Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Miscellaneous - 1275 TURNPIKE STREET 4/30/2018 (7)
1. BRIGHTVIEW NORTH ANDOVER 1275 TURNPIKE STREET NORTH ANDOVER, MASSACHUSETTS i� SPECIFICATION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION MARCH 29, 2012 �li:JyaTYOI 60y -,- PRO CON VA INCORPORATED Design and Coy s. traction Management Trent ARCHITECTURE P.O. Box 4430, Manchester, New Hampshire 03108, 603-623-8811, Fax: 603-623-7250 www.proconinc.com Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 INCORPORATED 4� tars agn and Co»simction ,Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Division # Section # Title Issue Date Revision Date Note: content that has been revised is noted with bold text throughout this specification. INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 010 1 Title Page 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 0001 10 Table of Contents 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 0001 15 List of Drawings 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 Project Summary and General Requirements 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 01 31 19 Pre Installation Criteria 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 01 3300 Submittals and Substitutions 12/20/2011 01 41 00 Building Code Review 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 01 50 00 Construction Facilities 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment 12/20/2011 01 74 00 Construction Cleaning 12/20/2011 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION/LANDSCAPING 02 80 00 Site Improvements (By Blair Hines Associates, LLC) 12/20/2011 02 92 00 Lawns (By Blair Hines Associates, LLC) 12/20/2011 02 93 00 Landscaping (By Blair Hines Associates, LLC) 12/20/2011 02 93 50 Irrigation (By Blair Hines Associates, LLC) 12/20/2011 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast -in-place Concrete 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 0354 13 Gypsum Cement Underlayment 12/20/2011 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 Masonry 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 0421 13 Thin -brick System 12/20/2011 Section 1112_000110 TOContents.doc Page 1 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON INCORPORATED Desi�p and Constriction Martag gent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Division # Section # Title Issue Date Revision Date DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 1200 Structural Steel 12/20/2011 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 12/20/2011 05 31 00 Steel Deck 12/20/2011 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 12/20/2011 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal 12/20/2011 05 52 00 Handrails and Railings 12/20/2011 DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 1000 Rough Carpentry and Sheathing 12/20/2011 06 1753 Prefabricated Wood Floor & Roof Trusses 12/20/2011 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 06 63 00 Posts, Railings and Decking 12/20/2011 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 10 00 Damp Proofing & Waterproofing 12/20/2011 07 21 00 Building Insulation 12/20/2011 07 27 00 Air/Moisture Barriers 12/20/2011 0731 13 Asphalt Roof Shingles 12/20/2011 0741 13 Metal Roofing 12/20/2011 07 46 33 Vinyl Siding & Trim 12/20/2011 07 46 46 Fiber -Cement Siding/Panels 12/20/2011 07 53 00 EPDM Membrane Roofing 12/20/2011 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 12/20/2011 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 12/20/2011 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 12/20/2011 07 84 00 Firestopping 12/20/2011 07 84 43 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems 12/20/2011 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 12/20/2011 07 95 00 Expansion Control 03/29/2012 DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS (DOORS AND WINDOWS) 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 12/20/2011 08 1400 Wood and Fiberglass Doors 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 08 1433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 Section 1112_000110 TOContents.doc Page 2 of 4 3 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONi,,i� INCORPORATED Design and Cmistruction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Division # Section # Title Issue Date Revision Date 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 12/20/2011 085300 Vinyl Windows 12/20/2011 08 71 00 Door Hardware 12/20/2011 08 80 00 Glazing 12/20/2011 08 90 00 Louvers & Vents 12/20/2011 DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 0921 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 0922 16 Non -Load Bearing Steel Framing 12/20/2011 0930 13 Ceramic Tile 12/20/2011 09 51 23 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 12/20/2011 09 68 00 Carpet 12/20/2011 09 77 30 FR Paneling 12/20/2011 09 90 00 Painting 12/20/2011 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings 12/20/2011 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 20 00 Building Specialties & Commercial Laundry Equip. 12/20/2011 10 28 00 Toilet & Bath Accessories 12/20/2011 10 31 00 Manufactured Fireplaces 12/20/2011 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 12/20/2011 10 55 00 Postal Specialties 12/20/2011 DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT 113100 Appliances 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 11 40 00 Food Service Equipment 12/20/2011 DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 12 35 30 Residential Casework 12 48 00 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 12/20/2011 12/20/2011 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used. Section 1112 000110 TOContents.doc Page 3 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design and Gpnsinieiusn ,%lanageneni ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Division # Section # Title Issue Date Revision Date DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 14 91 82 Trash Chute 12/20/2011 DIVISION 21— FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 BY DESIGN -BUILD ENGINEER DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 00 00 BY DESIGN -BUILD ENGINEER DIVISION 23 — MECHANICAL 23 50 00 General MEP/FP Criteria 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 BY DESIGN -BUILD ENGINEER APPENDICES Al Geotechnical Report A2 Geotechnical Supplemental Report B Wetland and Buffer Zone Mitigation Plan C MEP -FP Narrative D Responsibility Matrix 12/20/2011 12/20/2011 12/20/2011 12/20/2011 03/29/2012 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1112 000110 TOContents.doc Page 4 of 4 0 INK Brightview North Andover PRO COMTJ4Project Specification North Andover, MA c o R P O R AT E D Revised Marc Design and ct „srri,et:o„ �ranage,t:rne h 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE SECTION 00 0115 List of Drawings Sheet # Description Issue Date By COVER SHEET: CS 1 Cover Sheet 03/29/12 PCIA CS2 Code/ Information Sheet 03/29/12 PCIA LS1 First Floor Life Safety Plan 03/29/12 PCIA LS2 Second Floor Life Safety Plan 03/29/12 PCIA LS3 Third Floor Life Safety Plan 03/29/12 PCIA LS4 Fourth Floor Life Safety Plan 03/29/12 PCIA CIVIL DRAWINGS (by Marchionda Associates L.P.) 1 Cover Sheet 03/29/12 MA 2 Legend and Notes 03/29/12 MA 3 Existing Conditions Plan 03/29/12 MA 4 Overall Layout Plan (80 -scale) 03/29/12 MA 5 Layout Plan (40 -scale) 03/29/12 MA 6 Grading and Drainage Plan (40- scale) 03/29/12 MA 7 Utility Plan (40 -scale) 03/29/12 MA 8 Plan and Profile 03/29/12 MA 9 Plan and Profile 03/29/12 MA 10 Plan and Profile 03/29/12 MA 11 Open Space Plan 03/29/12 MA 12 Wetland Replication Areas 03/29/12 MA 13 Constr. Period Erosion & Sedimentation Control Plan 03/29/12 MA 14 Details 03/29/12 MA 15 Details 03/29/12 MA 16 Details 03/29/12 MA 17 Details 03/29/12 MA 18 Details 03/29/12 MA 19 Details 03/29/12 MA LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS (by Blair Hines Design Associates) L-01 Materials & Layout Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-02 Materials & Layout Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-03 Grading Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-04 Grading Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-05 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-06 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD Section 1112_000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 1 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS o INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Sheet # Description Issue Date By L-07 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-08 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-09 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD L-10 Planting Plan 03/29/12 BHD LP -1 Lighting Plan 03/29/12 BHD LD -1 Landscape Details 03/29/12 BHD LD -2 Landscape Details 03/29/12 BHD LD -3 Landscape Details 03/29/12 BHD STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS (by Pro Con, Inc.) S0.1 Structural General Notes and Design Criteria 03/15/12 PCIA S0.2 Structural Schedules and Notes 03/15/12 PCIA S0.3 Column Schedule 03/15/12 PCIA S0.4 Base Plate and Anchor Bolt Details 03/15/12 PCIA SLI Overall Foundation Plan 03/15/12 PCIA SI.la Foundation Plan - Area "A" 03/15/12 PCIA Sl.lb Foundation Plan - Area `B" 03/29/12 PCIA Sl.lc Foundation Plan - Area "C" 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.2 Overall Second Floor Framing Plan 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.2a Second Floor Framing Plan - Area "A" 03/29/12 PCIA S 1.2b Second Floor Framing Plan - Area "B" 03/29/12 PCIA S 1.2c Second Floor Framing Plan - Area "C" 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.3 Overall Third Floor Framing Plan 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.3a Third Floor Framing Plan - Area "A" 03/29/12 PCIA S1.3b Third Floor Framing Plan - Area `B" 03/29/12 PCIA S1.3c Third Floor Framing Plan - Area "C" 03/15/12 PCIA SIA Overall Fourth Floor Framing Plan 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.4a Fourth Floor Framing Plan - Area "A" 03/29/12 PCIA S 1.4b Fourth Floor Framing Plan - Area "B" 03/29/12 PCIA S1.4c Fourth Floor Framing Plan - Area "C" 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.5 Overall Roof Framing Plan 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.5a Roof Framing Plan - Area "A" 03/15/12 PCIA S 1.5b Roof Framing Plan - Area `B" 03/15/12 PCIA Sl.5c Roof Framing Plan - Area "C" 03/15/12 PCIA S2.1 Foundation Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S2.2 Foundation Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S2.3 Foundation Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S2.4 Foundation Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S2.5 Anchor Bolt Layouts 03/15/12 PCIA S3.1 C.M.U. Framing Details 03/15/12 PCIA Section 1112_000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 2 of 6 0 0 Brightview North Andover PRO CONo Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED itio11�fgcr�ncrrt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE Sheet # Description Issue Date By S4.1 Wood Framing Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S4.2 Wood Framing Sections & Elevations 03/15/12 PCIA S5.1 Steel Framing Sections 03/29/12 PCIA S5.2 Steel Framing Sections 03/29/12 PCIA S5.3 Steel Framing Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S5.4 Steel Framing Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S5.5 Brace Frame Elevations & Details 03/15/12 PCIA S5.6 Steel Framing Sections 03/15/12 PCIA S6.1 Shearwall Sections 03/15/12 PCIA ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS (by Pro Con, Inc.) ALL Overall First Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.1a Partial First Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.1b Partial First Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.2 Overall Second Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.2a Partial Second Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.2b Partial Second Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.3 Overall Third Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.3a Partial Third Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.3b Partial Third Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA AIA Overall Fourth Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA AlAa Partial Fourth Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA AlAb Partial Fourth Floor Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.5 Overall Roof Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.5a Partial Roof Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A1.5b Partial Roof Plan 03/29/12 PCIA A2.1a Partial Enlarged First Floor Common Area 03/29/12 PCIA A2.lb Partial Enlarged First Floor Common Area 03/29/12 PCIA A2.2a Partial Enlarged Second Floor Common Area 03/29/12 PCIA A2.2b Partial Enlarged Second Floor Common Area 03/29/12 PCIA A2.2c Partial Enlarged Second Floor Common Area 03/29/12 PCIA A2.3 Enlarged Third Floor Common Areas 03/29/12 PCIA A2.4 Enlarged Fourth Floor Common Areas 03/29/12 PCIA A2.5 AL Small Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.6 AL Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.7a AL Studio Deluxe Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.7b AL Studio Deluxe Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.8 AL Companion Suite Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.9a AL One Bedroom Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA Section 1112_000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 3 of 6 Brightview North Andover PRO CON,' Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Design � Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE Sheet # Description Issue Date By A2.9b AL One Bedroom Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.9c AL One Bedroom Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.10 AL Two Bedroom Plans and Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.11 AZ Small Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.12a AZ Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.12b AZ Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.13a AZ Studio Deluxe Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.13b AZ Studio Deluxe Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.14 AZ Companion Suite Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.15a IL Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.15b IL Studio Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.16a IL One Bedroom Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.16b IL One Bedroom Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.17a IL One Bedroom w/ Den Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.17b IL One Bedroom w/ Den Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.17c IL One Bedroom w/ Den Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.18 IL One Bedroom 1 'h Bath Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.19 IL Two Bedroom 1 '/2 Bath Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.20a IL Two Bedroom, Two Bath Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.20b IL Two Bedroom, Two Bath Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.20c IL Two Bedroom, Two Bath Plans & Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A2.50 Decorative Light Fixture Schedule 03/29/12 PCIA A2.51a Partial First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "A" & `B" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.51b Partial First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "C" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.52a Partial Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "A" & `B" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.52b Partial Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "C" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.53a Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "A" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.53b Partial Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "B" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.54a Partial Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan "A" 03/29/12 PCIA A2.54b Partial Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan `B" 03/29/12 PCIA A3.1 Exterior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A3.2 Exterior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A3.3 Exterior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A4.1 Building Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.2 Building Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.3 Building Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.10 Wall Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.11 Wall Sections and Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.12 Wall Sections and Details 03/29/12 PCIA Section 1112_000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 4 of 6 Brightview North Andover PRO CON4,40 Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE Sheet # Description Issue Date By A4.13 Wall Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.14 Wall Sections and Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.15 Wall Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A4.30 Enlarged Plan Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.40 Enlarged Section Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.50 Enlarged Roof Section Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.51 Enlarged Roof Section Details 03/29/12 PCIA A4.60 Fire Rated Assemblies and Wall Partition Types 03/29/12 PCIA A4.61 Fire Rated Assemblies and Wall Partition Types 03/29/12 PCIA A4.62 Fire Rated Assemblies and Wall Partition Types 03/29/12 PCIA A4.63 Fire Rated Assemblies and Wall Partition Types 03/29/12 PCIA A5.1 Stair #1 Plans and Section 03/29/12 PCIA A5.2 Stair #2 Plans and Section 03/29/12 PCIA A5.3 Stair #3 Plans and Section 03/29/12 PCIA A5.4 Stair #4 Plans and Section 03/29/12 PCIA A5.5 Elevator Plans and Trash Chute Section 03/29/12 PCIA A5.6 Elevator Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A5.7 Stair, Elevator and Trash Chute Details 03/29/12 PCIA A6.1 Door Schedule 03/29/12 PCIA A6.2 Enlarged Door Details 03/29/12 PCIA A6.3 Window Schedule and Enlarged Details 03/29/12 PCIA A6.4 Window Flashing Installation Sequence 03/29/12 PCIA A6.5 PTAC Sections and Details 03/29/12 PCIA A7.1 Interior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A7.2 Interior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A7.3 Interior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A7.4 Interior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A7.5 Interior Elevations 03/29/12 PCIA A7.6 Enlarged Plans 03/29/12 PCIA A7.7 Millwork Sections and Interior Details 03/29/12 PCIA A7.8 Millwork Sections 03/29/12 PCIA A7.9 Enlarged Fireplace Plans and Sections 03/29/12 PCIA Section 1112 000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover PRO CONI:. Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED es gn and Construction Manag`ent Revised March 29, 2012 Project 4301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE Sheet # Description Issue Date By MISCELLANEOUS DRAWINGS EL -100 Food Service Equipment Layout and Schedule 02/02/12 BSC EL -200 Food Service Equipment Layout and Schedule 02/02/12 BSC INTERIOR DESIGN DRAWINGS (by Aumen Asner, Inc.) ID 1 Finish Schedule 03/29/12 AA ID 2.1 First Floor Finishes Plan 03/29/12 AA MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Design/Build TBD FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS Design/Build TBD PLUMBING DRAWINGS: Design/Build TBD ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS: Design/Build TBD FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS: Design/Build TBD END OF SECTION 0 Section 1112_000115 List of Drawings.doc Page 6 of 6 PRO COMA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA De..ignand ustructionManagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction SECTION 0100 00 PROJECT SUMMARY AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Project Identification: Brightview North Andover 1. Project Location: 1275 Turnpike Street (Rte. 114) North Andover, MA 01862 2. The Brightview Senior Living project consists of a four story, combustible/non- combustible residential building with associated parking and landscaped areas. The Assisted Living and Alzheimer's areas of the building are non-combustible Type 2A construction. The Independent Wing of the building is combustible Type 5A construction. Per code the areas are two separate buildings separated by a 2 hour rated fire wall with fire rated building expansion control. The buildings include sleeping units, living and dining areas, a theater, a pub, a library, a beauty salon, a hobby room, a commercial kitchen (for AL and IL areas) a country kitchen (for Alzeimer's residents), a commercial laundry and building mechanical/plumbing and electrical rooms. All amenities on all floors are for building residents only. Owner: Brightview North Andover, LLC 218 North Charles Street, Suite 220 Baltimore, MD 21201 3. Owner's Representative: Alan Siegfried B. Architect: Pro Con, Incorporated - Architecture Mailing address: PO Box 4430 Manchester, NH 03108 Overnight mail address: 1359 Hooksett Road, Hooksett, NH 03106 Tel: 603-623-8811 Contact Person: Erik Anderson, AIA (eanderson@proconinc.com) C. Contractor: Pro Con, Incorporated Mailing address: PO Box 4430 Manchester, NH 03108 Overnight mail address: 1359 Hooksett Road, Hooksett, NH 03106 Tel: 603-623-8811 Contact Person: Brian R. Knox (bknox@proconinc.com) 2.0 APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES 1. Refer to attached code review, section 014100. Section 1112 010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Pagel of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.0 ALLOWANCES PRO CCN,,, INCORPORATED Designs and Construction Ytnnugentent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the following: 1. Lump -sum allowances. 2. Unit -cost allowances (See Division 1 Section 5—"Unit Prices") 3. Quantity allowances. 4. Contingency allowances. 3.1 LUMP -SUM, UNIT -COST, AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 3.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Omitted 3.4 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Omitted 4.0 ALTERNATES A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 4.1 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. Section 1112_010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 2 of 8 0 161 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 4.2 PROCEDURES PRC) COM# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. 4.3 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Omitted 5.0 UNIT PRICES 5.1 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 5.2 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. List of Unit Prices: 1. Omitted 6.0 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Section 1112_010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 3 of 8 PRO CONAA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design nn t tonstnuctionMnndgenwit Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. See Divisions 2 through 26 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. C. See Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated construction. 6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements, without prior written approval from Structural Engineer of Record. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety without prior written approval from the Architect of Record. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or 1-0in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 6.2 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 6.3 MATERIALS A. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. Section 1112 010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 4 of 8 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 6.4 EXAMINATION PRO CON,4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6.5 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather. conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 6.6 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete/Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond - core drill. Section 1112_010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doe Page 5 of 8 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification I?egi� andCoiesfnrctiox rYta»ayenrGrrt North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching (if applicable): Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane 10 surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 7.0 WORK AND/OR PRODUCTS FURNISHED AND/OR INSTALLED BY OTHERS 7.1 OWNER -FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PRODUCTS to be incorporated into Work by the Owner's Separate Contractor(s). A. Builder's Risk Insurance per Contract. B. Telephone/Data/Building Entry Systems: Refer to attached Responsibility Matrix C. Primary Electric, transformer, transformer pad, meters, conduit, cables, vaults, etc. are by Owner. Furnished and installed by local utility company under direct contract to the Owner. D. Any & all Building Permits including fees & assessments of all local agencies having juris- diction, unless herein specified (excludes MEP-FP/FA permits which are the responsibil- ity of the applicable trade contractor). E. Any and all municipal, utility / impact fees and permits (i.e. sewer, water, telephone, power, cable, irrigation, etc.), unless herein specified. F. Security system: Refer to attached Responsibility Matrix Section 1112010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 6 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4, INCORPORATED Design and Constniction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction G. CATV / MATV system: Refer to attached Responsibility Matrix H. FF&E package: Refer to attached Responsibility Matrix I. Interior and Exterior Signage. Work by Owner includes filing for and obtaining permits for exterior monument -based and building mounted signs. J. Energy and Property management systems. K. Sound System. L. Sprinkler Booster Pump (if required) including associated piping, wiring, etc. M. Domestic Water Booster Pump (if required) including associated piping, wiring, etc. N. Elevator Operator Cost (if required) for operating the elevator prior to final elevator permit. 7.2 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS TO BE INSTALLED BY THE PRIME CONTRACTOR: A. Refer the Responsibility Matrix. 7.3 OWNER FURNISHED INFORMATION: A. Approvals including qualifications of local agencies having jurisdiction, including but not limited to; Planning Board, Zoning Board of Appeals, Board of Health, etc. B. Equipment weights for equipment not mounted on slab on grade. 8.0 CLARIFICATIONS 8.1 The Owner shall carry Builder's Risk coverage, naming Pro Con, Incorporated as additional insured. 8.2 All construction work is guaranteed for a period of two (2) years from the date of "Substantial Completion" on a per building basis. 8.3 The Owner shall be responsible for the cost of electrical power, heat and water from date of Substantial Completion. 8.4 The Owner shall be responsible for all insurance (s), fuel and utility charges, maintenance and snow removal, etc. once the building has been accepted as "Substantially Complete". 8.5 Any requirements by Federal, State or Local agencies or authorities not herein specified are not included in the contract. This does not preclude Pro Con, Inc. or it's subcontractors from com- plying with building and fire codes with a usual, customary, professional standard of care. This clause is to state that if a code official, or person having jurisdiction, makes a decision or inter- pretation that affects cost or schedule that was not disclosed prior to the time the contract price and schedule was proposed to the Owner, then Pro Con, Inc. is not liable for those "unforeseen" items. 8.6 All cutting, patching and fire -stopping by subcontractor performing the work. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect or Structural Engineer. 8.7 Access panels are to be fire rated/clearly labeled where located in fire rated assemblies. Access panels are furnished and installed by each sub where required for their work. Access panels to be flush mounted, finished to match adjacent materials. Section 1112_010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 7 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON44 INCORPORATED Design and consinectfon Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 8.8 MEP/FP/FA contractors shall guarantee for two (2) years, from date of Substantial Completion, the quality of all materials, equipment and workmanship furnished and installed and to remedy, to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner, all defects in the work. This includes replacing all defective apparatus, material and equipment, and correcting all damage to adjacent work, paint, woodwork, or building caused by leaking pipes or connections or other defects in his work and its operation. Where sound and vibration conditions arise, which the Architect considers objec- tionable, the subcontractor shall pay all costs to remedy conditions. Subcontractor shall obtain guarantees from equipment manufacturers covering their respective equipment for the above pe- riod of time. Furnish five (5) copies of guarantees to the Architect for delivery to the Owner. 8.9 MEP/FP/FA systems subcontractors shall coordinate work with all related trades; Structural framing, Elevators, Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical, Fire Alarm, Utilities Agen- cies, etc. 8.10 All Design/Build systems are to comply with requirements of the latest editions of all the appli- cable codes. 8.11 All Design/Build Subcontractors shall file all required notices and plans, and shall secure and pay for all necessary permits for the work of their trade. 8.12 Any conditions of work from the Town/State that limit the hours or days of work was not considered in the Project schedule. Any such requirements may extend the completion dates. 8.13 Real estate showing of units prior to substantial completion will require compliance with OSHA regulations and signing of waivers to enter the construction site. , 9.0 EXCLUSIONS The following items are specifically excluded from the Contract: 9.1 Refer to Contract for items excluded. END OF SECTION Section 1112_010000 Summary + Gen Regt.doc Page 8 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.0 GENERAL PRO CON4,4* INCORPORATED Design and ConstructionManagement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 013119 PRE INSTALLATION CRITERIA Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.1. "Pre -Installation" and / or "Pre -Placement" meeting(s) shall be held, at the project site, prior to the installation of work which requires coordination, special installation, testing and / or controlled proceedures. These meetings shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: A. PRE -OWNER START-UP MEETING B. Pre — Site / Clearing / Excavation / Grading / etc. C. Pre -foundation placement All footing excavations shall be inspected prior to placement. D. Pre -slab placement E. Pre -placement - Sitework Concrete All below slab excavations, vapor barriers, and fill shall be inspected as described in Section 01010r�ior to placement of Concrete F. Pre -utilities G. Pre -Framing - Stick Frame or Panelized. H. A Pre — skin meeting to coordinate the entire skin construction with all related trades including, but not limited to, framing, prefabricated panels, sealants, windows, MEP/FP (penetrations), air barrier, etc. (Meeting to include Owner). I. Pre -retaining walls J. Pre -masonry K. Pre -Steel L. Pre — Insulation (include Owner) M. Pre — Gypsum Wall Systems N. Pre- Plumbing / Mechanical / Electrical / Fire Protection O. Pre-Door/Hardware P. Pre- Roofing (include Owner) (All roofing trades — shingles, metal, etc.) Q. Pre -Finishing (drywall, painter, VWC, specialty finishes, etc.) R. Pre -Landscaping (include Owner) (sidewalks, irrigation, utilities, etc.)] S. Pre-FF+E Installation (include Owner) T. Pre-Punchlist (include Owner) 1.2. These meetings shall include the following individuals and others as may be necessary. A. The attendees shall include: General Contractor Project Manager and Superintendent Subcontractor (s) Sub Foreman and Project Manager Material Supplier Supplier Representative Material Manufacturer Technical Representative Designer Structural Engineer and/or Architect Design / Build Systems Subcontractor Engineer(s) Testing Agency Engineer with training in the specific trade. Section 1112_013119 Pre Installation Criteria.doc Page 1 of 2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,4, INCORPORATED Design and Constncction Managonent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Owner Representative B. See individual Specification sections for more specifics. 1.3. Minutes shall be maintained by the General Contractor / Project Manager and distributed to all parties within 5 business days. These minutes shall serve as the installation guide for the trade. END OF SECTION Section 1112 013119 Pre Installation Criteria.doc Page 2 of 2 0 0 0 Brightview North Andover PRO CON4` Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Dece b Design and Construction Management mer 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog number or reference to recognized industry standards. 2. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data for its review and acceptance or rejection by the Architect. 3. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the work, including: a. Contractor's Progress Schedule b. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples c. Letters of Conformance d. Certificates e. Manufacturer Installation Instructions 4. Substitution Procedures 5. Manuals 6. Miscellaneous Submittals 7. Sample Warranties B. Related Documents: 1. Letter of Conformance Form 2. Contractor's Substitution Request Form C. Related Sections: 1. Contractual Requirements for Submittals: General Conditions a. Two (2) copies of all Submittals, plus number of copies to be returned to Contractor, shall be submitted unless otherwise specified. b. Provide additional copies as required for use in Project Record Documents. 2. Section 01770 - Contract Closeout Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 1 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CON# Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED ^ � Design and CanstructioaManagemcxt December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE 3. Individual Submittals Required: All Sections of these Specifications unless noted otherwise. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of Submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each Submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. Submit Submittal Schedule to Architect within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Contract. 1. Refer to Section 010000 for additional requirements. 2. Coordinate each Submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other Submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of Submittals for related elements of the work so processing will not be delayed by. the need to review Submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a Submittal requiring coordination with other Submittals until related Submittals are received. b. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit Submittals to the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing. B. Deliver Submittals to the Architect. C. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each Submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each Submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 10" x 10" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's and Architect review and acceptance markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project Name b. Date c. Name and Address of Subcontractor or Vendor d. Location Where Item is to be Used e. Name of Manufacturer f. Drawing Number and Detail References, as Appropriate g. Certification by the Contractor 0 Section 1112 013300 Submittals.doc Page 2 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CONI, Project Specification North Andover, MA Design tfORPnstRn nNan gement December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE D. Submittal Transmittal: Package each Submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each Submittal from Contractor to Architect. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. Transmit each submittal to the Architect with Transmittal Letter. 2. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. 3. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate. 4. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 5. After Architect review of Submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous Submittal. 6. When re -submittal is required for any reason, transmit under new letter of transmittal, indicating by reference to a previous Submittal that this is a re -submittal. a. Identify on submittal all changes made since previous submission. 7. Distribute copies of reviewed Submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 8. All Submittals shall bear the stamp of approval of the Contractor submitting same as evidence that they have been checked by him, or they will be rejected. a. Must be signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 9. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Contract. Submit in the form required by the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 3 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CONS# Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Design and ConstnectionManagement December 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit .1.04 LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE A. Letter of Conformance: Short -form informational submittals which are to be used instead of shop drawings, product data and samples. They are also to be used to supplement shop drawings, product data and samples. A sample "Letter of Conformance" is located at the end of this Section. Use copies of this form for each submittal unless a more specific Letter of Conformance is located at the end of a particular Specification Section. B. Within 30 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement, submit all Letters of Conformance indicating Contractor's selections for products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. C. Procedure: 1. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. 2. Submit completed Letter of Conformance for products selected as indicated within each Section. 3. Fill-in required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 4. Clearly identify applicable products, characteristics, models, and options. Attach supplemental information including product data to each Letter of Conformance as necessary to communicate all information specific to the product. 5. No modifications to form permitted. 6. Letters of Conformance are not to be used for substitution requests. D. By submitting a Letter of Conformance, Contractor declares that the product identified by manufacturer's name and model number: 1. Is one of the product(s) specified 2. Is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents, and 3. Will be provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's published instructions. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Where Shop Drawings are required, submit newly prepared information drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. 0 Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 4 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CONI` Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and Construdion management December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE B. Shop Drawings shall be drawn at a scale to clearly indicate all of the above conditions and allow for corrections or modifications which the Architect may wish to make. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of manufacturer's literature and catalog sheets as Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall clearly indicate all dimensional data for all parts of the item; types and materials for all connections; finishes; the exact relation of the item to adjacent materials and equipment in the completed structure including clearance, any necessary isolation, and fastening methods and devices; and mechanical and electrical connections. D. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates, and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions 2. Identification of Products and Materials Included 3. Compliance with Specified Standards. 4. Notation of Coordination Requirements 5. Notation of Dimensions Established by Field Measurement E. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11 ", but no larger than 36" x 48". F. Number of Copies: Submit one copy and one reproducible. Architect will return reproducible. G. Do not permit Shop Drawing copies, without an appropriate final "Action" marking by the Architect, to be used in connection with the work. H. The Contractors shall be responsible for distribution of additional prints to vendors, etc. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Where Product Data is required, collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's Printed Recommendations b. Compliance with Recognized Trade Association Standards C. Compliance with Recognized Testing Agency Standards d. Application of Testing Agency Labels and Seals e. Notation of Dimensions Verified by Field Measurement Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 5 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON ei� INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE f. Notation of Coordination Requirements g. Type and Model Numbers h. Sample Warranty. Project Specification December 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. B. Distribution: Furnish copies of final Submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's possession. 2. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.07 SAMPLES A. Where Samples are required, submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, full color -range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: a. Generic Description of the Sample b. Sample Source c. Product Name or Name of Manufacturer d. Compliance with Recognized Standards e. Availability and Delivery Time 2. Colors: a. General: Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to the Architect for his review and selection. 3. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final Submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3) that show approximate limits of the variations. Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 6 of 12 r�1 0 Brightview North Andover PRO CONI` Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and Construction management December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample Submittals. 4. Preliminary Submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. a. Preliminary Submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the Submittal may serve as the final Submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to Subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the work. I. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the work will be judged. a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. 1.08 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.09 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing to Architect. Section l 112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 7 of 12 Brightview North Andover FRO CON4,4& Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. No Exceptions Taken: Final Unrestricted Release. Work may proceed, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 2. Note Markings: Final But Conditional Release. Work may proceed, provided it complies with the notations and corrections on submittals and with Contract Documents. Architect's comments shall be considered a part of the original submittal. Should Contractor disagree with any such comments, so notify the Architect within fourteen (14) days after receipt of such transmittal and before commencing work on the items in question. Failing this, Contractor shall be deemed to have agreed to such comments by the Architect and to have accepted full responsibility for implementing them at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Revise and Resubmit: Returned for Re -submittal. Do not proceed with the work at the site or allow submittal at site. Fabrication in shop or factory may proceed on items not affected by the Architect's comments only. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Revise and Resubmit 4. Rejected: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, with Architect's explanation included or for reasons noted above in section 1.02/D-8. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products, materials, or equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source. 0 Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 8 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CONS' Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and ConstrucHonManagement December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's selection of a product or materials, select an option which is compatible with other products and materials already selected (which may have been from among options for those other products and materials). Total compatibility among options, if not assured by limitations within contract documents, must be provided by Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections. C. Owner's Approval Required: 1. In addition to the following, refer to the General Conditions, Article 4, for additional requirements. 2. The Contract is based on the materials, equipment, and methods described in the Contract Documents. 3. The Contract Drawings and Specifications establish the "minimum standard of quality" each product and/or system must meet to be considered acceptable. Products of other manufacturers will be considered if the product and/or system meets or exceeds the "minimum standard of quality" established by the Contract Documents. 4. The Owner will consider proposals for substitutions under the "or approved substitution" and the "or approved equal" provision of materials, equipment, and methods, only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required by the Owner and Architect to evaluate the proposed substitutions. Submittals cannot alter the design intent. a. It will be the responsibility of the submitting Contractor to prove equality. b. Request must include "Contractor's Substitution Request" Form, a copy of which is attached to this Section. c. The Submittal shall include a line -by-line, item -by -item description of the specified and proposed product. d. Request must include any impact on cost or schedule. 5. Requests for substitutions must be submitted to the Architect NO later than 60 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 6. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, OR METHODS UNLESS SUCH SUBSTITUTIONS HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTED FOR THIS WORK IN WRITING. D. "Or Approved Equal" or "Or Approved Substitution" 1. Where the phrase "or approved equal" or "approved substitution" occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material, equipment, or methods will be approved as equal by the Owner and Architect unless the item has been specifically approved for this work by the Owner and Architect. a. Color choices will be one of the determining factors for acceptance. 2. The decision of the Owner will be final. Section 1112013300 Submittals.doc Page 9 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CON# Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED ^ � Design and ConstnrctionManagement December 20, 2011` J, Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE E. Availability of Specified Items: 1. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the work. 2. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, so notify the Architect prior to the receipt of Bids. 3. Costs of delay caused on non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by the Contractor, will be back -charged as necessary and shall not be bome by the Owner. F. Whenever the Contractor secures approval for changing any items and such change involves a corresponding change or adjustment in any adjacent or related item, the responsibility for making the required change, or seeing that it is made, rests with the Contractor. The cost of these changes and/or adjustments shall be paid for by the Contractor unless it is otherwise agreed, in writing, at the time the change is accepted. The acceptance of any change will not, in any way, relieve the Contractor from full compliance with the Contract Documents. 2.02 MANUALS A. General: Where Manuals are required to be submitted covering items included in this work, prepare all such Manuals in durable plastic binders approximately 8-1/2 x 11 inches in size with at least the following: 1. Identification on or readable through the front cover stating the general nature of the Manual. 2. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual furnishing immediate information as to location of all emergency data regarding the installation. 3. Complete instructions regarding operating and maintenance of all equipment involved. 4. Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost, and name and address of nearest vendor of parts. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Copy of accepted Shop Drawing(s) with all data concerning all changes made during construction 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS A. Inspection and Test Reports Not Performed by Owner: Classify each inspection and test report as being either "Shop Drawings" or "Product Data" depending on whether the report is specially prepared for the project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at the point of production. Process inspection and test reports accordingly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01000 for additional requirements. Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 10 of 12 Brightview North Andover PRO CONI Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED Design and ConstructionManagcment December 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE B. General: Prior to submittal for Architect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material, including the following: 1. Secure all necessary approvals from public agencies and others. Signify by stamp or other means that all required approvals have been obtained. 2. Clearly indicate all deviations from the Contract Documents. C. The General Contractor shall submit a prioritized tabulation by date of Submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. List those Submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the work, and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 1. These dates may be shown on Construction Project Schedule at Contractor's option. 3.02 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Make all Submittals enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide all required time for reviews for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and Re - submittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery. 2. In scheduling, allow a minimum of fourteen (14) full calendar days for the Architect's initial review following receipt of the Submittals. Allow additional time if the Architect requires coordination with subsequent Submittals. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related Submittals are received. b. If an Intermediate Submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial Submittal. Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for reprocessing each Submittal. 3.03 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Contractor shall stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. "Stamp or statement shall include the following: "The Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents." Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 11 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE PRO CON ,;, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification December 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Refer to each respective Specification Section for submittal requirements, and detailed instructions, and submit a proposed Submittal Schedule to the Architect. Submit the schedule prior to first submission. END OF SECTION Section 1112_013300 Submittals.doc Page 12 of 12 0 0 0 PRO CON,,,4, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design and Construction Alanagentent North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE SECTION 01 41 00 . BUILDING CODE REVIEW SUMMARY Legend (303. 0) = '09 IBC section or table # NR = Not required. NA = Not applicable. Ap licable Codes Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Code ( Agency Agency Contact Information ........... Adoption Date 2009 International International Code 500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, April 12010 Building Code w/ State of Council, Inc. (ICC) 6th Floor, Washington, DC Massachusetts 20001 Amendments 780 CMR, Massachusetts Board of One Ashburton Place August 2010 8`h Edition � Building Regulations Room 1301 and Standards Boston MA 02108 248 CMR Massachusetts Massachusetts Board of 1000 Washington St. State Fuel and Gas Code State Examiners of Suite 170 March 11, 2005 Uniform State Plumbing ' Plumbers and Gas Fitters Boston, MA 0218-6100 Code [P] 1-617-727-9952 2009 International International Code 500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, April 1 2010 Mechanical Council, Inc. (ICC) 6th Floor, Washington, DC Code 20001 [P] 1 -888 -ICC -SAFE (422- 7233); [F] (202) 783-2348 E-mail webmaster(�ijccsafe.org —--........_..—-.....__._._._._......__.._._.......... ___ ........ _......... - .._ [ 1 Batterymarch Park - — -. ......... 2011 National Electrical --._.............-------..... --- INational Fire Protection ..__............. __..__..... --................... _J Code, NFPA 70 w/ State ( Association Inc. Quincy, MA 02169-7471 of Massachusetts 1 (NFPA) (617) 770-3000 Amendments 527 CMR www.nfpa.or! 2009 International Energy International Code 500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, April 12010 Code w/ State of Council, Inc. (ICC) 6th Floor, Washington, DC Massachusetts 20001 Amendments 780 CMR, Massachusetts Board of One Ashburton Place August 2010 8' Edition, Appendix AAS Building Regulations Room 1301 and Standards Boston, MA 02108 521 CMR Rules and i Massachusetts ! One Ashburton Place January 27, 2006 Regulations of the Architectural Access I Room 1310 Massachusetts I Board Boston, MA 02108 Architectural Access ! (617) 727-0660 Board I 527 CMR Massachusetts i Massachusetts Board of Dept. of Fire Service May 24, 2002 Fire Prevention Fire Prevention P.O. Box 1025 State Road Regulations Regulations Stow, MA 01775 978 567-3100 1112_014100 Codereview.doc Page 1 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON :,,48 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction ASHRAE 90.1-2004 American Society of (Commercial) Heating, Refrigerating ASHRAE and Air Conditioning (800) 527-4723 Engineers, Inc. www.ashrae.orc/ ASHRAE _ I Elevator Code: 524 CMR Mass. State Elevator Code / ASME Al 7.1 / ASME A90.1 / ASME A20.1 / ALI B 153 / ASCE 24 Other: Fire Suppression NFPA 13 systems, and others as may be required by the work. Code Enforcement Contacts for this Proiect: Town of North Andover Building Department 1600 Osgood Street North Andover, MA 01845 Phone: (978) 688-9545 Fax: (978) 688-9542 Code Enforcement Staff for the Town of North Andover MA Inspector of Buildings: Gerald Brown Code Enforcement for the State of Massachusetts Fire Subcode Official: Stephen D. Coan, State Fire Marshal (978) 567-3111 Elevator Subcode Official: Ed Kawa, Chief of Inspection (617) 727-3200 Zoning Zoning District: Allowed Use: Proposed Building Use: Maximum Building Height (per zoning) Allowable Roof Appurtenance Height: Proposed building height: BUILDING CODE REVIEW V -R Village Residential District Residential Continued Care Retirement Center (Allowed by Special Permit in V -R District) 35' 3 Stories N/A (Excludes bulkheads, chimneys, flagpoles, meth. penthouses etc). 49'-2" 4 Stories (Variance granted) Section/Table numbers are per 2009 IBC & 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code, 8`h Edition. Date: December 20, 2011 Project #: 301112 Rev.: March 29, 2012 Project Name: _Brightview North Andover Current Phase of Project (as of date shown above): Under Construction Project Location: 1275 Turnpike Street (Rte 114) North Andover MA Proiect Description: The project consists of new construction work for a four story senior housing facility (Independent Living -IL, Assisted Living -AL and Alzheimer's Care-ALZ) with associated parking and landscape areas. The AL and ALZ portion of the building has a non-combustible Type 2A construction with a concrete floor on a metal deck. The IL portion of the building is wood frame Type 5A construction with gypsum concrete on wood Page 2 of 11 1112_014100 Codereview.doc 0 0 PRO CON,,;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction sheathing and wood trusses. The entire building has a fully automatic NFPA 13 sprinkler system. The exterior finish consists of a combination of brick veneer and vinyl siding with an asphalt shingle and EPDM roof. Code Review performed by: Erik Anderson AIA Date: 11/17/2011 Code Review reviewed by: Jim Loft AIA Date: 12/02/2011 General Building Data Building Use Group Classification (Chapter 3): Building A (Assisted Living/Alzheimer's): I-1,1-2, A-1, A-2, A-3. B Mixed Occupancy use? (508): Yes Non -separated? (508.3): Yes Separated? (508.4): No Fire suppression system required? (903.2): Yes Fire suppression system provided? (903.3): Yes Type: NFPA 13 Proposed Type of Construction (602): 2A Minimum Type of Construction Required: 2A Open Parking Garage (406): NA Mezzanines? (505): N/A Basements? (502): Yes Story above grade (202): 3 Special Detailed Requirements based on Use and Occupancy - Chapter 4 (Section 407) I-2 Occupancies Corridors (407.2): Corridors shall be continuous to exits and separated from other areas except as permitted by Section 407.2.1 through 407.2.4. Corridor Walls (407.3): Corridor walls shall be constructed as smoke partitions in accordance with Section 711. Smoke Barriers (407.4): Each story must be subdivided into a minimum of two smoke compartments to provide a refuge area. Smoke barriers to comply with Section 710 Automatic Sprinkler System (407.5): Smoke compartments containing patient sleeping units shall be equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3. 1 1 Smoke compartments shall be equipped with approved quick -response or residential sprinklers in accordance with Section 903.3.2. Fire Alarm (407.6): A fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance with Section 907.2.6. General Building Limitations - Chapter 5 Building Area Tabulation: (506) Open Perimeter or "Street Frontage" Increase for total building: Open space (506.2): N = >30 ft, E = >30 ft, S = >30 ft, W = 0' Building Area Increase = (Open Perim / Bld. Perimeter — 0.25) (30/30) = (932'-0" /1,103'-0" — 0.25)(1) =.59 1 112 014100 Codereview.doc Page 3 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,4, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managentent ARCHITECTURE Allowable Area Tabulation (506.1): Type 2A Construction Type Use Group: • of Allowable Tabulation Area • Increase for Open Perimeter (506.2): • Increase for Complete Suppression (506.3) Total % Factor Conversion Factor: (% Factor / 100) Allowable Floor Area (per floor) (Table 503); Adjusted Allowable building area per floor: (Conversion Factor x Tabular Area) Actual Floor Area (per floor): Qualifications for Unlimited Area (507): N/A Height Limitations (Table 503.0): Use Group: Allowable building height: Allowable building stories: Height Modifications (504): Automatic sprinkler system increase (504.2): Adjusted Allowable building height: Adjusted Allowable building stories: Proposed building height: Proposed number of stories: (Note: does not include basement) Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction I_1 I_2 A-1,2,3 B 100% 100% 100% 100% +59% +59% +59% + 59% +200% +200% +200% +200% =359% =359% =359% = 359% =3.59 =3.59 =3.59 =3.59 = 19,000 sf = 15,000 sf = 15,500 sf =37,500sf = 68,210 sf = 53,850 sf = 55,645 sf=134,625sf = 42,019 sf (2nd Floor) II=1 I-2 65 ft 65 ft 4 Stories 2 Stories A-1,2,3 B 65 ft 65 ft 3 Stories 5 Stories 20 ft/1 St 20 ft/1 St 20 ft/1 St 20 ft/1 St 85 ft 85 ft 85 ft 85 ft 5 Stories 3 Stories 4 Stories 6 Stories 49'-2" (Per town of North Andover variance) (3) (3) (3) (3) Means of Egress - 2009 IBC Chapter 10 & 780 CMR Chapter 10 Occupant Load (IBC T1004.1.1): (Refer to LSI drawing for additional information) Building A - 1st Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: A-1 770sf (Per 1004.7) 26 A-3 1,226 sf 15 sf 82 B 1,400 sf 100 sf 14 R-2 13,337 sf 200 sf 67 Total Occupancy First Floor: 189 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 4 Buildina A - 2nd Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: A-2 3,200sf 15 sf 213 A-3 1,262 sf 15 sf 84 I-1 20,418 sf 200 sf 102 Total Occupancy First Floor: 399 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 3 11 12_014100 Codereview.doc Page 4 of 11 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Building A - 3rd Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: A-2 1,779sf 15 sf A-3 570 sf 15 sf 1-1 13,522 sf 200 sf R-2 4,685 sf 200 sf Total Occupancy First Floor: Building A - 4th Floor: PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Occupants: 119 11 Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 68 23 221 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 3 Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: A-3 594 sf 15 sf 40 I-1 19,736 sf 200 sf 99 Total Occupancy First Floor: 139 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 3 Building A - Total Occupant Load per Table 1004.1.1: 948 Building B (Independent Living): R-2 Residential and Assemblv (A-3 Mixed Occupancy use? (508): Yes Non -separated? (508.3): No Separated? (508.4): Yes Fire suppression system required? (903.2): Yes Fire suppression system provided? (903.3): Yes Type: NFPA 13 Proposed Type of Construction (602): 5A Minimum Type of Construction Required: 5A Open Parking Garage (406): NA Mezzanines? (505): N/A Basements? (502): Yes Story above grade (202): 3 General Building Limitations - Chapter 5 Building Area Tabulation: (506) Open Perimeter or "Street Frontage" Increase for total building: Open space (506.2): N = >30 ft, E = 0 ft, S= >30 ft, W = >30' Building Area Increase = (Open Perim / Bld. Perimeter — 0.25) (30/30) = (701'-0" /761'-0" — 0.25)(1) =.67 Allowable Area Tabulation (506.1): Type 2A Construction Type Use Group: • of Allowable Tabulation Area • Increase for Open Perimeter (506.2): % Increase for Complete Suppression (506.3) Total % Factor Conversion Factor: (% Factor / 100) Allowable Floor Area (per floor) (Table 503): Adjusted Allowable building area per floor: (Conversion Factor x Tabular Area) Actual Floor Area (per floor): RR=2 AA=3 (I" Fl. Multi-purpose Room) 100% 100% +67% +67% +200% +200% = 367 % = 367 % —3.67 = 3.67 = 24,000 sf = 15,500 sf = 88,080 sf = 56,885 sf = 16,160 sf (2"d Floor) Page 5 of 11 1112 014100 Codereview.doc PRO CON ,; , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Qualifications for Unlimited Area (507): N/A Height Limitations (Table 503.0): Use Group: Allowable building height: Allowable building stories: Height Modifications (504): Automatic sprinkler system increase (504.2) Adjusted Allowable building height: Adjusted Allowable building stories: Proposed building height: Proposed number of stories: (Note: does not include basement) Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction R-2 A-3 (I" Fl. Multi-purpose Room) 50 ft 50 ft 3 Stories 2 Stories 20 ft/1 St 20 ft/1 St 70 ft 70 ft 4 Stories 3 Stories 49'-2" 49'-2" (3) (1) Means of Egress - 2009 IBC Chapter 10 & 780 CMR Chapter 10 Occupant Load (IBC T1004.1.1): (Refer to LS 1.1 drawing for additional information) Building B - 1st Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: A-3 2,400 sf 15 sf 160 R-2 7,183 sf 200 sf 36 Total Occupancy First Floor: 196 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 2 Building B - 2nd Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: R-2 16,160 sf 200 sf 81 Total Occupancy First Floor: 81 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 2 Building B - 3rd Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: R-2 16,160 sf 200 sf 81 Total Occupancy First Floor: 81 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 2 Building B - 4th Floor: Use: S.F: S.F. Per Occupant: Occupants: R-2 16,160 sf 200 sf 81 Total Occupancy First Floor: 81 Occupants Required Exits: 2, Provided: 2 Building B - Total Occupant Load per Table 1004.1.1: 439 Occupants Capacity of Egress Component (IBC 1005.1): Egress width (inch) per occupant per IBC 1005.1 Location: Stairways: Doors/Ramps/Corridors: With Sprinkler System 0.3 in/occ 0.2 in/occ 48 in. stair serves 160 occ.) (32 in. door serves 160 occ) 1112_014100 Codereview.doc Page 6 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO COST # INCORPORATED Design and Construction wanagentent ARCHITECTURE Means of Egress Illumination (1006.1): Illuminated at all times. Accessible means of Egress (1007): Two required and minimum of two provided. Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Means of Egress Elevator (1007.2.1): Not required - accessible floors are not more than 4 stories above level of exit discharge. Enclosed exit stairways (1007.3): Area of refuge not required per exceptions #1 (sprinkler system provided). Means of Egress Doorways (1008.1.1): Minimum width 34" clear. Revolving Doors (1008.1.4.1): N/A. Door arrangement (1008.1.8): Doors in series must allow width of door + 48". Stairway doors (1008.1.9.10): Openable from both sides without key Exception 1 • discharge door operable from egress side only. Exception 2: stairways serving not more than 4 stories doors can be locked from the side opposite the egress side. Panic Hardware (1008.1.10): Required at egress doors from electrical rooms with electrical equipment rated 1200 amps or greater. Stairway Width (1009.1): Minimum of 44 inches, 36" minimum at an occ load of 50 or less 48" clear provided Treads and risers (1009.4): 4" min. and 7" max. rise, 11" min tread Stairway landings (1009.5): Not less than the width of the stair. Vertical Rise (1009.7): 12 feet maximum between landings. Handrails (1009.12): Both sides of stair. Stairways to Roof (1009.13): Not required, building is less than 4 floors. Roof hatch provided Roof Access (1009.13.1): Exception: buildings without an occupied roof, access to the roof shall be permitted by a roof hatch not less than 16 sq.ft. in area with a minimum dimension of 24" Protection at Roof Openings (1009.13.2): Guards are required when the roof hatch is within 10 ft of the edge of the building. Ramps (1010.1): Slope shall not exceed 8% if used as part of a means of e ress Ramp Vertical Rise (1010.4): Maximum rise is 30". Ramp Width (521 CMR 23.4.) 48" clear width required between handrails. Ramp landings (1010.6): Required at top, bottom, points of turning and entrance/exits Ramp landing width (1010.6.2): Ramp landings shall be at least as wide as the ramp. Ramp landing length (1010.6.3): Ramp landing lengths shall be 60" minimum. Ramp handrails (1010.8): Ramps with a rise greater than 6" shall have handrails on both sides Exit Signs (1011): Provided and visible to clearly mark egress path w/ intensity of not less than 5 foot-candles Electrical Rooms (780 CMR, 1011.1.1): Electric rooms governed by 1008.1.10 require an additional exit sign installed so that the top edge is not more than 18" above the floor adjacent to the electric room door. Handrail Heights (1012.2): Not less than 34 or more than 38" above stair nosing or landing Not less than 30" or more than 34" above for alternating tread stairs or ship ladders Handrail Extensions (1012.6): Horizontally 12" beyond top riser & continue to slope for one tread depth beyond bottom riser. Guards (1013.2): 42" high at all drops greater than 30". Opening limitations (1013.3): Openings shall not allow passage of a4" sphere Exception 1: at a height from 36" to 42", openings shall not allow passage of a 4 3/8" sphere Exit Access (1014): In Group 1-2 occupancies, rooms must have exit access directly to a corridor. Common Path of Travel (1014.3): Shall not exceed 125 ft in R-2 occupancy and shall not exceed 75 feet in A I-2 and B occupancies in a building fully equipped throughout with a sprinkler system Spaces with one means of Egress (Table 1015.1): Max. occ. Load = 49 for uses A B 10 for uses I and R. Exit Access Arrangement (1015.2.1): Exception 2 - Distance between doors to be 1/3 the diagonal with sprinkler system. Exit Access Travel Distance (T1016.1): With Sprinkler 250 feet inA,1-1, Ruses, 200 feet in I-2 use. Aisle accessway for tables and seating (1017.4.1): To comely with Figures 1017.4 and 1017.4.1. Corridor fire resistance rating (T1018.1): With Sprinkler— Uses A,B,1-2= 0 hour, Use R=.5 hour, Use I-1=1 hour 1112 014100 Codereview.doc Page 7 of 11 PRO LONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Constnretoa Management Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction Corridor width (1018.2): 44 inch minimum Dead End Limit (1018.4): 20 feet except in Uses B,I-1,R-2: 50 feet with a sprinklersystem. Required: Shown: 2 2 Number of Exits (T1021.1): Location: 1 - 500 occupants: (Refer to Section 10 above) Parking Structures (1021.1.2): N/A Buildings with one exit (1021.2): N/A. Vertical Exit Enclosures (1022.1): Stair shafts are 2 hour rated, connecting 3 floors and a basement. Discharge Identification (1022.7): A stairway shall not continue below its level of exit discharge unless an approved barrier is provided. Directional exit signs shall be provided per 1011. Floor identification signs (1022.8): Per 521 CMR section 41.00. Smokeproof Enclosure (1022.9): N/A. Exit Passageway Width (1023.2): Minimum of 44 inches Exit Passageway Construction (1023.3): Rating to match exit stairwabeing served, fire barriers per 707 and/or Horizontal Assembly. Per 712 Luminous egress path (1024.1): Not required, no occupied floors above 75 above lowest level of fire department vehicle access. Horizontal Exits (1025.1): Not more than 1/2 required exits can be horizontal exits. Exterior Stairways (1026): N/A Exit Discharge (1027.1): Exit shall discharge directly to the exterior of the building_ Exception 1: a maximum of 50% of exits can discharge_through a level of discharge provided egress ss is unobstructed and visually identified, the entire level of discharge is separated from floors above or below by fire resistive construction conforming to the rating of the exit enclosure, and the egress path is protected with an automatic fire sprinkler system. Assembly (1028): A-1 and A-3 areas of the buildingto with this section. Emergency Escape and Rescue (1029): N/A. Types of Construction - Chapter 6 Proposed Type of Construction (602): Structural Frame, including columns, girders and trusses (T601): Bearing Walls - Exterior (T601): Bearing Walls - Interior (T601): Nonbearing Walls and Partitions - Exterior (T601): Nonbearing Walls and Partitions - Interior (T601): Floor .Construction, including supporting beams and joists (T601): Roof Construction, including supporting beams and joists (T601): Rating of Exterior walls based on separation distance (T602): Less than 5 feet 5 feet to less than 10 feet 10 feet to less than 30 feet 30 feet or more Type 2A 1 hour (T601 & T602) 1 hour (T601 & T602) 1 hour 0 hour T602 0 hour typ., fire wall = 2 hour 1 hour 1 hour 1 hour 1 hour 1 hour 0 hour Fire -Resistance Rated Construction - Chapter 7 Fire -Resistance Rating of Structural Members (704): The fire-resistant ratings shall not be less than the ratings required for the fire -resistance rated assemblies supported by the structural members as specified in table 602. Exterior structural members (704.10): Columns at exterior walls must have the highest fire -resistive rating in accordance to T601 and T602. 1112_014100 Codereview.doc Page 8 of 1 I 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Exterior Walls (705): PRO CON4 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managetrrent ARCHITECTURE Maximum area of exterior wall openings (T705.8): Classification of Opening: Less than 3 feet (UP/S) >3 feet to 5 feet (UP/S) >5 feet to 10 feet (UP/S) >10 feet to 15 feet (UP/S) >15 feet to 20 feet (UP/S) >20 feet to 25 feet (UP/S) >25 feet to 30 feet (UP/S) Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Not Permitted 15% 25% 45% 75% Unlimited Unlimited >30 feet (UP/S) Not Required Vertical separation of Openings (705.8.5): No limit per Exception 1: less than 4 stories above the grade plane Exception 2: Building equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system Vertical Exposure (705.8.6): N/A. Parapets (705.11): Not required per Exception 4. Parapet Height (705.11.1): N/A. Fire Walls (706): 2 hour rated fire wall provided as shown on the plans Fire Wall Openings (706.8): Openings not limited per Exception 2. Fire Barriers (707): For rating of Shafts — see Section 708.4 for Exit enclosures — see Section 1022 1 for Exit Passageways — see Section 1023.3, for Horizontal Exit — see Section 1025.1 Fire Resistance Rating Requirements for Fire Separation Assemblies between Fire Areas (T707.3.9): N/A. Shaft Enclosures (708.4): Shaft enclosures shall have a fire resistive rating of not less than 2 hours when connecting four stories or more, including basements. Refuse and Laundry chutes (708.13): Refuse chute provided shall be in a 2 hour rated shaft enclosure Elevator lobby (708.14.1): Not required Exception 6 hoistwUs are pressurized per per section 708.14.2. Fire Partitions (709): Corridors and walls separating dwelling units shall comply with this section Smoke Barriers (710.3): When required smoke barriers shall have a fire resistance rating of 1 -Hour Smoke Partitions (711): _0 -Hour unless required elsewhere by IBC Horizontal Assemblies (712) (T601): 1 -Hour floor/ceiling & roof/ceiling assembly_ Ceiling Panels (712.3.1): Ceiling panels must resist upward force of 1 lb/fe with devices Unusable space (712.3.3): In 1 -hour fire resistance rated roof assemblies the floor membrane is not required to be installed where unusable attic space occurs above. Penetrations (713): Penetrations through fire resistance rated assemblies wall and horizontal assemblies Membrane penetration (713.3.2): Rating of fire stop materials at penetrations to match assemblies beim penetrated. Exception 1: Steel electrical boxes that do not exceed 16 sq in in area cannot exceed 100 sq in in 100 sq ft of wall area. Outlets on opposite sides of wall need to be separated by 24" or can be separated not closer than the depth of wall with insulation between or have solid fire -blocking or have putty pads protecting both outlets. Fire Resistant Joint Systems (714): Provide fire-resistant joints to resist the passage of fire for a time period of not less than that required for the fire -resistive construction for which it is installed Fire Door Opening Protectives (T715.4): Fire Barriers > 1 Hour 4 hour wall 3 hour opening 3 hour wall 3 hour opening 2 hour wall 1-1/2 hour opening 1 1/2 hour wall 1-1/2 hour opening 1 Hour Exit Enclosures 1 hour wall 1 hour opening Exit Corridors 1 hour wall 1/3 hour opening Other fire & smoke barriers 1 hour wall 3/4 hour opening Fire Window Opening Protectives (T715.5): Page 9 of 11 1112 014100 Codereview.doc PRO CQN�,O, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Manage}nent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction Interior Walls >1 hour wall See Sect. 715.2 1 hour wall 3/4 hour o ening Exterior Walls >1 hour wall 1-1/2 hour opgni g 1 hour wall 3/4 hour opening Limiting sizes of wired glass (T715.5.4): 3 hour opening 0 area 1-1/2 hour door ext. wall 0 area 1-1/2 hour opening 100 sq inches Max Ht 33" Max W 10" 1- hour opening 100 sq inches Max Ht 33" Max W 10" 3/4 hour opening 1,296 sq inches Max Ht 54" Max W 54" 1/3 hour opening No Limit Fire Window 1,296 sq inches Max Ht 54" Max W 54" Ducts and Air Transfer Openings (716): T716.3.2.1 Fire Damper Rating: < 3 hour assembly 1.5 hour damper 3 hour or greater assembly 3 hour damper Penetration of shaft enclosures (716.5.3): Shafts penetrated by ducts shall be protected with approved fire and smoke dampers. Concealed Spaces (717): FireblockinQ and draftstoppinc shall be installed in combustible concealed locations in accordance with this section. Draftstopping in floors (717.3): Exception — Not required w/ fully sprinklered building Draftstopping in attics (717.4): Exception — Not required w/ fully sprinklered building 0 Combustibles in concealed spaces in Type 1 or II construction (717.5): Not permitted Fire Resistance requirements for plaster (718): N/A Thermal and Sound Insulating Materials (719): In accordance with section 719. Prescriptive Fire Resistance (720): Calculated Fire Resistance (721): Interior Finishes - Chapter 8 Interior Finishes (801.1): Allowable flame spread and smoke development is limited by location and occupancy Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Requirements by Occupancy (T803.9): Sprinklered Group Exit Enclosures and Exit Passageways Class B Corridors Class B Rooms and Enclosed Spaces Class B (Due to I-2 Occupancv) Interior Floor Finish (804): In accordance with section 804. Decorations and Trim (805): In accordance with section 805 Fire Protection Systems - Chapter 9: Automatic Sprinkler Systems (780 CMR, T903.2): Required. NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems (903.3.1.1): Installed throughout. Alternative Automatic Fire Extinguishing Systems (904): Provided at kitchen. Standpipe Systems (905.0): In accordance with section 905 with 780 CMR amendments Portable Fire Extinguishers (906): In accordance with section 906. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems (907): In accordance with section 907 with 780 CMR amendments Emergency Alarm Systems (908): In accordance with section 908 with 780 CMR amendments Smoke Control Systems (909): In accordance with section 909 with 780 CMR amendments 1112_014100 Codereview.doc Page 10 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,40 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Smoke and Heat Vents (910): In accordance with section 910. Fire Command Center (911): N/A. Accessibility - Chapter 11 Requirements per 521 CMR Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Interior Environment - Chapter 12 Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Ventilation (1203): In accordance with IMC 2009 Temperature Control (1204): In accordance with section 1204. Lighting (1205): In accordance with section 1205. Yards and Courts (1206): In accordance with section 1206 Sound Transmission (1207): In accordance with section 1207 Interior Space Dimensions (1208): Minimum ceiling height is T-6". Bathrooms kitchens laundry rooms and storage rooms shall be permitted to have a ceiling height of not less than 7'-0" Access to unoccupied spaces (1209): N/A Surrounding Materials (1210): In accordance with sections 1210.1 and 1210.2. Miscellaneous Items Energy Efficiency (Chapter 13): In accordance with IECC 2009 with 780 CMR amendments and appendix AA Exterior Wall Sidings and Veneers (Chapter 14): In accordance with chapter 14. Structural Design (Chapter 16): In accordance with Chapter 16.. Structural Tests and Inspections (Chapter 17): In accordance with section 1703. Waterproofing/Dampproofing (1807): In accordance with section 1807. Decay and Termite Protection (2304.11): N/A Glass and Glazing (Chapter 24): In accordance with Chapter 24. GWB Materials (Chapter 25): In accordance with Chapter 25. Plastics (Chapter 26): In accordance with Chapter 26. Elevators and Conveying Systems (Chapter 30): In accordance with chapter 30 and 524 CMR Massachusetts Elevator Regulations. Special Construction (Chapter 31): In accordance with Chapter 31. Sitework/Demolition (Chapter 33): In accordance with Chapter 31. END OF SECTION 1112_014100 Codereview.doc Page 11 of 11 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proi ect Specification North Andover, MA Designan�iConstructionManage"„"f Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 0150 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 A. Summary: This Section specifies construction facilities and temporary controls including temporary utilities, support facilities and security and protection facilities. B. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building Code Requirements. 2. Health and Safety Regulations. 3. Utility Company Regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department, and Rescue Squad Rules. 5. Environmental Protection Regulations. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series Standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." C. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL Standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicting dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and procedures performed on temporary utilities. At the earliest time, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Materials: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 1. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". Provide UL -labeled, fire -treated lumber and plywood for temporary offices and sheds. Provide exterior, Grade B -B high-density concrete form overlay plywood for signs. Provide 5/8 -inch (16 - mm) thick exterior plywood for other uses. 2. Roofing Materials: UL Class A Standard - weight asphalt shingles or UL Class C Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doc Page 1 of 6 PRO C0 INA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA De$1gn and Construction Matn gement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit mineral -surfaced roll roofing on roofs of temporary offices, shops and sheds. Paint: Comply with Division 9 Section "Painting" a. For exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylic -latex emulsion over exterior primer. b. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide 2 coats interior latex -flat wall paint. 4. Tarpaulins: Waterproof, fire-resistant, UL -labeled tarpaulins with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire -retardant tarpaulins. 5. Water: Potable water approved by local health authorities. B. Equipment: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. Water Hoses: 3/4 -inch (19 -mm), heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long. 2. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA -polarized outlets. Provide outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. 3. Electrical Power Cords: Grounded extension cords. Use hard -service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. 4. Lamps and Light Fixtures: General service incandescent lamps. Provide guard cages or tempered -glass enclosures where exposed breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. Heating Units: Temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. Fire Extinguishers: Hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand - carried, portable, UL -rated, Class ABC, dry -chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposure. a. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. 0 Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doc Page 2 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,;I, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit PART 3 Execution A. Installation, General: Use qualified personnel to install temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will service the project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 1. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 2. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate safely and efficiently. Relocate as the work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire -prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. B. Temporary Utility Installation: Engage the local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for change orders. Temporary Water Service: Install temporary water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction. Maintain service until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize piping prior to use. 6. Temporary Electric Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnects, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. Install service underground.. a. Power Distribution: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. b. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching to fulfill Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO LONA Brightview North Andover I N C O R P O R AT E D Project Specification North Andover, MA Nsip nad constnrction Nfnnagenient Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 security requirements and illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained, LP -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for personnel engaged in construction. Install a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station. Provide a dedicated telephone line fora fax machine in the field office. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 9. Sanitary Facilities: Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best service the project's needs. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers. �J a. Toilets: Install self-contained, single -occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass -fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit -type privies will not be permitted. C. Support Facilities Installation: Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other construction and support facilities for easy access. Maintain facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. 1. Field Offices: Provide heated and air-conditioned, insulated, weathertight temporary offices of size to accommodate personnel at the project site. Provide offices on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. D. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furnish field offices with a desk and chair, a 4 -drawer file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and a 6 -shelf bookcase. 0 Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doe Page 4 of 6 PRO CONI Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Resign and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Equip with a water cooler and toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet unit with a mirror. 3. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install sheds equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: 1. For temporary drainage and dewatering operations not directly associated with construction, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. 2. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain excavations and construction free of water. F. Temporary Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. 2. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. 3. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions. a. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. Ft. (23 sq. M) or less with plywood or similar materials. b. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood -framed construction. G. Omitted. H. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for elevators. I. Project Signs: 1. Install project identification and other signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the project. 2. Support on framing of preservative treated wood or steel. 3. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 4. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when work is being performed. Comply with local lighting ordinances. K. Waste Collection and Disposal: 1. Collect waste daily. 2. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. Enforce requirements strictly. 3. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doc Page 5 of 6 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 4. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg. F (27 deg Q. 5. Separate waste as required by local authority having jursidiction. L. Stairs: 1. Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. 2. Cover finished, permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 0 Mm Section 1112_015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls.doc Page 6 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRC) CONo# INCORPORATED Design and Constnation Manosmient ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0166 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1. Products 2. Transportation and Handling 3. Storage and Protection 4. General Product Requirements B. Related Sections: 1. Section 0133 00 - Submittals and Substitutions 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Project Specification Dee -20,2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1112_016600 Materials and Equipment.doc 1 of 2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON e, INCORPORATED Design and CorrshwfionManggement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit PART PRODUCTS 2.01 General Product Requirements: A. Semi -Open Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name one or more products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated. 1. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "Approved Substitution", the Architect will allow products as substitutions only after complying with the requirements of the General Conditions and Section 0133 00. 2. The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 1112_016600 Materials and Equipment.doc 2 of 2 0 N 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: PRO CON i INCORPORATED 4$� Design and Construction manageunent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0174 00 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Condition and Division 01 Specifications sections apply to work of this section. B. Individual Specification Sections: Specific Cleaning for product of work item. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED: A. Cleaning/disposal of materials, waste materials, debris and rubbish during construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS: 2.1 EQUIPMENT: A. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris and rubbish. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 CLEANING: A. Maintain areas under Contractor's control free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space. C. Periodically clean interior areas to provide suitable conditions for work. D. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on an as - needed basis. E. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet or newly - coated surfaces. F. Clean Owner occupied spaces daily, when impacted by work. G. Cleaning of public streets when under Contractor's control. 3.2 DISPOSAL: A. Remove demolition materials, waste materials, debris and rubbish from site periodically and dispose of off-site per any applicable regulations. END OF SECTION Section 1112_017400 Construction Cleaning.doc Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL PRO CON4, INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section including, but not limited to, the following: Inspection procedures Project Record Documents. Operation and maintenance manuals. Warranties. Instruction of Owner's personnel. Final cleaning B. Owner will define in the Construction Contract the "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall complete the following. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain & submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work & access to services & utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, & similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. Section 1112_017700 CloseoutProcedures.doc Page 1 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,o INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three (3) copies of the list. Include the name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Section 1112 017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 2 of 11 0 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON44; INCORPORATED Design and constnrrtiun Marrngenrertt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings, where applicable. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble three (3) complete sets of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 3 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PPO CONS; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 3. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject B. MANUAL CONTENT : In each manual include information specified in the individual Specification Section and the following information for each major component of building equipment and its controls: 1. General system or equipment description. 2. Design factors and assumptions. 3. Copies of applicable Shop Drawings and Product Data. 4. System or equipment identification, including: a. Name of manufacturer. b. Model number. C. Serial number of each component. 5. Operating instructions. 6. Emergency instructions. 7. Wiring diagrams. 8. Inspection and test procedures. 9. Maintenance procedures and schedules. 10. Precautions against improper use and maintenance. 11. Copies of warranties. 12. Repair instructions including spare parts listing. 13. Sources of required maintenance materials and related services. 14. Manual index. 15. Final Air Test and Balance Report. 16. 24 hour emergency contact information. C. Organize each manual into separate Sections for each piece of related equipment. As a minimum, each manual shall contain a title page; a table of contents; copies of Product Data, supplemented by Drawings and written text; and copies of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 1. Title Page: Provide a title page in a transparent, plastic envelope as the first sheet of each manual. Provide the following information: a. Subject matter covered by the manual. b. Name and address of the Project. C. Date of submittal. d. Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the Architect. f. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Table of Contents: After title page, include a typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged systematically according to the Project Manual format. Include a list of each product included, identified by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to the content of the volume. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 4 of 11 L01 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO COM# INCORPORATED Iksign anti Construction,Yfuungrmrnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction a. Where a system requires more than one volume to accommodate data, provide a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. 3. General Information: Provide a general information Section immediately following table of contents, listing each product included in the manual, identified by product name. Under each product, list the name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor or Installer and the maintenance contractor. Clearly delineate the extent of responsibility of each of these entities. Include a local source for replacement parts and equipment. 4. Product Data: Where the manuals include manufacturer's standard printed data, include only sheets that are pertinent to the part or product installed. Mark each sheet to identify each part or product included in the installation. Where the Project includes more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item, using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data that is applicable to the installation, and delete references to information that is not applicable. 5. Written Text: Prepare written text to provide necessary information where manufacturer's standard printed data is not available, and the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. Prepare written text where it is necessary to provide additional information or to supplement data included in the manual. Organize text in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. Where necessary, provide a logical sequence of instruction for each operation or maintenance procedure. 6. Drawings: Provide specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment or systems or to provide control or flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in project record drawings to assure. correct illustration of the completed installation. a. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MATERIAL AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit 3 copies of each manual, in final form, on material and finishes to the Owner Construction Rep for distribution. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. Provide a second section for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on care and maintenance of materials and finishes. B. Architectural Products: Provide manufacturer's data and instructions on care and maintenance of architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. 1. Manufacturer's Data: Provide complete information on architectural products, including the following, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog number. b. Size. C. Material composition. d. Color. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 5 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,4� INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction e. Texture. f. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 2. Care and Maintenance Instructions: Provide information on care and maintenance, including manufacturer's recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. Provide information on cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to the product. Include manufacturer's recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. List of products requiring instructions includes, but is not limited to, wood, vinyl, flooring materials, stone and all natural products. C. Moisture Protection and Products Exposed to the Weather: Provide complete manufacturer's data with instructions on inspection, maintenance, and repair of products exposed to the weather or designed for moisture -protection purposes. 1. Manufacturer's Data: Provide manufacturer's data giving detailed information, including the following, as applicable: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. C. Installation details. d. Inspection procedures. e. Maintenance information. f. Repair procedures. D. Schedule: Provide complete information in the materials and finishes manual on products specified in the following Sections: 1. Face Brick: Section 042000 - Unit Masonry. 2. Rubberized Asphalt -Sheet Waterproofing: Section 071100 - Sheet Membrane Waterproofing. 3. EPDM Sheet Roofing: Section 075300 - Single -Ply Membrane Roofing. 4. Omitted 5. Finish Hardware: Section 087100 -Door Hardware. 6. Insulating Glass: Section 088000 - Glazing. 7. Carpet: Section 096800 — Carpet 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -1l -inch (115 -by -280 -mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doe Page 6 of 11 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS; INCORPORATED Design ani Contmetion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. D. Warranties, Bonds, and Service Contracts: Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, or service contract in the appropriate manual for the information of the Owner's operating personnel. Provide written data outlining procedures to.. follow in the event of product failure. List circumstances and conditions that would affect. validity of warranty or bond. 1.9 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit (3) three copies of each manual, in final form, on equipment and systems to the Owner Construction Rep for distribution. Provide separate manuals for each unit of equipment, each operating system, and each electric and electronic system. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on operation and maintenance of the various pieces of equipment and operating systems. B. Equipment and Systems: Provide the following information for each piece of equipment, each building operating system, and each electric or electronic system. 1. Description: Provide a complete description of each unit and related component parts, including the following: a. Equipment or system function. b. Operating characteristics. C. Limiting conditions. d. Performance curves. e. Engineering data and tests. f. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's Information: For each manufacturer of a component part or piece of equipment, provide the following: a. Printed operation and maintenance instructions. b. Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. C. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 3. Maintenance Procedures: Provide information detailing essential maintenance procedures, including the following: a. Routine operations. b. Troubleshooting guide. C. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Operating Procedures: Provide information on equipment and system operating procedures, including the following: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Instructions on stopping. f. Shutdown and emergency instructions. g. Summer and winter operating instructions. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 7 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,;, INCORPORATED Design and Constnrction rManngenrent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction h. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. i. Special operating instructions. 5. Servicing Schedule: Provide a schedule of routine servicing and lubrication requirements, including a list of required lubricants for equipment with moving parts. 6. Controls: Provide a description of the sequence of operation and as -installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer for systems requiring controls. 7. Coordination Drawings: Provide each Contractor's Coordination Drawings. a. Provide as -installed, color -coded, piping diagrams, where required for identification. 8. Valve Tags: Provide charts of valve -tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 9. Circuit Directories: For electric and electronic systems, provide complete circuit directories of panel boards, including the following: a. Electric service. b. Controls. C. Communication. C. Schedule: Provide complete information in the equipment and systems manual on products specified in the following Sections as applicable to this project: 1. Pipe Markers: Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. 2. Air -Cooled Condensers: Section 15670 - Condensing Units. 3. Chillers: Section 15685 - Water -Cooled Centrifugal Chillers. 4. Air -Handling Units: Section 15854 - Central -Station Air -Handling Units. 5. Fans: Section 15860 - Centrifugal Fans. 6. Filters: Section 15886 - Air Filters. 7. Diffusers: Section 15933 - Air Terminals. 8. Lighting Fixtures: Section 16515 - Interior Lighting. 9. Generator Sets: Section 16620 - Packaged Engine Generator Systems. 10. Telephones: Section 16740 - Telephone Systems. 1.10 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon times. 1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during other seasons. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system as the basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 1.11 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Instruction Program: Submit two (2) copies of outline of instructional program, including schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module Section 1112 017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 8 of 11 0 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConsimctionManagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. Submit two (2) copies at end of each training module 1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Pre -Instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.13 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include system and equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements. 3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 4. Operations: Include startup, break-in, control, and safety procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise, vibration, economy, and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools. Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 9 of 11 PRO LONA& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Managene nt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Owner Construction Rep, with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. 1. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 0 Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 10 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS; INCORPORATED Design nn4 Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove stains from exposed concrete walks and patios. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. J. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. in. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION Section 1112_017700 Closeout Procedures.doc Page 11 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON # INCORPORATED Design and Constmetion Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 02800 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this Section consists of all site improvement work as shown on Drawings, and as specified herein. Work Included but not limited to: 1. Granite Pier 2. Boulders 3. AZEK Pergolas 4. Pressure treated drip edge. 5. Pressure treated deck with Trex decking for Greenroof. B. Definitions 1. The following related items are included herein and shall mean: a. Standard Specification: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts De- partment of Public Works, Standard Specification for Highways Bridges, latest edition. b. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials c. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials d. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transporta- tion Officials. e. ASTM C615: Standard Specification for Granite Building Stone. f. NYSDOT Standard Specifications. New York State Department of Transportation, latest edition. g. NBGQA: "Specifications for Building Granite", National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc., Barre VT. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All sample submissions and other submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITION, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. SITE IMPROVEMENTS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 80 00 -1 PRO CONS# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA- Design and oN Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Contractor to submit shop drawings for review by Architect showing all fasteners, inserts and connections for Azek Pergola. Construction details should conform to manufacturers installation details. C. Shop drawing for Pergola and connection to footing and pavement. D. Shop drawing for wooden deck for green roof, showing spacing and sizing of all lumber and posts. E. Granite samples and shop drawings for granite piers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRANITE - GENERAL A. Granite shall comply with requirements of the National Building Granite Quarries Association (NBGQA) for tolerances, color, and finish qualities, unless amended herein. To the greatest possible extent, provide continuous blocks of stone for fabrication of matching units. Mark matched units to provide continuous- ' sequence installation. B. Certification of Specified Physical Characteristics of Stone: 1. Stone shall be first quality granite, hard and durable, of a uniform or similar color, grain, size and texture, free from seams, cracks, or other imperfec- tions, and having a smooth splitting character. It shall be clean, and show no evidence of any rust or iron particles. Test samples shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C615. 2. Granite shall conform to the following minimal requirements: a. Abrasion: 70.0 Ha. b. Absorption: 0.4 % (average) c. Compressive strength: 19,000 psi (average) d. Modulus of rupture: 1,500 psi (average) 3. All stone materials shall have characteristics and physical requirements as defined by ASTM C119 and C615, and possess physical characteristics (Table 1) as specified under C614, in accordance with the following ASTM test references: a. Abrasion resistance of stone subject to foot traffic ASTM C241. b. Absorption of natural building stone: ASTM C97. O c. Compressive strength of natural building stone: ASTM C170. SITE IMPROVEMENTS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 028000-2 PRO CONI& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Con5tnictionMaltagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit d. Modulus of rupture of natural building stone: ASTM C99. 2.2 GRANITE PIERS A. Granite for piers shall be as selected by the Owner. B. Granite piers shall be sized according to Drawings and approved shop draw- ings. All exposed edges shall be steel finished. C. GRANITE: Comply with the physical requirements and properties of ASTM C615 and with "Specifications for Building Granite" National Building Quarries Association, Inc., for color and finish qualities. Granite shall be sound, durable stone, free from imperfections such as knot formations, starts, cracks or seams which may impair its structural integrity. Granite shall be free of minerals that may cause objectionable staining under normal environments of use. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. D. Cut all stone as required accurately to shape and dimensions and full to the square with jointing as shown or required. 2.3 BOULDERS A. Provide weathered granite Boulders from site in size from 2'x3'x2' to 3'x3'x5' in size or approximately 1 to 3 tons. B. Boulders shall be carefully picked up with nylon straps placed on trucks for de- livery. Stones shall be secured with wood blocking to keep adjacent stones from scratching weathered surface of stones. 2.4 PRESSURE TREATED DRIP STRIP A. Provide pressure treated lumber to dimensions shown on the drawings and in accordance with 06 10 00 rough Carpentry and Sheathing specifications herein. B. Provide crushed stone as required in Earthwork specifications herein. 2.5 AZEK PERGOLAS A. All columns shall be 10" dia. "Tuscan Column" with "doric" capitals and 13.5"x13.5" square bases s made from fiberglass with 2.375" galv. Steel pipe cores. B. All carry beams between posts shall be 3.5"x7.25" AZEK vinyl with aluminum cores. SITE IMPROVEMENTS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 028000-3 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA sign and nstru``'°°"'A"agemen` Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. All beams shall be 3.5"x7.25" AZEK vinyl with aluminum cores. D. All Lathe cross pieces at top of Pergola shall be 1.5'1.52" AZEK. E. All AZEK shall be white. F. All connections shall be stainless or galvanized steel screws, nails and bolts. G. 8" dia. 3000 psi concrete footings 2.6 PRESSURE TREATED DECK FOR GREEN ROOF A. Provide pressure treated lumber to dimensions shown on the drawings and in accordance with 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry and Sheathing specifications herein. B. Provide TREX decking in accordance with Architectural specification. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GRANITE PIER A. Excavate to place steel reinforced concrete foundation. Carefully set granite piers plumb and in alignment as shown on Drawings. Set additional steel reinforce- ment as shown on plan and backfill with concrete. 3.2 BOULDER PLACEMENT A. Excavate locations as directed such that boulders are set partially buried and ap- pear "naturalistic." All Boulders shall be placed under the direction of the Land- scape Architect. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, nylon straps and labor for picking boulders, conveying them to their locations, shimming the stones to be at the intended heights and orientations. C. Place a minimum of 6" of crushed stone below all stones. Shim boulders with small rocks or concrete blocking. After boulders are set in a manner agreeable to the Landscape Architect, drive crushed stone into all voids below boulder so that it is fully bedded on crushed stone. 3.3 DRIP EDGE A. Perform all excavation of every description to the depths indicated on the Draw- ings. 0 SITE IMPROVEMENTS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 028000-4 PRO CON X, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design onac°nst�wcrlor,lbra�,Age,ne"` Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Install pressure treated edge in plumb position carefully aligned to be parallel with adjacent building foundation. C. Backfill with crushed stone as shown on detail. 3.4 AZEK PERGOLA A. Install 3000 psi concrete footings in locations and in sizes as shown on plans and approved shop drawings for each of the three separate pergola structures. B. Install factory fabricated fiberglass columns in accordance with the manufactur- er's installation instructions and carefully aligned as shown on approved shop drawings for each of the three separate pergola structures. C. All workmanship shall be in conformance with Specification 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry and Sheathing. 1. Align each post vertically and laterally. Secure in position during erection of pergola structure. 2. Securely attach work fastening as required to provide a rigid finished struc- ture. 3. Set work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb per- gola beams and crossbeams level and evenly spaced. 3.5 PRESSURE TREATED DECK FOR GREEN ROOF A. Fabricate deck as shown on plans and in accordance with Architectural specifi- cation 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry and Sheathing. Coordinate placing of P/T sleepers on protection board with roof waterproofing assembly. Be careful not to disturb or damage roofing membrane and water proofing system. B. Carefully connect posts to sleepers so that fasteners do not penetrate protection board. Erect posts plumb and in alignment as shown on drawings. C. Secure joists with joist hangers in accordance with Architectural specifications. Attach TREX decking in accordance with 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry and Sheathing specification. END OF SECTION SITE IMPROVEMENTS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 028000-5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA . Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CON4 INCORPORATED Design and Con tmctionManagement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 02 92 00 LAWNS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part ,of this Section. B. Examine Drawings and other Sections of the Specifications for requirements af- fecting work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to com- plete lawn work as shown on Drawings and specified herein and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of subgrade in areas to receive topsoil. 2. Place sand under -drainage layer 3. Place topsoil and finish grade for lawn areas. 4. Seeding fine lawns 5. Seeding Dry Meadow 6. Seeding Wet MeadowMletland 7. Protecting and maintaining lawn areas until Final Acceptance. 8. Cleaning up. 1.3 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A. Areas of lawn work shall be inspected before start of work and correct defects such as incorrect grading. B. Contractor shall be solely responsible for judging full extent of work require- ments involved. By submitting bid, Contractor affirms he has carefully examined the site and conditions affecting work. No claim for additional costs will be ak lowed because of lack of knowledge of actual existing conditions. C. Drawings, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which work is to be performed are believed to be correct, but Contractor examine them for himself during bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors or inaccuracies found therein. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-1 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.4 PERMITS AND CODES PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and Contraction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Work shall conform to Drawings and Specifications and shall comply with appli- cable codes and regulations. B. Comply with rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the Town of North And- over, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and other authorities having juris- diction. Labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to make Work comply with such requirements shall be provided without additional cost to Owner. C. Arrange for and obtain permits and licenses required to complete Work. Fees not waived shall be paid for by Contractor. D. Conduct operations to minimize interference with use of roads, driveways, or other facilities near enough to Work to be affected. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. The following related items are included herein and shall mean: 1. Standard Specification: The State of New York Department of Transporta- tion, Standard Specification, latest edition. 2. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials. 3. AAN: American Association of Nurserymen. 4. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 5. ADAC: Association of Oficial Agricultural Chemists. 6. USDA: United States Department of Agriculture. 1.6 SAMPLES/SUBMITTALS A. Sample submissions and other submittals shall be in accordance with the re- quirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Section 01300 -Submittals. B. Prior to ordering materials listed below, submit representative samples to Archi- tect for selections and approval as follows. Do not order material until Archi- tect's approval has been obtained. Delivered materials shall closely match ap- proved samples. 1. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance listing analysis for the fol- lowing: LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-2 O 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 a. Fertilizer b. Seed c. Sod — if required d. Lime PRO CONS;, INCORPORATED Design and ConsMrction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance with each shipment of each seed and sod type. Certificate from seed and sod supplier shall indi- cate seed is true to variety indicated on packaging. Certificates shall in- clude guaranteed percentages of purity, weed content and germination of seed, net weight and date of shipment. No seed may be sown until certifi- cates have been submitted. C. Submittal Schedule I. Before installation: a. Manufacturer's Product data b. Test Reports C. Seed Certification 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work under this Section shall be performed by workmen experienced in lawn installation under full time supervision of qualified foreman. 1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver material to site in original unopened packages, showing weight, manu- facturer's name and guaranteed analysis. B. Store materials in such a manner that their effectiveness and usability will not be diminished or destroyed and shall be uniform in composition, dry, unfrozen and free flowing. The Architect reserves the right to reject material which has become caked or otherwise damaged or does not meet specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL BORROW A. Topsoil borrow shall be as described in Section 02 93 00 Planting. B. Deficiencies in Topsoil shall be corrected by Contractor as directed by testing agency. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-3 PRO CONiA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DesigeandCmrstneitionmmragenrent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. No Topsoil shall be delivered or handled in a frozen or muddy condition. 2.2 SAND UNDERDRAIN MATERIAL A. Sand borrow shall be as described in Section 02 93 00 Planting. 2.3 TOPSOIL ADDITIVES A. Organic Fertilizer shall be derived: complete fertilizer and a standard product complying with State and United States fertilizer laws. Fertilizer shall be deliv- ered to site in original unopened containers which shall bear manufacturer's name and guaranteed statement of analysis. Fertilizer for incorporation into lawn areas prior to seeding shall contain 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phos- phorus, and 5 percent potash by weight of ingredients or as otherwise indicated by soil test results. Fertilizer shall have its nitrogen in a water soluble form de- rived from urea, ammonium nitrate, or ammonium phosphate. B. Superphosphate: finely ground phosphate rock as commonly used for agricul- tural purposes and shall contain not less than 18 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Ground Limestone: dolomite limestone and contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates and magnesium and shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100 mesh sieve and 90 percent will pass through a 20 mesh sieve. Coarser material will be accepted provided the specified rates of applica- tion are increased proportionately on the basis of quantities passing the 100 - mesh sieve. 2.4 MAINTENANCE FERTILIZER A. Maintenance fertilizer: shall contain 4 percent nitrogen, 1 percent phosphorus, and 2 percent potash by weight of ingredients. Fertilizer shall have its nitrogen in water soluble form derived from urea, ammonium nitrate, or ammonium phosphate. 2.5 SEED A. Seed mixture: fresh, clean, new crop seed. Seed can be mixed by an approved method on site or can be mixed by dealer. If seed is mixed on site, each variety shall be delivered in original containers bearing dealer's guaranteed analysis. If seed is mixed by dealer, Seeding Contractor shall furnish to the Architect the dealer's guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentage of pu- rity and germination of each variety. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-4 PRO CON.A. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA . Design and C°"St""tion ma"as�„`"' Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Chewings fescue, hard fescue, tall fescue and rygrass shall contain Acro- monium endophytes. Seed containing endophyte must be kept cool and dry at all times; do not stockpile in the sun. Proportion of mix Minimum B. Seed Mixture Seeded Lawn: Reliant Hard Fescue Jamestown II Chewings Fescue Palmer II perennial ryegrass after purity germination 40% 95% 40% 95% 20% 95% 2. If cultivars as listed are not available, others can be substituted with Archi- tect's approval. C. Meadow Seed Mix and Wet Seed Mix shall be purchased through New England Wetland Plants, Inc. 820 West Street Amherst, MA 01002 Phone: 413-548- 8000. Seed Mixes shall be the following: 1. "Wet Seed Mix" shall be New England Erosion Control/Restoration Mix for Detention Basins/Moist Sites. 2. "Wildflower Seed Mix" shall be New England Wildflower Seed Mix. 2.6 SOD — if required A. Grade 1 Sod shall be a mixture of Kentucky Bluegrass varieties, with a mini- mum of 10% Red Fescue or Chewing Fescue. Sod shall be well rooted turf free from disease, insect pests, weeds and any other harmful matter. B. Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 3/4 inch, plus or minus 1/4 inch, a the time of cutting. Measurement of thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch. Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier's stand- ard width and length. Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be 5% Broken pads and torn or uneven ends will not be accepta- ble. Sod shall be at least one year old from time of original seeding. C. Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their won weight and retain their size and shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on the upper 10% of the section. D. Sod shall be harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 36 hours. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the Ar- chitect prior to its installation. Soil on sod pads shall be kept moist at all times. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 2.7 COMPOST PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design+md constniction Management ARCHITECTURE A. Shall be as described within Section 02 93 00 Planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAWN WORK SCHEDULE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Lawn work shall proceed on schedule in conformance with project phasing as indicated on phasing drawings and specified under General Conditions. These requirements will be strictly adhered to. B. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance work on installed lawn until an acceptable lawn is established for a minimum of 60 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF NEW LAWNS A. Preparation of subgrade 1. Before beginning work of this Section, Lawns Subcontractor shall inspect subgrade work to ensure proper subgrade, true to elevation and with smooth slopes parallel to final finished grade, has been provided. Note that subgrade must pitch to subdrains. 2. Coordinate additional work to and adjustment of subgrade with General Contractor. Do not begin placing Topsoil on subgrade until receipt of Ar- chitect's approval. 3. Immediately before placing sand drainage layer, cultivate subsoil with chisel plow, harrow or other approved method to 6" depth. 4. Rake surface of subsoil to remove rocks in excess of 3". Architect shall inspect and approve subgrade before placing of sand drainage layer. 5. Place a 6-8" layer of course sand. 6. Place 2"-3" layer of topsoil and rake this topsoil into the top 2-3" of the sand layer. Place the remaining topsoil to meet the finish grade. 7. Provide and set sufficient grade stakes, as determined by Architect, to en- sure correct line and grade of finish grade. B. Placing Topsoil Place and spread Topsoil over approved areas to depth sufficiently greater than depth required so after natural settlement and light rolling, complete work conforms to lines, grades and elevations indicated, and ensures proper drainage in an uninterrupted pattern free of hollows and pockets. Topsoil depth after rolling shall be 6". Included in Contract shall be aug- LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-6 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA . Project #301112 PRO CON.# INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and ConsbvctFon Management Dec. 20, 2011 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit menting the Topsoil stripped from the site with course sand and compost as directed by the Architect based on soil test results without additional costs to Owner. 2. After placing Topsoil, 5" - 6" depth by use of rototiller to loosen compac- tion and incorporate limestone and super phosphate at rates recommend- ed by test results. Do not overwork soil. 3. Roll entire surface with roller weighing approximately one hundred pounds per foot of width. During rolling fill depressions caused by settlement with additional loam borrow and regrade and roll until surface presents smooth, even and uniform finish and is up to required grade. Obtain approval from Owner's Representative of finish grading and rolling of Topsoil borrow. 4. Placing, tilling, rolling and finish grading of Topsoil borrow shall be per- formed with agricultural machinery designed for that purpose to prevent over compaction of seed bed. Heavy construction equipment shall not be permitted for these purposes. 5. No subsoil or Topsoil borrow shall be handled if in a wet or frozen condi- tion. C. Application of fertilizers 1. Prior to seeding, apply uniform application of 5-10-5 fertilizer at rate of 440 pounds per acre. Work into soil with seed application described below. 3.3 SEEDING SEASON A. Seeding dates are as follows: 1. April 15 to June 1, September 1 to October 15. B. Seeding other than within the above season shall be allowed only when or- dered by Architect or when Contractor submits written request for permission to do so and permission is granted. Newly seeded areas, if seeded out of season, must be continuously watered according to good practice if seeding is done be- tween June 1 and September 1. Seeding done outside dates established above shall be solely at Contractor's risk. 3.4 SOWING OF SEED A. Seeding: Seeding shall consist of soil preparation, seeding, raking, rolling, weeding, watering and otherwise providing labor and materials necessary to secure establishment of acceptable turf. B. Sowing of Seed: Immediately before seed is sown, ground shall be scarified or raked lightly until surface is smooth, friable, and of uniformly fine texture. No LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC? CC Meo INCORPORATED Desip and Constmdion Manage+neit ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit seeding shall be done during windy weather. Sow seed in two directions right angles to each other, applying 3 lbs. of seed per 1,000 sq. feet in each direc- tion. Sow seed evenly using a cultipacker or approved seeding device (if culti- packer is not used, cover seed with thin layer of Topsoil borrow by dragging, light raking or other approved method). Roll in both directions with hand roller weighing approximately one hundred pounds per foot of width, and water with fine spray. Provide protective fencing where required to keep area undisturbed until grass is established. 3.5 SODDING — if required A. Limit of sodding shall be as shown on the Drawings. All areas on the plan are to be sodded only after written approval of the placement of topsoil and finished grading or as directed by the Architect. B. Planting season for sod shall be from April 15 to June 1 and from August 15 to November 1. The actual planting of sod shall be done, however, only during periods within this season which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and by accepted practice in this locality. At his option and on his responsibility the Contractor, may plant sod under unseasonable condi- tions without additional compensation but subject to Architect's approval as to time and methods. C. Sodding of lawns shall be done only by experienced workmen under the super- vision of a qualified foreman. Sodding shall consist of soil preparation, sodding, rolling, pegging weeding, fertilizing, watering and watering and otherwise providing all labor and materials necessary to secure the establishment of ac- ceptable turf. D. The soil on which the sod is laid shall be reasonable moist and shall be wa- tered, if directed by the Architect. The sod shall be laid smoothly, edge to edge, and where continuous or solid sodding is called for on the plans sod shall be laid with the longest dimension parallel to the contours. Sodding shall start at the base of slopes and progress upward in continuous parallel rows. Vertical joints between sods shall be staggered. Immediately after laying, sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed by tamping, rolling, or by other ap- proved methods so as to eliminate all air pockets, provide true and even sur- faces, insure knitting and protect all exposed sod edges, but without displace- ment of the sod or deformation of the sod surface. The sodded areas shall be watered evenly and at a rate of five gallons per square yard, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. E. In all swales, on all slopes one on three or steeper and elsewhere where speci- fied or as directed by the Architect, sods shall be held in place by stakes. Peg - LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-8 0 0 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Ma""synpen` Dec -20,2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit ging shall be done immediately after tamping. At least one stake shall be driv- en through each sod to be pegged and the stakes shall be not more than two feet apart. Stakes shall have their flat sides against the slope and be driven. 3.6 WATERING A. Watering of Seeded Areas 1. First Week: Provide labor and arrange for watering necessary to establish acceptable lawn. In absence of adequate rainfall, watering shall be per- formed daily and as necessary during first week and in sufficient quantities to maintain moist soil to two inch minimum depth. 2. Second and Subsequent Weeks: Water lawn to maintain adequate mois- ture in upper 5 inches of soil, necessary for deep root growth promotion. 3. Watering in a manner providing uniform coverage while preventing erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to finished surface by watering equipment. Provide sufficient wa- tering equipment to apply one complete coverage to seeded areas in eight hour period. t 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance begins immediately after lawn is installed and continues according to the following requirements: 1. Lawns shall be maintained for a minimum of 60 days and as long as re- quired to establish uniform, thick, well-developed stand of grass. 2. Mowing: Mow lawns at seven day intervals or more frequently if required. First mowing when grass has reached 2 1/4"-2 1/2" height, and cut grass to 2" height. Subsequent mowings shall cut grass to 2" height. Mow in the fall until growth of grass ceases, and resume in spring when grass reach- es 2 1/2" height. 3. Apply uniform application of 4-1-2 soluble nitrogen (urea or ammonium ni- trate) fertilizer at rate of 44 pounds nitrogen per acre throughout mainte- nance period. Initial application 3 to 4 weeks after seeding. Additional ap- plications shall occur at four week intervals or as directed Owner's Repre- sentative. 4. Lawn areas shall continue to be watered as described above. 5. After grass has started, areas which fail to show uniform, thick, well- developed stand of grass shall be immediately re -seeded repeatedly until areas are covered with satisfactory growth of grass as determined by Ar- chitect. 6. Repair damage from erosion, gullies, washouts, or other causes immedi- ately by filling with loam borrow, tamping, re -fertilizing and re -seeding. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-9 PRO LONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design mod Gautn+chort Mamagemtnt North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.8 INSPECTION FOR ACCEPTANCE A. Conditions of Acceptance 1. Lawn acceptance shall be given for entire lawn area. No partial ac- ceptance shall be given. 2. Lawns shall exhibit uniform, thick, well- developed stand of grass. Lawn areas shall have no bare spots in excess of four inches in diameter and bare spots shall comprise no more than two percent of total area of lawn. 3. No lawn areas shall exhibit signs of damage from erosion, washouts, gul- lies, or other causes. 4. Pavement surfaces and site improvements adjacent to lawn areas shall be clean and free of spills or overspray from placing or handling of loam bor- row and seeding operations. B. Inspection and Acceptance 1. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Architect shall inspect lawn ar- eas to determine completion of Contract work. This request must be sub- mitted a minimum of five days prior to anticipated inspection date. 2. If lawn areas are not acceptable, the Architect shall indicate corrective measures to be taken, and extend maintenance period as necessary for completion of work. Contractor shall request a second inspection of lawns as described above. This process shall be repeated until total lawn area being inspected is acceptable. 3. If the lawn areas are acceptable to Architect, he shall arrange meeting of Contractor and Owner to accept lawn work. Final inspection shall be part of this meeting to insure acceptability. At this meeting, Contractor shall be furnished with written acceptance of lawn approval. Contractor shall hand over maintenance of lawn to Owner at this meeting. 4. Following the acceptance of lawns, Contractor shall provide Owner with access to lawn areas as required for the Owner's maintenance work. C. Cleanup 1. Following lawn acceptance, Contractor shall immediately remove materi- als and equipment not required for other planting or maintenance work. Materials and equipment remaining on site shall be stored in locations which do not interfere with Owner's maintenance of accepted lawns or other construction operations. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping paving and building surfaces clean during placement of loam and seeding operations. Spills and over - sprays shall be cleaned up immediately. Acceptance shall not be granted until this condition is met. LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-10 En 101 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA . Project #301112 PRO CON�;�j� INCORPORATED D0211 rind Constnettion Management ARCHITECTURE END OF SECTION Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit LAWNS Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 029200-11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA . Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS PRO COM# INCORPORATED Iksign and Co)uinrction MITMZelnent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 02 93 00 LANDSCAPING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this Section consists of all Planting work and related items as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified herein and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Planting Mixture 2. Preparation of Topsoil Mixture 3. Planting of trees, shrubs, groundcover, and perennials 4. Planting rooftop garden, including green roof. 5. Mulching of all plantings 6. Maintenance B. Definitions The following related items are included herein and shall mean: 1. Standard Specification: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works, Standard Specification for Highways Bridges, latest edition. 2. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials 3. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 4. AAN: American Association of Nurserymen. 5. ADAC: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All sample submissions and other submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITION, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Prior to ordering the below listed materials, submit representative samples to Architect for selection and approval as follows. Do not order material until LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-1 PRC) LONA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Bcsignand ConshuctionManagcntenf Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit Architect's approval has been obtained. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. 1. Compost: The Contractor shall provide a one (1) cubic foot representative sample from each proposed source for testing and approval as directed herein. The Contractor shall deliver samples to Pine and Swallow Environmental testing laboratory prior to delivering of compost to site and pay all costs. Testing report shall be sent directly to the Architect and the Owner. 2. Topsoil: The Contractor shall provide a one (1) cubic foot representative sample of topsoil stripped from the site for testing by Pine and Swallow Environmental and pay all costs. Testing report shall be sent directly to the Architect and the Owner. Report shall be submitted at least two weeks before placement of Topsoil. 3. Sand: The Contractor shall provide a one (1) cubic foot representative sample from each proposed source for testing Pine and Swallow Environ- mental and approval as directed herein. The Contractor shall deliver sam- ples to testing 'laboratory prior to delivering of sand to site and pay all costs. Testing report shall be sent directly to the Architect and the Owner. 4. Subbase material: The Contractor shall provide a one (1) cubic foot repre- sentative sample from each area of the site (assume 2 required) for testing Pine and Swallow Environmental. This analysis will be the basis for the design of the topsoil and planting soils. The Contractor shall deliver sam- ples to testing laboratory pay all costs. Testing report shall be sent directly to the Architect and the Owner. C. Pine and Swallow Environmental, Inc. 867 Boston Road, Groton, MA 01450 #978-448-9511 will test and evaluate the submitted compost, topsoil, subsoil and sand for suitability in preparing blended "topsoil" and "Planting Soil" mixes compatible with the subbase materials. Tests are as described in Section D below. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. 1. After test results for components have been accepted, the Contractor shall create sample mixes of planting soil and Topsoil as specified. Submit sample of mixes to Pine and Swallow for evaluation. 2. After the test results for Planting Soil and Topsoil mixes have been ac- cepted, and during the placement of planting soils, test every 100 cubic yards of planting soil mix delivered to the job site. D. Test Reports: Topsoil and Planting Soil as mixed and placed shall be sent to Pine and Swallow, Environmental, Inc. 867 Boston Road, Groton, MA 01450 #978-448-9511 for testing. Pine and Swallow, Environmental, Inc. will review test results for compliance and will submit recommended adjustments in Plant- ing Soil and Topsoil to Contractor or supplier. Contractor shall pay for costs of testing and review of test results, including retesting as directed by Pine and LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Swallow Environmental. PRO CON4,0, INCORPORATED Desigt and CO11Stru CtiOn MaaggMent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Mechanical gradation (sieve analysis) shall be performed and compared to the USDA Soil Classification System. Percent clay (0.002 mm) shall be reported separately in addition to silt (ASTM D-422-63, hydrometer meth- od). 2. The silt and clay content shall be determined by a Hydrometer Test of soil passing the #270 sieve after destruction of organic matter by H2O2. 3. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, Lead, Chromium, Aluminum, Soluble Salts, acidity (pH), buffer pH and micronutrients. 4. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with Recommended Soil Testing Procedures for the Northeastern United States, 2nd Edition, Northeastern Regional Publication No. 493; Agricultural Experiment Stations of Con- necticut, Delaware, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont and West Virginia; Revised - December 15, 1995. Referenced Document may be ob- tained on the web at http://ag.udel.edu/extension/Information/Soil_Testing/title-95.htm. Tests include the following: a. Test for soil Organic Matter by loss of weight on ignition, as de- scribed in Northeastern Regional Publication No. 493, p. 59. b. Test for soil CEC by exchangeable acidity method as described in Northeastern Regional Publication No. 493, p. 64. c. Test for soil Soluble Salts shall be by the 1:2 (v:v) soil:water Extract Method as described in Northeastern Regional Publication No. 493, p.74 except 1:5 for Organic Amendment Material. d. Test for Buffer pH by the SMP method as described in Northeastern Regional Publication No. 493. 5. Certified reports on analyses from producers of composted organic mate- rials are required, particularly when sources are changed. Analyses will in- clude all tests for criteria specified for Organic Amendment Material. 6. Density Tests: ASTM D1556 Density of soil and rock in place using Sand Cone Method" or with Nuclear Density (e.g. Troxler) equipment. ASTM D698 Test Method for laboratory compaction characteristics of soil using Standard Effort. a. In-place density tests shall be carried out at a rate of one test per 2,000 square feet for each type of material placed. 7. Antidesiccant: Submit manufacturer literature. 8. Fertilizer: Submit Certificate of Compliance listing analysis. 9. Unit prices for all plant materials, including installation. LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4 ,, INCORPORATED Design and Coustmetion Managem€rtt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 10. Cost for one year maintenance after acceptance of plantings. 11. Manufacturer's certificates regarding fertilizers and lime. 12. Manufacturer's literature for LiveRoof - green roof system or equal, includ- ing planting tray, planting soil, and plant list. 13 Tournesol Manufacturer's literature and finish colors for Wilshire Collection fiberglass planters. Provide samples of finishes if required by Owner. E. Certificates: Provide certificates required by authorities having jurisdiction, es- pecially for any composted materials containing sewage sludge. Approval as EPA Type 1 "exceptional quality" is required as well as that of the State of Mas- sachusetts. 1.4 CERTIFICATION OF ACCEPTANCE AND GUARANTEE A. After the minimum sixty (60) day maintenance period, the Contractor shall request the Architect, in writing, for an inspection to determine whether the plant material is acceptable. If the plant material and workmanship are acceptable, written notice will be given by the Architect to the Contractor stating that the one year maintenance and guarantee period begins from the date of the Certificate of Acceptance. B. If any plants are sickly and dead at the time of inspection, acceptance will not be granted, and the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all the plants shall be extended until replacements are made. All plants unacceptable to the Architect shall be promptly removed from the project. Replacements shall conform in all respects to the specification for new plants and shall be planted in the same manner. C. Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after inspection and issuance of Certificate of Acceptance, and shall be alive and in satisfactory growth at the end of the guarantee period. The sum of 10% of the total cost of the planting contract shall be retained and paid to the Contractor after replacements have been made, one year from acceptance of original planting. D. At the end of the guarantee period, inspection will be made again. Any plant required under this contract that is dead or unsatisfactory shall be removed from the site. Each plant shall show at least 75% healthy growth and shall have the natural character of a plant of its species in accordance with the American Nurseryman's Association Standards. These plants shall be replaced during the normal planting season. A final inspection for acceptance will be made after the replacement plantings have lived through one year. E. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind, size and quality as specified in the PLANT LIST. The cost shall be borne by the Contractor, except for possible replacements due to vandalism or neglect on the part of others. LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-4 IN LNWA c 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRO CON # INCORPORATED Design mid Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2.1 COMPOST (Organic Amendment Materials) A. Organic Matter (Compost) for amending planting media shall be a stable, hu- mus -like material produced from the aerobic decomposition of organic residues. The residues, if biosolids, shall consist of compost meeting MA DEP Type 1 re- quirements or approved equal. Leaf or Yard Waste Compost, shall be com- posted for a minimum of one year (12 months). Compost shall be free of debris such as plastics, metal, concrete or other debris and stones larger than 3/8", larger branches and roots and wood chips over 3/8" in length or diameter. Compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management practices in conjunction with addi- tion of fertilizer and other amendments as applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. 1. The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 12:1 to 25:1. 2. Stability shall be assessed by the Solvita procedure. Protocols are speci- fied by the Solvita manual (version 4.0). The compost must achieve a ma- turity index of 6 or more as measured by the Solvita scale. Stability tests shall be conducted by Woods End Research Laboratory, Mt. Vernon, Maine, Soil Control laboratory of California, or approved equal. 3. Pathogens/M eta Is/Vector Attraction reduction shall meet 40 CFR Part 503 rule, Table 3, page 9392, Vol. 58 No. 32, and Commonwealth of Massa- chusetts 310 CMR 32.00 (for applications to soils with human activity). 4. Organic Content shall be at least 20 percent (dry weight). One hundred percent of the material shall pass a 3/8 -inch (or smaller) screen. Debris such as metal, glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. Organic content shall be determined by weight loss on ignition or H2O2 for particles passing a Number 10 sieve according to procedures performed by the West Experiment Station at the University of Massachusetts, Am- herst or equal. For loss by ignition, a 50 -cc sub -sample of the screened and mixed compost is ground to pass the number 60 sieve. Two to three grams (+ 0.001g) of ground sample dried to a constant weight at 105 de- grees C is placed into a muffle furnace. The temperature is slowly raised (5C/minute) to 450C and maintained for three hours. The sample is re- moved to an oven to equilibrate at 105C and the weight is taken. Organic matter is calculated as loss on ignition. 5. pH: The pH shall be between 6.5 to 7.2 as determined from a 1:1 soil - distilled water suspension using a glass electrode pH meter American So- ciety of Agronomy Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 2, 1986. 6. Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to five soil to water ratio extract shall not exceed 2.0 mmhos/cm (dS/m). LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED Iksip and Constwtion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 7. The compost shall be screened to 318 inch maximum particle size and shall contain not more that 3 percent material finer that 0.002mm as de- termined by hydrometer test on ashed material. 8. Nutrient content shall be determined by the University of Massachusetts Soil Testing Laboratory or equivalent laboratory and utilized to evaluate soil required amendments for the mixed soils. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potas- sium, Calcium, Aluminum, Magnesium, Chromium, Iron, Manganese, Lead, Soluble Salts, Cation Exchange Capacity, soil reaction (pH), buffer pH, and micronutrients. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil as required for the work shall be as stripped from the site and stockpiled. Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, earth clods, sticks, stumps, and clay lumps. Topsoil shall be screened in two operations: first to remove stones and debris greater than 4" and a second screening to remove stones and debris larger than 1" in size. B. Deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor based on testing. No topsoil shall be handled in a frozen or muddy condition. C. Based on topsoil testing by Pine and Swallow Environmental, topsoil may require mixing with compost or sand to adjust organic content and permeability required for satisfactory performance. Additional mixing of screened topsoil with course sand and compost as directed are a requirement of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.3 SAND A. Sand for Planting Mixture and Topsoil Mixture shall be uniformly graded medium to coarse sand consisting of clean, inert, rounded grains of quartz or other durable rock free from loam or clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials with the following gradation for material passing a Number 10 sieve. Percent Passing U.S. Sieve Size Number 10 18 35 60 140 270 0.002mm Minimum Maximum 100 --- 60 80 25 45 8 20 0 8 0 3 0 0.5 LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-6 En 0 0 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design And Construction manAgetnent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 20% by weight of the total sample. C. The ratio of the particle size for 70% passing (D70) to the particle size for 20% passing (D30) shall be 3.0 or less. (D70/D20 <3.0) D. Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by H2O2. 2.4 PLANTS A. The Contractor shall furnish and plant all plants shown on the Drawings, as specified, and in quantities listed on the PLANT LIST. No substitutions will be permitted. In case of conflict between the Planting Plan and the Plant List, the Plant List shall prevail. All plants shall be nursery grown: 1. The Contractor is responsible for paying all shipment and shipment related costs for this Contract. If any plant is damaged by digging or during transit or off loading, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to replace the un- acceptable plant at his/her expense. 2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility at the end of the guarantee period to replace any plant at no additional cost to the Owner that the Architect determines unacceptable. The Contractor shall pay all replacement costs, maintain the replacement plants for a minimum of thirty (30) days or until acceptance and provide a one year guarantee. B. Plants shall be in accordance with the U.S.A. Standard for Nursery Stock of the American Association of Nurserymen, Latest edition. C. All trees shall exhibit distinctive character and form and shall be well branched and fully covered with foliage. Trees shall meet the requirements for spread or height stated in the plant list. The measurements for height are to be taken from the ground level to the average height of the tree not to the highest branch. The thickness of each shrub shall correspond to the trade classification "No. 1" AAN standard. The side branches must be generous, well twigged, and the plant as a whole well -branched. The plants must be in a moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises or other root or branch injuries. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery. D. All plants shall be healthy, free of insects and diseases. E. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling All plants shall be carefully handled so that the roots are adequately protected and moist at all times. Plants shall not be pruned prior to LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-7 PRO CON eo Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DaignandGonsfmdionManagemtnt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit planting. The balls of balled and burlapped plants shall be well protected before, during and upon delivery and until planted. Plants delivered by truck shall be properly wrapped and covered to prevent wind -drying and desiccation of branches, leaves or buds; plant balls should be firmly bound, unbroken, reasonably moist to indicate watering prior to delivery and during storage and tree trunks should be free from fresh scars and damage in handling. Plants shall be delivered in box trucks or covered with planting tarps. Any plants that are shipped without protection will be rejected upon arrival. Trees and other plants arriving with dry rootballs shall be rejected. If immediate planting is not feasible, protect all plants from sun and drying wind by mulching. Balled and burlapped plants shall not be planted if the ball is cracked or broken either before or during the process of planting. F. All Plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have a normal habit of growth and be legibly tagged with the proper name. Only plant stock within the hardiness Zone 1 through. 5, as established by the Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain, Massachusetts, will be accepted. G. The root system of each shall be well provided with fibrous roots. All parts shall be moist and show active green cambium when cut. They shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs or larvae. H. All plants must be moved with the root systems as solid units with balls of earth firmly wrapped with untreated eight ounce burlap, firmly held in place by a stout cord. All B&B trees shall be hand dug and drum laced. Wire baskets will be accepted provided the rootball is tightly held and laced in place. Plants delivered in loose wire baskets shall be rejected. No "burlap" made of synthetic fibers will be acceptable. The diameter and depth of the balls of earth must be sufficient to encompass the fibrous and root feeding system necessary for the healthy development of the plant. No plant shall be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding its roots has been badly cracked or broken preparatory to or during the process of planting. The plants and balls shall remain intact during all operations. All plants that cannot be planted at once must be heeled in by setting in the ground and covering the balls with mulch and watering them. At least 75% of the plants furnished for each size range shown on the Plant List shall be at or above the average between the maximum and minimum size specified. If a nursery supplies material at a specific height (not a range), then the larger size of the specified range shall be furnished. J. Plant material which is to be planted after the specified seasons for planting shall be dug during the normal season for digging of the particular plant material and be stored and maintained in good health until planting. The Contractor shall assume all costs for maintaining plant material while it is being stored. LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-8 PRO LONA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA . vesig,'and "Ont 011Mfin4geme,r Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit K. The Contractor shall provide a list of suppliers in sufficient time to allow the Architect to inspect the plants prior to delivery. 1. The Contractor shall request, in writing, that the Landscape Architect pro- vide representative to select and tag all trees and representative stock of shrubs, perennials and groundcovers planted under this Section. The Con- tractor shall pay for time incurred by the Landscape Architect at standard rates not to exceed $90/hr.; the expense for transportation (mileage at $.55), rental car and airfare and overnight accommodations, if necessary, for the Landscape Architect's representative during the period of time re- quired to select and tag the plant material. 2. Plants shall be selected by the Landscape Architect at the place of growth for conformity to specification requirements as to quality, size, and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. Cost of replacement shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. Representative stock of shrubs; perennials and groundcovers, shall be clearly marked in storage locations on site and the Contractor shall ar- range for the Landscape Architect to inspect shrubs, perennials and groundcovers upon arrival for conformance with the sample plants. L. Plants shall be dug with care and skill. Special precautions shall be taken to avoid any unnecessary injury to, or removal of fibrous roots. Each species or variety shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that particular plant. All precautions shall be taken to ensure the arrivals of plants at the project site are in good condition for successful growth. M. Requests for plant substitutions shall be made at least 5 days before the plants are to be planted and such requests shall list at least 5 major nursery sources contacted for confirmation of unavailability. 2.5 WATERING A. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish his own supply of water to the site at no extra cost. If possible, the Owner will furnish the Contractor upon request with an adequate source and supply of water at no charge. However, if the Owner's water supply is not available or not functioning, the Contractor will be held responsible to furnish adequate supplies at his own cost. All work injured or damaged due to the lack of water, or the use of too much water, shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct. Water shall be free from impurities injurious to vegetation. 2.6 ANTIDESICCANTS A. Antidesiccants shall be emulsions or other materials which will provide a protective film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-9 PRO CO3NA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Dcsignand CoustmctionMmrugcme»t Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit and specifically manufactured for that purpose. Manufacturer of Antidesiccant shall be subject to the Architect approval. Antidesiccant shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and shall be mixed according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2.7 BARK MULCH A. Bark mulch shall be shredded bark averaging 1/2 to 2 inches in length and shall be no less than 6 months old nor more than 1 year old. It shall be free of sticks leaves twigs and other debris to the satisfaction of the Architect. It shall not contain ground up construction debris, shipping palates, or any toxic materials. It shall not have been subject to anaerobic conditions. 2.8 OSMO-COAT SLOW RELEASE FERTILIZER A. Osmo-coat fertilizer shall be beads of fertilizer specifically designed for the growing of potted plant materials which provide a continuous slow release of nutrients over a 6-9 month period. 2.9 GREENROOF B. GREENROOF shall be LiveRoof hybrid green roof system or approved equal. Tray depth shall be approximately 4.25" deep with a modular size of 1'x3'. Note that the top 1" of the tray system needs to be removable so that the tray system does not show. Tray system shall allow plants to spread from one tray to another. C. Soil medium shall be a manufactured blend of lightweight inorganic granules, such as expanded shale, vermiculite or perlite and organic materials. D. Plants shall be a blend of sedum species and other low growing xeric species. 2.10 PLANTERS A. Tournesol FRP planter with irrigation appurtenances shall be as manufactured by Tournesol Site Works, 42326 Albrae St., Fremont, CA 94538 1-800-542- 2282 B. Wilshire Collection fiberglass planters, Finish: MMP Iron or as approved by Owner. 1. WCS-3600 36" dia. X 30" ht. FRP with CWC-2800/CWM-1720-3R — Provide 3 drain holes as recommended by manufacturer 2. WCR-2400 24"x24" x24"ht. FRP with CWC-R1850/CWM-R1114-2K — Provide 2 drain holes as recommended by manufacturer 3. WCR-482424 48"x24"x24"ht FRP with CWM-R1620/2K — Provide 3 drain holes as recommended by manufacturer. LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-10 0 *1 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA. Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING MIXTURE PRC) CON to INCORPORATED Design and Construction Mnnggentent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. The Planting Mixture shall consist of a blend of approximately equal parts by volume of Topsoil, Sand and Compost. This blend shall be made as designed by Pine and Swallow Environmental. Blending of the components shall be car- ried out with earth moving equipment to mix components and then the material shall be run through a screening plant to thoroughly mix together the compo- nents prior to placement. The components shall be blended to create a uniform mixture as determined by the Landscape Architect. 1. The final mix shall have an organic content between 5 and 8 percent and conform to the following gradation requirements for material passing a Number 10 sieve. Percent Passing U.S. Sieve Size Number Minimum Maximum 10 100 --- 18 73 93 35 55 83 60 28 55 140 21 32 270 15 21 0.002mm 1 4 2. Maximum size shall be one inch largest dimension. The maximum re- tained on the #10 sieve shall be 20% by weight of the total sample. 3. The ratio of the particle size for 80% passing (D80) to the particle size for 30% passing (D30) shall be 5.0 or less. (D80/D30 <5.0) 4. Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by H2O2. 5. A sample of the prepared Planting Mixture shall be sent to Pine and Swal- low Environmental for testing and approval prior to use. Results shall be sent to Architect who will direct the Contractor to begin work or remix and resubmit the sample. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING A. Contractor shall carefully review details and specifications with Architect and Owners Representative before proceeding. 3.3 PLANTING ON SITE A. Planting of any plant material includes: Coordination with the nursery, shipment LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-11 PRO CON # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Mamgonant Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 from the nursery, the digging of the holes, provision of the soil additives and amendments, furnishing the plants of specified size with roots in the specified manner, the labor of planting and mulching, and the removal of all excess or debris material created as a result of the work. B. Coordination with Existing Conditions: Prior to excavating for plants, the Con- tractor shall inform himself fully or existing conditions below grade. Specifically, the Contractor shall verify the location of underground utilities and, when work- ing over the structure, the depth of waterproofing, drainage and other utility structures running below grade. The Contractor shall be liable for any damages resulting from his failure to ascertain subsurface conditions before proceeding with the work. C. Planting on site within plan ting beds: 1. All shrub, perennial and groundcover planting beds on the site shall have 12" of planting mix installed in a "continuous bed" and graded prior to planting. 2. Prior to placing planting mix, the Contractor shall prepare the subgrade and place sand as required under Section 02920 Lawns. 3. The Contractor shall spread 2" of planting mixture over the entire bed and rake the planting mixture into the top 4" of the sand. The Architect shall inspect all beds prior to the placement of the 12" of planting mix. 4. All shrubs and trees shall be set on the ground by the Contractor in their approximate location for approval by the Landscape Architect before any excavation. The Contractor shall move plants as necessary to obtain the Landscape Architect's approval. Each plant location shall be carefully marked and the planting hole excavated so that the final arrangement of plants conforms to the location of plants as approved prior to planting. Before beginning any backfilling, the Contractor shall turn and otherwise correct the plant location as required by the Landscape Architect for his approval. Once final approval has been given by the Landscape Architect, the Contractor can proceed with the backfilling. 5. Trees shall be planted such that the rootflare is 3" above the surrounding grade. Provide saucers to contain water as shown on the detail and cover the surface of the saucer with mulch, leaving the actual rootflare uncov- ered with mulch. 6. Shrubs shall be planted such that the rootflare is 1" above the surrounding grade. D. Planting of Perennials and Groundcovers: 1. After all shrubs and trees have been planted, the planting beds shall be mulched. The Contractor shall then place all the perennials and groundcovers in locations for the Landscape Architect's approval and shall (D LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON # INCORPORATED Design acid Construction Managenjcnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit adjust the locations as directed to the satisfaction of the Landscape Archi- tect. Each plant location shall be carefully marked and the mulch moved aside and a planting hole excavated so that the final arrangement of plants conforms to the location of plants as approved prior to planting. 2. The Contractor shall spread additional mulch as may be needed to tidy up the beds and cover planting mix with 2" depth of bark mulch after settle- ment. E. All tree planting that is not within planting beds shall be performed as shown on the details with a hole excavated no deeper than the rootball and with a mini- mum width 3' greater than the rootball diameter. Backfill hole with planting mix. Trees shall be planted such that the rootflare is 3" above the surrounding grade. Provide saucers to contain water as shown on the detail and cover the surface of the saucer with mulch, leaving the actual rootflare uncovered with mulch. F. All plant roots and earth balls must be damp and thoroughly protected from sun and wind from the beginning of the digging operation, during transportation and on the ground until the final planting. After plant locations have been approved, and trees are backfilled to within 8" of the surface, remove burlap, rope, from the tops of root balls. Cut and remove the top of the wire cages for machine dug plants and remove the top two courses of wire to a depth of at least 8". Re- move all non biodegradable twine. Untie or cut rope and twine that is tied around the root flare. Do not pull burlap out from under root balls. G. The sides of rootballs of potted shrubs and perennials shall be scarified to cut or free encircling roots. H. All plants shall be flooded with water twice within the first 24 hours of the time of planting and all plants during the maintenance period shall be watered at least twice each week. At each watering the soil around each tree or shrub shall be thoroughly saturated. If sufficient moisture is retained in the soil, as determined by the Landscape Architect, the required watering may be reduced. Shredded bark mulch shall be placed over entire planting areas to a depth set- tled depth of two inches, not later than one week after planting. No mulch shall be applied prior to the first watering of plant materials. J. Pruning: 1. All dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruises branches shall be removed back to a live bud, branch or stem. Never cut a leader and do not trim back the tips of branches. K. Antidesiccant shall be applied to all plants before digging at the nursery and/or as directed by the Landscape Architect once the plants have been delivered to LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-13 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 the site. PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design And Construction Manngeruent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit L. Absolutely no debris may be left on site. Excavated material shall be removed as directed by the Architect. Repair any damage to site or structures to restore them to their original condition as directed by the Architect, at no cost to the Owner. M. The Contractor assumes responsibility for any damage caused to pavements, utilities and other elements of construction caused by planting operations. Pro- vide all necessary materials and labor to protect any construction elements which may be endangered by planting installation or maintenance. 3.4 PLANTING OVER STRUCTURE IN PLANTERS A. Contractor shall carefully review details and specifications with Landscape Archi- tect and Owners Representative before proceeding. After roof water proofing, protection boards, protection slab and drainage mat are in place, set planters in locations shown on plans. B. Place 4-6" of sand in the base of the planters; fill planters with 2" of planting mix and lightly rake into top of sand layer. Place plants and backfill as described above. 3.5 GREENROOF A. Install LiveRoof in locations as shown on the plan. Set trays to dimensions shown on plan as per vendor's directions. 3.6 FERTILIZATION A. Initial fertilization shall consist of the use of dry fertilizer, water-soluble fertilizer, or a combination of both. B. Dry fertilizer, shall be incorporated in the planting mix, including fertilizer for ac- id -loving plants as appropriate. C. Water-soluble fertilizer shall be dissolved in water at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. The thoroughly mixed solution shall be applied at the time of initial planting after the water used for back fill soaking has leached away. D. Unless otherwise approved, refertilization shall be by a water-soluble fertilizer applied in conjunction with watering or by itself. No refertilization will be allowed after July 15th. E. All plants shall be liquid -fertilized at least 3 times between May 15 and July 15th LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-14 0 -0 N PRO CON ,;& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA _ Dcsgnand Construction Managamenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit with water-soluble fertilizer mixed and applied as herein specified or as directed when applied with a watering. F. The Contractor's guarantee period extends Spring to Spring, all plants shall re- ceive an additional application of fertilizer in the spring prior to final acceptance. 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall con- tinue until the issuance of the Certificate of Acceptance. The Contractor shall regularly water all the plantings, including the rooftop garden, taking particular care that plants do not become overwatered or wilt because of inadequate moisture. B. The Contractor shall maintain all plants and plant beds for a period of one year after the issuance of the Certificate of Acceptance as part of the base contract. This maintenance includes providing supplemental watering to establish GREENROOF, rooftop plantings and landscape plantings. B. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a cost for one year of maintenance of all plantings along with the unit pricing for plants. The Owner may extend this maintenance for a second additional year as set forth in the Contract and sub- mitted cost. C. Maintenance shall consist of keeping the plants in a healthy growing condition and shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, remulching, removal of dead material, and resetting plants to proper grades or upright position. D. An irrigation system is part of the construction, however all lawn areas and plantings will not be covered by irrigation. Included in maintenance is adjust- ment of the irrigation system to provide adequate water without overwatering any plantings. The Contractor shall reduce the time for irrigation to ensure that there are no soggy areas. Supplemental hand -watering of some plants may be required during the first year to preclude overwatering. Providing supplemental hand watering of areas of the site that are not covered by irrigation is a re- quirement of the Contract. Ensuring that plantings are not overwatered is a re- quirement of the Contract. E. For areas of the site without automatic irrigation system, the Contractor shall . water the plantings 3 times per week throughout the growing season during the one year guarantee period. At each watering, the soil around each tree or shrub shall be thoroughly saturated. If sufficient moisture is retained in the soil, as directed by the Architect, the required watering may be reduced. Trees will require a minimum of ten gallons of water each. LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-15 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Vaisisand Constructiantifrs»agMnent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Planting beds shall be kept free of weeds and mulch shall be replaced as re- quired to maintain a proper depth as specified. G. Plants that die during the maintenance period shall be replaced as directed by the Architect. H. Spraying for both insect pests and diseases shall be included during the maintenance period as required and as directed by the Landscape Architect. All pest control operations shall be performed only by an individual holding current- ly valid applicable licenses. Spraying is to be considered only after full consid- eration has been given to alternative pest control strategies. The least toxic ap- proach to pest control will always be used. The Landscape Architect may order or the Contractor may request the use of a suitable insecticide or fungicide when it is determined that infestations of in- sects or plant disease require the use of such material. J. All herbicides, insecticides, and fungicides shall be applied as prescribed by their manufacturer and in accordance with The Commonwealth of Massachu- setts laws. The Contractor shall either possess from the Commonwealth of Massachusetts the proper registrations and permits for application of such ma- terials or have the applications made by an approved, qualified firm holding ,O such registrations and permits. Copies of all permits in connection with such materials shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION 0 LANDSCAPING Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 00-16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA . Project #301112 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 02 93 50 IRRIGATION Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 A. Work to be done includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and ser- vices required to complete all irrigation work indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. This work shall include furnishing and installing all PVC and polyethylene pipe and fittings, valve access boxes, sprinkler heads, electric wire, etc., as required for a complete irrigation system as called for in these Specifications or as may be required for proper operation of the system. C. All materials to be incorporated in this system shall be new and without flaws or defects and of quality and performance as specified and meeting the require- ments of the system. All material overages at the completion of the installation are the property of the Contractor and are to be removed from the site. D. The requirement for Backflow prevention, water taps, blow -outs, meters and plumbing shall be coordinated with the General Contractor and Plumbing sub- contractors who will provide these fittings. E. The General Contractor shall provide all required sleeving needed to extend ir- rigation piping into isolated planting beds. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The General Contractor shall submit the names of 3 or more qualified irrigation contractors for review and approval by the Landscape Architect. The qualified irrigation subcontractors shall submit a price that includes providing a complete irrigation system design and installation, subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. B. The selected irrigation subcontractor shall submit a drawing for the proposed ir- rigation system in accordance with the supplementary General Conditions for work in this Section. This drawing shall indicates the location of all valve boxes, number of zones and specified number of spray heads in each zone for review and approval by the Landscape Architect. The irrigation subcontractor shall modify the irrigation plan as directed. C. The Irrigation Contractor shall provide six (6) copies of product specification sheets on all proposed equipment to be installed to the Owner's Representative IRRIGATION Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 50- 1 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desigaiand nsftc"°nMauage7nent Dec. 20, 2011 !� Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE `J for approval. Work on the irrigation system may not commence until product sheets are submitted and approved. D. The Contractor shall maintain complete "as -built" drawings of each buildings system as the project proceeds. As-builts should specify pop up height and nozzle for each type pop up sprinkler. E. Maintenance and Operating Instruction Manuals - minimum of two (2) complete manuals - shall be furnished to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the project along with a copy of the project "As -Built" Drawing, as well as a complete set of "Approved" Product Submittals outlined above as well as equipment operating manuals. 1.3 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contrac- tor shall obtain. in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guar- antee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall warrant the irrigation system, parts and labor, for a period of one year. As part of the warranty the Contractor shall provide the first year Winterization of the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYLCLORIDE (PVC) IRRIGATION PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe in sizes (1" to 2" and below). Note that all irrigation supply lines be- low pavements and in planting beds shall be PVC pipe. Polyethylene pipe may be used within lawn areas only. PVC pipe shall be schedule 40 -100 Ib. test. B. Insert fittings shall be PVC and shall be threaded or solvent welded fittings for all piping required on plans. 2.2 POLYETHYLENE IRRIGATION PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyethylene pipe in sizes (1-1/4" and below) and locations as indicated on the Drawings shall be Type II, No. PE 3206 -(NSF -PW). Medium Density, 100 Ib. wall, 100 Ib. test. K IRRIGATION Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 50- 2 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desi =AndConstMdiQnMnnngomenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE B. Insert fittings for polyethylene pipe shall be as manufactured by Spears Manu- facturing, Inc., or approved equal. C Polyethylene "funny" pipe shall be used for hookups to individual heads. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Full circle and part circle pop up spray sprinklers shall be Hunter PS -04 or Rain Bird 1800 Series or Hunter PGP rotary heads as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 2.4 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES, BOXES A. Electrical control valves shall be 1" remote control (in specific sizes and loca- tions as shown on the Drawings), diaphragm type fiberglass bodies valve as manufactured by Weathermatic, 24 v Electric, or approved equal. B. Valve boxes shall be 6" round for 1" valves, and standard or jumbo for multiple valves with locking covers as manufactured by Carson, or approved equal. 2.5 CONTROLLERS A. Controllers shall be hybrid in construction, dual programmable with individual day running and remote ready attachment. Controller to be capable of manual, semi-automatic, and automatic operation. Controllers to be Rain Bird or Weathermatic. 2.6 WIRE A. All control wire shall be #18 multi strand, direct burial and shall meet all state and local codes for this service. 2.7 MOISTURE SENSORS A. Moisture sensors to be a "Water Limiter". Moisture sensor for each controller to be located in close proximity of water tap serving that controller. Install one moisture sensor for each group of controllers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS IRRIGATION Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 50- 3 PRO CONA6 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Designaml mt dioaMmragemene Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE A. The inside of all pipes shall be kept clean and free of all dirt, debris and foreign matter. When pipe laying is not in progress, all open ends of pipes shall be tightly sealed. B. Pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to allow for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.2 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install a valve access box for each electric control valve per manu- facturer's instructions. B. All valve access boxes shall be installed on a level 6" crushed stone base. Grade of bases shall be consistent throughout project so that finish grades fall within the limits of construction. 3.3 WIRING (CONTROL CABLE) A. All control wire shall be installed, direct bury, in the pipe trenches. Install one wire for each zone and provide a white common ground wire. Common wire to be the only white wire. B. All wire connections at remote control valves shall be left with sufficient "slack" so that in case of repair the valve bonnet or splice may be brought to the sur- face without disconnecting the wire. C. Service wiring in connection with drawings and local codes for 24 -volt service. Do not damage wire in pulling. Provide splices only in junction boxes, control cabinets, or valve boxes. 3.4 IRRIGATION NOTES A. Pipe and valve locations are diagrammatic, contractor to verify on site and lo- cate on "As -Built" plans. B. Pop sprinklers to be nozzled as indicated on the drawings. As -Built drawing shall indicate pop up height and nozzle installed. C. All sprinklers to be supported by swing fitting composed of funny/crazy pipe and two barbed elbows. D. All sprinklers and valve boxes to be set to grade before final acceptance. E. Contractor to provide valve boxes at all remote valve locations, 6" round box or larger as specified. Allow a minimum of 24" slack in all wire at valve locations. IRRIGATION Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 50- 4 PRO CON4;,& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DcsignanAConstmcGonMnnagcnrenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE F. Irrigation contractor to supply and install irrigation controller. Building contractor to provide 120 volt outlets for controllers at their location and sleeve through the building wall for valve wires. 3.5 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. After topsoil has been fine graded and lawns installed, adjust sprinkler heads, valve boxes, to grade as required, so that they will not be damaged by mowing operations. B. After all plantings have been installed, adjust location and height of sprinklers to spray over groundcovers and perennial plantings. C. Continue sprinkler cover adjustment as required by settlement, etc., throughout the guarantee period. D. Each control zone shall be operated for a minimum of 10 minutes and all heads checked for consistency of delivering water. Adjustments shall be made to heads which are not consistent to the point that they match the manufacturer's standards. All heads, valves, timing devices or other mechanical or electrical components, which fail to meet these standards, shall be rejected, replaced and tested until they meet the manufacturer's standards. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE AND OPERATION BY OWNER A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for the training of maintenance personnel in the operation, maintenance and repair of the system. The Contractor shall furnish, in addition to the "as -built" plans and operational manuals, copies of all available parts lists, trouble -shooting lists, specification sheets and catalog sheets to the Own- er's personnel responsible for the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system in triplicate with one copy to the Owner's Representative. Warranty pe- riod of one year shall commence at the date of owner acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION IRRIGATION Blair Hines Design Associates, LLC 02 93 50- 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1— GENERAL PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design anis Construction Manragement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION INCLUDES, but is not limited to, the following: A. Cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, accessories mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. Footings and frost walls Elevator Pits Slab on Grade Exterior walks and pads Stamped Concrete (refer to Section 0275 1) B. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, sealers, and finishes. The extent of concrete work shown on drawings, including, but not limited to the following: location thickness/psi reinforcing UL Ref. 1. Foundations & Frost Walls As shown 3000 psi bars N/A 2. Interior Slab on Grade As shown 3000 psi Nylon fiber N/A 3. Interior Slabs on Deck As shown 3500 psi WWF N/A 4. Exterior Slab on Grade / Sidewalks As shown 4500 psi w/air (6%) WWF N/A C. 10 mil. Vapor Barrier installed under all interior slabs on grade as noted elsewhere in the specification. Vapor Barrier will be placed on top of Base Course, directly under the slab. The slab must be "wet cured" for a minimum of seven (7) days and is the responsibility of the General Contractor to monitor and document their curing process. Ensure non -staining products and ensure thorough, consistent coverage during "wet curing" process. Alternate: curing compound or other means of insuring proper curing of concrete slab may be utilized if approved in writing by the structural engineer. Method is weather dependent. Method to be finalized at pre -slab meeting. Vapor Barrier will be taped and sealed at all overlapping joints and at all penetrations with approved, compatible POLYETHYLENE SPLICING TAPE. Vapor Barrier shall be carried up the foundation wall and cut at top of slab and sealed to adjacent concrete. Note: comply with requirements for radon evacuation system. 1.2 Related Documents: A. Drawings, Specifications, Division 1 and Contract B. Cement Concrete Pavement + Colored, imprinted concrete. D. Geotechnical Study: See Appendix A. 1.3 Quality Assurance: A. Comply with provisions American Concrete Institute 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" and 301 "Structural Concrete for Buildings" except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Section 1112_033000 Concrete.doc Page 1 of 6 PRC} CON,;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Form all footing and foundations. Unformed placement of concrete is not allowed. C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.4 Pre -placement meeting(s) shall be held at the project site, prior to installation of concrete. Refer to Section 01050 - Pre -Installation Criteria. The attendees shall include: General Contractor Project Manager and Superintendent Placement Subcontractor and Foreman Concrete Supplier Structural Engineer A. Meeting #1 - Pre -foundation placement. All footing excavations shall be inspected as described in Section 01010 prior to placement of Concrete. B. Meeting #2 - Pre -slab placement. All below slab excavations, vapor barriers, and fill shall be inspected as described in Section 01010 prior to placement of Concrete. C. Meeting #3 — Sitework Concrete Pre -placement. 1.5. Submittals: A. Provide Mix designs including cylinder breaks for the specific mix. � Provide designs for each type of concrete to be used on the project. ..`J B. Provide data sheet s for aggregates, fiber reinforcing, etc. to be incorporated into the concrete. C. Special additives for curing acceleration, curing retardation, etc. must be approved in writing by the Structural Engineer prior to placement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Form Materials: A. Forms for Concrete Surfaces: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. B. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces. 2.2 Reinforcing Materials: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A-615 Grade 60, deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: Plain cold -drawn welded steel wire, ASTM A-185. C. Provide metal bolster, chairs and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Clay bricks, blocks, stones, etc are not acceptable. D. Synthetic fiber reinforcing for slabs: Virgin nylon monofilament fiber reinforcement additive confirming to ASTM C-116. Section 1112 033000 Concrete.doc Page 2 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 2.3 Concrete Materials: PRC) CO INCORPORATED Design and Constrmjion,4anagement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type Il. B. Normal Weight -Aggregates: ASTM C33, with maximum 1 1/2" for footing and other mass concrete and 3/4" maximum for other concrete. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. D. Calcium Chloride. Not permitted. E. Admixtures Do not use any additives without prior written approval from the Architect or Structural Engineer. 2.4 Accessories: A. Provide minimum 10 mil polyethylene vapor barrier with approved polyethylene splicing tape cover over prepared sub -base material for floor slabs as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide base course for all floor slabs of evenly graded natural gravel 3/8" maximum to 1/8" minimum (pea gravel). C. Non -shrink Cement Grout Below Column Base Plates: Non-metallic, flowable, high strength (4000 psi at 7 days) conforming to CRD -C 621. D. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309. E. Absorptive Mats: ASTM C171. F. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion. 2.5 Proportioning and Design of Mixes: A. Use proprietary standard design mix that meets the following qualities and furnish satisfactory evidence of such conformance prior to placement of concrete. Accompany each mixer truck with a delivery ticket noting type of concrete and materials and time of batching. Note placement location and time of each load on these tickets and file all tickets on the job site. B. Concrete: Proportion to design strengths indicated on drawings. 2.6 Concrete Mixes: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified: 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Concrete design mixes ASTM C94, 28 -day compressive strength: a. Walls, foundations and footings: 3000 psi b. Interior Slab on grade: 3000 psi with nylon fiber reinforcing. c. Exterior site concrete exposed to weather: 4500 psi, 6% (+/- 1%) air entrainment with steel WWF reinforcing. 3. Maximum slump of concrete shall be 4" (+/- %2") for slabs and 5" for remaining work. A slump of up to 5 '/2" is permitted with the use of a mid-range water reducer. Slump will be taken at the truck prior to discharge into pumps. Section 1112_033000 Concrete.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification IJesign and Construction ManagementNorth Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2.7 Composite Waterproofing: A. Provide Type 1 Volclay panels around entire exterior of elevator pit including bottom, top and side of footing and walls to form a monolithic waterproofing membrane. 1. Sodium Bentonite Content: 1 lb./ft2 a. Granular Size: 90% passing 20 Seive, 10% passing 200 Seive b. Granular Type: 90% Montmorillinite, 10% Volcanic Sediment 2. Dry Thickness: 0.187 inch 3. Panel Size: 4 feet x 4 feet 4. Typical Panel Weight: 18 lbs. 5. Permeability: ASTM D 5084 1 x 10-9 cm/sec. 6. Puncture Resistance: ASTM D 78195 lbs. B. Manufacturers recommended accessories required for complete installation. C. Vapor Barrier: Vapor Barrier shall be minimum 10 mil thickness polyethylene sheet materials. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All joints shall be lapped a minimum of 6" and sealed with approved polyethylene splicing tape as recommended by the manufacturer. All penetrations, piping, ducts, etc. shall be lapped and sealed with approved polyethylene splicing tape. Note: comply with requirements for radon evacuation system. 2.9. Admixtures: A. Air entrainment — 6% (+/- 1%) in all exterior slabs, per ASTM C 260. 0 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Forms: A. Arrange and assemble formwork which is readily removable without damage to cast -in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work. Support brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads until such loads can be supported by concrete. C. Use factory fabricated, adjustable length, and removable or snap -off metal form ties. D. Provide PVC sleeves openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades, schedule 40 PVC. E. Expansion joint material, asphalt impregnated formed felt; thickness as indicated; depth as required for concrete section being placed, position flush with surface of concrete. Material shall be compatible with joint sealant. 3.2 Placing Reinforcement: A. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction or concrete placement operations. 1. All bars shall be continuous in longest length possible with minimum 36 bar diameter laps. Reinforcing shall not be continuous through control joints, except at footings. 2. Bent corner reinforcing at all inside and outside corners shall be provided to lap and match horizontal reinforcement. Section 1112_033000 Concrete.doc Page 4 of 6 PRO CONi# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construe0on?4tnrrnbe,nent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 3. Minimum coverage for any reinforcing steel shall be as per A.C.I. 4. Welding for fabrication and installation is not permitted. B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least two full mesh and lace splices with wire. 3.3 Installation of embedded Items: A. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cost -in-place concrete. 3.4 Preparation of Form Surfaces: A. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. 3.5 Form Cleaning: A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter within forms. B. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.6 Concrete Placement: A. Comply with American Concrete Institute 304, and herein specified. B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal with approved polyethylene splicing tape. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. D. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding or tamping (except for slabs). E. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation. F. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike -off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps and hollows. G. Maintain mesh reinforcing in approximately the middle of slab during concrete placement operations. H. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength, which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. I. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators. J. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with American Concrete Institute 305R. K. When cold weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with American Concrete Institute 306R. Section 1112_033000 Conerete.doc Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.7 Finish of Formed Surfaces: PRO CON44� INCORPORATED Design gild constn+ct on manage,rrent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work have texture imported by form facing material used. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas and chip off fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height. 3.8 Monolithic Slab Finishes: A. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats, finished to a tolerance of FF24/FL 16. B. Provide 1/2" pitch in 4'-0" diameter of all floor drains. C. Provide broom finish surface in laundry room for installation of waterproofing membrane flooring. 3.9 Concrete slab Curing and Protection: A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. See part 1.3 of this specification section for additional information. Specific criteria for the project shall be established at the Pre -Placement meeting held at the project site. B. Provide moisture curing or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces at interior slab on grade, by one of the following methods for a period of 7 days. 1. Cover concrete surface with non -staining absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. 2. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width. 3.10 Removal of Forms: A. Form work may not be removed in less than 36 hours or until concrete has attained sufficient strength to carry loads. 3.11 Concrete Surface Repairs: A. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case, to a depth of less than I". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is unacceptable. 3.12 Composite Waterproofing: A. Install Composite Waterproofing at Elevator Pit per manufacturer's installation instructions, providing accessories necessary for complete installation. END OF SECTION Section 1112 033000 Concrete.doc Page 6 of 6 101 PRO CON440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Contraction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 03 5413 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Gypsum concrete floor underlayment over plywood or OSB subfloor. B. Quality control submittals: 1. Test reports as indicated in FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Article # 3.7 2. Certificates: Applicator's manufacturer's certificate or license C. Project Environmental Conditions: 1. Installation on surfaces not stabilized at temperature above 50 E is prohibited. 2. Placement of gypsum topping when surrounding air is 50 F. or less is prohibited. 3. Furnish adequate ventilation indicated in manufacturer's literature for curing. 4. Maintain manufacturer recommended temperatures during curing. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Specifications, Division 01 and Contract 1. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Refer to Section 0133 00, For each type of product indicated. 1.3 PREPLACEMENT MEETINGS: Pre -placement meeting(s) shall be held at the project site, prior to installation of concrete. The attendees shall include: General Contractor Project Manager and Superintendent Placement Subcontractor Owner and Foreman Gypsum Concrete Supplier Owner Structural Engineer and/or Architect PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS: A. "Gyp -Crete 2000" by Maxxon Corp. B. "Quikrete" by Quickrete Companies C. Alternate. "DryTek 7600" Fiber Reinforced cement based self -leveling underlayment. [This is a non -gypsum product for use over wood] 2.2 CRITERIA: A. Minimum dry density: 100-115 pounds per cubic foot B. Minimum compressive strength: 2000 pounds per square inch per ASTM C472 (1.4 mix design) Section 1112_035413_Gypsumcementunderlay.doc Page 1 of 3 PRO CON40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Coxstmctionhlanagemext Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Point loading: 1" diameter disc, 1000 pounds minimum D. Additional materials: sand and water to make mix of recommended density E. Topping compound: latex type recommended by manufacturer. F. Sealer and primer: as recommended by manufacturer ensure compatibility with floor finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner/Architect all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and the contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Fill cracks and voids with a quick setting compound. B. Do not start work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PLACEMENT: A. Do not place gypsum concrete until gypsum wallboard is installed. ti B. Spray one (1) coat of deck sealer over entire surface of OSB deck at rate recommended by manufacturer. C. Place gypsum concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Install to thickness indicated, minimum 3/4" thick, spreading and screeding to a smooth surface. E. Provide edge forms as required. Provide screed forms at doors and water closets. F. Provide plasterer's lath reinforcing at all toilets, bathrooms, or other rooms to receive ceramic tile. 3.4 FINISHING - Finish as recommended by manufacturer for scheduled finish materials. 3.5 CURING: A. Cure as recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not allow traffic on concrete during curing period; minimum 24 hours or longer if special conditions exist. 1. Do not load floors until reasonable strength has been achieved. 2. Any loading on topping shall be distributed and not concentrated. C. Maintain adequate ventilation and temperature above 50 degrees F until dry. D. Apply topping compound (sealer) at areas to receive resilient flooring and as required by finish flooring installation subcontractor. Coordinate time of installation with finish flooring installation subcontractor. 3.6 TOLERANCES - Unsatisfactory work shall be repaired prior to installation of finish flooring. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL: Section 1112_035413_Gypsumcementunderlay.doc Page 2 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON440 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manogeprent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Tests: Perform tests in accord with ASTM C472-90 testing procedures for 2" by 2" cube molds. Notify gypsum material manufacturer quality control department prior to sampling to ensure ASTM procedures are followed. Test daily during Work; random sample minimum one sample set per 5000 SF area daily or one set per day at less than 5000 SF area. B. A manufacturer's representative of the product being used shall be on site at all times during placement. This representative shall be prepared to take samples as deemed necessary by visual inspection at the discharge end of the hose to assure that field mixture is in conformance with the manufacturer's recommended practice. 3.8 PROTECTION Protect areas from traffic until system has obtained sufficient set in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. Repair areas damaged from early traffic on unprotected areas at no additional cost; repair damaged areas prior to installation of finish materials. Use materials recommended by manufacturer for repairs. END OF SECTION Section 1112_035413_Gypsumcementunderlay.doc Page 3 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART I - GENERAL PRO CON ,i , INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Section 04 20 00 MASONRY Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section as if rewritten or bound herein. B. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various shafts, lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, outlets, and equipment anticipated in the project. It is not intended to show every required space necessary for the full concealment of the Mechanical and Electrical systems which will be determined in the early design/build stages. Exact locations of these items shall be provided by the subcontract trades C. The Contractor shall coordinate and lay out the work maintaining all lines, grades & dimensions according to these drawings with due consideration for other trades and verify all dimensions at the site prior to any fabrication or installation. D. Project "Geotechnical Report", See Appendix A for a copy of the report. E. Concrete Section 03 30 00. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on Drawings. Face brick - See Exterior Elevations. 1. Moisture Barrier, Reinforcing, Mortar -Net, Accessories, etc. for complete installation. 2. Unit Masonry where indicated or where required. 3. Coordination with other trades abutting or penetrating masonry and/or dimension stone. 4. A Pre — skin meeting to coordinate the entire skin construction with all related trades including, but not limited to, framing, prefabricated panels, masonry, sealants, windows, MEP/FP (penetrations), etc. Refer to Section 01 31 00. 5. Air Infiltration barrier. Refer to Section 07 27 00. 6. Required Accessories, Masonry Anchors, etc. C. MOCKUP IS REQUIRED: Mock-up panel to include work of all skin trades. Pro Con, Inc. Architecture will issue a drawing of same. 1. Masonry mockup will be part of an overall exterior skin mockup. Masonry portion shall be 8' wide x 8' high minimum. Construct mockup to illustrate foundation, backup wall, exterior sheathing, air barrier, connectors, weep and cavity vents, through wall flashing, typical window installation, connections and flashing to adjacent materials and windows, control joints, sealant joints, sheetmetal, etc. See exterior elevation for mock-up drawings. 2. Mockup shall not be a part of the finished wall and mock-up shall remain in place throughout the project construction. 3. Mockup shall require acceptance by Architect. Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 1 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.3. RELATED WORK: PRO CONei� INCORPORATED Design and Constn+ction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Sheathing installation including wrapping of all openings. Mason shall not commence work until all wrapping of openings has been completed. Any deficiencies shall be called to the attention of the Contractor for remediation. B. Sealants see Section 07 92 00. C. Metal flashing and trim see Section 07 62 00. D. Air/Moisture Barriers see Section 07 27 00. 1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver building units to the site in approved protective film. Prevent damage to units Lift skids with proper and sufficiently long slings or forks with protection to prevent damage to units. Protect edges and corners. Conform to OSHA requirements. B. Store building units in a manner designed to prevent damage and staining of units. Stack units on timbers or platforms at least 3" above grade. Place polyethylene or other plastic film between wood and other finished surfaces of units when stored for extended periods of time. Cover stored units with protective enclosure if exposed to weather. C. Store or pile sand on a plank platform and protect from dirt and rubbish. Store mortar materials and sand in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or contamination by foreign materials Deliver mortar materials in original unbroken and undamaged packages with the maker's name and brand distinctly marked thereon, and upon delivery store in a shed until used on the work. D. Do not use salt or calcium -chloride to remove ice from masonry surfaces or on adjacent surfaces near stored materials.. 1.5. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 52 degrees F prior to and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 2.0. PRODUCTS 2.1 FACE BRICK A. Refer to Section 04 21 13 Thin Brick System for information on brick products. 2.2 OMITTED 2.3 OMITTED 2.4 UNIT MASONRY STANDARD A. Concrete Masonry Units: Comply with ASTM C 90; Standard Specification for Load- bearing Masonry Units, and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, "Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated. NOTE: Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 2 of 9 0 J PRO COMA- Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MAlksignand ConsinictionManagenrent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits built into masonry. B. Fire Resistance Ratings Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies with fire -resistance ratings determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. Where fire resistance rated concrete masonry units are required for assemblies, provide units meeting the requirements of ANSI/ACI 216.1/TMS-0216 "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies." C. Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. D. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. E. Weight Classification, Normal Weight. F. Provide bullnose units for outside corners where exposed, unless otherwise indicated. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, sills, and other special conditions. 2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE A. As indicated on drawings, provide precast concrete brick caps made from concrete with smooth uniform finish free from voids, cores, frogs, etc. and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Precast shall have uniform sandblasted finish. B. Manufacturer: Northern Design Precast, Inc. or equal approved by Architect. C. Mix Design: FW. D. Cement: White. E. Finish: Light Sandblast. F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 MASONRY CEMENT A. Provide materials that conform to ASTM C-91. Mortar Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Additives: Water repellent admixtures: "Hydrocide Powder" by Sonneborn Approved Manufacturers Southdown, Inc. LeHigh Portland Cement Co. B. Colored pigmented mortars 2.7 MEMBRANE FLASHING and ADHESIVE Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 3 of 9 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Mtinagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction A. Flashing: Sure -Seal Elastoform Flashing, 0.060" thick, with stainless steel drip edge, furnished by membrane manufacturer. Alternate: Grace Perm -A -Barrier with stainless steel edge. All flashing over openings to extend a min. of 4" beyond pre -cast concrete lintel and shall be end dammed. 2.8 CONTROL JOINT KEYS A. Control Joint Keys: Acceptable manufacturers. 1. "AA 2000-2001 Blocktite"-AA Wire Products Company, Chicago, IL. 2. "Rapid Poly -Joint"- Dur -O -Wal Inc., Morthbrook, IL. 2.9 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148 -inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148 -inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148 -inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 4J C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single -Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with �✓ single pair of side rods. D. Provide reinforcing in single wythe veneer walls as required by code, and as noted on the drawings. E. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors: 1. Provide 2 -piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal. studs, and that are capable of withstanding a 100-1bf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. Anchor screws shall be through the sheathing into the structural wood studs or light gauge framing engineered at develop strength required. Provide masonry screw inserts where attachment is into concrete or masonry. Available Products: Heckman Building Products, Inc.; "Pos-i-tie'. 2. Provide anchoring systems that comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 3. Masonry Anchors: Corrosion Resistant Zinc Alloy. Coordinate barrel lengths with wall types. a. Anchors to Concrete: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Tapcon Screw. b. Anchors to Masonry Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Tapcon® Screw. c. Anchors to Metal Stud Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Self -Drilling Screw. d. Anchors to Structural Steel: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Dril-It Screw. e. Anchors to Wood Stud Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Tapcon Screw. 4. Masonry Ties: Stainless Steel. a. Masonry Veneer Ties: Provide minimum 2 1/2 inches embedment in mortar with at least 5/8" mortar cover to the outside. Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 4 of 9 PRO CONI4� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MADesign and ConstractionjVfrntagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 5. Wire 3/16 inch diameter x length required for min. embedment. a. No. 75 Pos-I-Tie Triangle Wire Tie F. Precast Concrete Anchors: Stainless steel bent "U", "L" and/or "Z" anchors top & bottom @ 16" o.c. and/or as recommended by manufacturer. Heckman or approved equal. 2.10 OMITTED 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Where required by local environmental criteria, Job -Mixed Masonry Cleaner: 1/2 -cup tetra sodium polyphosphate and 1/2 -cup laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. B. Where allowed by local environmental criteria: Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned without damaging or discoloring masonry surfaces. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent"; ProSoCo, Inc. "202 New Masonry Detergent"; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2.12 CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL: A. Drainage material thickness as required. 2 -inch thick, free -draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. Must be full width of cavity. 1. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. B. Coordinate flashing to terminate minimum 6" above the top of the drainage material. 2.13 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Provide and install air infiltration barrier, overlapped minimum 6" over the sheet below and overlapped over all window flanges, thru wall flashing or other penetration to prevent the gravity infiltration of water in the cavity or onto the wall sheathing. 2.14 LINTELS A. Install hot dip galvanized steel lintels at all openings where indicated or where scheduled. Provide lintels at all opening in excess of 1 1/3 building unit. B. Minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide masonry lintels where shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. GENERAL: A. The execution of the work includes initial inspection, preparation, masonry erection, reinforcement installation, grout placement, field quality control testing and cleaning Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 5 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO COM# INCORPORATED De<igtr and Constniction Managemma ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction procedures. Dimensional tolerances for foundations on which masonry is built are to be measured prior to the start of masonry work. Standard requirements for good workmanship are required by the MSJC Specification. These include the requirement for completely filled mortar joints and grouted spaces. Proper support of masonry and bracing during construction is required but is not prescribed. Dimensional tolerances for the masonry are listed to ensure structural performance. B. Inspection of reinforcement and metal accessories is required to ensure that they have been properly placed and are free of materials that hinder bond. Tolerances for locating and placing reinforcing steel and adjustable wall ties to be per MSJC Code. C. As part of the preparation requirements, clay masonry units with an IRA greater than 30 g/min/30 in.2 (1.55 kg/min/m2) must be pre -wetted prior to placement. Cleanouts are required at the base of masonry to be grouted whenever pour heights exceed 5 ft. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. Mortar: ASTM C 780 Grout: ASTM C 1019. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Keep walls dry during erection by covering at end of each work period with non -staining waterproof membrane covering 2. Protect partially completed walls not being worked on with non -staining waterproof membrane until construction activities specified in other sections completes protection of walls. 3. Covering: Overhang at least 2'-0" on each side of wall; anchor on each side of wall. 4. Protect finished exposed work from stains. 5. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately. 6. Protect face materials against staining and etching. 7. Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar droppings during construction. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: 1. Installation of cracked, broken, or chipped units exceeding ASTM allowances is prohibited. 2. Use abrasive power saws to cut block. Avoid slivers less than 2" wide 3. Lay block plumb, true to line, and with level courses; space within allowable tolerances. 4. Furrowing bed joints is prohibited. 5. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is prohibited. 6. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 7. Units displaced after mortar has stiffened: Remove, clean joints and units of mortar; relay with fresh mortar. 8. Cut and patch finish masonry to accommodate work of other sections without marring Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 6 of 9 0 0 EO PRO CC -Ni"; # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design andcQ„sfmjionManagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction finished surface appearance. 9. Adjust shelf angles to keep work level and at proper elevation. 10. Mix units from pallets in work to diminish noticeable variation in color and texture between pallets. 11. Install pressure relieving joint material continuous by adhering material under shelf angles and required locations. 12. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry, remove loose block and mortar; clean and dampen exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. 13. Keep cavity clean of mortar; trowel protruding mortar fins in cavity flat to inner wythe face. B. Building in other work: 1. Build in work of other sections indicated to be built-in with block as work progresses; include anchors, wall plugs, expansion joints, and accessories. Space and align built-in parts; exercise care not to disturb other materials from position. C. Mortar beds: 1. Lay block with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in courses. 2. Install sufficient mortar on ends of block to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent blocks already in place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting into place. 5. Remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set. D. Mortar joints: 1. Nominal thickness: 3/8" +/ 2. Tool joints exposed in finished work when "thumb print" hard; use round jointer slightly larger than joint width. 3. Use plexiglass or stainless steel tool to compact joints where white or light colored mortar is used. 4. Tool joints: Concave; typical unless noted otherwise. 5. Trowel point or concave -tool joints below grade. 6. Flush cut joints not to be exposed in finished work or otherwise tooled. E. Bonding pattern: Lay block, brick or stone in common running bond, unless noted otherwise. F. Control joints: Provide through wall joints as recommended by the Masonry Institute 1. Keep clean of mortar and debris. 2. Install control joint material specified in Masonry Accessories Section continuous. 3. Make joints 3/4" wide unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space control joints as required but in no case more than 25'-0" O.C. See exterior elevations for location of control joints. 5. Coordinate location of control joints in block masonry. G. Expansion joints: 1. Keep clean of mortar and debris. 2. Make joints 1" wide unless otherwise indicated. Stop horizontal joint reinforcement 1" each side of joint. Section 1112 042000 Masonry.doc Page 7 of 9 PRO CON., , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Resign and Construction Management North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction H. Wall ties: Install in accord with requirements of Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section. J. Sealant joints: Retain !/2" deep by 1/4" wide sealant joint around outside perimeter of exterior doors, window frames, and other wall openings. K. Pointing: Cut out defective mortar joints and holes in exposed work. Repoint with new mortar. L. Dry cleaning: Brush block masonry surfaces with stiff bristle brush. Do not allow mortar droppings to harden on exposed surfaces. 3.5 Tolerances: A. Maximum variation from plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of walls and rises: 1) '/4" in 10'-0". 2) 3/8" in any story or 20'-0" maximum. 3) '/2" in 40'-0" or more. b. For external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: 1) '/4" in any story or 20'-0", maximum. 2) 3/8" in 40'-0" or more. B. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: a. '/a" in any bay or 20'-0". b. '/2" in 40'-0" or more. C. Maximum variation of linear building line from established position in plan and related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: a. ''/2" in any bay or 20'-0". b. 3/4" in 40'-0" or more. D. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls: Not less than 1/4" smaller nor more than V? larger than indicated. 3.6 CLEANING A. General: Remove stains in accord with recommendations of Block Institute of America, Technical Notes #20 REV, Reissued June 1987. Use cleaning agents only after pre -testing on sample panel. Test panel: a. Apply solution on half of surface of mock-up panel at least 21 days prior to application of cleaning solution to block. b. Should discoloration of block or mortar joints, staining, or efflorescence appear on sample panel, notify Architect in writing; await further instructions. Wet cleaning within seven days of placing masonry is prohibited. B. Preparatory work: 1. Protect materials adjacent block masonry subject to corrosion from contact with cleaning solution. 2. Saturate mortar joints with clean water; flush off loose debris at least two hours prior to cleaning solution application to block. C. Manufactured cleaning compound: 1. Apply on block masonry as tested on mock-up panel in accord with manufacturer's Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 8 of 9 PRO CON4,4� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction ivfa agamnent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction product data; flush with clean water. 2. Begin cleaning process at highest point of wall, working downward. Work in areas of 20 SF, maximum. Flush wall with clean water as cleaning progresses to prevent accumulation of scum. 3. Scrubbing mortar joints with cleaning solution is prohibited. D. Safely discard solutions containing debris and residue. END OF SECTION Section 1112_042000 Masonry.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design anti Construction hfanagennenf ARCHITECTURE SECTION 04 2113 THIN BRICK SYSTEM Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Provide all labor and materials necessary to install the mechanically attached brick and accessories which include a moisture barrier, fasteners, adhesive, brick, brick mortar and sealants. This Section includes: 1. Thin brick unit masonry 2. Brick trim units 3. Metal panel for thin brick installation 4. Mortar 5. Adhesives 6. Masonry flashing 7. Masonry waste disposal B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 03 Section `Cast -In -Place Concrete' 2. Division 05 Section `Cold -Formed Metal Framing' 3. Division 06 Section `Rough Carpentry' 4. Division 07 Section `Flashing and Sheet Metal' 5. Division 07 Section `Joint Sealants' (verify sealants are compatible with components of thin brick veneer system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. C General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's installation instructions and requirements. Samples for Initial Selection: Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 1 of 9 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desig►t and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. For each product requiring color and texture selection, provide full size samples. Include mortar color selector. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each product, size, color, and texture selected, provide six full-size units representing actual color and texture of products to be installed. 2. Colored mortar samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. E. Shop Drawings: For the following: F. 1. Show layout of panels on walls and the installation sequence of materials. 2. Dimensioned plans and elevations showing layout of panels on walls and large-scale details showing typical details of connections, joint conditions, expansion joints and other related components. 3. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing and locations of special shapes. G. Qualification Data: For installer issued by the metal panel system manufacturer. H. Cold Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials and equipment to be used to comply with cold weather requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section, factory trained and approved by the metal panel system manufacturer and employing personnel experienced and skilled in the application of the manufacturer's system. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Metal Panel: Obtain metal panel for support of thin brick veneer through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. E. Mockup: Prior to installing thin brick system, construct a sample wall panel to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements using materials indicated for final unit of Work: O Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 2 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC CON,# INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Construct a panel 8 feet long by 6 feet high, which includes brick, metal panel, mortar and accessories, structural backup, flashings, and control joint with joint sealant. Clean sample panel using specified cleaner after mortar has cured for at least 14 days. a) Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. b) Approval of sample panel is for color, texture and blending of masonry units; demonstration of aesthetic effects and qualities of brick; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; workmanship; and other material and construction qualities. c) Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup panel unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 2. Do not demolish mockups without written approval of the Architect. 3. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. F. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials and accessories shall be properly marked and labeled along with MSDS for each project. B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 1. Deliver products on pallets, with individual faces protected; keep dry. 2. Store units in protected area or under cover on level ground; keep dry. 3. Do not double -stack pallets. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. F. Deliver pre -blended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. G. Deliver adhesives to Project in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, expiration period of use, shelf/pot life, and curing Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 3 of 9 PRO CON A Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design andContnmrtionManagemenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit time. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants or other causes. 1.6 JOB SITE CONDITIONS A. Panels must be clean and free of any foreign matter before installing thin brick. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. C. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Install only when temperatures are above 40 deg F. Provide enclosures and heat when temperatures fall below 40 deg F. Maintain temperatures above 40 deg F within the enclosure for 72 hours after construction. Heat and maintain mortar and substrate above 40 deg F during application. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Warm -Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Attachment Panels: a. BRICK-FASTrm ("Qwik Brik") Steel Panels by Astech Associates, Inc. 804-323- 7088, or equal approved in writing by Architect and Owner. 0 Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 4 of 9 PRO CON.# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and COM IMCHOnManagM#Jent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Thin Brick Units: a. Kiln -fired TBX (select) exterior grade clay brick complying with ASTM C1088, with dove tail backs as manufactured by one of the following: 1) Endicott Clay Products Company 2) Metro Brick b. Size: 1/2" -1" x 2-1/4" x 7-5/8" C. Texture: Wirecut d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. e. Trim Units (including Rolok Sill): Match Brick for texture and color. f. All brick to be rated "not effloresced" in accordance with ASTM C67. g. Special Shapes: Provide for applications requiring brick of size, color and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing, including those at comers, movement joints, sashes, bull nose caps and lintels. h. Rolok Sill Brackets: Galvanized steel, not less than 20 gage, fabricated in 10 foot lengths, furnished by rolok sill manufacturer, providing a support ledge and locking leg into top kerf. i. Flashing Trims: Provide brick manufacturer's flashing trims. Aluminized steel, not less than 24 gage, fabricated in 10 foot lengths, factory applied finish, color to be selected by Architect. 1. Products: Provide the following manufactured by Endicott Tile Ltd or equal approved by Architect and Owner: a) Starter Angle b) Top/Side Angle j. Polyurethane Adhesive: ASTM C 557 and ASTM D 3498; single component, moisture -curing adhesive compatible with bonding brick to metal panel, unaffected by freeze -thaw cycles while continuing to remain flexible, as recommended by manufacturer for veneer system. 1. Products: a. PL Polyurethane Premium Construction Adhesive; OSI Sealants, Inc. b. Powerseal-2 Urethane Adhesive, SB -299; Surebond, Inc. B. Substitutions: AS APPROVED BY OWNER AND ARCHITECT IN WRITING. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Moisture Barrier: Refer to Division 7 B. Starter angle and flashing: Section 1112_042113 Tbin Brick System.doc Page 5 of 9 PRO CONAA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DesignondConstnictionMarragement Dec. 20, 2011 0 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Provide galvanized steel or aluminum continuous starter angle for starter course. All doors, window heads, terminations and dissimilar substrate or materials shall be properly flashed. C. Support Panel: 1. Mechanical support and spacer panel to be 28 gage architectural grade steel, hot dipped galvanized to G-60. Punched tabs provide a mechanical lock of thin brick with a dove tail back. Another row of punched tabs fall within the mortar joint that lock mortar to the panel. 2. Corner pieces provide a support ledge for comer pieces and spacing of joints that easily line up with standard 2' x 4' and 4' x 4' panels. 3. Panels must be clean and free of dirt, oil or any other surface contaminates. D. Adhesive: a. Refer to 2.1/2-J above E. Mortar: 1. Field mix mortar must be latex modified. Add 1 quart per 80 lb. Bag of type S mortar. Contact manufacture for additional recommendations. 2. Fill all voids in joints with newly struck mortar in order to provide uniform color. a. Acceptable Product: A. W. Cook Thin Brick Mortar specifically designed for thin brick applications. Meets ASTM C-109, ASTM C-882 and ASTM C-78. Also recommend Brick Set by United Products in Freemont, NE. Other mortar mixes may be used when modified with an acrylic latex and approved by the Architect. Field mixed mortar is not allowed. b. Water: Potable. C. Masonry Cleaning Compound: Sure Klean Vana Trol. F. Fasteners: 1. All fasteners must be rust resistant, galvanized or zinc coated. 2. Self tapping, cadmium plated screws or Versapin fastening system by Aerosmith or similar may be used to fasten panels to the substrate and into light gauge steel framing. 3. Twist shank masonry nails cadmium plated, or fastening system such as TrakFast by Ramset are recommended for fastening panels over concrete or masonry. 4. Galvanized annular ring nails or wood screws are recommended over wood frame construction. 5. Fastening pattern must be 1 per square foot minimum. G. Sealants: 1. Acceptable Products: Urethane or Silicone. Use proper backer rod and sealant at all abutments to dissimilar materials and through wall expansion joints. Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 6 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and Constmaian Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Examine conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of thin brick veneer system. 1. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Examine wall framing, sheathing and building wrap to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of panel anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. a) The plane of the wall shall not vary greater than + or —1/8 -inch within any 4 foot square area. b) Confirm furring at cold -formed steel framing area has been installed at 1 -foot on center, providing support at horizontal panel joints. 3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Consult with other trades prior to installing panels to avoid potential interference. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Panel layout: 1. Line-up on wall, establishing bottom of lowest panel course and mark level horizontal line at this point. 2. Lay out brick panels at corners working to the center of the wall. 3. Install panel rows straight, level and plumb. Metal panel joints shall be staggered over sheathing joints. Vertical joints between the metal panels shall be staggered from row to row. Recheck panels periodically foe levelness during installation, maintaining uniform bed joint width. At dissimilar materials and abutments, stop panel and brick veneer 3/8 - inch to'/2-inch from edge to allow for sealant joints. 4. Install panels flat and tight against the substrate, free of bulges and voids behind panel. 5. Leave a 1/8 -inch to '/4 -inch gap between the ends of panels to allow for expansion (verify dimension with manufacturer's instructions). 6. Control joints in the metal panel system shall coincide with the building control joints, where substrates change, or where significant structural, substrate or frame movement occurs. Provide vertical control joints where indicated, but not greater than 20 lineal feet on center. The joint widths should be 1/2" with backer rod and urethane or silicone sealant approved by the Architect. Where control joints are not shown, review proposed locations with Architect prior to proceeding. Consult local building codes and BIA t for additional information. 7. Expansion joints must be placed at floor lines for wood frame and steel frame construction. Consult local building codes and BIA for placement for required expansion joints. Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 7 of 9 PRO CON4; 0 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Cotuhuciion Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 8. Panels shall be clean, free of dirt, oil or any other surface contaminants. B. Brick Installation: 1. Install thin brick in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half-size units at corners, jambs and where possible at other locations. Use pre -manufactured corner units at corners, jambs, heads and changes in wall plane. 3. Cut units where required for fitting or for installation of built-in items, using power tools; do not install units having chipped or cracked edges on sight -exposed surfaces. 4. Align base courses to follow accurate floor lines. 5. Align faces plumb, level, true and with uniform joint widths. 6. Size and portion units for best appearance, with joints arranged neat and symmetrical, free of imperfections detracting from overall appearance. Mix units from several pallets as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. 7. Lay walls with 3/8 -inch average head joint spacing, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. Head joints shall be no less than 1/4 -inch and no more than 5/8 -inches wide. Provide a 1/4 -inch to 3/8 -inch joint around all wall penetrations and abutments to dissimilar materials. 8. Bond pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; ; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or �- jambs. a) One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Install soldier courses at locations indicated. b) Use vertical guideline markings to maintain vertical alignment. 9. Thin Brick Adhesion: Apply nickel size dabs on panel tabs that lock into dovetail back thin bricks and to the middle of the lower portion of the thin brick. Do not apply continuous bead of adhesive to panel. Slide dovetail brick over the appropriate tabs and adjust accordingly. Install bricks smooth edge on top and cut edge on bottom. Nestle the brick into adhesive, breaking any skin that may have developed on the adhesive. Replace adhesive that has begun to set. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for additional information. If conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and this specification occur, consult Architect for direction prior to proceeding. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Allow minimum of 12 hours for adhesive to set before installing mortar. B. When all applied veneers are secured in place, fill joints with mortar using a grout bag or mortar gun, complying with system manufacturer. Insure that the mortar joint is fully filled so Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 8 of 9 PRO CON + Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Vcsigu nod Conshuetion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit the mortar will grab the brick locks. Mortar only an area that can be tooled before mortar becomes too stiff. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, compressing the mortar. D. After the mortar has been tooled, brush the joint horizontally with a stiff bristled masonry brush to remove excess mortar from joints and face of brick. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect will observe appearance of installed units; installed masonry surfaces shall be free of imperfections which detract from overall appearance when viewed from a distance of 20 feet at 90 degrees normal to surface. 3.5 REPAIRING AND CLEANING 1. Remove and replace any masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units per the Architect's observations. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh adhesive and mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 2. Clean installed masonry surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; do not clean units with products not specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3. All sealants shall be in place and cured before cleaning operations occur. 4. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure thin brick is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 1. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Installer's property and shall be removed from the Project site for his use. 2. Disposal: Dispose into dumpsters, wrappers, containers and papers. Remove pallets, masonry waste, including broken masonry units from the site. END OF SECTION Section 1112_042113 Thin Brick System.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON'to INCORPORATED Design and Conshnctfon Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Steel including connections. B. Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," and AWS D 1.1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel." C. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS: 1. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. A firm with minimum five years experience in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. 2. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an AISC-Certified Plant for Category: Category I, conventional steel structures and Category: Category II, complex steel building structures. B. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: 1. An experienced Installer with a minimum of five years experience, who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ACCESSORIES A. Structural -Steel Shapes, Wide Flange: ASTM A-922. B. Channels, Angles & Plates: ASTM A_36. C. Cold -Formed Structural -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Anchor Rods: ASTM 1557 E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, high-strength heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers, uncoated. F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed G. Seismic design per Massachusetts State Building Code, 6t' Edition and AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings." H. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Where specified, apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel in conformance with ASTM A 123 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible according to AISC specifications and tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with Section 1112_051200 Structural Steel.doc Page 1 of 2 PRC) CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design And Constriction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. B. Welding: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel according to AISC specifications and within erection tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Set base and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. C. Bolted Connections: Install and tighten non high-strength bolts, unless high-strength bolts are indicated. Snug tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts." D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1. E. GROUT: Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30 -minute working time. END OF SECTION Section 1112051200 Structural Steel.doc Page 2 of 2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CON 4,# INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K -series steel joists. 2. KCS -type K -series steel joists. 3. Composite steel joists. 4. Joist accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS [1 SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." SJI "Standard Specifications for composite steel joists. C. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SDI's "Specifications." D. Substitutions under provisions of Division 01. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. Section 1112_052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 1 of 7 PRO CONoij� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design 4adConstrncfionMan agcnunt Dec. 20, 2011 f1 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �`JJ B. Design joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following: I . Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 2. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. I . Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 2. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. C. Welding certificates, if requested. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with requirements. E. Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer if requested. G. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For joists. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications." 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are applicable to types of joists., indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Section 1 ] 12 052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 2 of 7 Brightview North Andover PRO CON4 �,i, Design Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SDI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast -in-place concrete construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SDI's "Specifications" for web and steel -angle chord members. I. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. D. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. B. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Division 09 painting Sections. Section 1112_052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 3 of 7 PRO COl\T,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConsiractionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.3 K -SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K -series steel joists and KCS -type K -series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. E. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." F. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." G. Do not camber joists. ms's H. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications �J I. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48). 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. C. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. D. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. E. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 61 Section 1112_052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 4 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON ,; Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design end Construction Managennent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon -steel bolts. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. D. High-strength, field -bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. F. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. Section 1112_052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 6 of 7 0 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design And Constnictlon Manageownt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 1112_052100 Steel Joist Framing.DOC Page 7 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS PRO CON ,;�, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manageluent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECK Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are to be developed by the manufacturer. Copies of structural design drawings will not be accepted. B. Comply with SDI Publication No. 28, "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck and Composite Steel Floor Deck C. Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, structural quality, and as follows: 1. Zinc -Coating Weight: G60 (Z 180) 2. Grade: As required by design. 2.2 DECKING A. Galvanized Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet composite floor deck panels as follows: 1. Profile Depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS A. Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended roof deck accessory materials and floor deck pour stops and closures. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DECK INSTALLATION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to SDI Publication No. 28. Fasten deck to supports with screws or puddle welds at minimum of a 36/4 pattern with two (2) #10 side lap screws per span, unless otherwise noted on the drawing. B. Place, adjust, align, and bear deck panels on structure. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and weld to structure without warp or deflection. D. Cut, reinforce, and fit deck panels and accessories around openings and projections. E. Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans, sump plates, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels. Weld to substrate. F. Floor Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld pour stops and girder fillers to structure. Section 1] 12053100 Steel Deck. doc Page 1 of 2 PRO CON4,0 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmetion Manngeinent O Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued For Building Permit ARCHITECTURE G. Floor Deck Closures: Weld tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels. H. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on .both surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 0 Section 1112_053100 Steel Deck.doc Page 2 of 2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON440 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior wall framing. 2. Refer to Section 09 21 16 for Non -Load -Bearing Steel Framing. B. Related Documents: Drawings, Specifications, Division 01 and Contract 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without deflections greater than the following: 1. Exterior Wall Framing: a. Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height at masonry veneer. b. Horizontal deflection of 1/240 for exterior composite panels on furring. C. Wind loading per Structural Criteria on sheet SO. 1. (110 MPH) 2. Refer to structural drawings for additional structural requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by licensed professional structural engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Mill certificates. D. Welder certificates. E. Research/evaluation reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data. B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer. Section 1112_05 40 00—cold-formed metal framing.doc Page 1 of 4 PRO CON441 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel." D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire - resistance -rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing, A Worthington Industries Company. 2. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 3. Or Architect approved equal 2.2 MATERIALS 0 A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 zinc coating, Grade 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; Grade 50 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater. B. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: as noted on drawings. 2. Flange Width: as noted on drawings. 3. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, un -punched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated -steel thickness matching steel studs or as noted on drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. Section 1112_05 40 00—cold-formed metal framing.doc Page 2 of 4 Ne PRO CON4i� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Dosign and Constntction Manaycnrenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project 4301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel headless, hooked bolts and carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill screws. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. H. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 3. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 4. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. 5. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 6. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. B. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Section 1112_05 40 00—cold-formed metal framing.doc Page 3 of 4 PRO CON I# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstrrnaionManagentent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit O C. Non -Load -Bearing, Curtain -Wall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Isolate non -load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 2. Install horizontal bridging in curtain -wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 54 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 3. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain -wall -framing system. D. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. 1. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection. 2. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Section 111205 40 00—cold-formed metal framing.doc 0 Page 4 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managenimt ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 50 00 MISCELLANEOUS METAL Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Loose Bearing Lintels (Galvanized) and Leveling Plates. B. Pipe Bollards — galvanized. C. Support Angles for Elevator Door Sills (galvanized). D. Ladders - (galvanized). Elevator Pit Ladder (Three provided). Ships Ladders to roof (Two provided). E. Elevator Sump Pit Cover (galvanized). G. Misc. Steel Framing and Supports for Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. H. Support tubes for rooftop Equipment Screens (galvanized, refer to detail drawings). 1.2 SIMILAR MATERIAL SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Handrails and Railings. Section 05520 1.3 Related Documents: A. Drawings, Specifications, Division 01 and Contract 1.4. Submittals: A. Product Data and Shop Drawings as required per Section 01 33 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Material A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher -leveled sheet. B. Wide Flange Steel Sections: ASTM A992. C. Steel Channels, Angles & Plates: ASTM A36 D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B E. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53, Type B F. Bolts: ASTM A325 G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. H. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 1. Galvanizing: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. Section 1112_055000 Miscellaneous metal fabrications.doc Page 1 of 3 PRO CON ,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstmettnnManagM10t Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit J. Touch-up Primer for galvanized surfaces: SSPC 20, Type 1. 2.2 Pipe Bollards A. ASTM A53 galvanized steel pipe with concrete fill, as detailed. Provide smooth radius for concrete top to prevent accumulation of rainwater. Provide field painted finish. 2.3 Ladders: galvanized steel ladder at elevator pits and roof hatches. Fabricate of 1" x 5/16" flat steel side rails w/ 3/4"" diameter steel rungs with non -slip surface. Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication. 2.4 Ships Ladders A. Heavy duty bar grating stair treads, 6" deep by 24" wide. B. Factory welded handrails, 1 '/2" diameter. C. 10" structural steel channel stringers. D. Standard gray finish. 2.5 Elevator Sill A. Elevator sill and miscellaneous steel angles to be furnished and installed under this specification section. B. Tread Finish: At locations shown not to be covered with finish materials provide a non -slip aggregate finish with factory -packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused aluminum -oxide grits or crushed emery, rust -proof and non -glazing. C. Where treads are to be covered with carpet, tread and landing may be formed of steel checkered plate without concrete fill. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Well form metal work to shape and size with sharp lines, angles and arises. Leave clean, true lines and surfaces when shearing and punching. Thickness of metal, details of metal, details of assembly and support shall give ample strength and stiffness for the intended purpose. B. Conceal fastenings in all possible conditions. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water. Use welds where possible for permanent connections. Grind and dress smooth welds exposed to view. C. Provide lugs, clips, anchors and miscellaneous fastenings necessary for complete assembly and installation. Miter corners and angles of exposed moldings and frames. D. Grout frames, plates, sills, bolts and similar items with non -shrink grout. Set railings and similar items shown or required to be set in sleeves with molten lead or quick setting anchor cement. Size sleeves for approximately 1/4" clearance. E. Make trim in longest lengths possible, locate joints symmetrically. Fit adjacent pieces with hairline joints and aligned surfaces. Space exposed screws evenly and symmetrically. F. Bolted and Screwed Connections: 1. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades. 2. Install washers under heads and nuts bearing on wood. Draw nuts tight and nick threads of permanent connections. Use beveled washers where bearing is on sloped surfaces. 3. Screws, rivets and similar items used for permanent connections in ferrous metal, to be countersunk, with recess filled with non -shrink putty and finished smooth and flush. Section 1112_055000 Miscellaneous metal fabrieations.doe Page 2 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO COM# INCORPORATED Design and Coustnedion Manageneent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit G. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which applied. H. Finish Painting and Protection: 1. Field Painting: Shop coats abraded or burned out by welding shall be touched up before field painting. Touch up paint shall be the same paint for shop coat. Finish coats specified in Section 09 90 00. END OF SECTION Section 1112_055000 Miscellaneous metal fabrications.doc Page 3 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manag mjent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 05 52 00 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Summary: Provide painted steel railings at all exterior and interior stairways, ramps, exterior retaining walls, and other misc. guardrails. 1. Guardrails — 42" above finish floor — typical. 2. Handrails — 36" above finish floor or nose of tread — typical. B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railings to withstand structural loads required by ASCE 7 and as noted in Section 05511 Metal Stairs. C. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, structural analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state where Project is located, and manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory -applied finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M or A992. B. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500. C. Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A 48, Class 30. D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same material and finish as supported rails. C. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. Level 2 weld finish. D. Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed unless otherwise indicated or unavoidable and standard with systems indicated. When concealed is unavoidable flush fasteners should be used. Fasteners exposed to view shall be appropriate and consistent. E. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined per ASTM E 488. Section 1112_055200 Handrails and Railings.doc Page 1 of 2 PRO CON,to Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and ConstructionManagenieni North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.3 FABRICATION A. Assemble railing systems in shop to the greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending and by mitering at elbow bends. C. Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members by welding. D. Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails. 2.4 FINISHES A. Steel Railings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication for exterior applications, ASTM A 123, Cleaned and shop primed at interior applications. B. Prepare all rails for finish coating per section. 09 90 00 - Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation and free from rack. C. Coat concealed surfaces of dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core -drilling holes 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than OD of post. Fill annular space between post and concrete with non -shrink, nonmetallic grout. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. F. Finish grinding all exposed welds to a smooth uniform finish, level 2 finish, as outlined in the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers publication "Pipe Railing Systems Manual" — ANSI/NAAMM AMP 521-95. END OF SECTION Section 1112_055200 Handrails and Rai lings.doc Page 2 of 2 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON44j INCORPORATED Design and Constnictfnn Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0610 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit I.I. SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Underlayment B. Sheathing C. Engineered Wood Products D. Rooftop equipment bases, enclosures, and support curbs. E. Wood furring, grounds, nailers and blocking F. Wood preservative treated materials and Fire -retardant treated materials. G. Pressure treated/fire-retardant materials required at balconies in Type 2A construction. 1.2 Related Documents A. Drawings, Specifications, Division 1 and Contract. B. Section 06 20 00 1.3 Quality Assurance: A. Lumber: Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. Split, wrapped, twisted, or weathered lumber will not be acceptable B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. Identify with grade stamp of an agency certified by NFPA. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade -compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. C. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content: D. NO REMANUFACTURED OR REGRADED LUMBER WILL BE ALLOWED E. NO STUD GRADE 2x MATERIAL FOR FLOOR/ROOF TRUSSES WILL BE ALLOWED. 1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling: A. Store lumber and plywood a minimum of 8" above the ground in a manner to allow for proper drainage, ventilation and protection from the weather. Lumber must be covered properly for protection against the weather while stored on site. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings B. Materials stored improperly will be removed from the site and replaced with new material. 1.5 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS: A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. Section 1112_061000 Rough Carpentry & Sheathing.doc Page 1 of 4 PRO CON 6 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstmChommanngentrnt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �J 1. Where pressure treated wood or PT is indicated at gill plates or other locations coming in contact with concrete or masonry, Pressure treated wood shall be: A. Use Borate treated products at sill plates and other locations that are ultimately concealed from direct moisture contact. B. At Exterior locations that are subject to weathering, use the following: a. ACQ (Alkaline Copper Quaternary) - `Preserve', Nature Wood' or `Osmose' or b. CA(Copper Azole) - Wolmanized'. 2. No wood containing chromium or arsenic (CCA) may be used. NOTE: Use stainless steel brackets, nails, screws, etc in contact with PT wood. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 3. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete c. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials: A. Softwood Sheathing: PS -1, sheathing grade, exterior quality. 3. Rated Wall Sheathing: 15/32" APA rated sheathing, 32/16 Exposure 1. 4. Provide thicker panels where required by the fire resistance testing criteria for rated assemblies. Refer to drawings for additional details. 2.2 Accessories: A. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot dipped Galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations. Provide stainless steel per above at treated wood. Provide plain finish for other interior locations, size and type to suit application, typical nailing shall be with common wire nails. Staples shall be of equivalent strength as the required nails. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; hot dipped galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and stainless steel for treated wood, plain finish for other interior locations. C. Fasteners: Expansion shield lag bolt, type for anchorage to concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. Kwik Bolt -II (KB -II) with Steel threaded rod. D. Adhesive: Gun grade acrylic compound, such as Liquid Nails by Macco Adhesive. E. Bottom plate anchors to foundation: A307 carbon steel, 1/2" diameter shank, 9 -inch long anchor bolts with 90 -degree bend. Fasten to plates with hexagonal head nuts and cut washers. Provide continuous foam sill pad between plate and foundation or provide Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer by ProtectoWrap. Section 1112_061000 Rough Carpentry & Sheathing.doc Page 2 of 4 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Det ign and Consfmction Manngenrent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Power driven fasteners: Power driven steel pin 0.145" diameter shank, 3" long with metal washer with area of 1.10 square inches, such as Hilti DN72S36 as manufactured by Hilti. 2.3 Wood Treatment Materials: A. Wood preservative: Borate B. FRX — FRT Wood: balcony joists at the non-combustible portion of the building. Not all inclusive. 1. Treatment shall be FRX chemicals manufactured by Chemco Acquisition, Ferndale, WA. Or equal as approved by project Architect. A. The fire retardant formulation must be free of halogens, sulfates, chlorides and ammonium phosphate. 2. All lumber and plywood designated to be exterior fire retardant treated shall be pressure impregnated with FRX chemicals and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, "Standard Test Method for Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials." Also, when test conditions are extended to 30 minutes, the flame spread should not progress more than 10 1/2 feet beyond the centerline of the burners, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion. A. Each piece of fire retardant treated lumber and plywood shall be manufactured under independent third party follow-up inspection service, and each piece shall bear the appropriate qualified inspection agency's label indicating surface burning characteristics in the 30 minute ASTM E-84 flame spread test. Each piece will be labeled indicating kiln dried after treatment (KDAT) and identifying the treating company and location. 3. Recommended Hardware: Stainless steel or Hot dipped galvanized steel hardware is recommended. This hardware provides an extra margin of safety in wet environments. 4. FRX wood shall not be used in direct contact with the ground. 2.4 Shop Treatment of Wood Materials: A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives to AWPB LP -2. B. Re -dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19 percent moisture content. 2.5. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; '/2 inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. Alternate: Provide ProtectoWrap Protecto Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer. B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers C. Air/Moisture Barrier: Refer to section 07 27 00 Section 1112_061000 Rough Carpentry & Sheathing.doc Page 3 of 4 PRO CON'ej , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Gonst raonManagement Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Sheathing and Flooring: A. Place sloped roof sheathing with required joint spaces between sheets and with joints staggered. Sheathing grain shall be perpendicular to framing. Secure sheets over firm bearing. Provide sheathing clips (referred to as H clips or PSC clips) at unsupported panel roof edges, spaced one between each support. Provide edge blocking at all roof openings. Nail to framing member at plywood edges at 6" on center and at intermediate supports at 6" on center. Nail with at least 8d common nails. Additional nails at edges of roof shall be in accordance with section 01025 Code Review, for all applicable code requirements. B. Place tongue and groove flat roof sheathing with required joint spaces between sheets and with end joints staggered. Panel grain shall be perpendicular to framing. Secure sheets over firm bearing. Provide edge blocking of all floor openings. Glue and nail to framing members at panel edges at 6" on center and of intermediate supports of 10" on center. Nail with at least 8d ring or screw shank nails. 3.3 Tolerances: A. Framing members shall be installed 1/4" from true position, maximum. Square ends cuts shall be within 1/16' per foot of depth and width. End surfaces shall be cut as to provide contract over substantially the entire surface. Lengths of framing members shall be 1/16'+ up to 20 feet in length and 1/16' per 20 feet of specified length for members over 20 feet in length. B. Maintain sheathing surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet or more. 3.5. Nailing minimums to meet section 01 41 00 Code Review, for all applicable code requirements. 10 END OF SECTION 0 Section 1 ] ] 2_061000 Rough Carpentry & Sheathing.doc Page 4 of 4 PRO CON,, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constnuction hlanagenieut Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 0617 53 PREFABRICATED WOOD FLOOR AND ROOF TRUSSES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Metal Plate -Connected Floor Trusses B. Metal Plate -Connected Roof Trusses C. Metal Plate -Connected girder, gable end, and other trusses required for complete project. D. All Trusses including connections for an entire system are to be by Design -Build Subcontractor and Subcontractor's Engineer licensed in the state that the project is located; refer to Section 010000 for Subcontractor and Engineer requirements. E. Provide engineered design and furnish all connection accessories for all truss to truss, Truss to Engineered Wood Products, truss to non -wood framing, etc. connection accessories F. NO REMANUFACTURED OR REGRADED LUMBER WILL BE ALLOWED G. All dimensional lumber protected from the weather. shall be SPF #2 or Better. 1.2 Related Work: A. Prefabricated wall panels may be used at all locations shown to be wood stud walls and partitions. This shall include bearing walls, elevator shaft enclosures, non-bearing wood stud walls, shear walls, etc. Coordinate all truss connections and bearing loads with wall prefabricator. B. Submissions include Calculations, Drawings, Layout plans, Connection details, etc. 1.3 Related Documents A. Drawings, Specifications, Division Oland Contract. B. Section 01 56 50 Construction Waste Management Program. C. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry & Sheathing. D. Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry. 1.4 Description of Work: A. Prefabricated structural units consisting of metal plate connectors and dimension lumber assembled prior to delivery to the job site. All trusses are to be shipped self -supported, not requiring any field modification or additional structural reinforcement, i.e. "T" bracing or "scabbing". An inspection by a qualified individual, employed or subcontracted by the manufacturer, to verify that the truss has been assembled in accordance with the design is required for all trusses, prior to shipment of the trusses. Said inspection procedure must be documented in a letter prepared by this individual addressed to the Architect and/or Engineer. Coordinate with panel fabrication drawings Section 06 10 00. Where shown on plans or where required for truss configuration, provide ladder trusses or panels with higher plates than typical to provide bearing and wall closure, etc. If truss profiles are modified from the design configurations, provide additional members, framing, etc. to complete geometry. For example at low roofs to provide support for ceilings. At all gable end conditions provide bracing or strongback framing to resist wind load criteria. Section 1112_06 17 53_prefab floor & roof trusses Pagel of 5 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constnittion hlanagernent O Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.5 Quality Assurance: A. Provide wood trusses meeting the design and fabrication criteria of the "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction," by the American Forest and Paper Association (latest revision); "Timber Construction Standards" by American Institute of Timber Construction (latest revision), the same as if these specifications and all their references were set out in full herein. B. Fabrication: Established firm regularly involved in the engineering and fabrication of the type trusses required and subscribing to Truss Plate Institute (T.P.I.). 1.6 Minimum Design Criteria: A. Design plates, lumber and assembly in accordance with the approved values as accepted by local code authorities. B. Design live load as scheduled on the structural drawings. C. Maintain minimum spacing indicated on the drawings with design calculations based on indicated spacing. D. Adjustment factors for allowable stresses in accordance with the latest edition of NDS. E. Trusses to be designed without the installation of 'T' or'L' and "scab" bracing in field. F. Deflection (floor) is limited to the following: Live load L/480. Total load U240. G. Deflection (roof) is limited to the following: Live load L/360. Total load L/240. H. Increase Roof Snow loading to satisfy drifting criteria per governing building code. Provide said analysis on plan with truss package. 1.6 Submittals: A. Forward two copies of the design/shop drawings and structural calculations to the owner for permanent files. Note the following information on the Drawing and calculations: 1. Name, seal and registration number of a Structural Engineer licensed at the place where the project is located. 2. Design and fabrication data. 3. Metal connectors: Manufacturer, size, gauge and location. 4. Lumber grading for each member. 5. Pitch, span, required bearing area and spacing of trusses. 6. Design loading and allowable unit stress increases. 7. Tension or compression force for each member. 8. Building size and address. 9. Handling and erection instructions. 1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling shall be per Truss Plate Institute Bulletin BCSI B 1, B2 and B3. (Commentary and recommendations for handling, installing and bracing metal plate connected wood trusses). 1.8 Pre -Framing meeting will be held, at project site, prior to erection of any framing, panels, joists, trusses, etc. Section 1112_06 17 53_prefab floor & roof trusses Page 2 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRO CON4i� INCORPORATED Design and Constmetion Afanagement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2.1' Lumber: A. Use lumber bearing a grade -mark stamp indicating type grade, mill and grading agency. Provide all top and bottom chord members of each truss bearing a grade -mark in place upon delivery to the job site. B. Minimum nominal lumber size is 2 x 4 with top, bottom, web, and mansard chords sized larger as required by design. C. Hem -Fir lumber is not acceptable species of lumber for chords or web members. D. Do not use lumber that has a slope of grain exceeding the standard 1" slope to 8" run. E. NO REMANUFACTURED OR REGRADED LUMBER WILL BE ALLOWED 2.2 Connectors: A. Manufacture all truss connector plates from only prime commercial quality galvanized sheet of no less than 20 gauge (0.036") thickness with a minimum yield of 33,000 P.S.I. and a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 48,000 P.S.I. Provide corrosion resistant coating of 1.25 oz per square foot, commercial class, hot dipped galvanized or equivalent. Conform all connectors with design specifications for -light metal plate connected wood trusses by Truss Plate Institute. B. Provide at each plate bearing the stamped name of the manufacturer furnishing the engineered truss design. C. Where field connections of truss sub -assemblies are necessary, special nail on splice plates are acceptable, providing the plate sizes and positions are shown on the truss engineering design as approved by the truss plate manufacturer. D. Provide all truss -to -truss to beam/header connectors. E. Provide truss -to -plate anchors and hold-downs of all bearing conditions. F. Provide Engineering details and information for connections. 2.3 Fasteners and Anchorages: A. Provide code required anchoring devices as noted on drawings. 2.4 Fabrication: A. Accurately cut all truss members to length, angle and true to line to assure tight joints for finished truss. B. Simultaneously press connector plates into each side of the joints using a minimum vertical pressure of 50 tons while all truss members are tightly clamped to special jigs. C. No open joints which depend on stiffness of the metal connector plate to transmit stresses will be allowed. D. No wane or knots may enter the joint or connection under the nail plate. E. No more than one (1) live knot of a size specified and conforming to the proper grade mark will be accepted in total between the two members jointed at a single connection. F. Permanently stamp each truss with the name and address of the truss fabricator. G. Clearly mark or flag truss indicating points of pick-up, truss designation and bracing attachment locations. H. Band all trusses together for shipment to the job site. I. Nail multiple trusses of two units together from both sides with two rows of nails on each side of top, bottom and mansard chord spaced 12" on center staggered over length and one row at 12" on center each side of web members. Section 1112_06 17 53_prefab floor & roof trusses Page 3 of 5 PRO CONS; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Pen -nit J. Bolt multiple trusses of three units together with 1/2" M.B. at 24" on center for top, bottom and mansard chord and one each web. 2.01 FABRICATION A. Shop assembly: 1. Fabricate trusses in accord with reviewed shop drawings, design computations, and TPI Quality Control Manual QCM-77. 2. Truss composition: Types and sizes indicated on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Floor trusses: Wood chords, open wood webs. Roof.trusses: Wood chords and panel members. 3. Fabricate trusses in permanent facility devoted principally to truss fabrication. 4. Cut truss members to accurate length, angle, and size within specified tolerances. 5. Clamp truss members in mechanical or hydraulic jig with sufficient pressure to bring members into contact at joints during application of connector plates. If truss is removed from jig to apply plates to reverse side, take care to prevent opening of joint. 6. Include design camber when positioning members. 7. Stud gable end trusses and roof splits at 1'-4" O.C. 8. Stud floor truss kneewalls at 1'-0" O.C. 9. Permanently stamp each truss with stamp of fabricator; indicate truss identification number with reference to shop and setting drawings. B. Tolerances: 1. Location of connector plates: ±1/4" from location indicated on reviewed shop �J drawings. 2. Member length: f1/16" in 20'-0". 3. Square end cuts: 1/16" per ft. of depth and width. 4. Openings between tension members: 1/16" maximum. 5. Openings between compression members: 1/32" maximum. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Grade marks: General: Identify lumber by official grade mark of agency approved by ALSC Board of Review. Lumber grading: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping, or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. Conform to PS 20-70 (Reaffirmed 1981) with amendments, for grading of species used. Current edition of applicable association grading rules govern. Lumber 2" or less in thickness shall bear grade mark of an ALSC Board of Review approved agency. Section 1112_06 17 53_prefab floor & roof trusses Page 4 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION PRO CON'# INCORPORATED Design and Constniction,wanaganent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 3.1" Storing of Trusses A. Set trusses stored prior to erection in vertical position with support of final bearing joints and braced to eliminate unusual bracing or tipping over. B. Keep all banding placed on trusses of the fabricator's plant intact until installation. 3.2 Truss Installation: A. Comply with BCSI 2008 "Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". END OF SECTION Section 1112_06 17 53_prefab floor & roof trusses Page 5 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Section Includes: PRC} C ON# INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Alarrc g gent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Exterior standing and running trim and associated flashing Interior standing and running trim Interior column covers and brackets Stock interior standing and running trim for field finishing Interior MDF paneling and wainscot Window sills Shelving and clothes rods Ballet bar (at Fitness Room) Utility shelving Cementitious acoustical panels and backer insulation Reinforced fiberglass wall protection Courtyard trellis Stained wood handrail and stair treads at ornamental stair Related Sections: Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork Section 066300 - Porch Posts and Railings Section 074630 - Vinyl Siding & Trim Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim Section 092550 - Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings Section 123560 — Residential Casework 1.02 REFERENCES A. PS 1- Softwood Plywood B. PS 58 Basic Hardwood Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction C. NFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction. D. AWI Quality Standards E. FS TT -W-550 - Wood Preservative, Chromated Copper Arsenate Mixture F. FS TT -W-571 - Wood Preservation Treating Practices Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 1 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.03 SUBMITTALS PRO CON# 1NCORPORATED Design and Constructlo7.41anage,ment ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued for Building Permit A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 01330 with the following supporting data: 1. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings indicating component profiles and fastening and joining details. 2. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 3. Samples for verification of the following: a. Lumber products with factory -applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber for each finish system and color. b. Linear Moldings: 2 -foot -long section with finished joint. Show complete pattern. c. Nonlinear Shapes: Full-size unit. B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, thicknesses, finishes, joints, ornamentation, installation tolerances, and anchorage details. Indicate attachment methods, embedded supports, reinforcement, fabrication methods, joint treatments, clearances, and supports. 1. Show connection to suspension system and cutouts for sprinklers, diffusers, grilles, speakers, and lighting fixtures. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. Show locations, extent and installation details of fiberglass reinforced wall panels and acoustic ceiling panels. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill, and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. B. Perform finish carpentry work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Custom Grade. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide glass -reinforced gypsum fabrications with the following surface -burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. D. Mockup: Building mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and for review of aesthetics. 1. Provide sample installation of composite window trim, horizontal trim with cap flashing and vinyl siding, on mockup specified in section 06100. 0 Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 2 of 10 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design awl Constructlo!! �lltulagt�rrsclrt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction a. Mockup shall be completed for review at pre-installation conference. b. Mockup is not to be constructed on the building and is not to become part of the completed work unless otherwise instructed by Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations which could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. C. Ship and store glass -reinforced gypsum fabrications in factory -wrapped crates, packaged to keep units dry. Avoid cracking, warping, or staining the units. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry installation areas. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels throughout the remainder of construction period. 1. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity. 2. Acclimatize glass -reinforced gypsum fabrications to ambient temperature and humidity of spaces in which they will be installed. Remove packaging and move units into installation spaces not less than 48 hours before installing them. C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. D. Field Measurements: Where glass -reinforced gypsum fabrications are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 3 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.07 COORDINATION PRO CO f ` 1NCQRPORATED Design and Construction Afnnngenrent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued for Building Permit A. Coordinate layout and installation of glass -reinforced gypsum fabrications and suspension system components with other construction, including ceilings, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression -system components, and partition assemblies. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of r inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying �. grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." E. Hardwood Plywood: Comply with HPVA HP -1, "Interim Voluntary Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood." F. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. G. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD -Exterior Glue H. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 I. Slatwall: Paint grade, horizontally slotted, 48 lb. medium density fiberboard with internal strength of 100 lbs./ square inch, non -rated; Fiberboard Slatwall by Spacewall International. J. Decorative Building Brackets for canopies: Fibertech Decorative Architectural Products; Model No. BKT 40x 40. 2.02 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish); Grade A Finish, kiln - dried, white maple finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 4 of 10 PRO CONS' Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger jointed or solid lumber, of the following species and grades at the designated locations: 1. Grade Finish or 1 Common eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA; all locations unless otherwise noted. 2. Grade B Finish Poplar; NHLA; for window sills, except as noted otherwise. C. Moldings: Made to patterns included in the WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln -dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): N -grade white maple. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. Profiles as indicated on drawings. 2. Moldings for opaque finish (painted): P -grade pine, poplar or primed medium -density fiberboard. MDF only permitted at dry, low traffic areas. Profiles as indicated. D. Medium Density Fiberboard Trim: Provide factory -primed molding cut from medium density fiberboard (MDF) complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 1. Manufacturer: Forester Moulding & Lumber, Inc. or Architect and Owner approved equal. 2. Profiles: As indicated on drawings. 3. MDF trim permitted at dry, low traffic areas only. 2.03 PANELING A. Painted paneling (wainscoting): Interior factory -primed, medium density fiberboard (MDF), fire-resistant rated, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 1. Panel thickness: '/z -inch, unless otherwise noted. 2. Panel size: 48 inches by 96 inches. 3. 2 -inch bead board pattern. 4. Surface burning characteristics: as follows, tested per ASTM E 84: a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less 2.04 CLOSET SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. General: Subcontractor to fasten all supports and brackets through to studs or blocking. Contractor to coordinate blocking installation where required for installation of shelving or hangar rods. Connection to g.w.b. only will not be accepted. B. Shelving: 3/4 -inch hardwood plywood shelving with solid wood front edge for opaque finish. Opaque finish to conform to section 09900. 1. Provide four levels (rows) of minimum 12" D painted wood shelves uniformly space at closets as noted on architectural drawings. Provide deeper shelves where closet depth allows. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 5 of 10 Brightview North Andover PRO CONd` Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED, Design and Construefion Managenreat Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued for Building Permit ARCHITECTURE 2. Standards and Brackets: Twin slotted, heavy duty, steel shelf standards and U-shaped, double prong, heavy duty steel brackets, powder coated finish, color as selected by Architect. a. Product: Steel -Lok, Spur Shelving or alternate approved by Architect and Owner. C. Wire Closet Shelving and Clothing Rods: Provide vinyl coated, wire shelving system; 12 - inch deep shelves with matching mounting hardware for attachment to concealed blocking. 1. Product: ClosetMaid, or Architect/Owner approved equal. a. Provide four levels (rows) of 12 -inch D wire shelves: 1) Linen Closets 2) OT/PT closet 3) Elsewhere as noted on drawings b. Provide one level (row) of 12" D Wire Shelf and Rod: 1) ALZ Unit Large Closets 2) AL Unit Entry and Bedroom Closets 3) Elsewhere as noted on drawings D. Clothes Hook: Hewi Article 477.90.045, white nylon coated finish. 1. Provide clothes hook centered on back wall of closet @ 5'-0" AFF: a. ALZ Unit small (daily) closets 2.05 WALL PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panel (FRP): Kemlite Fire -X Glasboard with "surfaseal", 0.090"x 4'-0" x full height panels. PVC inside and outside corners, and 1 -inch wide, minimum, H -molding. Use adhesive and sealant as specified by manufacturer. Color for panel and molding shall match and shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. 2.06 ALZHEIMER'S GARDEN TRELLIS A. Trellis: Vinyl trellis as detailed. 1. Product: Sun Shades; Kroy Building Products, Inc., 1857 Evans Road, Cary, NC; phone: (919)678-4840; website; www.kioybp.com, or Architect and Owner approved equal. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Refer to civil and landscape drawings for additional information. 2.07 EXTERIOR COLUMN ENCLOSURES Refer to Section 066300. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 6 of 10 101 PRO CC N# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Dar gn and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Ballet Bar (at Fitness room): 1-1/2" diameter hard maple handrail, 12'-0" long. 1. Brackets: Brosco C -3601-A wall bracket, antique brass finish. 2. Option: Ballet Bar manufactured by Wolverine Sports, or equal. a) Stationary single, poplar, hand sanded with clear finish, 1-1/2 inch diameter. Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets for mounting securely to mirrored wall. B. Fasteners for exterior finish carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: I. Stainless steel 2. Hot dipped galvanized steel 3. Non -corroding aluminum 4. Pre -finished aluminum in color to match stain, where face fastening of material to receive stain is unavoidable. C. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment. Fasteners to be concealed unless approved by Architect. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot -dipped galvanizing coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Where pressure treated lumber is used, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. D. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. E. Glue: Aliphatic or phenolic -resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. F. Sealer for primed MDF: Seal cut surfaces of factory primed MDF with sealer by Titebond (Franklin International) or Architect approved equal. G. Flashing for exterior finish carpentry: Comply with requirements in Division 7 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. 1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Panel Siding and Trim: .0 1 9 -inch thick aluminum, Z- shaped flashing, formed in a metal break. 2. Color: Pre -finished to match trim color. Where trim is field painted, paint flashing one coat of finish to match siding and trim. H. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing exterior trim work. 1. Solid Maple handrail and stair treads at grand stair and connected guardrail at main lobby. 2.09 FABRICATION — Wood Finish Carpentry A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 7 of 10 Brightview North Andover PRO CONe, Project Specification North Andover MA INCORPORATED [7tskit and i,07t5ff74CitRtt •iRtiti 'BttlMtt• Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued for Building Permit ARCHITECTURE 0 B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: a. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold. 2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1-1/6 inch (1.5 mm) radius. 2.10 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (FRT) LUMBER A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Lumber: a. "Dricon"; Archwood Protection Inc..(770-801-6600) b. "Pyro-Guard"; Hoover Treated Wood Products (877-722-6292, ext. 211) 2. Plywood: a. "Exterior Fire -X"; Hoover Treated Wood Products (877-722-6292, ext. 211) B. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 25 or less by ASTM E84, with no sign of progressive combustion when test is extended to 30 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime and back prime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior not indicated as factory prefinished. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting." D. Ensure that all electrical or other services are in place. 3.03 INSTALLATION — FINISH CARPENTRY A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 8 of 10 PRC CON,+ Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Install the work plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. E. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. F. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails. G. Finish according to specified requirements. H. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. 3.04 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints with full -surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if required. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent spitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up factory - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 9 of 10 Brightview North Andover PRO CONProject Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED and Consstruch Knn agement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 Issued for Building Permit ARCHITECTURE C. Preparation for Finishing: Sand work smooth and set all nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. D. Cleaning: Keep premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from the accumulation of sawdust, cut -ends, and debris. E. Refer to Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work. F. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION Section 1112_062000 Finish Carpentry.doc Page 10 of 10 13 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRC CON INCORPORATED Design and Construction 7luanap- new ARCHITECTURE SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior wood frames and jambs. 2. Custom wood paneling and wainscots. 3. Interior ornamental work. 4. Custom wood cabinets and casework. 5. Custom plastic -laminate cabinets. 6. Wood countertops. 7. Plastic -laminate countertops. 8. Solid -surfacing -material countertops. 9. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. 10. Custom mantles 11. Custom interior benches 12. Custom bar 13. Custom reception desk 14. Salad bar (if applicable, refer to drawings) 15. Custom mail cubbies 16. Corridor handrails 17. Custom bookshelves (Library) B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 06 Section "Wood Paneling." 4. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork, except painted casework. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 1 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Des:finand Construction Afaniqement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 5. Division 11 Section "Food Service Equipment" for commercial equipment that mounts in casework and for sneeze guards for salad bar (if applicable). 6. Division 11 Section "Appliances" for appliances mounted in casework. 7. Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" for manufactured cabinets and post -formed plastic laminate countertops. 8. Division 22 Sections for sink units with garbage disposals mounted in countertops and for plumbing and venting connections of appliances installed in casework. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Exposed surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. C. Semi -exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are also included. D. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, drawer bottoms and end cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and tall cabinets are defined as "concealed". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including: panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid -surfacing material, fire - retardant -treated materials, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap O dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork. Section 1112 064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 2 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC CON# INCORPORATED Design and Constmction Manapment ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 5. Apply WI -certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop -applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop -applied opaque finishes. 3. Plastic laminates. 4. PVC edge material. 5. Thermoset decorative panels. 6. Solid -surfacing materials. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent - finished woodwork. 3. Veneer -faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish as specified. 4. Lumber and panel products with shop -applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with exposed surface finished. 5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 6. Thermoset decorative -panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 7. Solid -surfacing materials, 6 inches square. 8. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet -front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 9. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer certifying that products furnished and construction provided comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Section 1112 064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 3 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCONI " INCORPORATED Design and Cons mchon a'V1t!t gxr9cet�t ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: An experiences installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence -matched wood veneers. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Contract documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standards as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standards. E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where fire -retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire -test -response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM E 84 for standard period of time (10 minutes). a. Flame Spread: 75 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM E 84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In addition, the flame front shall not progress more than 10-1/2 feet beyond the centerline of the burner at any time during the test. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. F. Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD -01- 001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 0 Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 4 of 21 PRO CO 4, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction ivinnngem ni Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction G. Mockups: Build mockups as may be required by the Architect to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. H. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soilage and deterioration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 5 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.8 COORDINATION PRO CON,+ INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manrrpment ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White maple, plain sawn or sliced. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed -grain hardwood. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 (M -2 -Exterior Glue where required). 4. Particleboard: Straw -based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. 5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 6. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP -1, 7 -ply core, no voids, Grade A veneers. Made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semi -exposed edges. F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Colors, patterns and finishes as indicated in Finish Legend. 1 0 Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 6 of 21 PRS} CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Manngmient Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Edge banding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, thickness as specified, with radiused edges. Hot melt adhesive application. 3. Manufacturer: Per Finish Legend or if not noted in legend, subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. C. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin -Art, Inc. e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. G. Solid -Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a pre - coated finish. 1. Available Manufacturers: As specified in the Finish Schedule or, if not listed in Finish Schedule, subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avonite, Inc. b. Formica Corporation. C. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. H. Float Glass (only where noted on the drawings): ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3 '/4" thick. I. Tempered Float Glass for all locations unless otherwise noted, including but not limited to, Cabinet Doors and Memory Box Glass Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear) Quality -Q3, 1/4 -inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. Use tempered glass at all locations unless specifically stated otherwise on the architectural drawings. J. Mirror Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1503, Quality -Q3. K. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Classl (clear), Quality -Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 1/4 -inch thick. L. Bar Foot Rail: Lawrence Metal Products (or Architect and Owner approved equal); Bracket Style 902 Contemporary, spaced 3'-0" on center with 2 -inch diameter, heavy wall, tubular foot rails with matching end caps. Finish as selected by the Interior Designer. M. Decorative Wood Brackets: VanDyke Restorers, model as indicated. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 7 of 21 PILO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proiect Specification North Andover, MA Oesign and nstruction,'Y Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 0 1. Exterior Type: Organic -resin -based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Interior Type A: Low -hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed � fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated . woodwork. 5. Kiln -dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. C. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 1751bf, respectively. 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Weyerhaeuser. 0 Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 8 of 21 PILO CON. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-'retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine Ltd.; Medite Div. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". B. Butt Hinges: 2 -3/4 -inch, 5 -knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095 -inch -thick metal with anti - friction bearings and rounded tips, and as follows: 1. Semi -concealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semi -concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. 3. Provide 2 for doors less than 28 inches high; 3 for doors 48 to 62 inches high; and 4 hinges for doors more than 62 inches high. C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 3-dimensional adjustable, 100 degrees of opening, self-closing, slide -on technique, all metal. Products: a) Grass 1003, b) MEPLA SSP 03-254-599. D. Back -Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Catches: Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches high. 1. Push -in magnetic catches for wood doors, BHMA A156.9, B03131. Product: Magnetic touch -latch No. UH704, color selected by Architect; EPCO, Division of Best Hardware, Inc., or equal approved by Architect. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; 1. Steel shelf rest, 1/4 -inch diameter pin for drilled holes complying with BHMA A156.9, B84013; with brass finish. Product: Shelf Rest No. 346; Knape & Vogt Mgr. Co. or Architect approved equal. G. Drawer Slides: Side -mounted, full -extension, almond epoxy -coated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides; 75 lbf. Product: Drawer Slide No. 6200, Grasse, Inc. or No. 3211, Mepla-Alfit, Inc. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 9 of 21 PRO CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Vesxgn and Cmistniction Manngensent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 0 H. Drawer and Cupboard Locks: Cylindrical type, 5 -pin tumbler and cam, brass with chrome - plated finish, complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. 1. Provide minimum of 2 keys per lock and 6 master keys. 2. Each room shall be keyed according to Owner's instructions. I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 -inch OD, color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. or No.31; Outwater Plastics, (800) 631-8375. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Brass, Blackened, Satin Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 609 for brass base; BHMA 638 for steel base. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. L. Provide locking cabinet hardware at min. one base cabinet in each of these areas for chemical/detergent and other secure storage (coordinate with Owner's representative): 1. Country kitchen 2. Bistro bar 3. OT/PT 4. Beauty/Barber 5. Doctor Office 6. Charts/Records 7. Admin. Desk 8. Admin. Work Area 9. Servery 2.4 CABINET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fabric Covered Tack Surfaces: 100% polyester fabric, Class A rated, on 1/4 -inch thick fire rated cork, roll product; fabric color to be selected by Owner's Interior Designer. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a) Designer Series Bulletin Boards No. 3100; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. b) Fabric Cork; PolyVision Corp. B. Counter Bracket Supports: Fabricated of 6063 T-6, T-shaped extruded aluminum; MIG welded J along 45 degree miters and along back; pre -punched for '/4 -inch fasteners; provide rubber grommet in 7/8 -inch hole; powder coated finish; Rakks, Rangine Corp., Millis, MA. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 10 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED Desip and Co»sftction Manogenivit ARCHITECTURE C. Tray slides: Type 316, stainless steel, solid, tray slide rods. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screw as recommended by metal -framing manuf. D. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N-105 for applicable requirements. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in-place anchors. F. Paneling adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. G. Glue: Aliphatic or phenolic resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. H. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following minimum limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, EPA Method 24 (If state or local requirements are stricter, those requirements apply): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated. When quality grade is not indicated, provide Custom quality grade. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 11 of 21 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification besi�rr and Ga»strraclao» illarrngrrnt�rt North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 0 C. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. F. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. G. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent -finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. Fire -Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire -retardant particleboard or fire -retardant medium -density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and 0 Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 12 of 21 PRO CON4, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA On 4" and Co smtction Alaaagetrizgr# Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes unless otherwise noted. 2.8 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Refer to section 06200. 2.9 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior ornamental work for transparent finish includes the following: 1. Balustrades. 2. Columns. 3. Grilles. 4. Mantels. 5. Pediment heads. 6. Pilasters. 7. Stair treads. 8. Book shelves B. Grade: Custom. C. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent -finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. D. Refer to architectural and interior design drawings for locations. 2.10 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior ornamental work for opaque finish includes the following: 1. Balustrades. 2. Columns. 3. Grilles. 4. Mantels. 5. Pediment heads. 6. Pilasters. B. Grade: Custom. C. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. D. Refer to architectural and interior design drawings for locations. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 13 of 21 PICC) CON A Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proiect Specification I3esigrr and Constructroro,�tnrla�eaescraY North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2.11 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay and Flush inset; see drawings for locations. D. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless. E. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any closed -grain hardwood. F. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium -density fiberboard. G. Semi -exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match materials indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.12 PLASTIC -LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay and Flush inset; see drawings for locations. D. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless. E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018 -inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. F. Materials for Semi -exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. NO a. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018 -inch minimum thickness, 0 matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Section 1112 064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 14 of 21 PRO CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and en»strurtion Nfranagemext Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction b. For semi -exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. H. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range. I. Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. J. Base Cabinets: Bottoms and ends of cabinets, exposed backs and tops of cabinets; 3/4 -inch particleboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi -exposed surfaces. 1. Backs of cabinets: 3/8 -inch plywood. Back mounted to side, bottom and top; inset 3/4 - inch to conceal mounting rails. Tall cabinets shall have rails positioned at top and intermediate location. Base cabinet shall have positioned at the top. 2. Mounting rails: 3/4 -inch thick, fastened to cabinet back on interior of cabinet or as indicated in details. 3. Cabinet Sub -base: Separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides to floor), water resistant exterior grade plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder type construction of front, back, and intermediates to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach. 4. Depth: Provide cabinets of the type indicated meeting the following where depths are not indicated: a) Deep cabinet: minimum outside depth of 23 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 24 inches from wall to face of door). b) Shallow cabinet: Minimum outside depth of 13 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 14 inches from wall to face of door). K. Wall cabinets: Ends of cabinets and exposed backs; 3/4 -inch particleboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi -exposed Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 15 of 21 PRO CON+ Brightview North Andover 1 N C d RP d R AT © Project Specification Design andCanstrarctiass A4annge:went North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 0 surfaces. Tops and bottoms of cabinets; 1 -inch particleboard, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced. 1. Backs of Cabinets: 3/8 -inch plywood, melamine or plastic cabinet liner faced surfaces with balance sheet on concealed side. Back mounted to side bottom and top, inset 3/4 - inch to conceal mounting rails. Cabinets shall have rails positioned at top and bottom location. 2. Mounting Rails: 3/4 -inch thick, fastened to back of cabinet on interior of cabinet or as indicated in details. 3. Depth: Wall hung cabinets shall have a minimum outside depth of 13 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 14 inches from wall to face of door). L. Inside Corners: Construct cabinet and fillers at inside corners to allow for proper clearance and operation of drawers, doors and adjacent appliances. M. Drawer Fronts: 3/4 -inch thick particleboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi -exposed surfaces, applied to separate drawer body sub -front. N. Drawer Bodies: 1/2 -inch thick plywood sides, back, and sub -fronts with dadoed, pinned and glue joints. 1/4-inhc thick plywood bottom, rabbeted into sides, back and sub -front, and glued. All surfaces inside and outside of drawer box shall be covered with melamine finish. Reinforce drawer bottoms with 1/2 -inch by 4 -inch front to back hardwood intermediate stiffeners, glued and mechanically fastened in place. Provide one stiffener for drawers to 24 inches wide, two to 36 inches wide and four to 48 inches wide. O. Solid Doors: 3/4 -inch thick particleboard or medium -density fiberboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surface, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi -exposed surfaces. P. Dividers: 3/4 -inch thick particleboard or medium -density fiberboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surface, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi -exposed surfaces. Q. Shelving: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard meeting the following: 1. Open Shelving: 1 -inch thick shelving for all widths unless otherwise indicated. Top of shelves faced with plastic laminate. Underside and sides of shelves, melamine or plastic laminate liner faced. 2. Behind Solid Doors: 3/4 -inch thick for cabinets up to 24 inches wide. 1 -inch thick shelving for cabinets 24 inches wide and greater. Melamine or plastic laminate liner faced. 3. All shelving shall be adjustable except fixed center shelf for tall units to prevent bowing of cabinet sides. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 16 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS INCORPORATED Design and Constmchon Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction R. Edge banding: Color to match surfacing material. Finished edge banding shall be uniform in color and sheen. 1. Exposed and Semi -exposed Shelving: 3mm PVC applied to front edge. lmm PVC applied to back edge of both ends. 2. Doors and Drawer Fronts: 0.020 inch PVC applied to perimeter. 3. Drawer Bodies: 1 mm PVC applied to all edges, semi -exposed and concealed locations (top, back and bottom edges). 4. Cabinet Bodies: limn PVC applied to all exposed and semi -exposed edges. 5. Dividers: lmm PVC. S. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Match color, pattern and finish as indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations for the characteristics of the laminate indicated on Finish Legend. 2.13 WOOD COUNTERTOPS (where noted on the interior design drawings) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400C requirements for wood countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Top: Solid wood for transparent finish, edge glued, with crown direction reversed in adjacent boards, to produce widths indicated. Select boards for similarity of color and grain and arrange boards for optimum match between adjacent boards. Species and cut as follows: 1. Wood Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced. 2. Matching of adjacent veneer leaves: slip match. 3. Any hardwood for opaque finish. 4. Edge Treatment: a) Solid wood of species indicated for transparent finish. b) Solid hardwood for opaque finish. 5. Core material: Medium -density fiberboard made with exterior grade glue or moisture resistant particleboard. 2.14 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400C requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 17 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 B. Grade: Custom. PRC} CON# INCORPORATED Design aid Construction Management ARCHITECTURE C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Match color, pattern and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for the characteristics of the laminate indicated on Finish Legend. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces and lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on cabinet surfaces; see Drawings for locations of each treatment. F. Core Material: Particleboard. G. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior -grade plywood. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic -laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.15 SOLID -SURFACING -MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400C requirements for countertops. B. Grade: Custom C. Solid -Surfacing -Material Thickness: Min. 1/2 inch as detailed. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid - surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. Match color, pattern and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for these characteristics. E. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop -applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid -surfacing -material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. F. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. G. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. 2.16 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. 0 0 Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 18 of 21 PRC CONr� Brightview North Andover 1 N C O P P O R ATE D Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Cvnstnxt,o,� yla„ngc:,,,�„� Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Priming and finishing of interior architectural woodwork required to be performed at fabrication shop are specified in this section. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. I. Back priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end -grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic -laminate -clad woodwork do not require back priming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining and sheen, with sheen measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. Grade: Premium system for all casework grades. 2. AWI Finish System TR -6: Catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units. E. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. L Grade: Premium system for all casework grades. 2. Finish System: select one of the following: a) AWI Finish System OP -4: Conversion varnish b) AWI Finish System OP -5: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer 3. Color: Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: a) Casework: Satin, 30-50 gloss units. b) Countertops: Semigloss, 55-75 gloss units F. Bar Finish: Steebar Liquid Glass Epoxy Resin, commercial grade table and bar top epoxy resin. 1. Follow manufacturer's application instructions for seal coats, topcoats, air bubble removal and curing. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 19 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION PRO CON4,40 INCORPORATED Oes gn wid Constniction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site (where specified) to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire -retardant -treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used . to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed fasteners. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim. I. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 -inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 -inch horizontal variation from a true plane. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. WE �.r 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a 0 straight line. Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 20 of 21 Brightview North Andover PRO O ONS t3esr�sra�telC�asi�rrcr'nti,'41nn��crt,ertt Project Specification North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. I. Countertops and Bench Tops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop or bench top. 1. Align adjacent solid -surfacing -material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop or bench top. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops and bench tops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Apply sealant at space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 5. Install countertop brackets specified. J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and installer that ensure woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 1112_064000 Architectural Woodwork.doc Page 21 of 21 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Railing system. B. Post covers. PRO CON4,,i4� 1NCOPPORATED Design and Consfnn:f ion J41an�igenrent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 06 63 00 POSTS, RAILINGS AND DECKING C. Miscellaneous column covers. D. Decking: Composite and Aluminum. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This section includes: Synthetic railing system at balconies and PVC enclosures for porch posts. Refer to structural drawings for structural steel porch posts. B Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking attachment of rail systems and brackets. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for decorative columns. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads, requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code — 6th Edition 780 CMR and the following loads and stresses within the limits and under the conditions indicated: 1. Top Rails of Guards: 2. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. 3. Concentrated load of 200 lb/ft applied in any direction. 4. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 5. Infill of Guards: 6. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft. 7. Uniform load of 25 lbf/ft. applied horizontally. 8. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Pagel of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.5 SUBMITTALS PRO CON,(4� INCORPORATED Design acid Constnidion MnnageNnent ARCHITECTURE A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. Project Specification Dec. 20,201 ! Issued For Building Permit B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, configuration, and anchorages. D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below and of same material and color indicated for the Work: 1. Railing system: Submit samples of each component, assembled in a partial railing bay. 2. Column enclosure: Submit one sample of length suitable to include base and cap. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of blocking and installation anchorages required for installation of railing system. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Railing: 25 years against defects in material and workmanship. B. Factory -Applied Topcoat to Railing: 10 years against defects in material and workmanship. C. Posts: 10 years against defects in material and workmanship, assuming proper installation. Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 2 of 8 ON 0 101 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: PRO CON INCORPORATED Design null Constrnctiorr 14asaseieut ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Fibertech Decorative Architectural Products (basis of design) P.O.. Box 865, 4110 Old Geenville Hwy. Central, South Carolina 29630 2. 3. HB&G; P.O. Box 589, Troy, AL 36081. ASD. Tel: (334) 566-5000. Fax: (334) 566- 4629. www.hbecolumns.com. 4. Amity Fence Incorporated. Design to be similar to HB&G - PermaPorch-Pennington and approved by architect. 5. Trex Company Inc; (800) 289-8739 6. Versadeck Decking Products; (651) 356-1870 B. Requests for substitutions in accordance with provisions of Section 013300. 2.2 RAILING SYSTEM A. Railing: HB&G's PermaPorch railing; durable; low maintenance; compliant with requirements of ICC International Residential Code for One and Two Family Dwellings. B. Pre -Fabricated Sections: Pre -assembled; including installation kit; section lengths of 8 feet or as required (refer to Architectural drawings). 1. Style: Pennington or Architect approved equal. 2. Top and Bottom Railing Material: Cellular PVC with aluminum core insert. 3. Bottom Railing Material: Cellular PVC with aluminum core insert. C. Balusters: Solid expanded PVC. 1. Height: 36 inches (914 mm); style: square; size: 1-1/2 inches (3 8 mm) square. 2. Spacing: Less than 4 -inches o.c. as required by code. D. Intermediate Horizontal members: Solid expanded PVC, 1 -1.2 -inch square. E. Intermediate Posts: Aluminum column encased in high density PVC with poly -pyramid top. 1. Provide termination post at locations where railing system terminates against siding. 2. F. Color. As selected by Architect. G. Product: PermaPorch Railing, Pennington Style or equal approved in writing by Architect. Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 3 of 8 PRO CON A Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constaution Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit H. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed aluminum of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. Provide case sleeves at handrail connections to walls and posts. I. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railing system indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise. indicated. 2.3 PORCH POSTS AND COLUMN ENCLOSURES A. Column Enclosures: Tapered, round, non-bearing, fiberglass columns with capital and base. Product: Fibertech 10001008 or Architect approved equal. a. Column Design: Round, smooth, tapered. b. Column Size: 10"diameter or as required to enclose largest structural column. Coordinate with structural drawings. C. Column Base Design and Height: Standard, 4 inches high. d. Column Capital Design and Height: Standard, 4 inches high. B. Adhesive: Non -acetone based construction adhesive designed for use in exterior locations and as recommended by enclosure manufacturer. C. Assembly Strap: Provide manufacturer's standard strap for field -assembling column enclosure. 2.4 RAILING FABRICATION A. Assemble railing system in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. B. Non -welded connections: Fabricate railing system by connecting members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. C. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to structure. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. D. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 0 Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 4of8 PRO CON. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Manatenrent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Fillers: Provide fillers made from galvanized steel.plate, or other suitably crush-resistant materials, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.5 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS 2.6 PAINT A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Handrails to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing and Handrail Components: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. L Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for handrails and railings indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat -head stainless steel or aluminum machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Cast -In -Place and Post -Installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Cast -in-place anchors. 2. Expansion anchors. A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting." B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 5 of 8 PRO CQNA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proi ect Specification Design and Constriction blanagemenf North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Non -Shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. B. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.8 DECKING SYSTEM(s) A. Composite Decking: Trex Transcend® or approved equal by project Architect; durable; low maintenance; Trex products have been tested to ensure compliance with the 2006 International Building Code. Check with our local building code department for jurisdictional requirements. 1" Grooved Edge Board. Trex Hideaway Hidden Fasteners. Trex's 25 -year limited fade and stain warranty for Trex Transcend& Color to be determined from manufacturer's standard color selections. B. Aluminum Decking: Versadeck: Versaplank R-40 or approved equal by project Architect; Aluminum Plank Decking is combine -able, light and strong creating versatility for deck designers and builders. Fire Resistant Decking, Slip resistant, Dent resistant, No Ping, No warping. • Plank aluminum decking -supports 40 lbs. per square foot with supporting joists spaced up to 36 inches O -C (24" or less recommended). • Light Weight - approx. 1 1/4 lbs. per lineal foot. • Available in 8'- 24' lengths (2' increments). • Hidden Mounting Clip Fasteners, Spans 24" and up to 36", Polyurea Deck Coating • Environmentally friendly and responsible - recyclable, contains no VOC's or solvents. • The Starter Clips and the Tee Clips can be used for both the R-40 and the C-60 VersaplankTM aluminum decking systems. Color to be determined from manufacturer's standard color selections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 6 of 8 0 PRO CON,4 Brightview North � Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design andCoustna tiatt .4fartagerneut Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 COLUMN ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install railing and baluster system level and plumb with minimal joints between components and between railing and newels, posts, or columns. C. Prior to installing column enclosures on porch columns, install solid preservative -treated, wood blocking at heights required to fasten top and bottom rails of railing system to be installed after column enclosure installation is completed. Blocking shall be solid and capable of transferring loads imposed on railing system back to structure. Also install solid preservative -treated, wood blocking at locations required to fasten column enclosure, column base, and column capital to structure. Note that porch column covers rest on brick piers at porch but are full height adjacent to ALZ dining exterior entrance. Refer to exterior elevations. 3.4 RAILING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach intermediate posts to porch framing in manner to transfer railing loads to framing. Attach railing system into solid wood blocking behind sheathing where system connects to exterior wall of building. C. Fit exposed connections of railing system together to form tight, hairline joints. D. Attach handrails to porch columns and posts. 3.5 DECK SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. ' Provide all necessary fasteners and accessories for a complete system install. Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 7 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.6 PROTECTION PRO CON4,40 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION Section 1112_066300 Posts, Railings and Decking.doc Page 8 of 8 Mm 13 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON ,c; INCORPORATED Desip and Coustmdion Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 0710 00 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Spry -Applied / Membrane Waterproofing — where shown. B. Bentonite Waterproofing to Elevator pit walls and floor (under footing). 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and complies with requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer's current sheet membrane. B. Product Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: I. Bentonite Panel waterproofing 2. Prefabricated drainage composite PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1. SPRAY -APPLIED & MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING A. _Vertical Watemroofing and Drainage/Protection/Insulation (Foundation Walls Tremco Tremproof 260 Spray -Applied Waterproofing Membrane Tremdrain DPI Drainage/Protection Board (applied over membrane) 2" Thick Notes: For cracks in concrete 1/16" wide or less, provide double coverage application of TP260. Cracks greater than 1/16" to be field assessed by manufacturer's representative and manufacturer recommendations to be reviewed by Architect prior to incorporation. Only non -transforming release agents may be used on form surfaces. Penetrations to be pre-treated with trowel grade Karnack mastic or Tremco "Superstop". Substitutions: None Permitted. B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. Primer/Filler/Sealer: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. C. PROTECTION COURSE: (where noted on the Architectural drawings) 1. Board as approved by system manufacturer, pre -molded, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, semi- rigid board consisting of mineral -stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt -saturated felt, surface -coated with asphalt and sealed to core under heat and pressure, and provided with polyethylene film facings. 2. Manufacturers "Ram -Tough Protection Board"; The Barrett Co. (800-647-0100) "PC -2 Protection Course"; W.R. Meadows, Inc. (800-342-5976) "Protection Sheet"; Pecora Corporation (800-523-6688) "Protection Course II" ; Sonneborn Building Products (800-496-6067) "Tremboard"; Tremco, Inc. (800-562-2728). D. BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 1. Provide bentonite waterproofing and prefabricated drainage composite system to prevent the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and install without defects, Section 1112_071000 Damproofing & Waterproofing.doc Pagel of 3 PRO CON44� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DesipimdConsMictionManagcatent Dec. 20, 2011 f� Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �J damage or failure. Waterproofing shall consist of biodegradable corrugated Kraft board containing a minimum one -pound (0.45 kg) per square foot (0.1 sq m) of dry, granular sodium bentonite. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Provide bentonite panel waterproofing & applicable accessories by Volclay Panels as manufactured by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO). 3. Materials: SODIUM BENTONITE: Specially selected granular bentonite containing approximately 90% montmorillonite with 10% maximum unaltered volcanic ash and other native sediments. Free Swell Rating: 2 grams sifted into deionized water swells to occupy a minimum volume of 16 cc. Grading: Granular bentonite passes 90% through a 20 -mesh sieve and less than 10% through a 200 mesh sieve. BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING: Panels consist of 1 lb. (0.45 kg) per square foot of specially treated high swelling granular sodium bentonite contained inside a biodegradable, corrugated kraft board measuring 48" x 48" x 3/16" thick (1.2m x 1.2m x 0.47cm). ACCESSORY PRODUCTS: All accessory waterproofing materials shall be provided by bentonite waterproofing manufacturer or shall have manufacturer's written approval for substitution. Prefabricated Drainage Composite: Solid molded polystyrene core with a geotextile filter fabric adhered to one side. Trowel grade sodium bentonite compound used as a detailing mastic around penetrations, corner transitions and grade terminations. Rolls of flexible bentonite/butyl rubber strip waterstop for use in concrete construction joints. Secure with adhesive. Protection mat: High-strength geotextile protection course material. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1. Performance Criteria A, Comply with manufacturer's written installation recommendations, including preparation of substrate surfaces, detail coatings of joints and planar changes in substrate, and priming of substrates. B. Provide separation between waterproofing membrane and non -compatible substrates and materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.2 APPLICATION OF BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. Install bentonite waterproofing system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions as applicable to Project conditions and as indicated by authorized manufacturer's representative. B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage or contamination from waterproofing products during installation operations. C. Soil Substrates: Site conditions allowing, bentonite panel applications do not require a mud - working slab. Grade substrates should consist of well -leveled soils without voids and debris, and compacted to a minimum of 85% Modified Proctor density for uniform support and containment of waterproofing sheets. If substrate consists of gravel or crushed stone, place a Section 1112_071000 Damproofing & Waterproofing.doc Page 2 of 3 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desip and Cuastmcdon Mar,agenrenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit high-strength geotextile layer over the aggregate and then provide several inches of compacted soil or sand for uniform support and containment of waterproofing sheets. D. Concrete Substrates: Concrete to receive waterproofing shall be of sound structural grade with a smooth finish, free of debris, oil, grease, laitenance, dirt, dust, or other foreign matter which will impair the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system and which do not comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. E. All expansion joints should be cleaned, primed, fitted with a proper compression seal product and caulked with polyurethane sealant or applicable expansion joint assembly product manufactured by others. Expansion joint material manufacturer is responsible for water tightness of the expansion joint material. F. Manufacturer compatible waterstop shall be installed per manufacturer's guidelines, in all applicable vertical and horizontal concrete construction cold pour joints and around applicable penetrations. G. Prevent bentonite waterproofing products from hydrating before material is contained with overburden or backfill. When threat of rain is imminent, installed bentonite products not already contained by overburden or backfill should be covered with polyethylene sheeting to decrease the chance of hydration. Remove polyethylene prior to overburden or backfill operations. 3.3 DRAINAGE COURSE & BACKFILLING A. Prefabricated drainage system shall be installed to the exterior side of the bentonite panels with plastic solid core facing panels. Do not use drainage products with an open core construction (no solid plastic core). Install prefabricated drainage system to manufacturer's specifications. B. Do not place gravel or stone drainage in direct contact with bentonite Panels. Provide compactable backfill, free of debris or gravel larger than 1-1/2" (3.75 cm). Backfill should consist of soils compacted to 85% Modified Proctor density. Gravel or crushed stone are not acceptable as backfill material. Place backfill and compact immediately after waterproofing installation. END OF SECTION Section 1112_071000 Damproofing & Waterproofing.doc Page 3 of 3 PRO CON,4; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design anti Canstnictiun Mnnageafent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 07 2100 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. EXTERIOR ENVELOPE INCLUDING WALLS, ATTICS, ROOFS, FOUNDATIONS SEE SCHEDULE BELOW: B. INTERIOR ENVELOPE. SEE SCHEDULE BELOW C. Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. D. Surface -Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, flame -spread ratings of 75 or less and smoke - developed ratings of 450 or less. E. Insulation covered elsewhere: Insulation at EPDM Roofing 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Supplier labeling of all products to satisfy the local Energy Conservation Code B. Contractor Inspections and written certifications are required before concealment. 1. Foundations before backfill 2. Exterior wall/joist space [mechanically attached] 3. Exterior wall prior to installation of drywall. 4. Firestops @ corridors and fire separation partitions 5. All Partitions for sound attenuation control C. No Piping shall be run above the insulation or on the cold side of insulation. This includes water, sanitary, condensate, sprinkler, or any other wet piping. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. EXTERIOR ENVELOPE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS (Refer to drawings for more information): Location R= Notations installed 1. Foundation R-7.5ci Foundation walls/(outside or as noted) Walls total of 4'-0" vertical plus full horizontal soil pressure 2. Exterior walls rigid: R-7.5ci over Air Barrier meth fasten 3. Exterior walls Min. R13 + 7.5ci (Metal) Insulation mechanically pins or strapping batt insul *: Min. R13 + 3.8ci (Wood) fastened without compressing batts. {friction fit not acceptable) Refer to drawings for locations 4. Roofs R20ci (Flat Roof) Rigid min. thickness 2'/z"under EPDM Roof mech. fasten R38 (Sloped Roof) Batt or spray -in 5. Steel tubes at exterior walls Fill completely with foam insulation * Note: Exterior stud walls fill void completely with batt insulation. Use R-19 if required at 6" stud walls. B. INTERIOR ENVELOPE: location R= Notations installed 1. Room separations 6" sound attenuation blankets at metal studs friction 2. Corridor Walls 3 '/z or 6" sound attenuation blankets at studs sta le 3. Ceilings Not required except as noted in drawings gravily 4. Pipe chase partitions 3 1/2" sound attenuation blankets at each stud Section 1 l 12_072100 Building Insulation.doc Page 1 of 4 PRO CONS; j, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design: ,70 Constnnction Managesnrnt North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 5. Mechanical rooms 6" unfaced fiberglass in 6" stud wall - 6 mil poly friction 6. Elevator shafts R19 Fiberglass with Vapor barrier 6 mil poly friction/poly Alternate kraft paper or foil faced batts. stapled 7. Toilet partitions 3 '/2" sound attenuation blankets [where indicated] friction 8. Roof drain leaders Insulate all roof leader piping for moisture and acoustics per manuf. C. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: 1. Provide FSK 25 exposed fire -retardant vapor barrier as required where insulation is not covered with drywall in direct contact with the drywall 1.4. All materials to be asbestos free. 1.5. CODE REQUIREMENTS: A. All insulation in roof and wall assemblies shall be approved for use without an additional thermal barrier in accordance with State and Local Building Codes. B. Local Code Criteria — Refer to Section 01025. 1.6. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: A. An experienced installer with a minimum of five years experience, who will be present on the project site at all times when installation work is in progress. 1.7. FIRE -TEST -RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS: A. Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire -test -response characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E-84 Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E-119 Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E-136 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS A. Installation shall be in accordance with the State and Local Energy Conservation Code, Certifying Installed Insulation For blown or sprayed insulation, the initial installed thickness, settled thickness, coverage area, and number of bags used must be clearly posted at the job site For components having a manufacturer's guaranteed R -value rating, thickness markers must be placed at least every 300 feet For components without a manufacture's guaranteed R -value rating, contact the Insulation Contractors Association of America for an approved way to ensure proper insulation levels are obtained. All insulation requirements assume the insulation is installed at its standard thickness. If insulation is compressed, the R -value is reduced and the building may not meet the requirements. B. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV — R-10. Section 1112072100 Building Insulation.doc Page 2 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Desip and CpttstMctlon MonaSentett! ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Fiberglass Batt/Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with fibers manufactured from glass. a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corp. C. Owens Corning. 1. Characteristics: a. Type: Un -faced Fiberglass batts; width equal to framing spacing; 6 mil poly vapor barrier. b. Facing: Foil faced as required by U.L. Assemblies C. Flame spread rating by section 01025 Code Review as Class A, SBCII and NFPA as Class 1 batts flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed 50 or less where left exposed and required by code for building type: Flame resistant foil scrim faced; ASTM C665-86, Type III, Class A; 1.0 perm rating maximum; flame spread of 25 or less. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665; Type I, unfaced manufactured from glass. 1. 3-1/2" thick at all interior metal stud partitions. CertainTeed Products Corp.; Sound Control Batts. Johns Manville Corp.; Sound -SHIELD. Owens Coming; Quiet Zone Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. USG Acoustical Products Company. 2. Characteristics: 1) Material: ASTM C665-88, Type III FS faced flexible mineral fiber batt. 2) Nominal density: 2.5 PCF. 3) Thickness: 3%" unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, follow stricter criteria. Provide double layer at chase walls. 4) Size: Batts net stud width, minimum; no odd sized pieces permitted. 5) Combustibility; ASTM E136-82: Noncombustible. 6) Surface burning characteristics; ASTM E84-87: a) Flame spread: 15. b) Smoke developed: Ten D. Mineral Wool "Thermafber" batt insulation for firestop closures where indicated. E. Loose Fill Insulation: or "blown insulation". 1. Type: ASTM C764-84, Type I, Category 1, cubed mineral fiber for pneumatic placement. 2. Thickness & density to achieve R-30 rating for thermal resistance. 3. Furnish manufacturer's standard fine netting for attachment to ceiling framing for blow- in installation prior to final ceiling finish application. 4. ALTERNATE: Glass -Fiber Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764; maximum flame - spread and smoke -developed indices of 5, Type 1 for pneumatic application. Or Cellulosic -Fiber Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame - resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. F. Rigid extruded polystyrene insulation (REPS): 1. Acceptable products; perimeter insulation: a. Amoco Foam Products, Inc.; Amofoam® CM, square edge. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A.; Styrofoam SB, Score Board or SE, Square Edge. C. Owens Corning; FormulaR 250 SE. Edges: Square. Section 1112_072100 Building Insulation.doc Page 3 of 4 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Desigr„mA Cp,sslnution Managenrni North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Characteristics: a. Material: Extruded, closed cell, CFC -12 free, polystyrene boards meeting ASTM C578 -87a, Type IV for use in perimeter applications. b. Density: 2.0 PCF, minimum. C. "K" Value at 75 degrees F.: 0.20. d. Compressive strength ASTM D1621-73: 15 minimum. G. Lay -in ceiling sound batts: a. Acceptable products: 1) CertainTeed Products Corp.; Sound Control Batts. 2) Johns Manville Corp.; Grid-SHIELDO. 3) Owens Corning; Sonobatts. 4) USG Acoustical Products Company. b. Type: Unfaced mineral wool or fiberglass batt blankets; ASTM C665-86, Type 1. c. Size: T-0" by 3%Z". H. Accessories. I . Nails and Staples Steel wire, galvanized, type and size to suit application. 2. Tape Polyethylene or Polyester, self -adhering type, 2 inches wide. 3. Insulation Fasteners Steel impale spindle and clip on flat metal base, self adhering backing, length to suit insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier at exterior walls and roof/ceiling assemblies: Polyethylene, 6 mil thick at walls and ceilings, 10 mil thick at slab. (Note requirements for radon evac. System. See details). F-►� B. Air/Moisture Barrier - Provide products listed below at exterior walls. Coordinate with Specification 07210 — "Air/Moisture Barrier". I . "Typar Commercial Wrap", or architect approved equal. 2. Air Barrier Tape compatible with approved barrier. C. Mechanical Fasteners: Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors with Washers formed from perforated galvanized carbon -steel sheet welded to projecting steel spindle with length capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position with 1-1/2" square or diameter self-locking washers PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R -values indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Fill voids as required in all partitions, including behind outlets, to preserve STC rating of the assembly specified. B. Place loose -fill insulation to comply with ASTM C 1015. 1. Comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's "Special Report - Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." C. Extend vapor barrier to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage. Overlap at studs and tape all joints. Tape tightly with polyethylene splicing tape to all penetrations. END OF SECTION Section 1112_072100 Building Insulation.doc Page 4 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY PRC) CON�;�j, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managertlent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07270 AIR/MOISTURE BARRIERS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Section Includes: - Weather -resistant, commercial air/moisture barrier system. 1) Provide commercial grade air -moisture barrier/weather resistant system over exterior, above grade, vertical wall surfaces indicated, including surface/substrate inspection, air - barrier sheet installation including system flashing, fasteners, seam taping and proper overlapping as required for a complete void -free and uniform waranteed installation. 2) Application of Weather -resistant air/moisture barrier systems include: a. Over Exterior Grade Gypsum Sheathing b. Over Exterior Grade Plywood Sheathing B. Related Sections: 1) Section 05 40 00 — Cold Formed Metal Framing 2) Section 06 10 00 — Rough Carpentry 3) Section 07 10 00 — Damp proofing and Waterproofing 4) Section 07 2100 — Building Insulation 5) Section 07 46 30 — Vinyl Siding & Trim 6) Section 07 62 00 —Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide non -degradable, commercial weather -resistant, air -moisture barrier system by a single source manufacturer for vertical building envelope protection that is compatible with related building components and will maintain air/moisture resistance yet maintain moisture - vapor permeability. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 1677 — 00; Type I Specification for Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Framed Building Walls B. ASTM E 96 — 00; Method B Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials C. AATCC Test Method 127(American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists) Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. D. TAPPI Test Method T -41D Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) E. TAPPI Test Method T-460 Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method) Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page I of 7 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Consfmction Managennent North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. ASTM D882-00; Method A Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting G. ASTM D1117 - 99 Test Methods for Non -woven Fabrics H. ASTM E 84 - 01 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Refer to Section 0133 00 for Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's most current technical product data and installation instructions and product testing results equaling or exceeding those specified. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Pre -Installation Conference: Submit report verifying project site and substrate conditions, acceptance of mock-up panels prior to installation, including any special manufacturer field instructions or requirements. Review of access, safety, and protection plan to be included with report. 2. Manufacturer's field service reports: Site reports on periodic visits indicating air -barrier system observation installation by an authorized field service representative. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01 77 00 for contract closeout submittal 13 Information. 1. Air -Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer's executed standard warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of completion. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Installer Qualifications: Installer with (5) years successful experience with installation of commercial sheet membrane weather- resistant, air -moisture barrier systems on new construction projects of similar type. B. Source Limitations: Provide weather resistant barrier and accessory materials produced by one manufacturer. C. Mock-up: Install on mock-up(s) using approved weather -resistant, air -moisture barrier system including approved fasteners, flashings, tape and related accessories per manufacturer's latest printed instructions and recommendations. Obtain Architect and Consultant's approval of weather -resistant, air- moisture barrier system for appearance and workmanship standard. Contact manufacturer's designated commercial specialist or representative to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty, prior to air -moisture barrier system installation. 1. Mock-up size: Refer to mock-up requirements in other Sections. 2. Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship standard. 3. Demonstrate tie in of this system with below grade waterproofing. K Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page 2 of 7 PRO CON4i� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consrnicrion Management Dec. 20, 2411 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Pre -Installation Conference Meeting: 1. A pre -installation conference is required a minimum of two weeks prior to start of weather -resistant, air -moisture barrier installation. Meeting will be scheduled by General Contractor with Architect, Engineer, General Contractor, Installing Contractor, Owner or Owner's Representative, and Manufacturer's designated Representative. 2. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of air -moisture barrier system materials and components, installer's training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection of the work on secondary weather - barrier system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather -resistant, air -moisture barrier system materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store and protect weather -resistant, air -moisture barrier system materials at temperatures and conditions as recommended by system manufacturer. Protect from damage during construction and while stored onsite. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather resistant air -moisture barrier system and components with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather -tight barrier system. B. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction scheduling conflicts and delays. C. Schedule installation of weather resistant, air -moisture barrier materials and covering of finish exterior cladding within nine months of barrier system installation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Basis -of -Design Products: The design intent for secondary weather resistant, air and moisture barrier system is based on DuPontTM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® and related system components to provide Tyvek Weatherized System. Section l l 12_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page 3 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON 4; j, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Mauagment ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit B. Approved Manufacturer: Proven compliance with performance requirements listed below and Five (5) years experience with high quality manufacturing of non -woven, spun -bonded olefin sheet membrane air -barrier materials: DuPont Building Innovations Contact: 4417 Lancaster Pike 800-448-9835 Chestnut Run Plaza 728 Wilmington, DE 19805 www.iyyek.com C. Alternates, requiring Architect's written approval: 1. "Typar Commercial" by Reemay, Inc., (615-847-7000) 2. "R -Wrap Commercial" Protective Wrap by Simplex Products Division, (517-263-8881). 2.02 Materials A. DuPontTm Tyvek® CommercialWrap& High-performance, flash spun -bonded olefin, non- woven, non -perforated, secondary weather -resistant air barrier. B. Performance Characteristics: TEST PROCEDURE TEST NAME RESULTS ASTM E 1677 — 00; Specification for Air Air leakage at 25mph (40km/h) Type I Retarder (AR) Material or wind pressure less than 0.06 System for Framed cubic feet per minute per square Building Walls foot CM/F2 75Pa =.001) ASTM E 96 — 00; Test Methods for Water 28 perms Method B Vapor Transmission of Materials AATCC Test Method Water Resistance: 280 cm (minimum). 127 Hydrostatic Pressure Test (American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists TAPPI Test Method T- Grams of Paper and 2.7 oz/yd' (minimum). 41D Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area TAPPI Test Method T- Air Resistance of Paper Air infiltration at > 1500 460 (Gurley Hill Method) seconds. Also see ASTM E- 1677 Type 1 above. ASTM D882-00; Method Test Methods for Tensile 38/35 lbs/in (minimum). A Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting ASTM Dl 117 - 99 Test Methods for Non- 12/20 woven Fabrics Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page 4 of 7 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC) CON INCORPORATED Design andConsfrnction Management ARCHITECTURE ASTM E 84 - 01 Test Method for Surface Class A Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit C. Fasteners and accessories: I. Seam Tape: DuPontTM Tyvek® Tape, DuPontTM Building InnovationsTM. 2. Fasteners: a. For wood frame construction: Tyvek® Wrap Caps, DuPontTM Building InnovationsTM - #4 Nails with large 1" inch plastic washers heads. b. For Masonry construction_ Use masonry tap -con fasteners with Tyvek® Wrap Caps 2" inch diameter plastic cap fastener. 3. Sealants: Urethane Sealants which comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, use classifications required for sealing penetrations and masonry ties remaining watertight and that are compatible with air -barrier membrane. Sealants that do not contain silicones. 4. Flashing and related components: a. DuPontTM FlexWrapTM - flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. b. DuPontTM StraightFlashTM - straight flashing membrane material for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations and masonry ties, etc. c. Approval of related components and terminations 4. Substitutions: Only as approved by Architect in writing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are acceptable for installation of air -barrier system in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. a. General: Do not proceed with weather resistant air -moisture barrier system installation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility of satisfactory performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's specific health, safety and environmental recommendations per most recent EPA standards, material safety data sheets, technical bulletins and installation instructions. Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page 5 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and CorisfmciionMangement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit B. Install weather resistant, air -moisture barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing and exterior surfaces indicated per manufacturer's recommendations and the Architect's drawings. If there are conflicts between the manufacturer's recommendations and Architect's drawings, refer conflict to Architect for resolution prior to proceeding with work. a. Install air -moisture barrier sheet membrane after exterior sheathing is installed and before installation of windows and doors. Install lower level air -moisture barrier sheet membrane in horizontal manner prior to upper layers to ensure proper shingling of layers to assure proper moisture resistance. C. Unwrap sheet membrane roll at corner, leaving 6" —12" inches (152-305mm) overlap. b. Overlap air -moisture barrier sheet membrane at exterior corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches. Overlap all seams by a minimum of 6 inches. D. Maintain sheet membrane roll plum and level during installation. c. Extend bottom edge of sheet membrane roll over sill plate interface by at least 3 to 6 inches. Hold the roll vertically and unroll for a short distance horizontally. Use the grid marks provided to line up with stud framing for attachment. d. Ensure barrier is plumb and level with foundation, and unroll extending Air Barrier completely over window and door openings. Secure to foundation with recommended elastomeric sealants as recommended per manufacturer. E. Attach sheet membrane air -moisture barrier to exterior sheathing/masonry substrates indicated: e. Attach sheet membrane to studs through exterior grade plywood, exterior rigid insulation sheathing or exterior grade gypsum sheathing with approved plastic cap nails every 12" to 18" on vertical stud line for wood stud framing. f. Attach sheet membrane to steel -stud framing every 12" to 18" along stud line using approved rust resistant screws with 2 inch plastic washer caps as recommended by air - moisture barrier manufacturer. g. Attach sheet membrane to masonry using tap -con screws with 2 inch plastic washer caps or approved adhesives as recommended by manufacturer. F. Coordinate installation of air -moisture barrier, sheet membrane at all openings and penetrations with installation of flexible flashing materials approved by manufacturer. h. Install appropriate flashing materials at windows, doors, penetrations and inter -sections as recommended by flashing manufacturer's instructions. G. Attach seams of air -moisture barrier sheet membrane with approved seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by air -moisture barrier manufacturer. H. Match approved mock-up installation for proper placement and installation. Repair damaged areas and re -work installations not in compliance with contract documents. Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Barrier.doc Page 6 of 7 Em 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.05. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manage+nerrt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Where required in 1.04 above, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of periodic visits by manufacturer's designated Commercial Field Specialist or representative for periodic observation of weather restistant, air -moisture barrier system installation and application. B. The Owner or their representative reserves the right to complete recommended testing as required by the manufacturer at completion of work to assure warranty requirements and contract document compliance are met. 3.06. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces from damage and protect installed weather resistant, air -moisture barrier system from damage during construction. END OF SECTION Section 1112_072700 AirMoisture Banier.doc Page 7 of 7 PRO CON.O� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design find Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 07 3113 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. MOMEMMUNTURNI'm A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge Vents 4. Accessories B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry and Sheathing" for wood framing and roof sheathing. 2. Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, counterflashings and flashings. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vent and exposed valley lining indicated. I. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected: Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page I of 11 PRO CON4,4111 Brightview North Andover 1 N C O R P 0 RATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design acrd Cmrstntction A?nnagemtrtt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Ridge Vent: 12 -inch long Sample. 4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches square. 5. Self -Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from applicable code organization. G. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles from single source from single manufacturer. C. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. *Asphalt shingle mockup to be included in the overall exterior mockup specified elsewhere. 1. Build mockups for asphalt shingles including related roofing materials. a. Size: min. 48 inches long by 48 inches. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 0 Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 2 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON.; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Mangyement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at -Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well -ventilated, weather tight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather,sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Install self -adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which .manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Manufacturing defects. b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self -seal after a reasonable time. 2. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first five years non -prorated. 3. Wind -Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow -off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 90 mph for five years fromdate of Substantial Completion. 4. Algae -Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five years from date of Substantial Completion. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 3 of 11 PRO LONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Coustntctiarr Krotrtycireee:t North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 5. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's Warranty, or warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering the Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft. of each type, in unbroken bundles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES 0 A. Laminated -Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi -ply overlay construction, glass -fiber reinforced, mineral -granule surfaced, and self-sealing. Product: Certain Teed Corporation; Landmark 25 or Architect approved equal. 2. Butt Edge: Architectural Tab. 3. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Color and blends: Two colors as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. 5. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type I, 36 -inch wide, asphalt -saturated organic felts, non -perforated. B. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene faced (non -aggregate only): ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 -mil- thick sheet; slip resisting, polyethylene -film -reinforced top surface laminated to SBS -modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 4 of 11 PRO CON. Brightview North � Andover i N CO R P O R AT E D Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constnectionblanagemeezt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building permit 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start "A". b. Grace, W.R. & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield 2.3 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV -stabilized plastic ridge vent with non -woven geotextile filter strips and external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Product: Air Vent Inc,; Shingle Vent II 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 18 square inches per linear foot 3. Width: 12 inches 4. Thickness: 7/8 inches 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options B. Peak Ridge Vent (Single Slope): Manufactured aluminum peak vent with non -woven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; complete with end caps. 1. Minimum Net Free Area. 9 square inches per linear foot. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options. 3. Product: Air Vent Inc.; Peak Filter Vent, PFV 152 Series C. Provide other vents as required for a complete installation and as otherwise noted on the architectural drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; stainless-steel or hot -dip galvanized -steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120 -inch diameter, barbed shank, sharp -pointed, with a minimum 3/8 -inch diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Stainless-steel or hot -dip galvanized -steel wire with low -profile capped heads or disc caps, 1 -inch minimum diameter. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 5 of 11 PRO COMAA , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 201 1 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches over and 5 inches beyond each side of down slope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Cricket and Backer Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney or other items extending through roof and 6 inches above the roof plane. 4. Open -Valley Flashings (provide unless otherwise required): Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 1 -inch high, inverted -V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches. 5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2 -inch roof -deck flange and 1 -1/2 -inch fascia flange with 3/8 -inch drip at lower edge. C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirtat slope of roof, and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. 3. If unacceptable conditions are encountered, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 6 of 11 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.2 PREPARATION PRO CON44 INCORPORATED Design and Caisfn�ctrc�rr,tifanagemrnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Single -Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self -adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self -adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self -adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c. C. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low- temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below and as indicated on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover uriderlayment within seven days. Do not use aggregate type underlayment. Per Massachusetts State Building Code, provide ice shield underlayment at all asphalt shingle roofs sloped below four units vertical in 12 units horizontal (4:12). Refer to drawings for roof slope information. 2. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self -adhering sheet underlayment. 3. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 4. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 5. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 6. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 7. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 8. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches. 9. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof -Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches, and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 7 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON440 INCORPORATED Design and Constn:ction btanagemcnt ARCHITECTURE 10. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit D. Concealed Valley Lining: Comply with NRCA's recommendations. Install a 36 -inch wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Fasten to roof deck with roofing nails. 1. Lap roof -deck felt underlayment over valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches. 2. Install a 36 -inch wide strip of valley lining centered in valley. Lap ends of strips at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten to roof deck with roofing nails. 3.4 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as noted in the drawings. 1. Install metal flashings according to'recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of down slope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof -penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 8 of 11 0 Wn PPO GOND. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Managemcut Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fascia at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair -stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair -stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. E. Install asphalt shingles by single -strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according to manufacturers written instructions (comply with code and wind load requirements). 1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots in addition to fastening with additional roofing nails. 2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. G. Closed -Cut Valleys: Not Used. H. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley 1/8 inch in 12 inches (1:96) from highest to lowest point. 1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3 -inch wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open -valley flashings. I. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. J. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. 3.6 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. Refer to contract. Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 9 of 11 PRO CON't';Ak Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design r ca and Consttion tifanagenrent North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. The Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph; C. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; I Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or - deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray -cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 10 of 11 PRO CON4+ Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmetion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. END OF SECTION Section 1112_073113 Asphalt Shingles.doc Page 11 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART I — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 4113 METAL PANEL ROOFING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment and services for all preformed roofing as indicated, in accord with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The Metal Roofing Manufacturer will provide all components required for a complete metal roofing system to include panels, panel clips, trim/flashing, fascias, ridge, closures, sealants, fillers and any other required items. 2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 3. See Division 01 for General Requirements. B. Related work specified elsewhere I. Section 061000. 2. Section 073130. 3. Flashing and sheet metal: Section 076200. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards 1. ASTM E1514, Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems, American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1998(2003). 2. ASTM El 592, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 2001. 3. ASTM E1646, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1995(2003). 4. ASTM E1680, Standard Test Method for Rate ofAir Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems, American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1995(2003). 5. MBMA, Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual, Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Inc., Cleveland, OH, 2000. 6. UL 580, Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Northbrook, IL, 2006. B. Manufacturer's qualifications 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three years experience in manufacturing metal roofing systems. Panels specified in this section shall be produced in a permanent factory Section 1112074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 1 of 7 PRO CON,,, North Andover Senior Housing Dr�j NCORPO�R oTBDs r�r Project Specification North Andover, MA aign and Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit environment with fixed -base roll -forming equipment. A letter from the manufacturer certifying the manufacturer's qualifications shall accompany the product material submittals. C. The Installer shall meet the following minimum criteria a. Have received specific training in the proper installation of the specified system and will be present to supervise whenever material is being installed. b. Have installed five projects of similar scope and magnitude that have been in service for a minimum of two years with satisfactory performance of the roof system. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Testing 1. Metal roofing systems shall be tested in accordance with UL580, Class 90 rating. 2. Metal roof panel systems shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1592 or negative loading. Capacity for gauge, span or loading other than those tested is permitted to be determined by interpolating between test values only. 3. Metal roof panel systems shall have a maximum air infiltration rate of 0.007 cfm/ft2 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680. 4. Metal roof panel systems shall have no water leakage at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E1646. 5. The panels and concealed anchor clips shall be capable of supporting a 300 -pound temporary concentrated load at the panel mid -span in the installed condition. The load shall be applied over the entire panel width. The panels shall support this concentrated load without displaying permanent distortions that would affect the weather -tightness of the SSSRS. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The SSSRS shall be designed by the Manufacturer as a complete system. Members and connections not indicated on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All . components of the system shall be supplied or specified by the same manufacturer. B. Design Loads 1. Design load application shall be in accordance with IBC 2009 with Mass. Amendments. 2. Dead Loads a. The dead load shall be the weight of the SSSRS. Collateral Loads shall be as shown on the contract drawings. Collateral Loads shall not be applied to the roof panels. (Collateral Loads consist of Sprinklers, Mechanical and Electrical Systems, and Ceilings, and shall not be attached to the roof panels.) 3. Live Loads a. The panels and concealed anchor clips shall be capable of supporting a minimum uniform live load of 20 psf. 4. Snow Loads a. The design ground snow loads shall be as defined on the contract drawings. All sources Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 2 of 7 PRC) CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design anst ConstructionManggenunt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit of snow drifting should be identified in the contract documents. 5. Wind Loads a. The design wind speed for the metal roofing .system shall be as defined on the contract documents. 6. Thermal Effects a Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from temperature variation, as specified in the MBMA Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual, 7. Rainfall Intensity a. All exterior gutters and downspouts shall be designed for rainfall intensity based upon a 5 -year recurrence interval for a five-minute duration. All interior gutters, valleys and downspouts shall be designed for rainfall intensity based upon a 25 -year recurrence interval based on a five-minute duration. C. Framing Members Supporting the SSSRS 1. Any additions/revisions to framing members supporting the SSSRS to accommodate the manufacturer/fabricator's design shall be the Contractor's responsibility, and shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer of Record. Deflection requirements shall be in accordance with the applicable building code. D. Roof Panels 1. Steel panels shall be designed in accordance with the AISI 5100. 2. Deflection requirements shall be in accordance with the applicable building code, or as a minimum, L/180 for roof snow load (but not less than 20 psf). E.Accessories and Their Fasteners 1. Accessories and their fasteners shall be capable of resisting the specified design wind uplift forces and shall allow for thermal movement of the roof panel system. Exposed fasteners shall not restrict free movement of the roof panel system resulting from thermal forces, except at designed points of roof panel fixity. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Installation Drawings 1. Submit completed installation drawings and installation details by the manufacturer, to the architect for review. Do not proceed with manufacture prior to review and architectural approval of installation drawings. Do not use drawings prepared by the architect for installation drawings. Details submitted are to include metal roof connection to adjacent materials. 2. Installation drawings shall show methods of installation, elevations and plans of roof and wall panels, sections and details, specified loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents, sealants, interfaces with all materials not supplied by the metal roofing system manufacturer, and proposed identification of component parts and their finishes. Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 3 of 7 PRO CON4i� North Andover Senior HousingORP ORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desigis findDec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Calculations (All calculations noted below shall be reviewed and sealed by an Engineer.) 1. Submit engineering calculations defining cladding loads for all roof areas based on specified building codes, allowable clip loads, and required number of fasteners to secure the panel clips to the designated substructure. 2. Compute uplift loads on clip fasteners with full recognition of prying forces and eccentric clip loading. 3. Calculate holding strength of fasteners in accordance with submitted test data provided by Fastener Manufacturer based on length of embedment and properties of materials. 4. Submit drainage calculations for valley, gutter, and downspout design if applicable. 5. Submit thermal calculations and details of floating clip, flashing attachments, and accessories, indicating the free movement in response to the expansion/contraction effects. C. Physical Samples 1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes. a. Submit one 12 -inch long sample of panel, including clips. b. Submit two 3 -inch x 5 -inch color chip samples in color selected by the architect (owner). c. Submit sample of snow guards to be provided by same contractor as required as well as drawings indicating quantity of guards and their proposed locations D. Test Reports 1. Submit test report showing that metal panels have been tested in accordance with ASTM E1592. 2. Submit test report showing that metal panels meet the water penetration requirements of ASTM E1646. 3. Submit test report showing that metal panels meet the air infiltration requirements of ASTM E1680. E. Metal Roofing System Fabrication Certification 1. Submit a letter from the SSSRS manufacturer verifying that the SSSRS has been produced in a plant that is accredited under the IAS AC472 or AC473 program. F. Installation contractor's qualifications 1. Submit a letter from the manufacturer identifying the installer of the metal roofing system as an authorized installer, approved by the manufacturer [within the last 2 years prior to the start of the installation of the metal roofing system. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver metal roofing system to job site properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage. B. Handling Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 4 of 7 Brightview North Andover PRO CATED , Design andConsfmctlonmapage",ennt Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing metal roofing system to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage. C. Storage 1. Store all material and accessories above ground on well supported platforms. Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation of metal roofing system to prevent condensation build-up between each panel or trim/flashing component. PART 2 — PRODUCTS; Vertical Rib Structural Standing Seam. 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal roof panel 1. Profile: 2 inch high rib x 12 inch wide panel. 2. Seam Type: Mechanically Seamed 3. Minimum Thickness: Panel to meet all specified design loads, but not less than 0.023 inches (24 Gauge). 4. Panel Base Material a. Galvalume® steel sheet, AZ50, conforming to ASTM A792 for painted and unpainted panels. 5. Texture: a. Smooth. 6. Finish a. Selected from manufacturer's standard offering. b. Factory Color Finish: 1. Clear acrylic -coated Galvalume®. B. Concealed Anchor Clips 1. Concealed anchor clips shall be the same as those used during the testing of the roof system. Clip bases shall have factory punched or drilled holes for attachment. Clips shall be made from multiple pieces with the allowance for the total thermal movement required within the clip. Fixed clips are permitted when the manufacturer can substantiate that the system can accommodate the thermal cyclic movement under sustained live or snow loads. 2.02 Miscellaneous Materials A. Fasteners I. Fasteners for steel roof panels shall be zinc -coated steel, aluminum, corrosion resisting steel, or nylon -capped steel, type and size specified below, or as otherwise, approved for the applicable requirements. Fasteners for aluminum roof panels shall be aluminum or corrosion resisting steel. Fasteners for structural connections shall provide both tensile and shear ultimate strengths of not less than 750 pounds per fastener. Fasteners for accessories shall be the manufacturer's standard. B. Components Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 5 of 7 North Andover Senior Housing North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON # INCORPORATED cosign and construction Maaagernent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Components shall be compatible with the roof panel furnished. Flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps, gutters, downspouts, roof curbs, and similar metal components shall not be less than the minimum thickness specified by the SSSRS Manufacturer. Exposed metal components shall be finished to match the panels or trim, as furnished. Molded closure strips shall be closed -cell or solid -cell synthetic rubber or neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride pre - molded to match configuration of the covering and shall not absorb or retain water. Thermal spacer blocks and other thermal barriers at concealed clip fasteners shall be as recommended by the SSSRS Manufacturer. C. Sealants 1. All tape sealant shall be a pressure sensitive, 100 percent solid, sealing tape with a release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sagging, non-toxic, non -staining tape sealant approved by the SSSRS Manufacturer. 2. The SSSRS Manufacturer shall approve all joint sealant that will come into contact with the SSRS. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Panels shall be produced by a SSSRS Manufacturer meeting the requirements of section 1.02B. B. Fabricate trim, flashing and accessories to Manufacturer's specified profiles. 2.04 PREFABRICATED PIPE FLASHINGS A. Pipe penetrations through the roof faces on the front of the building (where the standing seam roofs are located) is not permitted. All roof penetrations are to be on the rear of the building. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examination 1. The Contractor shall verify installed work of other trades that such work is complete to a point where the roofing system installation may commence. 2. Verify that the substructure installation is in accordance with the approved shop drawings and SSSRS Manufacturer's requirements. This specifically includes verifying that secondary structural members and/or decking are installed to meet performance requirements. Coordinate with SSSRS Manufacturer to ensure that the substructure is installed to accommodate the appropriate clip spacing. B. Discrepancies In event of discrepancy, notify the architect (owner). Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 6 of 7 0 10 101 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Corsrmction Managentmt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. - Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the SSSRS in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved installation drawings. B. Install the SSSRS so that it is weather tight and allows for thermal movements. C. Locate and space all exposed fasteners in accordance with the SSSRS Manufacturer's recommendations. Use torque settings to obtain controlled uniform compression for a positive seal without rupturing the neoprene washer. D. Avoid placing pipe penetrations through the panel seams. E. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials (i.e. copper, lead, graphite, treated lumber, mortar, etc.). Water run-off from these materials is also prohibited. F. Comply with SSSRS Manufacturer's approved installation drawings, instructions and recommendations for installation of roof curbs. Refer to SSSRS Manufacturer's standard installation details. Anchor curbs securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural movement. G. Install snow guards per their manufacturer recommendations in a quantity and layout recommended by the snow guard manufacturer. 3.03 CLEANING, PROTECTION A. Dispose of excess roofing materials and remove debris from site. B. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Protect work against damage until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the architect (owner), any work that becomes damaged prior to final acceptance. D. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions per the SSSRS Manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 1112_074113 Metal Roofing.doc Page 7 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,4 INCORPORATED Design: and Constntction Mmnagenarnt ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 46 33 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit VINYL SIDING & TRIM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. General Conditions, Special Provisions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this Section. 1.2 Work Included A. Vinyl siding, trim, soffits, band board, shutters, air infiltration barrier and pre -fabricated vinyl decorative louvers if shown. B. Installation shall conform to manufacturer's nailing patterns to withstand 90 mph wind loading as indicated on the Structural Drawings with increased attachment at corners, roofs, etc. 1.3 Related Sections A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 076200 — Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage instructions for each product specified. B. Sample: 12" long by actual width sample for each product specified. C. Color Chart: Each product specified. D. Quality Control: 1. Certifications: Approval of Local and State Building Codes in duplicate. E. Contract Closeout: 1. Warranty: In Duplicate. 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Reference Standards: Applicable requirements of standards and specifications referenced herein apply to the work of this Section. B. Certification: Certify that siding meets the standards described in the following documents. 1. Vinyl siding and Trim: SBCCI-8732; ICBO-4072; and BOCA 77-93. 2. Approval of Local and State Building Codes. C. Field Sample:Mock up 1. Provide minimum 200 square foot field sample of wall siding, trim and soffit installation on a mock-up of the exterior wall to be constructed at the at the job site for approval prior to start of work. Sample may NOT be part of the finish work. 2. Upon approval, field sample shall be maintained as standard of workmanship for the project. Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Pagel of 6 PRO CON4# North Andover Senior Housing INCORPORATED Anngcmerit E�rDProject Specification North Andover, MA Design Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. WIND RESISTANCE: Verify wind resistance ratings for Project Location. 1. REFER TO PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA 2. Wind -Resistance -Test Characteristics: Where wind -resistance vinyl siding, trim and attachments are required to meet code, provide documentation certifying compliance. As drawings indicate, the basic wind speed for this building =110 mph Exposure B. Provide manufacturer's recommended additional installation methods to satisfy code requirements and indicated in warranty the additional installation methods. Component and Cladding elements shall be installed to satisfy the requirements of the IBC 2009 with Massachusetts Amendments. Building Components and Cladding" which are elements of the building envelope that do not qualify as part of the main wind force -resisting system, shall be desi eng_d and installed to satisfy the wind load criteria for the building. This shall include increases for Exposure as well as for height,_ edge strips, and end zone conditions as defined by the Building Code. Identify each bundle of material and fasteners with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Where drawing indicates project wind speed conditions in excess of 60 MPH, provide manufacturer's recommended additional installation methods to satisfy code requirements and indicated in warrantee the additional installation methods. 1.6 Delivery and Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to job site I unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and content identification. B. Store materials as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7 Warranty A. Manufacturers of siding and soffit materials together with the installers shall jointly warrant the materials and installation specified herein for a period of five (5) years from date of acceptance by the Architect Representative against seepage and leakage of water into the building. B. Manufacturer's Standard Limited 50 year transferable or lifetime warranty against cracking, delamination, fading, flaking or other similar problems. C. If the materials specified herein fail to perform at any time during the five (5) year term, the manufacturer and the installer immediately following written notification acting as one responsible agent shall repair or replace all damaged areas as required at no expense. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 Clapboard Siding A. Vinyl Siding (integrally colored, vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679. 1. Product: Monogram 46 D4" Clapboard Rough Cedar 2. Texture: Wood Grain 0 Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Page 2 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON440 INCORPORATED Design find CO),SNnction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 3. Minimum nominal thickness: Not less than .044 inch. 4. Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): 3/4 -inch. 5. Nailing Hem: Post -formed, double thickness, .088 inch thick. 6. End Locks: Post -formed, factory notched ends of horizontal panels to form self- aligning, elfaligning, overlapping joints. 7. Flame Spread Rating: Not greater than 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 8. Smoke Development Index: Not greater than 390 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Fire Endurance Classification: ASTM E 119, 1 hour rated. 10. Rate of Burning: ASTM D 635; self -extinguishing with no measurable extent of burn. 11. Colors for Vinyl Siding: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. 2.2 Shingle Siding A. Shingle Siding (integrally colored, vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679. 1. Product: Cedar Impressions, D7" Straight Edge Rough -Split; CertainTeed Corp. 2. End Locks: Post -formed, factory notched ends of horizontal panels to form self - aligning., overlapping joints. 3. Flame Spread Rating: Not greater than 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Smoke Development Index: Not greater than 390 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 5. Fire Endurance Classification: ASTM E 119, 1 hour rated. 6. Rate of Burning: ASTM D 635; self -extinguishing with no measurable extent of burn. 7. Colors for Vinyl Siding: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. 2.3 Exterior Vinyl Ceiling and Soffit A. Exterior Vinyl Ceiling: Integrally colored, vinyl soffit complying with ASTM D 4477. 1. Product: Beaded Triple 2" Soffit; CertainTeed Corp. 2. Pattern: 6 -inch exposure in triple 2 inch, beaded edge board style. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Ventilation: Non -vented, except where venting is indicated or required. Where venting is required, provide concealed venting. 5. Minimum nominal thickness: Not less than .039 inch. 6. Minimum Profile Height: 3/8 -inch. 7. Flame Spread Rating: Not greater than 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 8. Smoke Development Index: Not greater than 390 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Fire Endurance Classification: ASTM E 119, 1 hour rated. 10. Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. B. Vinyl Soffit: Integrally colored, vinyl soffit complying with ASTM D 4477 1. Product: Universal Triple 4" Soffit; CertainTeed Corp. Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO CON4,�o North Andover Senior Housing INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design ame Constmction Manag mrnt Dec. 20, 2011 !� Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �J 2. Pattern: 12 -inch exposure in V -grooved, triple 4 -inch board style. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit, unless otherwise indicated. Not less than 5.85 sq.in/sq.ft. 5. Minimum nominal thickness: Not less than .040 inch. 6. Minimum Profile Height: 7/16 -inch. 7. Flame Spread Rating: Not greater than 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 8. Smoke Development Index: Not greater than 390 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Fire Endurance Classification: ASTM E 119, 1 hour rated. 10. Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. 2.4 Vinyl Vents A. Gable Vent Louver: Oval gable vent fabricated of molded, U.V. stabilized polypropylene copolymer with integral color with lock -on trim ring and sealed -in fiberglass screening. 1. Product: Oval Gable Vent; Mid-America Building Products or Architect approved equal. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 3. Refer to drawings for locations. 2.5 Accessories A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. B. Vinyl Accessories: Where vinyl accessories are indicated, provide integrally colored vinyl accessories complying with ASTM D 3679 except for wind -load resistance. 1. Texture: Wood grain. 2. Provide accessories manufactured by same manufacturer of siding and matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flashing: Aluminum flashing at heads of openings and where indicated are provided in Division 6200 "Finish Carpentry". 1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating, same color as siding where installed. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single -component urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (non -traffic) and for uses M, G, A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. E. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to metal framing through gypsum sheathing, use large head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 -inch or 3 full screw -threads into metal framing. K Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Page 4 of 6 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConshuctFan Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. For fastening vinyl to wood blocking, use aluminum or other corrosion resistant fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view, provide pre -finished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened. 2.6 Air Infiltration Barrier A. Refer to Section 072700 1. Manufacture to provide accessories as required for a complete installation as indicated and specified. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Architect Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.2 Preparation A. Verify governing dimensions of building. Clean and repair adjoining work or substrate effecting proper installation of this work. 3.3 Installation, General A. Install siding, soffits and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's standard details and the Drawings. B. Install Air Barrier over entire building as specified in Section 06100.- Rough Carpentry. C. Installation of materials specified within this Section shall be in accordance with the best practice, with all joint members true and plumb. D. Provide for expansion and contraction of siding. Do not drive nail heads tight against nailing lock. Nail size shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Joints or laps shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Locate end joints over center lines of framing. Stagger end joints & separate by at least two courses. F. Hold siding 1/4" away from floors, soffits, doors, windows, and louver frames for sealant application as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. G. Provide sealant applications at all locations as recommended by the siding manufacturer. 3.4 Installation of Clapboard Siding A. Spacing: Allow space between both ends of siding panels and trim for thermal movement. B. Fastening: Where siding is installed over exterior gypsum sheathing, fasteners shall penetrate through sheathing into framing system. Hold head of screw back at proper distance to permit movement of siding during expansion and contraction. C. Joints: Overlap horizontal panel ends one-half the width of factory pre-cut notches. When lapping ends without factory pre-cut notches, lap ends 1 inch. D. Where top course of siding terminates at eaves, soffits and similar conditions, provide L - cover and L -receiver to conceal top attachment. Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Page 5 of 6 PRO CON,$$& North Andover Senior Housing INCORPORATED cnrnt Project Specification MDesi�4 North Andover, A Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 E. Provide trim pieces in one piece without joints, except where lengths exceed manufactured lengths. 3.5 Installation of Shingle Siding A. All shingle siding panels to be installed from left to right. Install panels so left end of panel overlaps right panel to conceal lap joint. B. Install starter strip and vertical J -trim in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow space for expansion and contraction in all accessory pockets: 1. 1/4 -inch if temperature is above 40 deg. F. 2. 3/8 -inch if temperature is below 40 deg. F. C. Center Pinning: Each panel contains a short vertical slot, perpendicular to the nail slots, that indicates the center of the panel. To maintain an aesthetically correct rib width at the lap joint for warm and cold temperatures, it is necessary to limit panel movement. Locate short, vertical slot on nail hem and "center pin" panel using one of the following options: 1. Install a nail on both ends of the same nail slot. 2. Pin panel by fastening directly through nail hem. 3. Drill a 3/16 -inch diameter hole through nail hem and substrate and place a single fastener through the hole. D. Install nails in center of remaining slots, 16 inches o.c. Leave room between fastener head and nail flange for expansion and contraction. Do not hard nail fasteners. E. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for completing installation of siding and for installation of panels under and over openings. 10 3.6 Installation of Exterior Vinyl Ceilings and Soffits A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.7 Installation of Vinyl Accessories A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, including instructions for fusing polystyrene backer and for creating finished edges. 3.8 Protection and Clean Up A. Protect adjacent surfaces and in-place construction from damage during installation of materials specified herein. B. Disturbed areas of other trades shall be immediately restored at no additional cost. C. Remove all trash and debris at end of each day's work. END OF SECTION Mm Section 1112_074633 Vinyl Siding & Trim.doc Page 6 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. General Conditions, Special Provisions and Division I - General Requirements apply to this Section. 1.2 Work Included A. Fiber -cement siding panels, trim, air infiltration barrier. B. Installation shall conform to manufacturer's nailing patterns to withstand 110 mph wind loading as indicated on the Structural Drawings with increased attachment at comers, roofs, etc. 1.3 Related Sections A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 076200 — Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants D. Section 090000 — Exterior Painting 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage instructions for each product specified. B. Sample: 12" long by actual width sample for each product specified. C. Color Chart: Each product specified. D. Quality Control: 1. Certifications: Approval of Local and State Building Codes in duplicate. E. Contract Closeout: 1. Warranty: In Duplicate. 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Reference Standards: Applicable requirements of standards and specifications referenced herein apply to the work of this Section. B. Certification: Certify that siding meets the standards described in the following documents. 1. Labeling: Provide fiber -cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Approval of Local and State Building Codes. C. Field Sample: Mock up 1. Include mock-up specified in other sections and the Architect's drawings. Sample may NOT be part of the finish work. 2. Upon approval, field sample shall be maintained as standard of workmanship for the project. Section 1112_074646 Fiber -Cement Siding.doc Page 1 of 5 PRO CON # North Andover Senior Housing INCORPORATED �tstntction gM���t Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. WIND RESISTANCE: Verify wind resistance ratings for Project Location. 1. REFER TO PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA 2. Wind-Resistance-Test Characteristics: Where wind-resistance vinyl siding, trim and attachments are required to meet code, provide documentation certifying compliance. As drawings indicate, the basic wind speed for this building =110 mph Exposure B. Provide manufacturer's recommended additional installation methods to satisfy code requirements and indicated in warranty the additional installation methods. Component and Cladding elements shall be installed to satisfy the requirements of the IBC 2009 with Massachusetts Amendments. Building Components and Cladding" which are elements of the buildinIz envelope that do not qualify as part of the main wind force -resisting system, shall be designed and installed to satisfy the wind load criteria for the building. This shall include increases for Exposure as well as for height, edge strips, and end zone conditions as defined by the Building Code. 3. Identify each bundle of material and fasteners with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Where drawing indicates project wind speed conditions in excess of 60 MPH, provide manufacturer's recommended additional installation methods to satisfy code requirements and indicated in warrantee the additional installation methods. 1.6 Delivery and Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to job site I unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and content identification. B. Store materials as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7 Warranty A. Special Warranty for Fiber -Cement Siding and Trim: Manufacturer's standard form in which B. manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. C. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturer's Standard Limited 50 year transferable or lifetime warranty against cracking, delamination, fading, flaking or other similar problems. D. If the materials specified herein fail to perform at any time during the five (5) year term, the manufacturer and the installer immediately following written notification acting as one responsible agent shall repair or replace all damaged areas as required at no expense. 8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. Section 1112_074646 Fiber -Cement Siding.doc Page 2 of 5 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 Fiber -Cement Panels PRO CON4;', INCORPORATED Iksign and Constmaion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber -cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie; http://www.hardie.com/; HardiePanel Vertical Siding or comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; http://www.certainteed.com/; Weatherboards Smooth Vertical Siding. b. MaxiTile, Inc; a California corporation; http://www.maxitile.com/; MaxiPanel. 2. Panel Texture: Smooth texture. 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer suitable for field painting. 4. Paint Finish: Panels located in highly visible areas, such as IL and AL porches and porte cocheres; balcony structures visible from the IL entry circle; balcony portico shown at 6A/A4.3; terrace/first floor panels at AL entry facade; and first/second floor panels at IL entry fagade, are to receive finish paint per section 09000. 2.2 Panel Trim A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, trim boards, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie; http://www.hardie.com/- Harditrim or comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; http://www.certainteed.com/; Weatherboards FiberCement Trim. b. MaxiTile, Inc; a California corporation; http://www.maxitile.com/; MaxiTrim. c. Azek Corp; www.azek.com, trim only. 2. Scope: Trim boards as shown on building elevations on the Drawings. 3. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Texture: Smooth. 5. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer suitable for field painting. B. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. Section 1112_074646 Fiber -Cement Siding.doc Page 3 of 5 PRO CONS. North Andover Senior Housing IINDesiC OR and OR TED 444 Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flashing: Aluminum flashing at heads of openings and where indicated are provided in Division 62000 "Finish Carpentry". 1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating, same color as siding where installed. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single -component urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (non -traffic) and for uses M, G, A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. E. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle -head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of into substrate. 1/4 inch 3. For fastening fiber cement, use hot -dip galvanized or stainless-steel fasteners. 2.3 Air Infiltration Barrier A. Refer to section 07 27 00. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Architect Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.2 Preparation A. Verify governing dimensions of building. Clean and repair adjoining work or substrate effecting proper installation of this work. 3.3 Installation, General A. Install siding, soffits and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's standard details and the Drawings. B. Install Air Barrier over entire building as specified in Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. C. Installation of materials specified within this Section shall be in accordance with the best practice, with all joint members true and plumb. D. Provide for expansion and contraction of siding. Do not drive nail heads tight against nailing lock. Nail size shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Joints or laps shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Locate end O joints over center lines of framing. Stagger end joints & separate by at least two courses. Section 1112_074646 Fiber -Cement Siding.doc Page 4 of 5 PRO coN14, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design �„a co„Seruct,'on ns�„„se,nrnr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Hold siding 1/4” away from floors, soffits, doors, windows, and louver frames for sealant application as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. G. Provide sealant applications at all locations as recommended by the siding manufacturer. 3.4 Installation of Fiber -Cement Panel A. General: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. B. Install fiber -cement siding and related accessories. 1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for completing installation of siding and for installation of panels under and over openings. 3.5 Installation of Trim Boards A. Glue all end joints of running trim. B. Glue all butt joints. C. Glue the top edge of all horizontal trim pieces to prevent wind infiltration. D. Use a glue acceptable to manufacturers of both trim boards and siding. E. Use fasteners acceptable to trim manufacturer. F. Prior to field painting, fill nail holes with caulk specified. G. See Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting” for painting of PVC trim in field. 3.6 Protection and Clean Up A. Protect adjacent surfaces and in-place construction from damage during installation of materials specified herein. B. Disturbed areas of other trades shall be immediately restored at no additional cost. C. Remove all trash and debris at end of each day's work. END OF SECTION Section 1112_074646 Fiber -Cement Siding.doc Page 5 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRC} CON44� INCORPORATED Desirs and COnstniction Manabensent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 53 00 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 1. l RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fully Adhered or mechanically fastened EPDM membrane roofing system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Protection sheet membrane adjacent to kitchen exhaust fan. B. Section includes the installation of acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips furnished under Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." C. Related Sections: I. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for furnishing acoustical deck rib insulation. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for roof insulation. 4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to Page 1 of 12 Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc PRO CON ioi k Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Constriction Management North Andover, MA _ Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing. { 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field -of -roof locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Roof paver, full sized, in each color and texture required. 4. Walkway pads or rolls. 5. Termination bars. 6. Battens. 7. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 8. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. E. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 2 of 12 Brightview North Andover IPN� pO CON4� vesig�:andconstmCnanManagement Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from applicable code organization for this jurisdiction. H. Field quality -control reports. I. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is approved for membrane roofing system identical to those used for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane roofing system approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. D. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. E. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire -resistance -rated roof assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. F. Pre -installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 3 of 12 PRO CONo# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design med Conshnction Mimngenient North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, substrate board, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 4 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRC CON# INCORPORATED Desigxi and Cons tetio» Nlanagerttertt 2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type H, reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. C. Roofing Products International, Inc. d. Versico Incorporated. C. Or equal approved in writing by Architect 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS (some items may not be applicable) A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. f. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. g. Non -membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. B. Sheet Flashing: 60 -mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 5 of 12 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design anJConsMictionx1an4gt7nrnt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene non -reinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60 -mil - thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non -aromatic solvents, grease, and oil. Provide adjacent to kitchen exhaust fans as shown on the drawings. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. E. Modified Asphaltic Fabric -Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard modified asphalt, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric -backed membrane roofing. F. Water -Based, Fabric -Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard water-based, cold -applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric -backed membrane roofing. G. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic -rubber polymer primer and 3 -inch -wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. H. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single -component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing. I. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. K. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, pre -punched. L. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. M. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T - joint covers, in -seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. N. Liquid coating, specifically formulated for coating EPDM membrane roofing, as follows: 1. Type: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. Must comply with specified UL assembly. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: O Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 6 of 12 PRO CON ,40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design: and Co„stmctionManagentenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. b. Architect approved equal. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. Must comply with specified UL assembly. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. 1. Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vapor - retarder application. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM approved roof insulation. B. Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, which complies with requirements indicated for materials, compliance with referenced standards (including UL assembly for the roof/ceiling), and other characteristics. The aged R Value of the insulation is to be not less than six (6) per inch which is to be verified by HVAC engineer calculations of total envelope to meet the minimum energy requirements for the building, but insulation shall not be less than 3 -inches thick. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 7 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 2.7 WALKWAYS PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid -rubber, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads (or rolls), approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Note: It is the responsibility of the roofing contractor to provide walkways as required to provide access to the service side of all rooftop equipment directly from the roof hatches. Refer to mechanical drawings for rooftop unit locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface .plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 8 of 12 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Const—tion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of deck to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' written instructions. 3.4 VAPOR -RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene -film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Refer to detail drawings for additional information. 1. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated at drains. D. Install insulation in multiple layers under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Install layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 12 inches in each direction with no gaps, to form a complete thermal envelope. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of hailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 9 of 12 PRO CON 4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constntction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. E. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Apply a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt to substrate at temperature and rate required by manufacturer and install fabric -backed membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. F. in addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters. G. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. H. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. 1. Apply a continuous bead of in -seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. I. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. J. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. K. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 10 of 12 Brightview North Andover I�N' O CO ON,# �sigaaaacanstmetinnManagement Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit L. Adhere protection sheet over membrane roofing at locations indicated. 3.7 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Not permitted. 3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated and as required to provide access to all rooftop equipment. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 11 of 12 PRO CON .414# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, NIA Design and Conshuciion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION Section 1112_075300 EPDM Membrane Roofing.doc Page 12 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRC) CON44, INCORPORATED Design and Coustnuttiun Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 62 00 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 1. Manufactured roof drainage system. 2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 3. Step Flashing. 4. Formed equipment support flashing. 5. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field - assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. E. Maintenance data. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. Page 1 of 10 Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc PRO CON ,�� , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA vesipand CoustmetimManagewnt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Mockups: Incorporate flashing in previously specified mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. C. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pre -treat with white or light-colored, factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. 2. High-performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C4R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below. Prepare, pre -treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2 -coat system: Manufacturer's standard 3 -coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and pre -painted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 2 of 10 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design 41;d constmrtjon Alanage,,,e„r Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1. For Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non -hardening, non -skinning, non-drying, non -migrating sealant. H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, non -corrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 3 of 10 PRO CON,4;�j, Brightview North Andover I N C OR P O R AT E D Project Specification North Andover, MA Desipand ConstntctionMmregentent ^ Dec. 20, 2011�l Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit J. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. K. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet fabricator for waterproof and weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. L. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non -corrosive, size and gage required for performance. M. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or other soft closed cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as fill under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. N. Stack Flashing: Pipes penetrating shingled roofs shall be ARFCO self-sealing neoprene collar with aluminum flange. Coordinate color of stacks with Architect. O. Soffit Vent (Through Soffit Scupper Pipe): 4 -inch diameter vent plug, white color, located directly below scupper drain pipe for concealment. Set vent plug in bead of white silicone sealant to secure in vinyl soffit. P. Splash Blocks: Pre -cast, reinforced concrete splash block, 12 inches wide by 30 inches long. 0 2.3 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2. Finish: Mill With manufacturer's standard color coating. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. 0 Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 4 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4i� INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit B. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non -corrosive metal. E. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate non-moving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- long sections. Furnish flat - stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Provide the following components: I. Gutter: "K' Style with 1 -inch wing; 5 inches wide 2. Gutter Hangers and End Caps: For "K" Style gutters 3. Downspout: Round, 3 -inch diameter, with associated elbows and straps. 4. Drop Outlets (Gutter to Downspout): Round, 3 -inch diameter with wire strainer. 5. Thru Wall Scupper: Outlet box — overflow scupper, 4 by 6 inches. B. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel with phosphatized finish, 26 gage. 2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch- long, but not exceeding 12 -foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 -inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 5 of 10 PRO CON10 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATEDProject Specification Design and Consdnctionm(mageme"t Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 -inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials (refer to Architectural details): 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch thick. 4. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick. 2.7 FABRICATED FLASHING SCHEDULE A. Roof Edge Flashing for Membrane Roofing: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch long, but not exceeding 10 -foot long sections, 0.040 -inch thick aluminum. 1. Profile: SMACNA, Figure 2.5C; continuous edge clip; 6 -inch flange on roof; 12 -inch wide concealed backup plate. B. Roof Edge Transition between Membrane Roofing and Shingles: SMACNA, Figure 4-1213; continuous edge clip and 6 -inch flange on roof, no elevated edge, 0.040 inch thick aluminum, color to blend with shingle color. 1. Joint Style: Butt joint with 12 -inch wide concealed backup plate. C. Drip Edge at Shingles: SMACNA, Figure 4-22D, formed to detail with additional extended drip, minimum 0.024 -inch thick aluminum. D. Rake Edge at Shingles: SMACNA, Figure 4-22C, formed to detail with additional extended . drip, minimum 0.024 -inch thick aluminum. E. Change of Slope Flashing for Shingle Roofs: SMACNA, Figure 4-22A, formed to detail, minimum 0.032 -inch thick aluminum, color to blend with shingle color. F. Wall to Roof Shingle Flashing: Shop formed to detail, with continuous clips, minimum 0.024 - inch thick aluminum, color to blend with shingle color. G. Shingle Step Flashing: SMACNA, Figure 4-21A similar; lace base flashing in shingle courses; formed to detail, minimum 0.024 -inch thick aluminum, color to blend with shingle color. H. Two-piece Counter Flashing at Siding: SMACNA, Figure 4-3C modified; turn vertical leg of receiver up 8 -inches behind siding and under sheathing wrap. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 6 of 10 0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction ManagMwnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit I. Louver Sill Flashing and Miscellaneous Metal Flashing: Shop formed to detail, continuous clips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 F.11 I:3, 3.2 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. I. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 7 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws, metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre -tinning where pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic -coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 8 of 10 0 v 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,$j INCORPORATED Design and Contraction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low -slope roofs. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing. E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 -inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 -inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24 -inch centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. Section 1112_076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 9 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Pito CON # INCORPORATED Design and Constnution Man4gement ARCHITECTURE 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION Section 1112 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.doc Page 10 of 10 0 01 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 I.O.GENERAL PRO COM# INCORPORATED Design and Constnution Manngmnent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION INCLUDES, but is not limited to, the following: A. Roof Hatch(s) - Prefabricated roof hatches with insulated integral support curbs, operable hardware, OSHA safety railings, and counter -flashings. B. Roof curb and equipment supports C. Nailers and Accessories D. Pre—roofing meeting to coordinate the entire roofing construction with all related trades including, but not limited to, framing, EPDM roofing, sealants, windows, MEP/FP (penetrations), etc. E. Ladder for Roof Hatch F. Alternates G. Exclusions 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: include, but are not limited to, the following: A. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Section 01 50 00 B. ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 C. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 D. Wind loading and exposure, seismic criteria Drawings 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Submit product data which shall include general construction, configurations, jointing methods, and locations when applicable, and fastening methods. Include manufacturer's instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, rough -in requirements, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Work. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE - Subcontractor's responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following: Standards: Comply with the following: A. SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. B. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. C. OSHA 1910.23 & 1910.27 D. Supplier label to satisfy local Energy Conservation Code. Section 1112_077200 Roof Accessories.doc Page I of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.5.WARRANTY: PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design and constniction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Manufacturer: 1. Warrant standard for ten year period minimum against materials defects and water intrusion; include labor and materials required for repairs or remedial work at no additional cost. 2. Co -warrant installation with roofing installer for ten year period including water intrusion; include labor and materials required for repairs or remedial work at no additional cost. B. Begin warranties at Date of Substantial Completion. 2.0. PRODUCTS: 2.1. Roof Hatch (s) A.Roof hatch with Hatch Railing 1. Unit: 2'-6" x 4'-6" size, single leaf type. -Meet or exceed all applicable OSHA fall protection regulations including, but not limited to (29 CFR 1910.23) and 1910.27 -High visibility safety yellow color - -Non-penetrating attachment -Standard self-closing gate feature - Corrosion resistant construction - 10 -year warranty 2. Provide tie off devices, handrails, and other protection as required by the latest OSHA safety standards and with Ladder -Up Safety Post. 3. Curb: 11 gauge aluminum, finish to match roof, with one inch rigid insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing system; extended flange for mounting. 12" min height unless noted otherwise. 4. Cover: 11 gauge aluminum with one inch glass fiber insulation retained by 18 gauge inner liner. Continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal. Color as selected by Architect. 5. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated type with compression spring operators, positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasp inside; automatic hold -open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release, cadmium plated finish. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's recommended type. 7. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. B. MANUFACTURERS 1. The Safety Rail Source - Model # RHSR-SS 5430 2. JL Industries — Hatchguard 3. Bilco Company - "Bil-Guard TM" - Hatch Railing System C. ACCESSORIES Wood Nailers; Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2" thick. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Where removing exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide non - Section 1112_077200 Roof Accessories.doc Page 2 of 4 0 CJ Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON.44, INCORPORATED Design anri ColiSfniCtion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit removable fastener heads. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coating. 2.2. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports: Fabricate from 0.0747 -inch- thick, galvanized structural steel; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide units with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness and roof deck slope. Provide preservative -treated wood nailers at tops of curbs. Provide manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid insulation. 2.3. Roof Hatch Ladder: A. Aluminum fixed vertical ladder, including mounting brackets, that affixes to the wall and complies with ANSI A14.3. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Precision Ladders, LLC, "Model FL" Morristown TN 37816 or Architect approved equal. 2.4. Snow Guard (s) 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 2. Samples: Submit one full-size snow -guard in color and material selected for pproval. A.Quality Assurance 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide snow -guards manufactured by a company with an established and audited quality assurance program. B. Delivery, Storage, Handling 1. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage. C. PRODUCTS 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Precision Molding Company, Inc, 87 Spring Lane, Plainville, CT 06062, Tel. 860-229-7669, Fax. 860-747-4832, www.snowauards.com. Alternate manufacturers may be used with written approval from the Architect. 2. Polycarbonate Plastic Snow -Guards: "The King", manufactured using ultraviolet stabilized polycarbonate plastic. a. Metal Roofing: Attach per manufacturer recommendations. b. Color: Clear. d. Layout and quantity: Per the manufacturer for the roof sizes and pitches indicated E. EXAMINATION 1. Prior to start of installation, inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable for installation of snow -guards. 2. For snow -guards installed with sealant, verify forecasted temperature will be above 20 degrees (F) for 48 hours after installation. Section 1112_077200 Roof Accessories.doc Page 3 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 F. INSTALLATION PRO CON4i; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Snow -Guard Installation: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Attach snow - guards securely. Clean adjacent surfaces after installation per roof manufacturer's instructions. 3.0. EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A.Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. Installation A.General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated. C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. E. Operational Units: Test -operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.3.CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Remove all excess adhesive from joints, wall mounted equipment, door frames, and other similar items. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall -covering manufacturer. Replace strips that can not be cleaned. END OF SECTION Section 1112_077200 Roof Accessories.doc Page 4 of 4 0 3 0 PRO CON440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consfn:ctfon Manageiaent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 07 8100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed SFRM. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving SFRM. 2. Division 07 Section "Building Insulation", "Penetration Firestopping", "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems". 3. Division 09 Section "Painting" for intumescent paint. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SFRM: Sprayed fire -resistive material. B. Concealed: Fire -resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM. 2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire -resistance rating, including the following: Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 1 of 11 PRO CON,40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Applicable fire -resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1) For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire -resistance design designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are not permitted. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire -resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. 3. Treatment of SFRM after application. C. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. C. SFRM Testing: A qualified testing and inspecting agency may be engaged by the Owner or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. O Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 2 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manage cent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire -resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire -resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct -applied protection tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface -Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." G. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following: L Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements. 3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for SFRM during and after installation. 4. Review surface conditions and preparations. 5. Review field quality -control testing procedures. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 3 of 11 PRO LONA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATEDn �1ge,►�enr Proiect Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire -resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced -air circulation until fire -resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: I. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire -resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. 3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire -resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fire -resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire -resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire -resistive material. 5. Do not begin applying fire -resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. 6. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire - resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. M Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofng.doc Page 4 of 11 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design nod ConstnictionMnangement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 7. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire -resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire -response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SFRM A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Concealed Cementitious SFRM: a. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6 or MK-6/HY. b. Isolatek International Corp.; Blaze Shield I1. C. Or equal approved by Architect C. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows: Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory -mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 5 of 11 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proi ect Specification North Andover, MA Design and GoustmChonManq ent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire -resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire -resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12- A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire -resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced fire -resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25. inch. b. Where the referenced fire -resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness. C. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire -resistance designs whose fire -resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft. 3. Bond Strength: 200 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75 -inch minimum thickness of SFRM. 4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 9. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface -burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame -Spread Index: 0. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 6 of 11 PRO CON,4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmetlan Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.2. AUXILIARY FIRE -RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire -resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire -resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire -resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire -Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire -resistance designs indicated and fire -resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, comer beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire -resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of intumescent mastic coating fire -resistive material. Include pins and attachment. F. Sealer for Sprayed -Fiber Fire -Resistive Material: Transparent -drying, water -dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed -fiber fire -resistive material. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cafco Bond -Seal" by . Isolatek International Corp. G. Cement -Based Topcoat: Factory -mixed, cementitious hardcoat formulation recommended in writing by manufacturer of SFRM for trowel or spray application over concealed SFRM. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cafco 800" by Isolatek International Corp. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 7 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PRO CON4i� INCORPORATED Design and Constmction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire -resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire -resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire -resistive material. B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed. C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof -top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed. D. Conduct tests according to fire -resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire -resistive materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire -resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 8 of 11 0 n 01 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project 4301112 3.3. APPLICATION, GENERAL PRO CON 40 INCORPORATED Design anti ConShudian Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Comply with fire -resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire -resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated. B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part i "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. C. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire -resistance ratings and fire -resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire -resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type -recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath to substrate. D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire -resistive material where required to achieve fire -resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated. E. Extend fire -resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire -resistive covering in a single course. F. Spray apply fire -resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. G. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply SFRM that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied. H. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over which they are applied. 3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire -resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article. B. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed -fiber fire -resistive material as required to obtain designated fire -resistance rating. Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 9 of 1 i PRO CON.40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Conshuction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM where required. E. Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM where required. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspection and prepare reports: 1. SFRM. B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed f '� with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed , applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire -resistance design. 1. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 2. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 3. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000 -sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide -flange, structural -steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire - resistive material. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance O Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Page 10 of 11 PRO CON440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design end Constmetion Mmragment Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire -resistance criteria, but not less than 1501bVsq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. 4. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. 3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas. D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. END OF SECTION Page 11 of 11 Section 1112_078100 Applied Fireproofing.doc Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON,4; INCORPORATED Design and Constrnttion Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Penetrations through fire -resistance -rated floor and roof construction, including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire -resistance -rated walls and partitions, including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Joints at walls, floors, top of wall (head of wall) at floor and roof assemblies, edge of floor slabs at exterior walls, and openings around structural members which penetrate floor and wall assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8133 - Mineral Fiber Fireproofing 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. Performance Requirements: 1. F -Rated Through -Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Through -Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T -rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: a. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. b. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire -resistive shaft enclosures. c. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature -rise rating. d. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 -inch -diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area. Section 111207 84 00_firestopping.doc Page 1 of 6 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Uesigi and constrnction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3. Fire -Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire -resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM El 19, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire - resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. 4. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. a. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture -resistant through -penetration firestop systems. b. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. C. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through -penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 (01330) with the following supporting data: Provide product data for each type of product specified. a. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. 2. Provide product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 3. Provide product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 4. Provide manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when there is no UL, Warnock Hersey or OPL system available for an application. Engineering judgment must include both project name and the contractor's name who will install firestop system as described in judgment drawing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Section 1112_07 84 00_firestopping.doc Page 2 of 6 PRC CON e4m Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Through -penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through -penetration firestop system products .bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through -penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through -penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory", by Warnock Hersey or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Information within construction documents referring to specific design designations of through -penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain through -penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. D. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy". E. Coordinate Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through -penetration and joint firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. F. A manufacturer's direct representative shall be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures per manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Engineering Judgements: For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Section 111207 84 00 firestopping.doc Page 3 of 6 PRC) CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desigie and Comimmetion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do no install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1. For penetrations involving CPVC piping, provide through -penetration firestop systems which include materials that have been tested to be compatible with CPVC piping. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing ,0 and inspecting agency for the designated fire -resistance -rated systems. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: Permanent Forming/Damming/Backing Materials, Including the Following: a. Semi -refractory Fiber (mineral wool) Insulation b. Ceramic Fiber c. Sealants Used in Combination with Other Forming/Damming Materials to Prevent Leakage of Fill Materials in Liquid State d. Fire -rated Formboard 2. Temporary Forming materials 3. Substrate Primers 4. Collars 5. Steel Sleeves C. Under normal environmental conditions, all material used shall be non -corrosive to metal and compatible with synthetic cable jackets. D. Provide all miscellaneous items required to attach materials as specified and shown on Drawings. Section 111207 84 00_firestopping.doc Page 4 of 6 PPO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design anti COUS&WHon Mmrogernent Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (800) 992-1180 2. 3M Brand Fire Protection Products (800-328-1687) 3. Tremco, Inc. (800-562-2728) 4. Hilti, Inc. (800-879-6000) 2.03 INSTALLATION DETAILS: Refer to Drawings. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Systems shall include all necessary items for use in areas as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond. Do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the f restop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. Section 111207 84 00_firestopping.doc Page 5 of 6 PRO CON�;� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmdion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through -penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through -penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean -off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. C. Promptly remove any excess materials from any exposed finish surfaces. Repair floors, walls, or other surfaces which have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during installation of fire barrier materials. END OF SECTION Section 111207 84 00 firestopping.doc Page 6 of 6 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design find Constriction !Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 84 43 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire -resistance -rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials". 2. Division 07 Section "Firestopping". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each fire -resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a_ particular fire -resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's fire - protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire -resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire -resistive joint systems. Section 1112_078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 1 of 6 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desigffind cwsstmcnonmanagmient Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Shop Drawings: For each fire -resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire - resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire -resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire -resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Fire -resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire -resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire -resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire -resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire -resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." C. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire -resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure fire -resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. U Section 1112_078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 2 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.6. COORDINATION PRO CONO, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire -resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire -resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire -resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire -resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire -resistive joint systems are installed. Fire -resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire -Resistance -Rated Construction: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire -resistance -rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. Fire -Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of construction they will join. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. C. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. Nelson Firestop Products. f. NUCO Inc. g. RectorSeal Corporation. h. Specified Technologies Inc. i. 3M Fire Protection Products. j. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. k. USG Corporation. C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. Section 1112_078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO CONef,&, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design andCoustrurtion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit I. L -Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfrn/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. C. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. Nelson Firestop Products. f. NUCO Inc. g. RectorSeal Corporation. h. Specified Technologies Inc. i. 3M Fire Protection Products. j. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. k. USG Corporation. D. Exposed Fire -Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. VOC Content: Provide fire -resistive joint systems that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 10 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. F. Accessories: Provide components of fire -resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Section 1112 078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 4 of 6 Ka Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.2 PREPARATION PRC) CON10 INCORPORATED Design and Conshuction Mmra"e"t ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire -resistive joint systems to comply with fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire -resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire -resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire - resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire -resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill- voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. Section 1112_078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PRO CONS, INCORPORATED Design and Consf wdjan Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 f1 Issued For Building Permit ��JJ A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or fire -resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire -resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire -resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire - resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire -resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- �10 resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Section 1112_078443 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems.doc Page 6 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART I - GENERAL PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manogement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Sealant and Backing Materials including primers, backer rods, bond breakers and accessories. B. Work shall include providing sealant at intersection of construction components within and exterior to building, to be installed by one single source subcontractor. C. All backer rods shall be closed cell materials. D. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELESEWHERE Section 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Wallboard Systems E. NOTE: SEALANT INSTALLATION MUST BE DONE BY INDIVIDUALS TRAINED IN THE APPLICATION OF SEALANTS. Siding Subcontractor, Masonry Subcontractor, etc. MAY INSTALL SEALANTS ONLY WITH CERTIFICATION FROMSEALANT MANUFACTURER OF TRAINING AND APPROVAL TO INSTALL MATERIALS BEING WARANTEED. F. The sealant Manufacturer is to recommend appropriate silicone based joint sealant and primer if required for use in vinyl to vinyl and vinyl to 25 mil self adhered rubber flashing. Pull test by manufacturer's technical representative to be performed to confirm sealant adhesions and flexibility. Pull test to be certified by the sealant Manufacture's representative. 1.2 Qualifications A. This installer shall coordinate with all other related work on this project to determine the required sequencing of the work. B. Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide a 5 -year product warranty. C. Applicator warranty: 1 -year workmanship warranty. 1.3 Warranty for Sealants used with Insulating Glass Units A. Verify that sealants used in contact with laminated and/or sealed insulating glass units will not damage lamination, sealants, or void warranty used in double glazed units. 1.4 General Scope: Provide sealant at all interior and exterior joints including exposed and concealed joints as listed below: Around louvers, doors, frames, windows, entrances and other wall openings. Control and expansion joints in concrete and paving. Seal joints in toilet areas and bathrooms, and other joints where shown. A. Exterior locations included but not limited to: 1. Control and Expansion joints in brick, etc. 2. Door and window frames and adjacent construction 3. Under thresholds 4. Construction joints 5. Refrigerant, HVAC, plumbing, sprinkler, electrical, and other Div. 15 and 16 items Section 1112_079200 Joint Sealants.doc Pagel of 4 PRO CON # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design And CQnstnictran Management Dec. 20, 2011 /1 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �J lines entering building 6. Wall and soffit joints 7. Metal to concrete 8. Junction between vertical and horizontal surfaces 9. Joints in coping caps and exposed roof flashing 10. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete. 11. Joints between metal panels. 12. Joints between different materials. 13. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. 14. Joints between brick veneer and concrete patios and walkways. 15. Other joints as indicated. B. Interior locations including but not limited to: 1. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances and adjacent construction 2. Under thresholds except marble and carpet -to -carpet transitions. 3. Construction joints 4. Door bucks not flush with thresholds. 5. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 6. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. 7. Tile control and expansion joints. 8. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. 9. Joints on underside of precast beams and planks. 10. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 11. Edge of all vinyl wallcovering installations at junctions with other materials, including ceiling joint. 12. Bottom edge of mirror channels. 13. Top and edges of tub surround. 14. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 15. Joints at countertops, vanities. 16. Under thresholds except marble. 17. Door bucks not flush with thresholds. 18. Tubs, lavatories, water closets, and other plumbing fixtures. 19. Perimeters of fixed kitchen equipment. 20. Joints of mirrors in exercise rooms and wet areas. 21. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. C. Sanitary: 1. Tubs and lavatory tops. 2. Around fixed kitchen equipment and counter tops. 3. Joints at mirrors located in wet areas. 4. Joints between ceramic the and wall. D. See other sections for sealing to be performed as part of the work of that section and not specified herein. Section 1112_079200 Joint Sealants.doc Page 2 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General: PRO CON44 INCORPORATED Design and Constniction Manageme"t ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Colors: As selected by the Architect. Submit samples of full range of manuf. colors. B. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. C. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be non- staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.2 Sealants: Provide products specified below or comparable products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Dow Coming Corp. 2. GE Silicones 3. Sonnebom Bldg. Products Div., ChemRex Inc. 4. Bostik Inc. 5. Pecora Corp. 6. Tremco, Inc. A. Interior Sealant joints not subject to movement: 1. Interior Sealant: a. "Chem -Calk 600" - Bostik Construction Products, Huntington Valley, PA. b. "AC -20" - Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, PA (215-723-6051) C. "Acrylic Latex" - Tremco, Cleveland, OH (216-292-5000) 2. One part, non -sag, acrylic latex meeting the requirements of ASTM C834 with 10 -year life expectancy. 3. Colors: Match sealant material to colors of adjacent materials. Manufacturer's standard colors. B. Exterior Joints: 1. Exterior joints: Sealant composition shall be a silicone type, single component, non sag, moisture curing, capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and shore a hardness of 26. Sealant shall conform to ASTM C920 with a 20 year life expectancy. a. Tremco Spectrum 1 b. Sonnebom Building Products C. Pecora 864 Silicone — Pecora Inc. d. Dow Coming 795 2. Colors: Match sealant material to colors of adjacent materials from manufacturer's full range of colors OR per the designers finish schedule. 3. Joint Sizes: Joint sizes vary and may exceed 7/8" in width as required. Confirm tolerances of joint materials. No joints less than 3/8". Section 1112_079200 Joint Sealants.doc Page 3 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and ConstnirtionManagMnent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit D. Sanitary sealant, interior use I. One component silicone rubber sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and FS -S-001543, Class A. Provide acid cure, nonporous bond type, mildew resistant silicone rubber sealant where both joint faces are metal, glass, plastic, tile, or other non -porous material. a. Omni -Plus by Sonneborn (612-496-6000 Shakopee, MN) b. Dow 8640 by Dow Corning (517496-4000, Midland, MI) C. GE 1702 by General Electric Silicones (518-237-3330 Waterford, NY) 2. Colors: Match adjacent surfaces OR per the interior designers finish schedule. 2.2 Back -Up Materials A. Bond Breaker Tape: 1. Pressure Sensitive "470 or 481 polyethylene" - 3M Adhesives, Coatings and Sealers. B. Joint Backer Rod: 1. Joint Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene size to produce 25 percent minimum compression when installed in joint. 2.. Closed cell neoprene sized to fit cavity. Refer to drawings. 3. Sofrod, open cell, and sheathed open cell shall NOT be allowed. C. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non -staining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. Provide cleaner conditioner required for glass and glazed surfaces as recommended by sealant manuf. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of Installation means acceptance of all existing conditions making this Contractor responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered at his expense. A. Install appropriate sealant at all perimeter joints of frames (window, curtain wall, window wall, door, louver, fixtures, etc.) except as otherwise indicated. B. All interior and exterior joints required to be sealed for movement, watertightness, weathertightness and/or appearance. C. Primer: Cure primer according to manuf recommendations prior to applying sealant. D. Backing Materials: Install in continuous lengths as long as practical. E. Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements of ASTM C962. 3.2 Cleaning A. Clean adjoining surfaces to eliminate evidence of overflow, spillage or migration of sealant. END OF SECTION Section 1112_079200 Joint Sealants.doc Page 4 of 4 0 'J Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY PRO CUNT INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 07 95 00 EXPANSION CONTROL A. This Section includes architectural joint systems for building interiors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Project Specification March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and -details. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)" and 521 CMR Massachusetts accessibility code. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint system and fire -barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall -to -ceiling assemblies shall be subjected to hose stream testing. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall joint systems with roof expansion assemblies specified in Division 07. Section 1112_079500 Expansion Control.doc Pagel of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRO CON.�, INC 0RPO RATED ksign and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. B. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, and other accessories as required for complete installations. 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEM A. Product Basis of Design: 1. GFPS-100 as manufactured by The C/S Group. a. Continuous extruded flexible gasket. b. Continuous extruded aluminum floor frame. C. For use at carpet floors d. Attach with #10 x 1 '/2" wood screw and Rawl plug 18" o.c. or as recommended by the manufacturer. e. Provide Model RFX-1F fire barrier at rated assemblies (UL #FF -D-0044). f. Color as selected by the interior designer from the manufacturer's full range. 2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufactur&s recommended repair grout. Section 1112 079500 Expansion Control.doc Page 2 of 3 0 Ee PRO CON.,;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA vesigrrand ConsinrctionManagement March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction. D. Cast -In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 18 inches o.c. C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Coordinate so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. END OF SECTION 07 95 00 Section 1112_079500 Expansion Control.doc Page 3 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON,+ INCORPORATED Design and Constmtction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00 (07920) — Joint Sealants 2. Section 08 14 00 (08200) - Wood Doors 3. Section 08 7100 (08710) - Door Hardware 4. Section 08 80 00 (08800) - Glazing 5. Section 09 90 00 (09900) — Painting 6. Section 26 00 00 (16000) — Electrical 1.02 DEFINITIONS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic -coated steel sheets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. SDI - Steel Door Institute Publications SDI 105 through 128 B. ANSUSDI A250.3 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames" C. ANSUSDI A250.4 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings D. ANSUSDI A250.6 'Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames" E. ANSUSDI A250.8 - SDI -100 'Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" F. ANSUSDI A250.10 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames" G. ANSUSDI A250.11 'Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (Formerly SDI - 105)" H. ANSI/DHI Al 15.1G "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" Section 1112 08 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 1 of 12 PRO CON44). Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design and Constmaion Managennent Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE I. ANSI/DHI Publication A115.IG J. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows K. NFPA 105 "Hot Smoke Test" L. NFPA 252 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" K—.1V1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. UL Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 2. UL lOB "Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" 3. UL 10C "Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" 4. UL 1784 "Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies" 5. UL Procedure No. R-3791 N. Warnock Hersey, ETL SEMKO division of Intertek (WHI) Publications: 1. "Certification Listings" O. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) Publications: 1. "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 (01330) with the following supporting data: 1 . Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire -resistance and temperature -rise ratings, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified. 2. Submit Shop Drawings and product data indicating pertinent dimensioning, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations and installation details, and the following: a. Elevations of each door design. b. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. C. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. d. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. C. Details of each different wall opening condition. f. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. g. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 3. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 2 of 12 N] 10 PRO CON44 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstmctionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hollow metal doors and frames shall be fabricated in accordance with standards and specifications established by Steel Door Institute, complying with ANSI A250.8-1998 (SDI- 100)_"Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Acoustical qualities: Doors shall have a minimum sound transmission classification of 29 as tested under ASTM E90-61 T. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80 are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics per ASTM E2074, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated. Test pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252, or UL IOC to comply with local code requirements. D. Opening assemblies shall meet the requirements of NFPA 105 Hot Smoke Test. E. All stairwell doors and other doors as may be shown on the Drawings shall comply with the temperature -rise rating of 450 degrees F. maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. F. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project. 1. Comply with the requirements of the International Building Code with testing in accordance with UL IOC for positive pressure door test. a. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. b. Doors shall be labeled to certify compliance. C. Provide installation instructions attached to each door in a manner that assures availability to the installer and building official. G. Fire -Rated, Borrowed Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257, or UL 9. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. 2. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames. Section 1112 08 11 13 metal doors &. frames.doc Page 3 of 12 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Label each item, before shipping, with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size, door swing, and other pertinent information. C. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Owner's Representative. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. D. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 -inch -high wood blocking. Avoid using non -vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISTRIBUTOR A. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers: 1. Contract Hardware, Inc. (404-350-9408) a. Contact: Mark Tew 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. The Steelcraft Door and Frame Products, Division of Ingersoll-Rand (800-930.8585) 2. Ceco Door Products, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (615-661-5030) 3. Republic Builders Products, Division of MAGNATRAX Corporation (800-733-3667) 4. CURRIES Company, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (800-377-3948) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 10 11 and A568, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. -: O Section 1112_08 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 4 of 12 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConsMsction hfanayement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A1008 and A568, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A591, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. D. Hot dipped zinc coated steel shall be of the alloyed type and comply with ASTM A924 and A653. E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A153, Class B. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A153. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD -P-21035 or SSPC Paint 20. I. Hardware reinforcing on doors and frames shall comply with ANSI/SDI A250.6. The physical performance levels shall be in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Fabricate steel frame units to comply with ANSUSDI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Location and Type: All metal frames for doors shall be formed of steel to sizes and shapes indicated. Frames shall be fabricated with continuously welded corners unit type construction at joints, unless noted otherwise. Frames shall be furnished with Underwriter's Laboratories label, as required, at the place of manufacturer. C. Type and Gauges of Metal: Metal for frames shall be cold -rolled or hot -rolled, pickled and oiled, steel sheets with clean, smooth surfaces. Except where other gauges are indicated or specified, frames shall be fabricated from steel, not lighter than the standard Manufacturers Standard Gauge (MSG) as referenced in ANSI A250.8: Interior Frames of 16 -gauge (0.053 -inch) thick steel sheet for: a. Door openings wider than 48 inches. b. Level 2 steel doors. Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 5 of 12 PRO CON40� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design and Constmction Management Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE c. Wood doors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exterior Frames of 16 -gauge (0.053 -inch) thick steel sheet for: a. Door openings wider than 48 inches. b. Level 2 steel doors. c. Level 3 steel doors. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 3. Exterior frames shall be 0.30 per square foot per side, hot -dipped galvanized or electrolytic zinc -coated steel with a stretcher level degree of flatness. D. Workmanship and Design: The finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Fabricate members straight and true with comer joints well -formed, in true alignment and fastenings concealed where practicable. E. Drywall Frames: 1. Drywall frames shall be the same as flush frames except: 2. Frames shall be formed with double return backbends to prevent cutting into drywall surface. Frames shall be knocked down, designed to be securely installed in the rough opening after wallboard is applied. Mitered corners shall be reinforced with a wedge lock corner clip to provide a firm interlock of j ambs to head. 3. Each jamb shall have an adjustable anchor located 4" from the top of the door opening to hold frame in rigid alignment. Frames shall have a welded -in base anchor attaching plate in each jamb for field installation of loose base anchors or frames shall have two (2) dimpled holes in each jamb for anchoring base of frame with screws. F. Forming Corner Joints: Joints for welded -type frames shall be mitered and continuously arc - welded for full depth and width of frame and trim. All contact edges shall be closed tight and all welds on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush. G. Provision for Hardware: Frames shall be prepared at the factory for the installation of hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Welding of hinges to frames will not be permitted. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped to templates to receive all mortised hardware. Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cut-outs. Lock strikes shall be set out and adjusted to provide clearance for silencers. 1. Provide preparation for rubber silencers on interior room door frames; three per strike jamb at single doors. 2. Provide concealed metal reinforcements for hardware as required. The gauges of metal for reinforcement shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of hardware and the thickness and width of doors to be hung in the frame, provided that the gauges used are not lighter than those required by Commercial Standard CS -242-62. a. Galvanized for exterior doors. Page 6 of 12 0 Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Coastrnction Manage»tent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit -2-.3. All frames shall have a security anchor system installed on strike jamb consisting of a compression anchor at 3-1/2" from head of door frame and a "Z" type security anchor at 45" above floor. H. Wall Anchors: Provide metal anchors of shapes and sizes required for the adjoining type of wall construction. Locate anchors on jambs near the top and bottom of each frame and at intermediate points not over 24 inches apart. Galvanized anchors for exterior frames. 1. Anchor types shall be varied to provide positive fastening to adjacent construction 2. Provide UL approved anchors for UL labeled frames. Anchorage of UL label frames shall conform to printed UL test report for door frame manufactured. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016 -inch -thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. Required at all door strikes. Floor Anchors: Provide floor clips of not less than 16 -gauge steel and fasten to bottom of each jamb member for anchoring frame to floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for 3/8" diameter anchor bolts. K. Shipment: For welded type frames, provide temporary steel spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after installation. Otherwise, remove spreaders after frames are set and anchored. In place of spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tapes to show their location, size, door swing, and other pertinent information. 2.05 FRAME INSULATION A. Glass fiber, semi-rigid board, 2" thickness, unfaced, 3 lb. density. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Type 703" - Owens -Coming Fiberglass Corp (800-438-7465) Substitutions: None accepted 2.06 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Fabricate steel door units to comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical - endurance level. 2. Interior Flush Door: Page 7 of 12 Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc PRO CON,A, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proi ect Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConshuctionManagenrent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Model: "L Series"; Steelcraft Manufacturing Company, or approved substitution by other listed manufacturers. b. Level 2, Heavy Duty, 18 -gage, and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). C. Thickness: 1-3/4" d. Cores: Per ANSUSDI A250.8 1) Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated Kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. e. Minimum hardware reinforcing gages shall comply with Table 4 of ANSUSDI A250.8. 3. Interior Temperature Rise Doors a. Temperature rise doors shall be the same as flush door construction except core material shall be designed to produce the 450 degree temperature rise rating. b. Cores: Per ANSI/SDI A250.8: c. Mineral -Fiber Board: For labeled doors if a temperature -rise limit is required. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical - endurance level: a. Flush Door: 1) Thickness: 1-3/4" 2) Model: "L Series"; Steelcraft Manufacturing Company, or approved substitution by other listed manufacturers. 3) Level 3, Extra Heavy Duty, 16 -gage, and Physical Performance Level B (Extra . Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). b. Exterior doors shall be fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C236 or ASTM C976 on fully operable door assemblies. Provide thermal -rated assemblies with U -factor of 0.24 or better. Hot - dipped galvanized or electrolytic zinc -coated steel with a stretcher level degree of flatness. c. All exterior swing -out doors shall have the top and bottoms closed to eliminate moisture penetration. Door tops shall no have holes or openings. C. Door Louvers: 1. Furnish and install louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020 -inch thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.032 -inch thick steel frame. Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 8 of 12 0 0 Mm PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constnsction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Provide stationary sight -proof louvers with inverted V -Shaped or Y -Shaped blades of sizes and locations as shown on the Drawings. b. Provide Fire -Rated Automatic Louvers of sizes and locations as shown on the Drawings at fire -rated openings. 1) Louvers to be constructed with movable blades closed by actuating fusible links and listed and labeled for use in fire -rated door assemblies of type and fire - resistance rating indicated by the same testing and inspecting agency that established fire -resistance rating of door assembly. D. Door Fabrication: 1. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Workmanship: The finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects; form molding members straight and true with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are invisible after finishing. 3. Door Sizes and Clearances: Doors shall be of type, sizes, and design indicated. The clearances for doors shall be 1/8" at jambs and heads and 3/4" at bottom, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Clearances at meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 1/4" (1/8" on fire doors). a. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by ANSI/NFPA 80. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 5. Provisions for Hardware: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors at factory to receive all mortise -type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive surface -applied hardware, except push plates and kick plates; drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware will be done in the field. Provide metal reinforcing plates for surface -applied hardware as required. The gauges of metal for reinforcing plates shall comply with manufacturer's recommendation for the type of hardware used and the size and thickness of doors, provided that the minimum requirements are as follows: a. Hinge Reinforcement - 3/16 Inch b. Strike Reinforcement - I I Gauge C. Closers and Bracket Reinforcement - 12 Gauge d. Mortise Covers - 26 Gauge e. The gauges used shall not be lighter than those required by Commercial Standard CS 242-62. 6. Glazing Preparation: a. Doors indicated to have glass shall have non -removable glazing stops on the exterior sides of the openings and removable or snap -on type stops on the inside of the openings. Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 9 of 12 PRO CONS. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consbnrction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit b. Provide manufacturer's vision lites of sizes and locations as shown on Drawings, recessed into the door face similar to "Dezigner Trim" by Steelcraft, or approved substitution by listed manufacturers. C. Stops shall be UL approved for UL labeled doors. E. Doors with labels shall carry Underwriters label on the door and on the frame. They shall be constructed to meet Procedure No. R-3791 and R-3821, as listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 2.07 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish steel doors and frames after assembly. B. Factory Prime Coating for Field Painted Finish: Unless specified otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. 1. Clean and chemically treat metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence. Follow with a dip or spray coat of lead-free, rust -inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer on all exposed surfaces. Finished surfaces shall be smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 3 EXECUTION 0 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames. 1. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of standard steel frame connections before frame installation. 3.02 GENERAL A. Fabricate and install hollow metal units and their accessories in strict accordance with these Specifications and manufacturer's data. B. Hardware: For installation see Division 08, "Door Hardware" Section of these Specifications. 3.03 PLACING FRAMES A. Comply with the provisions of the "Steel Door Institute" 105, unless otherwise indicated. B. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced until permanent anchors are set. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 10 of 12 K PRO CON'0;a Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and constnutionMa,<N V'"t Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Frame Insulation: Install insulation in frames of gypsum board partitions. Cut insulation to full width of frame throat and friction fit within the jamb and head. Pack solid around perimeter of the frame. D. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts, or with power fasteners. Build wall anchors into walls or secure to adjoining construction as indicated or specified. Where frames require ceiling struts or other structural overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceiling or structural framing above as indicated and specified. 1. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 2. In metal -stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. E. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.04 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. B. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. C. Smoke -Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT A. Check and re -adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. B. Remove and replace defective work including doors or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. C. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. D. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.06 TOUCH-UP A. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Repairs: Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler, allow to cure, and sand flush for invisible joint with adjacent metal surfaces. Sand rust areas and apply touch-up paint using air drying paints compatible with shop finish. Damaged doors or frames that cannot be repaired shall be replaced. Section 1112 08 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 11 of 12 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.07 CLEANING: PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and ConstmetionManagemcnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. B. Upon completion, metal surfaces of doors and frames that are completely factory finished shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched -up as recommended by the door manufacturer. END OF SECTION Section 111208 11 13 metal doors & frames.doc Page 12 of 12 0 0 PRO CON,,;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consiniction Mana&w1errt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD, FIBERGLASS AND PRE -ASSEMBLED DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Types of doors required include the following: a. Prehung interior two panel face hollow core doors with wood frames, trim and hinges (within apartments). b. Prehung insulated metal entry door units with adjustable frames (unit entry doors). c. Hollow -core doors with hardboard faces. d. Fiberglass patio doors at apartment balconies and patios. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 11 13— Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware 3. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 4. Section 09 90 00 - Painting 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 01 33 00 with the following supporting data: I. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing specifications. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. a. Submittals shall use the same designations for door and hardware numbers as shown on the Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. WDMA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A "Architectural Wood Flush Doors", and I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors" of Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", and Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content", of Section 1112_08 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 1 of 9 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Cuysfn�cfion 1Ylnuagcuicrrt North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of WDMA quality standard. B. Sound Transmission Class: All entrance doors from interior corridors, together with their perimeter seals shall have a minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) of 26. C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category II materials, . unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. D. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80, are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E152, and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide rated stiles on fire rated doors. a. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. b. Doors shall be labeled to certify compliance. c. Provide installation instructions attached to each door in a manner that assures availability to the installer and building official. E. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from one source. F. Inspection: General Contractor shall provide in writing to Architect, an inspection of all doors and frames for conformance to specifications. Inspection shall include checking for fit tolerance, plumb and level, as well as proper hardware and operation. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Individually Package doors in vented poly bags with identifying marks prior to shipment. Doors shall not be removed from bags until ready to hang. After hanging, bags shall be placed over doors to provide protection until area in which doors are hung is free of construction traffic. 2. Store doors off the floor at least 3" in an area that is not susceptible to standing water or high moisture. Store doors in an upright position with spacers or corner caps separating each door. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on Shop Drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. Section 1112_08 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 2 of 9 PRO CON o Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstntctionAlanagernerrt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-11, "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content". 1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to and run concurrent with, and not be a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, Installer and General Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42" x 84" section, or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 inch span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period after date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. b. Stile & Rail Interior Doors: 1) Non -Rated: Life of installation. 2) 20 minute Fire Rated: Life of installation. 3) 45, 60, or 90 minute Fire Rated: One year from date of Substantial Completion. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's Warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREHUNG INTERIOR HOLLOW CORE DOORS AND FRAMES A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. VT Industries Inc. (800-827-1615) 2. JELD-WEN, Inc. (800-535-3936) 3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc., a Masonite Company (570-473-3557) Section 111208 14 00 -Wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 3 of 9 PRO CONS; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design. andConstnrcfivn,Naarngesrcnf North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Prefabricated interior wood door frames; WMMPA WM 1 and WMMPA WM4. Jambs: Grade P (paint or overlay); one piece flat jamb, open dadoes, two-piece split jamb. Casings: Stock size moldings WMMPA WM4, Grade P — Paint grade for opaque field finish softwood, Casing 11/16 inches x 3-1/4 inches WM 445 finger jointed; miter and spline corners; glue and staple to frame. C. Hardware: Pre -route frame and provide installed hinges with radius corners. 1. Finish of hinges; US5 (609) unless noted otherwise. D. Standard Hollow Core Doors (1-3/8 inch thick): AWI-02, Type SHC. 2 panel design; Ladder corrugates or honeycomb core with lock blocks; wood vertical stiles 1 inch minimum; wood top and bottom rails 1-1/8 inches minimum. Hardboard face panels, oil treated 1/8 inch thick, die formed enamel primer; 2 mils dry film thickness; neutral color; compatible with finish paint; smooth, free from sags or runs. E. Pre -fitting and Pre -Machining: NWWDA Standard prefit door clearances in frame: Jamb opening width minus 3/16 inches +/- 1/32 inch; head; 3/32 inch clearance +/- 1/32 inch. Hardware, pre -machine and install hinges and bore for latch set. F. Locations: Swing type hollow core doors within IL, AL and ALZ apartments and as indicated on door schedule. 2.02 RESIDENTIAL ENTRY DOORS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 2. Or equal approved in writing by the Architect. B. Door and frame assembly fire rated or labeled as indicated on door schedule. C. Door Panels: 24 gage galvanized steel faces; precision molded Ponderosa pine stiles and top rail; 2 -panel design; insert -molded steel and neoprene bottom rail and seal; all bonded to a 1-3/4 inch thickness imprecision fixtures by a foamed -in-place polyurethane core. D. Frames: Ponderosa pine; fully rabbeted and reversible; mortise reinforced with steel security plate. E. Hinges: (Standard In -Swing) Three 4 inch templates, butt type steel self-closing sprig hinges per operating leaf; removable pins; fully mortised to jamb and door edge. F. Weatherstripping: Polyethylene covered foam compression type; coped for overlap at corners; reinforced to prevent shrinkage. G. Fabricate units in accordance with ISDSI Standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified. H. Finish: Steel shall .be given one coat of manufacturer's standard electrostatically - applied, baked -on rust inhibitive primer. Wood members shall be prime painted. Section 111208 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doc O Page 4 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC} CON40 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managentettt ARCHITECTURE I. Hardware by manufacturer subject to approval of the Architect. J. Threshold: No threshold required. K. Fire rating: Refer to door schedule for required fire rating. 2.03 INTERIOR HARDBOARD DOORS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Hollow Core Doors with Hardboard Faces for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Hardboard 2. Core Construction: SHC (Standard Hollow Core) 3. Grade: Economy 4. Size: Size as shown on Drawings. 5. Frames: Pre -fit with frame and pre -machined for hardware for all but single -fold, bi-fold and bi-pass. 6. 2 panel design 7. Finish of Hinges: US5 (609) 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CraftMaster Interior Doors. b. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. c. Simpson Door Company. 2.04 FIBERGLASS PATIO/BLACONY DOORS A. EnergyStar rated Hinged Patio Doors. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Product; Thermatru doors; www.thermatru.com: In -swinging center hinged patio doors with one fixed light. 2. Door Model No.: PDF; RF or FL 3. Finish of hinges: US5 (609). 4. Accessories: a. ADA compliant threshold b. Low -e glazing c. Manufacturer's screen door. 2.05 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Louvers (except at full louver doors): Door manufacturer's standard solid -wood louvers, unless otherwise indicated. Size as indicated on Mechanical Drawings. Section 1112_08 14 00_wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 5 of 9 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Carrsfnecfiox aVlxxetgCrtrext North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Fire Door Louvers: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire rating of one and one-half hours and less. Size as indicated on Mechanical Drawings. 1. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch thick, hot -dip zinc coated and factory primed for paint finish. C. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces, painted to match laminate at laminate doors. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At 20 -minute, fire -rated, wood -core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. D. Wood -Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: At fire -rated door locations except, 20 -minute rated doors, provide manufacturer's standard wood -veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire rating indicated. E. Refer to Section 08 80 00 for glazing. 2.06 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: i 1. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL or Warnock Hersey requirements. Attach fire rating label to door and frame. 2. Stiles, rails and core shall be fully bonded together with adhesive and sanded smooth prior to laminating of face veneer. 3. Cross bands and faces for PC and FD type doors shall be laminated to core by the hot or cold plate process. 4. Factory-prefit and pre -machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre -machining. b. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. c. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115 -W series standards, and hardware templates. d. Factory drill pilot holes for hinge and lock face plate screws. e. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre -machining. Section 111208 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doe Page 6 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 5. Undercut: PRO CON,Oj INCORPORATED Design and C(nstr"ctign Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1) Apartment Entry -Door= 1/4" above threshold. 2) Apartment Bathroom Door = 3/8" above threshold. 3) Doors swinging over carpet = 3/4" above top of concrete subfloor. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full -width, solid -lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. D. Pre -Assembled Doors and Frames: 1. Coordinate with Section 08 7100 for all hardware requirements, including installation. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING A. Transparent (Stain) Finish: 1. Factory -applied by Manufacturer following AWI Section 1500 requirements for Custom Grade "TR -6". Finish shall consist of a four -coat process with a minimum 3 -mil dry film thickness on all surfaces. a. Apply vinyl wash coat by spray or roller;, fully pad into surfaces and wipe off. b. Apply stain by spray or roller; fully pad surfaces and wipe off. c. Sand lightly using 220 -grit paper. d. Apply final finish of two coats of clear, transparent, catalyzed vinyl resin by spray or roller. e. Stain Color: Satin -finish stain in color as approved by the Interior Designer. B. Opaque (Painted) Finish: I. Factory -applied by Manufacturer following AWI Section 1500 requirements for Custom Grade. Color as selected by the Interior Designer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Section 1112_08 14 00_wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 7 of 9 PRO CON 4,; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware". B. Manufacturer's Instructions. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Job -Fit Doors: 1. Field -verify dimensions of each new installed door frame; trim each door as required to properly fit each frame within specified dimensional tolerances; unequal trimming may be required. 2. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire - rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and matching. a. Trim non -rated doors equally from both sides when fitting for width and from top and bottom when fitting for height. Do not trim more than 3/4" from each edge. 3. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf /1-N{ at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative �J floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. 5. Bevel non -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. 6. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge, trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Hang doors and adjust for proper clearances and smooth operation without binding. 1. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 2. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. E. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Section 09 90 00, "Painting" 2. Seal field cuts in top and bottom rails and for hardware with 2 coats of a VOC compliant paint or varnish. 3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. Section 111208 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doc O Page 8 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design and Constnertion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Clean door and dry wipe with a soft cloth. D. After installation, protect doors from damage as recommended by manufacturer during subsequent construction activities. Damaged doors will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. E. Protect doors from damage. Replace damaged units at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Section 1112_08 14 00 wood and fiberglass doors.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON'el INCORPORATED Lksign and Construction Mnwr gvnent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 14 33 STILE AND RAIL WOOD ENTRY DOORS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior stile and rail wood entry doors and sidelights. 2. Interior stile and rail wood vestibule doors. 3. Factory finishing stile and rail wood doors. 4. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. 5. Pre -hanging doors in frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. I. Include details of construction and glazing. 2. Include factory finishing specifications. B. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. C. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Doors to be factory finished, and finish requirements. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For all doors. Section 1112 081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 1 of 6 PRO CON+ Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Co:tstructinn ManagementNorth Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction E. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory -finished doors. F. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer. - C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of quality standard referenced in Part 2. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather -tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. O Section 1112_081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 2 of 6 PRO CONJt Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED W Project Specification North Andover, MA Vesrgn and Constntction Alanagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Exterior Doors: One year. b. Interior Doors: One year. C. Insulating Glass Vision Panels: Three years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelights, including components, with wet -use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelights, including components, with either dry - use or wet -use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea -formaldehyde resins. 2.2 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Stock exterior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by Architectural Products Division, 1255 G.A.R. Highway Somerset, MA 02726, tel: 508-235-4397, or approved equal by project Architect, meeting specified construction and fabrication requirements as noted. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: a. Classic Craft Mahogany — Accu -Grain Technology b. Blackstone Glass w/ Black Nickel caming 3. Construction, General: Section 1112_081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA t)tasign and nstniction Alanagment Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction a. Grade of Doors and Sidelights for Transparent Finish: AWI Custom Grade and specified requirements. 4. Doors and Sidelights: a. Species: Mahogany; kiln dried, moisture content not exceeding 8 percent. b. Door thickness: 1-7/8 inches C. Stile and Rail Widths: 6 inch Stile, 7 inch top rail, 5 inch int. rail, 10 inch bottom rail. d. Molding Profile: Manufacturers' standard. e. Raised -Panel Thickness: Manufacturers' standard, but not less than 1-1/2 inches. f. Glass for Openings: At interior door and sidelights provide 1/4 -inch thick, uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, or laminated glass. Provide insulating glass for exterior doors and sidelights. Insulating units shall be made from 2 lites of 1/4 -inch thick, fully tempered float glass with low -e coating on third surface and argon filled for 3/4" total. g. Sidelite: Thickness 1-7/8 inches 1. Stiles and Rail: 3 inch stile, 7 inch top rail, 10 inch bottom rail. 2. Material: Mahogany 3. Glass: 3/4" clear tempered IG/Lead Glass 5. Frames: a. Mahogany; kiln dried, solid wood, AWI Premium Grade rabbeted frame. b. Jambs: 6-3/4 inch SR C. Hinges: 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" FBB!(! NRP US26D Square d. Weatherstrip: Bronze e. Sweep: Pemko #209 plus Pemko 18041 Brush Astragal 6. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances O and bevels unless otherwise indicated: Section 1112_081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 4 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PKI PRC) CON, INCORPORATED DeslVtand Construction 1Vhvyagcrrse,rrt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W Series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. E. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. G. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash to bof out swinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. FACTORY FINISHING A. Finish wood doors and sidelights at factory. Finish faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Hand sand prior to finishing and between each coat of finish; finish all 6 sides of doors and sidelights. B. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect and sheen. 1. Hand rubbed and polished finish system consisting of wiping stains and UV resistant catalyzed resin sealer coats for interior or exterior use. 2. Sheen: Satin. Section 1112 081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PRO CONS' INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors and fire -rated wood door frames will be installed. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, with referenced quality standard and other requirements specified. C. Factory -Fitted Doors and Sidelights: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re -hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. C. Protect doors and sidelights as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors and sidelights will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 1112_081433 Stile and Rail Wood Entry Doors.doc Page 6 of 6 0 J 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON4 INCORPORATED Design and Contraction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1. Access Doors and Frames of the Following Types: a. Wall Access Doors b. Moisture Resistant Access Doors c. Ceiling Access Doors d. Floor/Ceiling System Access Doors e. Sprinkler System Access Doors B. Related Sections: Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 2. Section 09 90 00 Painting 3. Division 21, 22 and 23 Sections for coordination of access to valves and other concealed items. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit copies of Shop Drawings of all items specified herein to Architect for approval. Obtain approval of Drawings prior to proceeding with manufacturing. Shop Drawings shall indicate: Elevations of each door type; Details of each frame type; Location in the building for each item; Conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and material; Typical and special details of construction; Methods of assembling sections; Locations and installation requirements for hardware; Size, shape, and thickness of materials; Joints and connections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Access doors shall be fabricated in accordance with standards and specifications established by Steel Door Institute. B. Fire Rated Access Doors and Frames: Comply with NFPA 80. Provide products listed by UL or another testing agency acceptable to local jurisdictions on each fire rated access door. Provide UL Label on each fire rated access door. C. Access panels shall be flush with finished wall or ceilings, except where panels are located in acoustic tile or paneling, the door shall be recessed to receive adjacent finish material. D. Access panel finishes shall be coordinated with the finish treatment of the area. Section 111208 31 00 access door.doc Page 1 of 5 PRO CON�;�, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Deap fmd Construction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver access doors cartooned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP PAINTING: A. Apply a primed finish to all ferrous metal surfaces furnished under this Section. Clean and chemically treat metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence. Follow with a dip or spray coat of rust -inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer on all exposed surfaces. Finished surfaces shall be smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. Each coat of paint shall be separately baked or oven dried. The time and temperature for drying shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for developing maximum hardness and resistance to abrasion. 2.02 ACCESS UNITS A. Wall Access Doors (Non -rated): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "WB Series"; J.L. Industries (800-554-6077) b. "Type RDW"; Karp Associates, Inc. (800-888-4212) c. "Model NW Series"; Nystrom Building; Products (800-547-2635) d. "Style DW"; Milcor, Inc., a subsidiary of Gibraltar Building Products Group (800- 528-1411) 2. Door Size: Select from manufacturer's standard sizes to suit required opening. 3. Designed for flush installation in wall construction. Construct of metal with concealed continuous hinge, having recessed screwdriver latch, size as indicated. B. Wall Access Doors (Fire -Rated): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "FDWB Series"; J.L. Industries (800-554-6077) b. "Type KRP-450 FR"; Karp Associates, Inc. (800-888-4212) c. "IW Model Series"; Nystrom Building Products (800-547-2635) 2. Door Size: Select from manufacturer's standard sizes to suit required opening. 3. Fire Rating: [1] [1-1/2] hour labeled. C. Moisture Resistant Access Doors (Non -rated): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Larsen "L-MPSS" stainless steel frame and "L-MPSS" stainless steel door, by Larsen's Manufacturing Co, with continuous, offset and concealed hinge, security fastener. (800-527-7367) Section 111208 3100 access door.doc Page 2 of 5 Brightview North Andover PI O CON40 DesiguandGo�tstrscfionManngrmrnr North Andover, MA Project SpecificationDec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Ceiling Access Doors (Non -rated): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Model RDW"; Karp Associates, Inc.. (800-888-4212) b. "Style DW"; Milcor, Inc., a subsidiary of Gibraltar Building Products Group (800- 528-1411) c. Model WB -DW; Williams Brothers Corporation of America (800-255-5515) d. "WB Series"; J.L. Industries (800-554-6077) e. "NW Series"; Nystrom Building Products (800-447-2635) 2. Performance Criteria a. Door Size: Select from manufacturer's standard sizes to suit required opening. b. Sheet metal construction with concealed continuous hinge, flush design. Provide each door with self-closing mechanism and standard flush design "self -latching" latch. E. Ceiling Access Doors (Fire -Rated): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Model KRP-350FR"; Karp Associates Inc. (800-888-4212) b. "Model WB -FRC"; Williams Brothers Corporation of America (800-255-3515) c. "FDWB Series"; J.L. Industries (800-554-6077) d. "IW Series"; Nystrom Building Products (800-447-2635) 2. Performance Criteria: a. Door Size: Select from manufacturer's standard sizes to suit required opening. b. Fire Rating: [l.] [1-1/2] hour labeled. c. Sheet metal construction with concealed continuous hinge, flush design. Provide each door with self-closing mechanism and standard flush design "self -latching" latch. F. Floor/Ceiling System Access Doors (Fire Rated) 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Model 3210"; Milcor, Inc., a subsidiary of Gibraltar Building Products Group (800- 528-1411) b. Approved substitution by Williams Brothers Corporation of America c. Approved substitution by J.L. Industries (800-554-6077) d. Approved substitution by Nystrom Building Products (800-447-2635) e. Approved Substitution by Karp Associates Inc (800-888-4212) Section 1112 08 31 00 access door.doc Page 3 of 5 PRO CONS; , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constrnrtlon Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 2. Performance Criteria: a. Size: Select from manufacturer's standard sizes to suit required opening. b. Fire Rating: [1] [1-1/2] hour labeled. c. Sheet metal construction with concealed continuous hinge, flush design. Provide each door with self-closing mechanism and standard flush design "self -latching" latch. d. Finish: Bonderized galvanized steel. G. Sprinkler System Access Doors (Fire -rated) 1. Performance Criteria: a. UL B (1-1/2 hr.) rated with automatic closer, UL rated anchors for construction in which door will be installed, and lockset with knob released keyed as directed by Owner. 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Milcor, Inc., a subsidiary of Gibraltar Building Products Group (800-528-1411) b. Karp Associates, Inc. (718-784-2105) c. Williams Brothers Corporation of America (309-796-2371) 2.03 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Factory prime coat units with electrostatic baked on electrostatic powder. Prime exposed edges with coat of white rust -inhibitive paint. 1. For steel finishes comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products". B. For fire -rated access doors, furnish units with ceramic fiberboard panel insert, attach to outside face of door, ready for field painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units and their accessories in accordance with final Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Install frame plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. Secure rigidly in place. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in work just prior to final inspection. Section 111208 3100 access door.doc Page 4 of 5 PRO CON,;0 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmaion Manaxmnmt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Remove and replace defective work including doors or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3.04 TOUCH-UP A. Immediately after erection of work, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and touch-up of compatible air drying primer. 3.05 PROTECTION: A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at the job site; store at the site under cover on wood blocking or on suitable floors. After installation, protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced with new work. Factory enameled finished work shall be shipped in cartons or other suitable containers. 3.06 CLEANING: A. Upon completion, metal surfaces of doors and frames that are completely factory finished shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched -up as recommended by the door manufacturer. END OF SECTION Section 111208 3100 access door.doc Page 5 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CON e, INCORPORATED Design and constmetfon Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 53 00 VINYL WINDOWS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes single hung, fixed sash in frame and bay vinyl -framed windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. R: Residential. B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both gateway performance and optional performance grade. 2. Size indicated in a schedule. 3. Performance Class: R Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 1 of 11 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Ihsign and Cortsimction Ma" agcment North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 4. Performance Grade: a) Single Hung: 45. b) Fixed: 50. B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2 -Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph. b. Exposure Category: B. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of vinyl window indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Accessories. D. Samples: For vinyl windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. I. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory -applied finish, weather stripping, hardware, color as specified and glazing. E. Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of vinyl window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 2 of 11 0 11 Brightview North Andover PR R CATED ON# vesipawCvnstmdionmanngeynent Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit G. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for vinyl windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of vinyl windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings and include adjacent materials, finishes and weatherproofing methods. Page 3 of 11 Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Conshu#ion Manngeinent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to vinyl windows including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of vinyl windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes. 3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating vinyl windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Vinyl Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 4 of 11 0 01 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PRC) CON4 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Silver Line Windows, Series 2900 (basis of design). 2. Harvey Windows and Doors: Vicon Single Hung 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Extrusions: Rigid (unplasticized) hollow PVC extrusions, formulated and extruded for exterior applications, complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS and the following: 1. PVC Resins: 100 percent virgin resin. 2. PVC Formulation: High impact, low heat buildup, lead free, nonchalking, and color and UV stabilized. 3. Extrusion Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.070 inch. 4. Multichamber Extrusions: Profile designed with multichambers between interior and exterior faces of the extrusions. B. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other surrounding building components. Cadmium - plated steel fasteners are not permitted. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 5 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit F. Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and for complete concealment when vinyl window is closed. 1. Weather -Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509. 2. Weather -Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Weather -Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. G. Sliding -Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven -pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin -impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene -coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702. H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 WINDOW A. Window Type: Fixed, Single hung and Bay as indicated on Drawings and window schedule. B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide vinyl windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. Performance Class and Grade: R 50. C. Condensation -Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide vinyl windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 65. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide vinyl windows with a whole -window, U -factor maximum indicated at 15 -mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503-98. 1. U -Factor: 0.31 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. E. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide vinyl windows with a whole -window SHGC maximum of 0.34, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 30 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 0 Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 6 of 11 PRO CON40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and C"onshaction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit G. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. Maximum Rate: 0.13 cf r/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. or more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. I. Life -Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. J. Operating Force and Auxiliary . (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 10l/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units. B. Glass: Clear, insulating -glass units, with low -E coating complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." Provide fully tempered glass lites where safety glass is indicated or required by code. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory -glazing system complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing". 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with vinyl; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock vinyl windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. 1. Sash -Balance Type: Provide two stainless steel, 1/2 -inch thick, constant force, coil balance springs per sash. Enclose balance springs in rustproof cases, with jamb liner covers, from the top or bottom sash to head of window unit. Balance covers shall be Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 7 of I 1 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONo# INCORPORATED Design and Constmction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit finished to match window frame finish and shall be easily removable for field service. Balances shall have an interlocking pivot bar for integral frame alignment with sash for keeping window frames straight and true during installation. C. Sill Cap/Track: Rigid PVC or other weather -resistant plastic track with manufacturer's standard integral color, of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior. D. Locks: Provide cam type sash lock and keeper designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and to force locking rails together. Units over 32 inches wide shall have two locks. E. Tilt Latch: Provide at the top of each operable sash to allow sash to tilt in for cleaning. Tilt latches shall be integrally mortised into the sash top rail. 1. Special requirements for windows in Alzheimer Units (ALZ) and Assisted Living Units (AL): a) Provide fixed, capped sash tilt mechanisms, operable by screwdriver by maintenance personnel. Screws shall have tamper resistant heads. b) Sash Opening Limiter: Limit opening height of sash to 6 inches. c) Exposed screws shall have tamper resistant heads to prevent unauthorized removal. F. Roller Assemblies: Low -friction design. G. Lift Devices: Provide continuous, integral lift rail on bottom of operable sash. 1. Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to 6 inches as noted above. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight -fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked -on organic coating in color to match window members. Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 8 of 11 Nn 61 J PRO CON # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Glass -Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18 -by -14 or 18 -by -16 mesh of PVC -coated, glass -fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration, in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. I. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. D. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18 -by -16 mesh of 0.011 -inch- diameter, coated aluminum wire. I. Wire -Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray. E. Screening General: Install screening with weave parallel to frame and stretch sufficiently to present a smooth appearance. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Simulated Divided Lite: Provide extruded PVC bars with tapered profile, finished to match sash, in configuration indicated. Provide between lites of insulating glass. Provide as shown on Architectural Drawings. B. Exterior Trim: Provide extruded PVC shapes, 5/4 by 3-1/2 inch minimum width face profile, flat profile to match the finish of the window units, unless otherwise indicated. Corners shall be heat welded and weathertight. Trim shall have integral J -trim on all sides to receive siding and/or thin brick. C. Undersill Trim: Provide extruded PVC shape, at the sill of all windows to match finish of window units, unless indicated otherwise. Trim shall have integral J -trim to receive siding. D. Interior Drywall Receiver: Provide extruded PVC shape, at head and jamb of windows indicated to have drywall returns. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Welded Frame and Sash/Ventilator Corners: Miter -cut and fusion welded. B. Fabricate vinyl windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full -perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Single -Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 9 of 11 PRO CON4;� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DcsigiiandConsfn+ctionManogement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit �J D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units. E. Factory -Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze vinyl windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. G. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion - resistant steel reinforcement complying with requirements for reinforcing members, or do both. H. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.9 VINYL FINISHES " A. Integral Finish and Color: Uniform, solid, homogeneous interior and exterior as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 0 Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 10 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.2. INSTALLATION PRO CON44� INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managennent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. In case of a conflict, contact Architect in writing for resolution before proceeding with the work. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated on the drawings, for weather- tight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory -glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 1112_085300 Vinyl Windows.doc Page 11 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel and wood doors. B. Hardware for fire rated doors. C. Thresholds, weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 —Rough Carpentry B. Section 08110 —Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. Section 08211— Wood Doors D. Section 08310 —Access Doors and Frames Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate door access controls (card readers, keypad entry systems, etc.) with Owner's security consultant. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Perform all work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI Al 15.1 AND A115.2 2. ANSI A117.1 3. ANSI 156.2 4. ANSI 156.3 Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 1 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 5. ANSI 156.4 6. NFPA 101 7. NFPA 80 8. NFPA 252 9. UL 1013 10. UL 305 B. Regulatory Requirements: PRO CON40, INCORPORATED Design and ConshutiionManagemen� ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Conform to NFPA 80, and other applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and acceptable to the public authority as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Conform to requirements of ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) 4. Accessibility: Hardware for doors used by the disabled shall comply with all state and local codes which shall supersede this Section. Notify the Owner's Representative of conflicts between regulations and this specification prior to providing hardware. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking. The hardware schedule shall clearly indicate the architect's hardware set and manufacturer of each proposed item. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the hardware schedule. 2. Provide two (2) copies of illustrations from the manufacturers catalogs and data in brochure form. 3. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable items and proposed substitutions in the hardware schedule. Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 2 of 16 0 01 PRO CON,4;m Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desigii and ConstmetionnsR„„s—r Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 4. Furnish hardware samples for design and finish as requested by the Architect. These samples may remain part of the project as long as product is protected from damage and remains in new condition. 5. Provide a keying schedule using key set symbols referenced in the Door and Hardware Institute manual "Keying Systems and Nomenclature". The keying schedule shall be indexed by door number, key set and hardware heading number and shall include cross keying instructions and special stamping instructions. 6. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams specifically developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold -opens and door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with the hardware schedule submittal, for approval. The following shall be included: a. System schematic b. Point to point wiring diagram c. Riser diagram d. Elevation of each door e. Detail interface between electrified hardware and other trades B. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: l .Provide manufacturers written installation and adjustment instructions for each item of hardware. Send installation instructions to the site with hardware. C. Maintenance Data: 1.Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing the following information: a. Complete information in the care, maintenance, lubrication, adjustment and preservation of finishes. b. Data on repair and replacement parts. c. Catalog pages for each product. d. Name, address and phone number of the local representative for each manuf. D. Keys: 1. Deliver with identifying tags to the Owner by security shipment direct from the hardware supplier. E. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer's written warranty and assure that forms have been completed in the Owners name and registered with the manufacturer. F. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 3 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PRO CON,� INCORPORATED Project Specification zwfflzAult Coltaftctionm-ase", t Dec. 20, 2011 n ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. NFPA 101 2. NFPA 80 B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. Obtain each item of hardware (i.e. hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, closers) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. The hardware supplier shall have warehousing facilities with -in 100 miles of the project and employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. This consultant shall be available to the architect and general contractor during normal operating hours. D. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality and design. Any substitution of products not listed in the specifications must be approved by the architect ten (10) days prior to bid date to allow sufficient time for addendum to be added to the bid documents. In accordance with Section 01600, required 00 data and physical samples must be provided. E. Fire -rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one (1) month prior to commencing work of this section with the owner to establish final keying and master key groups. B. Prior to installation of the hardware, manufacturer's representatives for locksets, exit devices and closers shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the architect and owner. Section 1112087 100 Door Hardware.doc Page 4 of 16 161 PILO CC3N444 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA vesipmid CQnstructionMmrnger:tenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Legibly mark and label each package, indicating item and location for which it is intended. Each marking shall correspond to the number shown on the approved hardware schedule. Each package shall contain all the required screws, bolts and fasteners necessary for installation of each hardware item. B. Construction keys: Tagged and plainly marked on face of envelope with the key change number, door designation and all other required information and mailed directly to the Owner. C. Permanent keys: Identified by lock manufacturer and opening to which they apply. Lock manufacturer shall place each set of keys into an envelope and label same with door numbers for rooms or areas. Mark boxes of keys with project name and location and ship Change Keys, Master Keys, and Grandmaster Keys via prepaid registered mail to Owner. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other trades directly affected involving the manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish two (2) complete sets of templates for door and frame preparation with copies of the final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to the hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door (if applicable) fabricators so as not to delay production. C. Coordinate Owners keying requirements during the course of the work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion for all items of hardware unless noted otherwise. B. The warranty period for exit devices shall be five (5) years from the date of substantial completion. C. The warranty period for manual door closers shall be ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion. D. All manufacturers' screws and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be installed to maintain the warranty. Section 1112 087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 5 of 16 PRO CON-. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and constractionmanagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools as applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by the hardware component manufacturer. C. Furnish three (3) dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish used with the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be delivered to the hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and fasteners and all special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned over to the owner at the completion of the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. McKinney Products Company 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. 3. Hager Companies B. Continuous Hinges: 1. McKinney Products Company 2. Pemko Manufacturing Company 3. Hager Companies. C. Latchsets and Locksets: 1. Yale D. Exit Devices: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 2. Dorma 3. Von Duprin 4. Corbin/Russwin 5. Yale E. Push/Pulls: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company 2. H.B. Ives 3. Trimco N Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 6 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,j� INCORPORATED Design and ConsthmtionManagemenf ARCHITECTURE F. Manual Door Closers: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 2. Norton Door Controls 3. Dorma 4. LCN G. Overhead Stops and Holders: 1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 2. Glynn -Johnson 3. Rixson-Firemark 4. Dorma H. Manual Bolts: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. H.B. Ives 3. Trimco I. Protection Plates: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company 2. H.B. Ives 3. Trimco J. Door Stops: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company 2. H.B. Ives 3. Trimco K. Thresholds: 1. National Guard Products 2. Pemko Manufacturing Company 3. Zero International L. Gasketing and Door Bottoms: 1. National Guard Products 2. Pemko Manufacturing Company 3. Zero International M. Key Cabinet: 1. Telkee 2. Aladin 3. Lund 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. 'Applicable provisions of Federal, State and local codes. 2. ANSMCC Al 17.1 American National Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 7 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4i� INCORPORATED Design iW ConstmetionManagrment ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 Life Safety Codes. 4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 80 Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors and frames as listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: Identified in the hardware sets at the end of this section. 2.3 HINGES A. All exterior doors shall be provided with heavy-duty continuous gear hinges. The continuous hinges shall be concealed leaf, tamperproof and able to handle doors up to 9 feet. Supply from the following list of approved products: 1. Roton 780-224 HD 2. Zero #914AA 3. Markar FM 2011. 4. Finish: Dark Bronze B. All interior doors over 36 inches in width shall have template heavyweight (0.180 or 0.190 gage) five knuckle, four ball bearing, full mortise type or as noted in HW sets. C. All interior doors without closers shall have template standard weight (0.134 or 0.146 gage) five knuckle, two ball bearing, full mortise type. D. Size: Provide 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" hinges on doors up to 3'-0" in width. Provide 5" x 4-1/2" hinges on doors from 3'-2" to 4'-0" in width. E. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. F. Finish of Hinges: US5 (609) except where noted in hardware sets. G. Supply from the following list of approved manufacturers: 1. Hager 2. Stanley 3. McKinney 2.4 LOCKSETS AND LOCK TRIM A. Type: Bored. B. Fasteners: Phillips head screws for lock fronts and strikes. C. Strikes: Furnish manufacturers standard curved lip for either standard fee of ASA strike. Straight lip will be rejected. Furnish wrought box of either dichromatic steel or plastic Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 8 of 16 0 We 0 PRO CON4i� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit regardless of type strike furnished D. Acceptable products: No substitutes without Owner and Architect's written approval. 1. Yale YH Collection —Academy Lever (AC) A156.2 —Series 4000 —Grade 2 2. Finish: All locks and latchsets shall be US5 (609). 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. All exit devices shall be architectural grade touch bar type of stainless steel construction. Provide VonDuprin 98 series, Sargent 88 series, Yale 7100 series, or Dorma 9000 series. B. Exit Device Trim: All lever trim shall match lockset design. All lever trim shall be free wheeling while in the locked positions. C. Attachments: All devices shall be supplied and installed with hex nuts and bolts. Devices shall be thru bolted to the escutcheon trim for added strength and security. D. Finish: All devices and trim shall be 313 Duranodic Dark Bronze. E. Strike: Provide manufacturer's standard or as detailed in the hardware sets. F. Panic bars shall be sized prior to installation to minimum operable width in order to comply with door opening requirements for ADA accessibility and code egress. Panic devices shall not project into the minimum required clear opening width of 32 inches. G. Panic Devices Manufacturers: L Corbin/Russwin. 2. Sargent. 3. Von Duprin 4. Yale 5. Dorma. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Supplier shall meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6 -pin tumbler cylinders unless otherwise directed by the Owner. B. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brassibronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. C. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. D. All locks and cylinders shall be keyed to a new master key system and construction Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 9 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and ConshnQion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit master key system. All keying shall be performed at the factory of the lock -and -cylinder manufacturer. Except as otherwise noted, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. A record of the key system shall be maintained in the cylinder manufacturer's key records section. Coordinate keying meetings with Owner and agencies. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following quantities of master keys and change keys to the Owner's Representative: 1. 2 keys per lock with a maximum of 8 keys per keyed alike set. 2. 3 keys each change keyed differently. 3. 10 construction Master keys. 4. 6 new Master keys. F. Cylinder and core shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. G. Key Management: Key control shall be provided by supplying a complete key storage and management system. Each key shall be fully cut, indexed, tagged and installed on cabinet hooks by the key cabinet supplier and shipped with the locks. Key cabinet provided shall be wall mounted (by Contractor) type with capacity plus 50 percent. Provide 3 -way cross index system referencing the (1) permanent room number, (2) key symbol: (3) bitting number set up by key control manufacturer and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. Identify each key. Provide a red tag for each key and mark this tag "DO NOT REMOVE." Attach to one (each differently numbered) key and place it first in the key cabinet. Using white tags, place the remaining 4 like keys on the same hook. Provide 4 copies of chart showing hook number, key number, the location or room the key opens and the key cut. One chart to be a permanent part of the key cabinet. Turn over the other 3 to Owner's locksmith. Provide and install hinged -panel wall mount type cabinet. Provide key cabinet by MMF Industries. H. Deliver permanent keys to the Owner's Representative and locksmith upon acceptance of the building. At this time, Contractor shall replace the construction system and core with permanent keys and cores in the presence of the Owner. All keys and locks shall be tested and approved by the Owner before acceptance. 2.7 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Provide full cover surface closers here indicated on the Drawings or hardware sets or where required by Code or the Architect. B. Type: Closers shall be full rack and pinion type with cast iron or cast aluminum shell. Closers shall be surface mounted and shall project no more than 2-1/8 inches from the mounting surface. Any door closers required to protrude beyond 4" from face of door may not be mounted below 80". Utilize a "reverse arm" closer if required to meet Section 1112087 100 Door Hardware.doc Page 10 of 16 U Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and consF,uction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit handicap codes. Barrier free and delayed action features shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or in the hardware sets. Closers shall be non -handed and provide independent adjustments for closing speed, latch speed, and back check (if appropriate) and power adjustment from size 2 through 6. For doors subject to positive or negative HVAC pressures, closer size shall be adjusted accordingly. Closers shall be enclosed in a molded full cover with finish to match other hardware in opening. All Closures shall NOT be fastened with Through Bolts through doors. All Wood Doors with closers to be provided with 5" wood top block. C. Exterior Openings: Closers on exterior openings shall have positive self -aligning stop arms. D. Other conditions shall be supplied as indicated on Drawings or hardware sets. E. Attachments: All closers shall be mounted with hex nuts and bolts. F. Finish: Dark Amber (695). G. Warranty: Closers shall provide a lifetime of installation warranty on shell and 10 years balance of closers. H. Quality: Provide products from the following list of manufacturer's products: Norton Dorma LCN Sargen 7500 8900 AF 4041 281-0 PR -7500 8900 SPA P4041 -EDA 281 -PED CLP -7500 8900 DS 4041-CUSH 281 -PS UNI -7500 8900 DS 4040-CUSH 281 -CPS 2.8 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS A. SR Swing. B. Donna ED 800 Series C. Horton LE Series D. Keane Monroe 2100 Series. Page 11 of 16 Section 1112 087100 Door Hardware.doc PRO CON44 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Constnution Managenunt North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit E. Submit finish chip to Architect and Interior Designer for approval. 2.9 DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES A. Kickplates shall be .050 gauge and two (2) inches less the door width at single openings, and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware sets. Height shall be 8", B. Mop plates shall be .050 gauge and one (1) inch less the door width at single openings and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. Height shall be 4". C. Push/Pull plates shall be beveled on all four (4) edges, unless otherwise noted. D. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self tapping screws. E. Finish: US5 2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall and Floor Stops: Supply wall stops where needed to protect doors or door hardware. When wall conditions do not permit use of wall stop provide floor stops with risers as needed to adjust for floor conditions. Finish: US5 B. Overhead Stops: Where wall or floor stops are not applicable provide surface overhead stops. Supply overhead stops -holders with extruded bronze channels arms and brackets. All stops shall be supplied and installed with thru-bolts. C. Supply from the following list of approved products: 1. Glynn Johnson GJ90 and GJ 100 Series. 2. Rixson #9 and #1 Series 3. Sargent 590 and 690 Series. 4. Dorma 900 and 910 Series. 5. Finish: SB — (690) Sprayed Dark Bronze 2.11 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND DOOR SEALS 0 A. Provide thresholds as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions: 1. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners. f �J Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 12 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONe; INCORPORATED Design and C011SMlctfon Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Where thresholds are indicated to be used with floor closers or pivots, they shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Thresholds shall be fluted on the ramp portion. 3. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they shall be cut for the mullions in the field, and extend continuously for the entire opening. 4. Provide machine screws and expansion bolts for all thresholds at concrete floors. 5. Provide self -tapping fasteners for weather-stripping and door seals being applied to hollow metal frames. 6. Finish DKB — Dark Bronze PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. The general contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free from defects. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finished, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Use templates provided by the hardware item manufacturer. C. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADAAG for positioning requirements for the Disabled. D. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. E. Set units level. Plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. F. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which it is set. Section 1112087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 13 of 16 PRO CON 40; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Consfmction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 O Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit G. All door closers shall be installed out of public sight wherever possible. H. Boxed power supplies shall be located as indicated, or if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment rooms. Verify location with the architect. I. Wires pulled per riser diagrams and electrical equipment mounted per installation instructions. Contractor shall be responsible for systems start-up, programming and computer training to end user. Contractor can contact RTS Technical Services at (610) 277-3805 for price on above start-up and training services. J. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames and wood doors comply with DHI Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Hardware locations for steel and wood doors shall be the same. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and r� ventilation equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. B. Clean hardware surfaces soiled by installation or by work in adjacent areas. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage door hardware or finish. 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SETS Each hardware set listed below represents the complete hardware requirements for one opening (single door or pair of doors). Furnish the quantities required for a complete installation per the requirements of this section. ALZ UNITS A. HARDWARE SET — 44 ALZ ENTRANCE DOOR (A) Hinges Lockset (Schlage AL53PD (ANSI F109) Entrance Lock) Stop Silencers O Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 14 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and ConstruttionManagement ARCHITECTURE B. HARDWARE SET — 45 ALZ INTERIOR UNIT. DOOR (B) Hinges (Pre -hung unit) Latchset (Passage Function) Stop Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit C. HARDWARE SET — 46 ALZ BATHROOM POCKET DOOR (C) Heavy Duty Sliding Door Hardware Door Pull 6"x 3/4" Diameter- B.B. Mount D. HARDWARE SET — 47 ALZ DAY CLOSET DOOR (D) Hinges (Pre -hung unit) Latchset (Passage Function) Stop E. HARDWARE SET — 48 ALZ CLOSET DOOR (E) Hinges (Pre -hung unit) Lockset (Storeroom Function) Stop AL UNITS A. HARDWARE SET — 49 AL ENTRANCE DOOR (A) Spring Hinges Hinge Lockset (Assisted Living Function) Kick Plate Door Knocker with Peep Hole Stop Silencers B. HARDWARE SET — 50 AL INTERIOR UNIT DOOR (B) Hinges (Pre -hung unit) Latchset (Passage Function) Stop Silencers Page 15 of 16 Section 1112 087100 Door Hardware.doc PRO CON+ Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstmaionMan Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. HARDWARE SET — 51 AL BATHROOM POCKET DOOR (C) Heavy Duty Sliding Door Hardware Door Pull 6"x3/4" Diameter- B.B. Mount D. NOT USED E. HARDWARE SET — 52 AL CLOSET DOOR (E) Hinges (Pre -hung unit) Latchset (Passage Function) Stop Silencers HARDWARE SET 53 — LANDSCAPE GATES 1 Electronic deadbolt 401 -MR -RM -110-118 x MK'D. CYL. (Folger Adam) Notes: 1. Balance of hardware by fence gate manufacturer. 2. Wired to fire alarm system. 3. Coordinate voltage with general contractor. 4. Compatibility with actual gate to be verified on site prior to purchase. Additional hardware sets not issued at this time. END OF SECTION Section 1112_087100 Door Hardware.doc Page 16 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON4, INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Managenrrttt ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1. Types of work in this Section include glass and glazing for: a. Float Glass b. Tempered Glass C. Insulated Units d. Polished Wire Glass e. Fire Rated Safety Glass f. Mirrors B. Related Sections: Project Specification Dec. 20, 2411 Issued For Building Permit 1. Section 07 92 00 — Joint Sealants 2. Section 08 11 13 - Steel Doors and Frames 3. Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors 4. Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum -Framed Entrances, Storefronts & Curtainwall. 5. Section 08 42 29 — Automatic Entrance Doors 6. Section 10 28 00 — Toilet and Bath Accessories 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 with the following . supporting data: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color. Sample requirement may be waived by Owner's Representative at their discretion. Section 111208 80 00_glazing.doc Page 1 of 9 PRO CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED UProject Specification North Andover, MA esipt apid Constnrction Manggemrnt Dec. 20, 2011 n Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit `J 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). C. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 0 I. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 1.06 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Section 111208 80 00_glazing.doc Page 2 of 9 PRO CON4'j j Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Comhuction Managcnient Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. All material shall be free from manufacturer defects and installation workmanship. Any material or workmanship judged to be defective shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. C. Insulating glass units shall be jointly guaranteed for a period of ten (10) years by the manufacturer and installer against obstruction of vision between interior glass surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal. Units damaged during guarantee period shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. All glass shall be new material, graded under Federal Specifications DD -G -451 -D -451D B. All glass in related area shall be from one manufacturer. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Refer to Drawings for location of glass. B. Glass [I]: Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. PPG Industries (800-377-5267) b. Pilkington North America (800-221-0444) C. AFG Industries, Inc. (800-251-0441) d. Guardian Industries (248-340-1800) e. Old Castle Glass, a CRH Company (800-899-8455) f. Viracon, Inc. (800-533-2080) C. Glass [II]: Tempered Glass: 1/4", Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3, clear, fully tempered safety glass (meet requirements of ANSI Z97.1). 1. All tempered glass shall conform to ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C1048, and Federal Standard CPSC 16 SFR 1201. Tempered glass shall bear permanent monogram indicating tempered quality. Fabrication marks on tempered glass shall be located to be concealed in completed installation. 2. Color: Clear to match aluminum windows glazing, Section 08 51 13. 3. Provide 1/2" clear tempered glass at shower enclosures, Section 10 28 00. Provide silicone setting blocks that are compatible with silicone sealants. All glass edges visually exposed shall have a polished pencil edge. D. Glass [III]: Coated Low Emissitivity Glass: 1/4", Condition C (other coated glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), with coating type and performance characteristics complying with requirements specified below: 1. Low E Coating: Side [3] on insulated units. Section 1112_08 80 00 glazing.doc Page 3 of 9 PRO CON440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Marmgement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Solarban 60 Solar Control Low -E Glass"; PPG Industries (800-377-5267) b. "Comfort Ti -AC -40"; AFG Industries, Inc. (800-251-0441) C. "Sunguard SN -68"; Guardian Industries (248-340-1800) E. Sealed Insulating Glass Units 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Old Castle Glass, a CRH Company (800-899-8455) b. Viracon, Inc. (800-533-2080) C. AFG Industries, Inc (800-251-0441) 2. Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air, space, sealing system, sealant, space material, and desiccants. a. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4" b. Air Space Thickness: 1/2", 90% Argon. 3. Exterior Pane of Glass: Glass Type [II] 4. Interior Pane of Glass: Glass [III] �J 5. Sealing System: Manufacturer's Standard Dual Seal a. Desiccant: Manufacturer's Standard - Either Molecular Sieve or Silica Gel or Blend of Both b. Spacer Material.: Manufacturer's Standard Metal with [Bronze Anodized Finishl F. Glass [IV]: Wire Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class I (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing), complying with ANSI Z97.1, 1/4" thick; Form I (wired, polished both sides), mesh M2 (square). 2.03 FIRE -RESISTIVE GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. 5/16" thick, "Premium FireLite Plus" distributed by Technical Glass Products (800- 426-0279). b. 1/4" thick, "Pyroshield Plus" distributed by Technical Glass Products (800-426- 0279). c. 5/16" thick, "Pyroguard Clear"; Old Castle Glass a CRH Company (800-899-8455) Section 111208 80 00_glazing.doc O Page 4 of 9 PRO CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Co"stmdion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Fire -Resistive, Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat sheets psf, permanently labeled with appropriate marks of testing and inspecting agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing product complies with fire -resistive installation indicated, and as follows: 1. Safety Glass: Shall conform to ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C1048, and Federal Standard CPSC 16 SFR 1201. 2. Polished on both surfaces, transparent with minimum visible light transmission of 85 percent. 3. Positive Pressure: Shall meet requirements of positive pressure test standards UL l OC. 2.04 MIRRORS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Binswanger Mirror, Division of Vitro America (800-238-6057) 2. Guardian Consolidated, (276-236-5196) 3. Gardner Glass Products (800-334-7267) B. Mirror glazing "select" quality float glass complying with ASTM C1036 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201, 1/4" thick. C. Silvering: Provide electro -deposited silvering in two coats. D. Exposed edges ground smooth and polished. E. Mirror sizes indicated on the drawings. Extend mirror to within V of adjacent walls, on each end, in one piece. F. Mirror Adhesive System: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Edge Seal: "UC -4401" - PPG Industries Inc., Glass Group; (800-377-5267) , or as recommended by mirror manufacturer. b. Adhesive: "Mirror -Mastic"; Palmer Products Corp (800-431-6151) c. Approved Substitution G. Exposed Mirror Clips: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Top Clip: 9/16" wide x 1-1/4" long; Model No. 318; Knape & Vogt (800-253-1561) b. Bottom Clip: Continuous low profile clip at base. C. Approved substitution 2.05 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: Section 111208 80 00_glazing.doc Page 5 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Pito CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Constmction Manngengnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Preformed Butyl -Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent - free butyl -polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non -staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. C. Sealants: Provide structural and weatherseal sealants recommended by the manufacturer of the glazing system. 1. As manufactured by the following: a. GE Silicones (800-255-8886) b. Tremco, Inc., Sealant/WeatheMroofing Division an RPM Company (800-562-2728) 2. Refer to Section 07 92 00 - for requirements. D. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Provide the curtain wall manufacturer's permanent nonmigrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and sealing requirements. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass. Section 1112 08 80 00_glazing.doc Page 6 of 9 0 X PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed -cell or waterproof -jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION: Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass comers. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. D. Anchor components securely in place in the manner indicated. Shim and allow for movement resulting from changes in thermal conditions. Provide separators and isolators to prevent corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and "freeze-up" of moving joints. E. Glazing: Inspect glass and framing for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including size, squareness, and offsets at comers; for existence of minimum face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. 1. Avoid point loading of glass. Do not proceed with glazing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Do not field -cut glass. 2. Field -Glazed Structural Silicone Glazing Work: Clean frames and glass surfaces with an approved solvent. Prime surfaces and apply structural sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean excess structural sealant before curing. Mechanically hold glass firmly in place until sealant is sufficiently cured. Install compressible backer rods in joint before applying weatherseal sealant. Section 1112 08 80 00 glazing.doc Page 7 of 9 PRO CON4;' j Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction MrmngcnKn! Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Erection Tolerances: Install curtain wall components plumb, level, accurately aligned, and located in reference to column lines and floor levels. Erection tolerances indicated below are the maximum allowable for both no-load and full -load conditions and are not cumulative. Adjust work to conform to the following tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: Limit offset of member alignment to 1/16 inch where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2 inch out of flush and separated by less than 3 inches by protruding work; otherwise limit offsets to 1/8 inch. 4. Location: 3/8 inch maximum deviation from the measured theoretical location of any member at any location. 3.04 GLAZING A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. D. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 3.05 MIRROR INSTALLATION A. Do not install mirrors on new plaster, freshly painted walls, or where airborne solvents, heavy-duty cleaners, etc., are in the air. Sub -surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 72 hours. B. Use exposed clips at top and continuous bottom clip at base of mirror. C. Seal bottom edges of mirror track with clear sanitary sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00. Allow to dry. D. Apply adhesive to 60% of back of mirror. E. Set mirror supported by setting blocks and press against substrate to ensure bond of adhesive. F. Hold mirror in place until adhesive fully sets. Section 111208 80 00 glazing.doc Page 8 of 9 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and C0kt6ft ufion ManagVnenk Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Section 1112 08 80 00_glazing.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART L GENERAL PRC CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Manageutenf ARCHITECTURE SECTION 08 90 00 LOUVERS & VENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Metal wall louvers and screens exposed to view in finish work, including: I. Exterior metal louvers. 2. Other exposed exterior and interior. louvers indicated on drawings. B. Extent: Extent of exterior louvers is shown on architectural and mechanical drawings. Coordinate requirements, quantities, and sizes with mechanical drawings. Louvers not shown on architectural drawings, but indicated on mechanical drawings, shall be provided as part of work within this section. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 — Vinyl Siding for vinyl vents 2. Division 07 — Joint Treatment Section. 3. Division 08 — Door Louver Section. 4. Division 23 — Dampers and Ductwork Section. 5. Division 26 — Electrical Controls Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International Inc. (AMCA): 1. AMCA Standard 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. 2. AMCA Publication 261 Directory of Licensed Products, current edition. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A526 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 2. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications for each product. Section 1112089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 1 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,;$, INCORPORATED Dcsign and Gonslraction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Shop Drawing: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Substitutions: Any proposed alternative systems must be submitted and receive approval 21 days prior to purchase to avoid project delay. Any manufacturer wishing to submit for prior approval must provide information that describes how products are considered equal or superior to the specified products. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Single Source Responsibility 1. Quality Assurances: Obtain louvers for the project from one source and same manufacturer. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, Air -Leakage, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery & Storage: Deliver products in each manufacturer's original, intact, labeled containers and store under cover in a dry location until installed. Store off ground; protect from weather and construction activities. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warrant all assemblies sold to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of purchase. Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 2 of 10 0 0 01 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL LOUVERS PRO CON # INCORPORATED Design and Constnution Managetneni ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2411 Issued For Building Permit A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Airline Louvers — A Nystrom Building Products Co. Location: 1701 Madison St NE, Minneapolis, MN 55413 Telephone: 612-781-7850, 800-547-2635 Fax: 612-781-1363, 800-317-8770 E-mail: info@airlinelouvers.com Web: www.airlinelouvers.com B. Alternative manufacturers and their products will be considered as outlined in Section 01010, provided they meet the design concept and are produced of materials that are equal or superior to those called for in the base product specification. The following is a list of possible louvers. Final selection shall be made once design/build trades have finalized systems and louver requirements. Submit product for review by Architect. 2.02 SPECIALTY BLADE LOUVERS A. LSA6D-DC MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 6" (150 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .125" (3.18 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Angle: 38 degrees 4. Blade Thickness:.081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 4.25" (106.25 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: Meets standards PA -201, 202, and 203 for Miami -Dade County hurricane louver certification. As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 55% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .23" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1250 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1250 F.P.M. free area velocity. B. LSA5CDD MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 5" (125 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Angle: N/A 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 2" (51 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. Section 1112089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 3 of 10 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Desip and Consdnclion Mansgoisent Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 2.03 a. Free Area: 44% Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .17" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1139 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1139 F.P.M. free area velocity. C. LSA8CDD MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 8" (203.2 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Angle: N/A 4. Blade Thickness: .060" (1.55 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 2.75" (70 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 46% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .30" water gauge at an airflow rate of 735 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an D. LSA6V MODEL airflow rate of 735 F.P.M. free area velocity. 1. Louver Depth: 6" (152.40 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Angle: Vertical blades 4. Blade Thickness: .060" (1.55 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 1.5" (38.07 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 121.9 mm) units per AMCA 500. d. Free Area: 42% e. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .19" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1479 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. f. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1479 F.P.M. free area velocity. DRAINABLE BLADE LOUVERS A. LSA2D45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 2" (50.8 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .062" (1.57 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: .062" (1.57 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 3.19" (81.03 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 38% Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 4 of 10 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Desip and Constmetion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .18" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1197 F.P.M. free are intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1197 F.P.M. free area velocity. E. LSA4D38 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 4" (100 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 38/45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 5.09" (129 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 54% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .11" water gauge at an airflow rate of 873 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 873 F.P.M. free area velocity. F. LSA6D38 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 6" (150 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 38/45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 5.91" (150 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 57% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .13" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1023 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per square ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1023 F.P.M. free area velocity. G. LSX4D45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 4" (100 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 4.5" (112.5 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 46% Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 5 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 2.04 PRO CON, INCORPORATED Design and Cwlsfmcfion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .16" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1176 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1176 F.P.M. free area velocity. H. LSX6D45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 6" (150 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extrnderl nl„min„m hrr.a A(WI_Tc 5. Blade Spacing: 6" (150 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 52% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .15" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1050 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1050 F.P.M. free area velocity. STORM BLADE LOUVERS A. LSA2W45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 2" (50.8 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .062" (1.57 mm) 3. Blade Type: Weather blades at 45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .050" (127 mm) 5. Blade Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: Free area of not less than 37.8% B. LSA4YSP MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 4" (100 mm) 2. Frame Thickness:.081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Stationary storm blades positioned in an inverted "Y" 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 4" (100 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: Free area of not less than 29% C. LSA4S38 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 5" (125 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Stationary storm blades at 38/45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 4.75" (118.75 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. Page 6 of 10 Section 1112 089000 Louvers & Vents.doe 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Constrection Managerue"t ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit a. Free Area: not less than 54% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .10" water gauge at an airflow rate of 696 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 696 F.P.M. free area velocity. D. LSA6S45 MODEL a. Louver Depth: 6" (150 mm) b. Frame Thickness:. 125" (3.125 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 c. Blade Type: Stationary storm blades at 45 degrees d. Blade Thickness: .90" (22.5 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 e. Blade Spacing: 6" (150 mm) f Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: not less than 48% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .06" water gauge at an airflow rate of 680 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 680 F.P.M. free area velocity. 2.05 WEATHER BLADE LOUVERS A. LSA 150W45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 1.5" (3 8 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .062" (1.57 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Weather blades at 45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .050" (1.27 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 1.5" (38 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: Free area of not less than 43% B. LSA4W38 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 4" (101.6 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Weather blades at 38/45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .081" (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 5.09" (129 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: not less than 54% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .14" water gauge at an airflow rate of 803 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. C. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 803 F.P.M. free area velocity. C. LSA6W38 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 6" (150 mm) Section 1112 089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 7 of 10 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4;j, INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and ConstrnctionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Frame Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Weather blades at 38/45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .081 (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 6" (150 mm) 6. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: not less than 55% b. Static Pressure Loss: not more than .18" water gauge at an airflow rate of 1010 F.P.M. free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 1010 F.P.M. free area velocity. D. LSX4W45 MODEL 1. Louver Depth: 4" (101.6 mm) 2. Frame Thickness: .081 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Weather blades at 45 -degrees 4. Blade Thickness: .08 1 " (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 5" (127 mm) 7. Performance Requirements: As following, as determined by testing 48" x 48" (1219 mm x 1219 mm) units per AMCA 500. a. Free area: not less than 49.4% b. Water Penetration: not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow rate of 683 F.P.M. free area velocity. 2.06 LOUVER ACCESSORIES A. Exterior Sill: Provide sill flashing of same material and finish as louvers where required and as indicated on drawings. B. Louver Screens: Provide framed removable screens for exterior louvers. 1. Bird screens shall be expanded aluminum mesh. Optional (please specify): %" (12.7 mm) x.063 diameter aluminum mesh wire mounted with removable frame or 18 x 16 mesh .011" (0.28 mm) aluminum (or steel) diameter wire insect screen. 2. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. C. Concealed Motor: Two -position, UL approved motor and linkage fully encased in louver frame behind access panel. Coordinate requirements and locations with associated trades. Refer to Division 15 and 16 for requirements. D. Electronic or Pneumatic Actuation: Specify manufacturer and actuator model designation. Coordinate requirements and locations with associated trades. Refer to Division 15 and 16 for requirements. 2.07 MATERIALS 0 0 A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide required finish. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. C. ASTM A526 galvanized to G90 zinc coating, galvanized bonderized coating. O Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 8 of 10 PRO CONA6 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification rkSignandC0110MCHOnManageMW Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Fastening: Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and zinc -coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Performance: Fabricate as required for optimum performance with respect to water penetration, strength, durability, and appearance. 2. Size: Fabricate louvers in walls to meet dimensions indicated on drawings. 3. Field Measurement: Verify size, location and placement of louvers prior to fabrication. 4. Shop Assembly: Fabricate to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints, and field assembly of units. S. Accessories: Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. 6. Vertical mullions: Provide vertical mullions of type and spacing indicated but not farther apart than recommended by manufacturer. 7. Horizontal mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at horizontal joints between louver units except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. 8. Connections: Join frame and blade members to one another welding, except where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. 9. Spacing: Maintain equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 2.09 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Shop Finishing: Factory finish louvers and accessories as following: 1. Baked enamel finish: AA-C23C42R1x. C. Color: (As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors). 1. Optional: custom colors, as selected by Architect. D. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by louver manufacturer. E. Selected color will be submitted for approval using the same materials to be used for fabrication. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions are ideal for suitable installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of work relating to louver installation including dimensions, locations of supports and anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 9 of 10 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConsMtction Mnnagrr��ent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.03 PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Protect all louvers from damage during storage, installation and thereafter until completion of structure. B. Louvers shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's typical details and instructions along with the advice of their qualified representative. Provide all necessary fastenings and anchors as required to complete installation. Units are to be installed plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Lap air infiltration barrier over flanges and tape to ensure tight system. C. Form tight joints with work of this Section. Fit exposed connections accurately. D. Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar materials. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjustment: Specify applicable product adjustment requirements. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to completion. Remove construction debris from project site and legally depose of debris. END OF SECTION Section 1112_089000 Louvers & Vents.doc Page 10 of 10 PRO CON# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Vesrgn and Cunstniction MairageintnC Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: i. Non -Load Bearing Interior Steel Framing a. Interior Partitions b. Suspended and Furred Ceilings 2. Gypsum Board, Screw -Attached to Wood Framing and Furring Members, and Required Accessories 3. Gypsum Board, Screw -Attached to Steel Framing and Furring Members, and Required Accessories 4. Glass -Mat, Mold & Mildew Resistant Interior Wall Panel 5. Sound Deadening Boards 6. Tile -Backer Boards B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 3. Section 07 20 00 - Thermal Protection 4. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping 5. Section 07 92 00 — Joint Sealants 6. Section 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tiling 7. Section 09 5123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings 8. Section 09 90 00 - Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" B. ASTM A510 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel" C. A653 "Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy - Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process" D. ASTM A641/A641M "Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire" Section 111209 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 1 of 19 PRO CON A, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and C'u±tstnicfion:Yfannycuret�t North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction E. ASTM C11 "Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems" F. ASTM C475 "Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board" G. ASTM C514 "Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board" H. ASTM C557 "Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing" I. ASTM C645 "Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members" J. ASTM C754 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products" K. ASTM C834 "Standard Specification for Latex Sealants" L. ASTM C840 "Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" M. ASTM C919 "Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications" N. ASTM C954 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thicknes" 0. ASTM C1002 "Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs" P. ASTM C1047 "Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base" Q. ASTM C1177 "Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing" R. ASTM C1178 "Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel" S. ASTM C1396 "Standard Specification for Gypsum Board" T. ASTM D3273 "Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber" U. ASTM E84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials" V. ASTM E90 "Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements" W. ASTM E119 "Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials" X. ASTM E413 "Classification for Rating Sound Insulation" Y. ASTM E488 "Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements" Z. ASTM E736 "Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members" Section 111209 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 2 of 19 PRO CQN4; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desip and Constniction lY andgement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction AA. ASTM E 759 "Standard Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire -Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members" BB. ASTM E761 "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire -Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members" CC. GA -214 "Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" DD. GA -216 "Application and Finishing Of Gypsum Panel Products" EE. GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section FF. GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" GG. FM Global (FMG) "Approval Guide, Building Products" HH. UL "Fire Resistance Directory" II. UL 723 JJ. United States Gypsum Co. (USG): "Gypsum Construction Handbook" 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM CI I and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Submit Product Data for each type of product specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire -resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E-119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire -resistance -rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA - 600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual", to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory", to FMG's "Approval Guide, Building Products", or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. D. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Section 111209 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doe Page 3 of 19 PRC? CONS Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proiect Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constriction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction E. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum .board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings indicated. G. Spray applied textured finish installers shall have successfully completed within last three years, at least three textured coating applications similar in type and size of this project. 1. Mockups: Provide a sample application in one Guest Room for acceptance by the Owner's representative and to serve as a sample standard of quality for the balance of the work. Rework sample room if necessary to obtain Owner's acceptance. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, Gypsum Board, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg. F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg. F. for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. Do not exceed 95 deg. F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. D. Environmental Conditions, Textured Finish: Comply with manufacturers recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coating can be applied. E. Maintain temperature at not less than 55 degrees F during installation. F. Provide adequate ventilation to permit drying during curing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL FRAMING FOR INTERIOR PARTITIONS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. National Gypsum Company (800-628-4662) Section 1112_09 21 16—gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 4 of 19 PRO CONi�& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Curestructi4n:Nnunyeirrext North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Clark -Western Framing Systems 800-543-7140) 3. Dietrich Metal Framing Inc. A Worthington Industries Company_ (412-281-2805) B. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lb per sq. ft. b. Protective Coating: G40 Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating per ASTM A 653 C. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch -wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: Minimum 20 Gage, and as indicated on drawings. 2. Thickness: 20 gage min. as follows: a. For head runner, still runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other openings. b. In locations to receive cementitious backer units. 3. Depth: 2-1/2 inches; 3-5/8 inches; 4 inches, 6 inches, and as indicated on drawings. D. Furring: 1. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal to be 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Depth of 7/8 andl-1/2 inches. 2. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission from steel sheet complying with ASTM A653 or ASTM A568 to form 1/2 inch deep x 2-5/8 inch channel with single or double -leg configuration. Minimum 25 gauge, pre -punched for screw attachment. E. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner designed to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A653 or ASTM A568. Thickness as indicated for studs, and width to accommodated depth of studs. F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Manufacturers of Grid Suspension Systems I. Approved Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (800-442-4212) Section 1112_09 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 5 of 19 PRO CON44� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design anti Construction Management Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE b. Chicago Metalic Corp. (800-323-7164) c. USG Interiors, Inc. (800-874-4968) Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction B. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard direct - hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 Zinc Coating, Soft Temper, minimum 0.162 inch diameter. E. Hanger Rods: ASTM A510 mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. Diameter as indicated. F. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0538 -inch -minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 1/2 -inch -wide flanges, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lb. per 1,000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb. per 1,000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Finish: G-60 hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A653 for framing for toilet rooms and where indicated. a. Rust -inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. G. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg. and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows: 1. Thickness: Minimum 0.0179 inch (25 Gage) , unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 1-5/8" inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Protective Coating: ASTM A653, G40 Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating per ASTM A525. H. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, hat -shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: Minimum 0.0179 inch (25 Gage) , unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: G40 Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating per ASTM A525. I. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A653 or ASTM A568 to form 1/2 -inch -deep channel of the following configuration: 1. Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric -shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single -slotted leg (web) or hat -shaped channel, with 1 -1/2 -inch- wide face connected to flanges by double -slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs). Section 1112_09 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 6 of 19 PRO CON , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Mana ennenC Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction J. Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Cast -in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms 2. Post -installed, chemical anchor 3. Post -installed expansion anchor 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. G -P Gypsum Corporation (800-225-6119) 2. National Gypsum Company Gold Bond Building Products Div. (800-628-4662) 3. United States Gypsum Co. (312-606-4000) 4. BPB America, Inc. (866-427-2872) B. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches and thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in 5/8 inch thickness to comply with ASTM C840 for application system and support spacing indicated. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36 and as follows: I. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Type: Type C where required for sound rated wall assemblies. 4. Type: Sag -resistant Type for Ceiling Surfaces 5. Edges: Tapered and Featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. D. Mold & Mildew Resistant Interior Wall Panel 1. Approved Manufacturers: 2. "Mold Tough"; United States Gypsum Co. (312-606-4000) 3. ASTM C1177, enhanced mold & mildew resistant gypsum core wallboard. Conforming to the physical properties of ASTM C36 and ASTM C1177 on Glass mat back. Rating of 10 "No Mold Growth" as tested for 4 weeks according to ASTM D3273. a. Surfaces to be Painted: Coated inorganic glass mat -faced back and paper -faced front. b. Surfaces to be covered with Wallcovering or other finish: Coated inorganic glass mat -faced back and front. Section 1112_09 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 7 of 19 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC) CON4,$, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 4. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. Do not use at fire -rated assemblies. a. Note F. Tile Backer Cement Board: ANSI Al 18.9. 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "DUROCK Cement Board"; United States Gypsum Co b. "Wonderboard"; Custom Building Products (800-272-8786) 2. Thickness: As shown on Drawings. G. Exterior Soffits (not directly exposed to the weather): 1. Approved Manufacturers: -0 a. "Fiberock Brand Aqua -Tough Interior Panels; United States Gypsum Co. b. Gold Bond Brand Exterior Soffit Board; National Gypsum Co. 2. Thickness: As shown on Drawings. H. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Approved Manufacturer a. "Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim Series" United States Gypsum Co b. No Substitutions 2. Material: Formed metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 3. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047: a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead (J -Bead) with both face and back flanges; face flange 'formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated. c. L -bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L - bead where indicated. Section 1112_09 21 16 gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 8 of 19 PRO CON ,,i , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction d. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. I. Zinc Accessories for Exterior Installations: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints formed from rolled zinc complying with ASTM C1047, in shapes indicated below by reference to ASTM C1047: 1. Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Shape LC -Bead (J -Bead), use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated. 3. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. J. PVC Accessories for Installations @ Pool Area: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints: Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Shape LC -Bead (J -Bead), use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated. 3. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. B. Joint Tape: ASTM C475, 2 -inch nominal width, paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged, job -mixed, chemical - hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. a. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. b. Apply water resistant tile adhesive to all cut or exposed edges, utility holes, and joints including those at wall intersections when installing moisture -resistant gypsum board panels. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. Section 111209 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 9 of 19 PRO COMA, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Dosibm and Cpnsiruetipn ManagementNorth Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound a. Walls: Smooth Level 4 finish for painted and VWC walls; typical U.N.O.. b. Ceilings: Smooth Level 5 finish for painted ceiling; typical U.N.O. 2.05 CEMENT BOARD ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide the kind, type, and size recommended by the cement board manufacturer for the application shown. B. Joint Reinforcement: 2 -inch wide glass fiber, open -weave tape, Durock Type P, as manufactured by USG Industries, or approved substitution. C. Joint sealer and joint compound as recommended by manufacturer for the application shown. 2.06 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Approved Manufacturers: 1) "AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant"; Pecora Com. (800-523-6688) 2) "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant"; United States Gypsum Co.(312-606-4000) 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Approved Manufacturers: 1) "BA -98"; Pecora Com. (800-523-6688) 2) Tremco Acoustical Sealant"; Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company (800-562-2728) B. Latex Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90. 2. Product has flame -spread and smoke -developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E84. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced installation standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum boards to continuous substrates. Section 111209 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 10 of 19 10 PRC CUNT, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consfnwtion Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. D. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C557. E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for attaching gypsum panels to steel framing. F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick. 2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. 3. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. G. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. H. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C514. I. Water: All water used in joint system shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of foreign material. J. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of gypsum drywall shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner's representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates with Installer present, to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 CEILING ANCHORAGES: A. Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.03 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary fire -treated wood framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. Section 111209 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 1 I of 19 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification vesigri Rntl Cor:sfnrctinrr �YfntrnSrrtrC?tk North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction C. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing of furring members or a indicated. D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 3.04 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. D. For STC -rated and fire -resistive -rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 1. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. 0 E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. For single -layer construction: 16 inches on center, or as indicated on drawings. F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange. G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA -600 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws, wither directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. H. Curved Partitions: 1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2 -inch intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1 -inch -high -by -thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. Section 1112_09 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc O Page 12 of 19 PRC) CON.,.,& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Doignanti Construction Managenrent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction I. Install thermal insulation as follows: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches on center. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or power-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches on center. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner. On adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10 inch staples fabricated from 0.0625 inch (16 gauge) diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member. 3.05 INSTALLATION - STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Screw furring members to metal framing. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure, as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. Section 111209 21 16—gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 13 of 19 PRO CONI Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction ,itnnag£nt£nt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 8. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620 -inch (8 -gauge) diameter, 4 feet o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2, 4 feet o.c. 3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. 4. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c. D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross - furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 3.06 INSTALLATION - CEMENT BOARD A. Install cement board on ceiling suspension system in locations shown on Drawings. Install to soffit vent moldings at perimeters. Apply long dimension parallel to or across framing. Center end or edge joints on framing and stagger joints in adjacent rows. Fit ends closely, but not forced together. 0 B. Fasten to framing per manufacturer's recommendations for fastening, but do not exceed 6 inches o.c. spacing. Space perimeter fasteners at least 3/8" from edge of board. 3.07 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and GA -216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed on one side. C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches, but not less than one framing member. E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. Gypsum boards shall extend tight to floors and ceilings with no gaps. Section 1112_09 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc O Page 14 of 19 PRC CONi,�, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design anti Canstnictioa Vanagemenh North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flanged first. I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. If not shown on Drawings, control joints shall be installed as follows, in locations as approved by Architect: 1. A control joint shall be installed where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic, or building control element) in the base building structure. 2. Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 3. Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 2500 sq. ft. 4. Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 900 sq. ft. 5. A control joint or intermediate blocking shall be installed where ceiling framing members change direction. K. Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire rated system, blocking shall be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material consisting of 5/8" type X gypsum board. L. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. M. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C-919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and close off sound -flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. Section 111209 21 16_gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 15 of 19 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Ucsibm and Construction ManagementNorth Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction N. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.08 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: On ceilings, apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible, and at right angles to framing, unless noted otherwise. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. B. Multi -layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer. On ceilings, apply base layer prior to applying base layer on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset face -layer joints one framing member, but not less than 16 inches from parallel base -layer joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/wall, apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least, one stud or furring member, not less than 10 inches with base layer joints. 3. On Z -furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multi -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum board and face layer to base layer as follows: Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. E. Direct -Bonding (Laminating) to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. F. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. G. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, comply with the following: 1. Install water-resistant Tile -Backer Board panels at showers, tubs, and where indicated on drawings to receive tile. 2. Tile Backing Panels: Page 16 of 19 Section 1112 09 21 16—gypsum board assemblies.doc PP.4 COMM- Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Con0rution Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction a. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated on drawings to receive tile. b. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to product a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations to receive water-resistant panels. c. Where the backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surface to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. H. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12 -inch -long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 4. For double -layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. 3.09 INSTALLATION - TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. D. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed. Provide edge trim -type with face flange to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. 1. Install "LC" bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 3. Install U -type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including expansion joints). Section 111209 21 16gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 17 of 19 PRO CQN 40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design find constroction Management North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 3.10 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration and level of gypsum board finish indicated. 1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas, using setting -type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges. B. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA -214. 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and where indicated. 3. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive light -textured finishes, wallcoverings, and flat paints over light textures. 4. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive gloss and semi -gloss enamels, nontextured flat paints, and where indicated. 5. Level 5 for gypsum board exposed ceilings to receive paint. C. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in finishing compound plus two separate coats applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and trim accessories using one of the following combinations of joint compounds (not including prefill), and sand between coats and after last coat. D. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound combination specified for Level 4 plus a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Use joint compound specified for the finish (third coat) or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated. E. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat. F. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat. G. Allow not less than 24 hours drying time between coats. H. Glass -Mat Gypsum Interior Wall Panel: 1. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use in interior applications. Section 1112_09 21 16—gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 18 of 19 PRO CUNT , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Uestgna„ d Constnrction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 3.11 CEMENT BOARD FINISHING A. Seal cement board per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Embed fiberglass reinforcement tape over joints and treat fasteners with joint compound as specified in Paragraph 3.11. C. Do not apply joint treatment over unsealed board. D. Apply skim coating of "Durabond 210 Joint Compound" by United States Gypsum Co, or approved substitution, over entire cement board surface. All joints, fasteners, and imperfections shall be covered provide smooth level surface for final finish. 3.12 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Cut, patch, repair, and point -up gypsum board as required. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. B. Promptly remove compound from door frames, windows, and other surfaces. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces which have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the framing and gypsum board work. Daily remove unused materials, containers, and equipment. Clean floors of all gypsum board and wood debris and leave broom clean. C. Clean spilled or splattered materials from adjacent surfaces not to be coated, immediately before coating has achieved an initial set. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 1112_09 21 16—gypsum board assemblies.doc Page 19 of 19 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON # INCORPORATED Design and ConstmacNon Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09 2216 NON -LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non -load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non -load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 2. Division 07 Section 'Building Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring members. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for head -of -wall joint systems installed with non -load-bearing steel framing. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for non -load-bearing metal framing, gypsum panels, and other components of wall assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load -bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 1 of 9 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATEDProject Specification North Andover, MA Design and Gonstntdion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 0 A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. 2. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. O Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 2 of 9 PRO CON.40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Design and Consinrrtion Management Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 2.3 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical (single leg). G. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. C. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 3 of 9 PRO CON # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Contraction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 3) Or equal approved in writing by the Architect C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. b. Metal -Lite, Inc.; The System. C. Or equal approved in writing by the Architect. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. E. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch - wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical (single leg). 2. Product: Provide Dietrich "RC -1 Deluxe or equal approved by Architect. H. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide w flanges. /0 Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 4 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Constmetion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare - steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch - diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. Refer to drawings for specific requirements for UL assemblies I. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Refer to the drawings and details. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 5 of 9 PILO CoN4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Des'grr and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire - resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. Refer to drawings for locations. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Comply with all instructions and requirements for listed UL Assemblies. D. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 6 of 9 0 0 L PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design imd Co cstrnctioxMaxagcment Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. E. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. F. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. G. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 7 of 9 Pito CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA &SignanACQUO"ctionManngement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Refer to drawings and listed UL assemblies. b. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated. Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance - rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced min. 24 inches o.c. E. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced min. 24 inches o.c. 0 Section 1112092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 8 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and CO) Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION Section 1112_092216 Non -load Bearing Steel Framing.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 PRODUCTS .1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CONS, INCORPORATED Design And Construction Man"gement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Floor Tile at accessible bathrooms and as noted on the Interior Design Drawings 2. Crack Bridging Membrane 3. Leveling Coat, Mortar, Grouts, and Adhesives 4. Thresholds B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00 — Joint Sealants 2. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.02 REFERENCES A. Tile Council of North America Inc. - "Hand Book for Ceramic Tile Installation". B. ANSI A 108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI Al 18.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar D. ANSI A118.3 — "Chemical Resistant, water cleanable tile -setting and grouting epoxy" E. ANSI A118.4 — "Latex-Portand Cement mortar" F. ANSI A118.7 — "Polymer modified cement grouts" G. ANSI A137.1 - Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 (01330). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, conform to ANSI - American Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. A single manufacturer shall produce all tiles and accessories. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C1028: a. All horizontal Surfaces: Minimum 0.6 Wet Section 1112 093013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 1 of 6 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstmetionManagenrent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit b. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. Wet 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. C. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate shall be prepared to receive new tile in a manner acceptable to the tile manufacturer. Existing flooring and other materials shall be removed and surface prepared to accept new tile. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR AND WALL TILE A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Dal -Tile Corporation (630-789-1479) 2. GranitiFiandre (727-522-6655) 3. Crossville Ceramics Co. (931-484-2110) 4. Ceramic Technics Ltd. (770-740-0050) 5. Latco Products (800-422-6860) 6. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. (301-929-8453) B. Floor Tile: Refer to Interior Design drawings. C. Wall Tile: Refer to Interior Design drawings. D. Tile Base and Accessories: Provide special shapes such as bull -nose edges and other accessories as required, to match wall tile. I. Provide matching bull -nose tile at all exposed edges. 2.02 CRACK BRIDGING MEMBRANE A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. "Laticrete 150 Crack Isolation Mat"; Laticrete International Inc. (800-243-4788) B. Provide self -bonding elastomeric membrane capable of heavy-duty service per ASTM C-627. Liquid -applied products will not be allowed. Section 1112093 013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 2 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 FRO CON ej� INCORPORATED Design mrd Constroction Management ARCHITECTURE C. Primer: As required by the slip sheet manufacturer. D. Furnish in 12 inch and 36 inch wide sheets in lengths required. 2.03 LEVELING COAT Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Leveling coat shall be 1/4" thick or less and shall consist of dry set mortar to which an equal volume of a mixture of one part Portland Cement and 1-1/2 parts sand has been added. B. Maximum variation in surface of leveling coat shall not exceed 1/8" in 8'-0" from required plane. C. Leveling coat shall be cured at least 24 hours before tile is applied. D. Surface to which leveling coat is to be applied shall be free of any coatings, oil, and wax. 2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS: FLOOR TILE A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. "Laticrete 254 Platinum Multipurpose Thinset Mortar"; Laticrete International Inc. (800- 243-4788) B. Bond Coat: Thin Set Mortar with Polymer or Acrylic/Latex Additive C. Installation conforming to ANSI A108.5 and A118.4 and Tile Council of America Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation No. 22F131 and TR911. 2.05 WALL ADHESIVE MATERIALS - CERAMIC TILE A. High strength latex -based, non-flammable adhesive formulated to meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI A136.1, Type 1. B. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Laticrete 15 Premium Multi -Mastic Adhesive"; Laticrete International Inc. (800- 243-4788) 2.06 GROUT MATERIALS A. Latex Portland Cement Grout consisting of dry set mortar with a acrylic latex or polymer additive. Use in conformance with ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A105.10. Materials shall conform to ANSI A118.3 and A118.7. 1. Color as shown on Interior Finish Index. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete International Inc. (800-243-4788) a. Epoxy Grout (All Joint Widths - Floor and Wall) 1) "Spectra LOCK Pro Epoxy Grout" Section 1112 093013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO CON,o Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constntrtion Maoagewmt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2.07 THRESHOLDS A. Georgia Marble, complying with ASTM 503 requirements, Grade A, free from cracks, chips, stains, or other defects, uniform in tone and coloring. Minimum abrasive -hardness value of 10 per ASTM C241. Finish to be fine sand -honed on faces and beveled edges. B. Color and size as shown in Interior Finish Index. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Edging and Transition Strips for floor tile: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Schluter Systems (800-574-8481) b. Approved Substitution by Marriott International 2. Miter corners and angles. Install in longest lengths possible with closely fitted and aligned butt joints, and with horizontal leg keyed into the mortar bed. Top edge shall be set flush with finished floor tile. Clean and remove any mortar stains. 3. Refer to Interior Finish Index for model, material and color. 2.09 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Joint Sealant to include sealing of ceramic tile surfaces at internal and external comers, transitions in plane and where ceramic tile work abuts dissimilar materials. 1. Refer to Section 07 92 00 for sealant specifications. B. Other materials, including adhesives not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of tiles, shall be only as recommended by the manufacturer of material to which it is applied. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Section 1112 093013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 4 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.02 PREPARATION: PRO CON 104# INCORPORATED Design and Conetrattiun Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Prior to laying flooring, vacuum and remove all contaminates from surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors. B. Apply concrete slab primer for ceramic tile, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.03 CRACK BRIDGING MEMBRANE A. Install membrane in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications. B. Provide 12 inch wide strip at all control joints and existing cracks in concrete floor. 3.04 TILE INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with the ANSI Standard Installation Specification A108.1 through A108.13 and TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". B. Handle, store, mix, and apply mortar and grout in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disruption of pattern, joint alignment, or bridging of Expansion Joints or Control Joints. D. Install tile after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by the flooring manufacturer. E. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints, control joints and pressure relieving joints of widths and locations according to TCA Handbook Construction No. EJ171, and as approved by Architect. Do not saw cut joints after application. F. Lay tile from center marks established from center of area so that tile at opposing edges of the area are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at edge perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis unless otherwise shown. G. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly in and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tile are not acceptable. H. Lay tile with grain in tile running in same direction. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. I. Sound tile after setting and replace hollow sounding units. J. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the ANSI A18.10 tile installation standards: Section 1112 093013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 5 of 6 PR0 CON40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA M$iV1.7 colistmCdonMm gement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.05 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. B. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100% mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A 108 series of the installation standards: 1. Exterior tile floors. 2. Tile floors in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries, and swimming pools. 3. Tile floors composed of tiles 8"x 8" or larger. 4. Tile floors composed of rib -backed tiles. C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise'indicated. D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or at all locations where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. B. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100% mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of the installation standards: 1. Tile wall installations in wet areas, including showers. 2. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 8"x 8" or larger. 3.07 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean grout and setting material from face of tile while materials are workable. Leave tile face clean and free of all foreign matter. B. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective work. C. Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed surface. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days, preferably 7 days. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces. END OF SECTION Section 1112 093013 Ceramic tile.doc Page 6 of 6 r� Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON44 INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Managennent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09SI23 ACOUSTIC TILE CEILINGS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Revised March'29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for suspension systems provided for gypsum board ceilings. 2. Divisions for MEP -FP work (by Design -Build Engineers) for coordination of air handling devices, fire protection devices, and electrical devices installed in ceiling systems. C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1 i 12_095123Acoustic the ceilings.doc Page 1 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO CQ �I �`# Project Specification North Andover, MA 1NCORPORATEDars;g,,,,,,�c�nst��ttar:ern,:agrs:rpt. Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 -inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface - burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 0 1112_095123Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 2 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO CO 4' Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Revised March 29 2012 Design and ConstnctionlWanagemcnt Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Mechanical, electrical and other utilities to be provided above the ceiling shall be completed prior to the installation of the ceilings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold -Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1112_095123Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 3 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO CQNI� Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Acoustic Panel ACT -1: For all public areas except as noted below. 1. Size: 24 inches x 24 inches x 3/4 -inch thick. 2. Composition: Mineral wool fiber. 3. Surface Finish: Vinyl paint; white. 4. Surface Texture: Medium textured. 5. Edge: Beveled tegular. 6. NRC Range: .55. 7. CAC Range: 35. 8. Fire Hazard Classification: Fire Rated and Class A, 0-25 flame spread. 9. Product: "Astro" Climaplus Fine Textured; USG Interiors, Inc. 10. Suspension System Type: A. B. Acoustic Panel ACT -2: For Kitchen, Servery, Dry Storage, Trash Room and Chef's Office 1. Size: 24 inches x 48 inches x 1/2 -inch thick. 2. Composition: Gypsum core. 3. Surface Texture: White, 2 mil. Rigid vinyl laminate, stipple texture. 4. Edge: Square. 5. CAC Range: 40. 6. Fire Hazard Classification: Fire Rated and Class A, 0-25 flame spread. 7. Product: Gridstone GB5045; National Gypsum Co. 8. Suspension System Type: B. C. Acoustic Panel ACT -3: For Theatre only. 1. Type: Exposed grid direct suspension with bracket. 2. Product: CertainTeed "Versatone". 3. Type: XII (per ASTM E1264). 4. Flame Spread per ASTM E84: Class A. 5. Size: 2' x 2'. 6. Panel Thickness: 3/4" 7. Edges: Square 8. Finished Surface: Laminated black mat. 9. Core: Medium density glass wool. 10. Color: Black tile with black exposed grid. 1112_095123Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 4 of 9 43 N Brightview North Andover PRO CONI` Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Revised March 29 2012 Design and C`onstrudion Management Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE D. Acoustic Panel ACT -4: For second floor back of house except areas to receive ACT -2. 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Product: #1774 "Dune". 3. Size: 2' x 2'. 4. Color: White. 5. Suspension system: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Prelude XL 15/16" E. Acoustic Panel ACT -5: Direct Applied Acoustic Ceiling for common areas as noted on reflected ceiling plans. Manufacturer: "Ecophon"; Contact: Chris Jones, E-mail: chris ionespsaint-gobain.com 2. Product: Ecophon Focus F, thickness: 20 mm, size: 600x600x2O mm. Color: white 010. 3. Grid System: NA 4. Installation: Installed according to Ecophon installation diagrams for fully adhered applications with an overall depth of system of 23 mm. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1112_095123 Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 5 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO CO �r Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Revised March 29 2012 Design and Construction Management Project #301112 Issued For Construction n ARCHITECTURE �J D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel -Copper -Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel -copper -alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- diameter wire. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04 -inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch- diameter bolts. F. Hold -Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced maximum of 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Type A: Narrow -face, Steel -capped, Double -web, Fire -rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, pre -painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with pre -finished, cold -rolled, 9/16 -inch wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Finish: Painted white. 4. Products: a) Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Suprafine Fire Guard. b) Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 4050 c) USG Interiors, Inc.; Centricitee DXLT System. B. Type B: Wide -face, Aluminum -capped, Double -web, Fire -rated, Hot -dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/653M, G60 coating designation with pre -finished, cold -rolled, 15/16 -inch wide aluminum caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Finish: Painted white. 4. Products: a) Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude Plus XL, XL8200 Series. b) Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 1250 System. c) USG Interiors, Inc.; ZXLA System. X1 1112_095123Acoustic the ceilings.doc Page 6 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO CON4,t Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED Revised March 29 2012 Design and ConstractionManagetnent Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Section 07920. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to tested fire -rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire -resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard 1112_095123 Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 7 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO C0,1.V of Project Specification North Andover, MA 1 N C d R.P O R AT E.D Revised March 29 2012 Design and Construction Management , Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in-place hanger inserts, post -installed mechanical anchors, or power - actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or post -installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 0 1112_095123Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 8 of 9 Brightview North Andover PRO O CONI,` Project Specification North Andover, MA I N C O R P Q R AT E D Revised March 29 2012 Design and ConstrnctionAfangount Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system members with box -shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire - resistance -rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 1112_095123 Acoustic tile ceilings.doc Page 9 of 9 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile 2. Solid Vinyl Floor Plank 3. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) 4. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering. 5. Resilient Wall Base, Reducer Strips and Other Accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 -by -9 -inch sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. For heat -welding bead, manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 6 -by -9 inches long, of each color required. 2. Resilient Accessories: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 -inch sections of each different color. D. Seam Samples: For seamless -installation technique indicated and for each floor covering product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 -inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 1 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONto INCORPORATED Design qad Cosstaretionmamgrntent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit G. Moisture, Relative Humidity and Alkalinity and Adhesion Tests: Provide results of specified moisture, relative humidity and alkalinity and adhesion tests and manufacturer's written moisture and alkalinity requirements for each resilient flooring type specified. H. Product Certifications: Signed by resilient flooring manufacturer of products supplied that products comply with specifications and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 Wlsq. cm. C. Source Limitations for sheet flooring: Obtain each type, color and pattern of sheet flooring from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 2 of 6 0 0 K PRO CON,o Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Doign and Co,:stniction Man ngemenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFER TO INTERIOR DESIGN DRAWINGS AND FINISH SCHEDULE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 3 of 6 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design and coustnistionmanagennnt North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours or as recommended by manufacturer. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement or as recommended by product manufacturer. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: I. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low -traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 4 of 6 0 0 0 PRO CONS, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desig,: and Consinxtion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat -Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 2. Chemically -Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical -bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly -fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on floor covering surfaces. J. Integral -Flash -Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches up vertical surfaces or as indicated on Drawings. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 5 of 6 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Constradion Mnnageatent North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply minimum one coat. E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0 Section 1112_096500 Resilient Flooring.doc Page 6 of 6 PRO CON4i� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constm:tion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 09680 CARPET PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of surfaces to receive carpeting. 2. Carpet: a. Stretch -in Installation b. Direct -Glue -Down Installation c. Double -Glue -Down Installation d. Carpet with Attached -Cushion Installation e. Carpet with Preapplied Adhesive Installation 3. Carpet Cushion: a. Furnished by Contractor, installed by Contractor 4. Accessories, including tack strips, adhesives tapes and all other required accessories. 5. Transition edges 6. Carpet stair nosings B. Related Documents: 1. Seam Layout Drawings provided by Interior Designer (if required) C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Section 03 54 13 - Cementitious Decks and Underlayment 3. Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS DDD -C-0095 Carpet and rugs, wool, nylon, acrylic, modacrylic, polyester, polypropylene B. CRI 104 Carpet Installation Standard 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 with the following supporting data: 1. A copy of the manufacturer's printed installation manual shall accompany Bid for review and approval by the Owner's Representative. Section 1112_09 68 00_carpet.doc Page 1 of 11 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and coustmCtimmonugc»m"t Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Shop Drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this Section, or can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Successful vendor shall be responsible for field measurements to determine carpet layout. C. All products shall comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute Indoor Air Quality Testing Program (Green Label). D. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics; per test method indicated below, by UL, ASTM, E 648, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 2. Rating: Pass E. The carpet contractor is responsible for reviewing carpet manufacturer's published installation instructions prior to installation. This includes understanding dye lots, pattern sequencing, pattern matching and any special instructions. Failure to abide by the manufacturer's instructions could result in a backcharge to contractor for corrections to the installation. F. Contractor is responsible for damages to work performed by others including but not limited to telephone or television wires placed in front of the tack -strip running the perimeter of the room. G. The installation contractor is responsible for verification of quantities within twenty-eight (28) days on new construction. The contractor shall provide take -offs of all carpet and padding, as required for a complete installation. No compensation will be allowed to the installation contractor for materials and labor that may be required to install additional carpeting because of incorrect quantity takeoffs. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling". B. Do not deliver carpet until areas of building are ready for carpet installation. Provide protection from loss or damage. Section 111209 68 00_carpet.doc Page 2 of 11. 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and Consmsc onManagenient ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated, dry area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 degrees F. (20 degrees C.) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. Never stack carpet more than two rolls high or stand up on roll ends on job site. Do not bend or fold carpet in storing. D. Carpet shall never be stacked more than five (5) rolls high 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6. 1, "Site Conditions, Temperature and Humidity" B. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved, and completed. C. In areas to receive carpet, room temperatures shall be maintained at 65-90 degrees F and with relative humidity ranging between 20 and 65 percent minimum for 72 hours prior to, during, and 72 hours following application. Materials shall be conditioned at application temperature and humidity at least 24 hours prior to application. Provide sufficient lighting for carpet installation. D. Contractor shall provide method approved by the Owner's representative to mechanically exhaust all spaces to receive carpet to the exterior during installation and a minimum of 72 continuous hours, or length of time required by the manufacturer or Owner after installation. E. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F, or as recommended by manufacturer. F. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that a pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Stretch -in installation labor shall be guaranteed for one (1) year. Sixty days after installation, the Subcontractor is to re -stretch all carpet where necessary and as directed by Marriott Representative. B. Tred-Mor Dubl-Stik installation labor shall be guaranteed for five (5) years. C. The adhesive manufacturers offer five (5) year warranty on their adhesives used on a Tred- Mor Dubl-Stik installation. D. It is the carpet Contractors responsibility to fill out the adhesive manufacturer warranties. The warranty must be returned to the adhesive manufacturer and a copy sent to the Contractor's representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet: Refer to Interior Finish Index and Interior Design Drawings Section 111209 68 00_carpet.doc Page 3 of 11 PRO CON44� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constractiommmagement Dec. 20, 2011 f� Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit `J 2.02 CARPET CUSHIONS A. The following carpet cushion information is provided solely for use by the Contractor to determine locations. B. Rubber padding - 50 oz. Badger waffle type pad shall be installed in Rooms unless TredMor pad is specified. C. Rubber padding - 68 oz. Granite IV flat type pad shall be installed in Public Areas and Guest Room Corridors unless Tred-Mor pad or direct glue -down is specified. 1. Rubber padding shall be cemented to the floor with a liquid mastic around the perimeter and in an use pattern across the field. 2. Rubber padding joints shall be at a right angle to all carpet seams. When this is not practical, shift the pad so that the joints are several inches from the carpet seams. All padding joints shall be taped. D. Tred-Mor Padding: 1. 1562 used in Ambulatory Guest Rooms (except at ADA accessible Guest Rooms) 2. 2568 used in Guest Room Corridors and other Public Areas not listed below 3. 2580 used in Assembly Areas 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Seaming: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. B. Hot melt tape — (all stretch installation areas except Dubl-Stik installations) 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "6 inch - Super 3S Tape"; ORCON (800-227-0505) C. Carpet Adhesive: (All direct glue -down areas except double-stik installations) 1. Non -staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer for use intended, complying with the following: a. Carpet adhesive to be non-toxic, low odor, and solvent free, with no alcohol, glycol, or ammonia. Adhesive shall be antimicrobial with no hazardous vapors and contain no carcinogenic materials, per OSHA Regulation 29 CFG 1910-1200. All containers shall contain material safety data sheets (MSDS) and be available at job site for inspection. D. Carpet Adhesive - Dubl-Stik Installation 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "No. 375 or SS -5" ("Safe -Set"); CHAPCO (Chicago Adhesive Products, Co.) (800- 621-0220) b. "Parabond" Dubl-Stik DS -902; Para -Chem, Inc. (800-763-7272) 0 Section 1112_09 68 00 carpet.doc Page 4 of 1 I Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON44; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE c. "No. 880"; M -D Building Products, Inc.. (800-654-0007) E. Carpet Seam Adhesive - Dubl-Stik Installation Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit I. This product shall be used to join the primary backs of tufted carpet and the woven backs of Axminster carpet together. 2. All seam adhesives shall be latex type. 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. " Seam Cement #112"; CHAPCO (Chicago Adhesive Products, Co. (800-621-0220) b. "Parabond Premium Latex Seam Sealer M267"; Para -Chem, Inc. (800-763-7272) c. Substitution as approved by Architect/Interior Designer F. Hot Melt Tape - Dubl-Stik Installation 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "CT-7DS"; ORCON (800-227-0601) 2. NOTE: MANDATORY USE WITH BRINTONS AND COURISTAN CARPETS 3. The use of hot melt tape is optional and depends on the carpet installer's preference. There are instances during some installations, such as pattern matching, where the hot melt tape may simplify and speed up installation. 4. CAUTION: DO NOT USE A SILICONE TREATED TAPE. THE SILICON WILL PREVENT THE ADHESIVE FROM ADHERING TO THE BACK SIDE OF THE TAPE. G. Tack Strips: 1. Water-resistant plywood strips as required to match pad thickness and in compliance with CRT 104, Section 11.3. 2. Commercial with 3 rows of pins. a. Type 1: Pre -nailed (Concrete) for anchoring into concrete sub -floor. b. Type 2: Extra long nails for cementitious leveling bed over plywood sub -floor. 2.04 TRANSITION EDGES A. Carpet Transition Edges: Refer to Interior Finish Index and Section 09 65 00 (09650). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. Section 1112_09 68 00 carpet.doc Page 5 of 11 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA rlesignand CoymftctionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Concrete Subfloors: General Contractor shall verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer b. Carpet cushion manufacturer 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreign deposits. 4. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, as approved by General Contractor. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue -Down Installation" 1. In the case of direct glue -down, carpet glued to floor, no padding required, follow the manufacturers specifications. 2. Milliken modular carpets and Collins & Aikman uniback carpet requires the use of their own adhesives when installing their products. B. Double -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Double Glue -Down Installation" C. Carpet with Attached -Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Attached Cushion" Section 111209 68 00_carpet.doc Page 6 of 1 I PRO CONeo, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Contraction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Carpet with Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10.4, "Pre - Applied Adhesive Systems" E. Stretch -In Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch -In Installation" 1. Install tack strip with adhesive, drill and pin, or nailing, or combination, where required for adequate strength. 2. Locate Tack strip 1/4 inch from wall to conceal carpet edge between stripping and base of wall. Strip entire perimeter of each carpeted space and at obstructions and cutouts. 3. Tap down tackstrip pins in Guestrooms at Entrances, Bathroom, Closets, and Balconies. 4. Tred-Mor Pad Installation a. Refer to Scope of Work, and the Interior Design Drawings, for Tred-Mor pad locations. Tred-Mor padding will be installed using the stretch -in installation method listed above unless Tred-Mor Dubl-Stik is specified. 5. Power stretch carpet uniformly in both directions the exact amount recommended by carpet manufacturer; trim edges, secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. a. Stretch -in installations must be power stretched uniformly length and width 1% to 1.5% using a power stretcher. b. When Graphic Action Back Carpet is specified, a uniform length and width power stretch of .75 % to I% is acceptable. 6. Use a carpet covered minimum 48 inch long 4 x 4 buffer block between power stretcher and wall to prevent damage to wall. Use a wall trimmer to trim carpet along walls and abutments. This Contractor shall be responsible for wall damage caused by installation Work. a. Trimmer must be adjusted to leave sufficient excess carpet to tuck into gullies. F. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs" G. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges H. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. I. Cut and fit carpets to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between cut pieces. 2. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. Section 1112_09 68 00_carpet.doc Page 7 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON I# INCORPORATED Design mid Consbvction Maugeme»t ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit J. Carpet shall extend to the back of all toe spaces, under all millwork, cabinetwork, convectors, bookshelving, and similar items to the limiting planes of the floor surface. Where carpet terminates at a doorway, termination of carpet shall occur under the edge of the closed door, or at the side of the threshold where this is*required. Cut and fit carpeting to all obstructions protruding from the floor surface, such as columns, pipes, thresholds, electrical, and telephone outlets, etc. All raw edges shall be sealed and securely and neatly tucked into place. K. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. L. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. M. Carpet shall be installed by experienced carpet layers in an approved manner, using Marriott's recommended adhesive and procedures, as approved by carpet manufacturer. Install carpet with pile running in the same direction, unless specifically directed to do otherwise. N. Install carpet cushion seams at 90 -degree angle with carpet seams. O. The final carpet pattern, layout, edge binding locations shall be as directed and approved by Owner's Representative. All associated installation shall be by this Contractor. 3.04 TRED-MOR DUBL-STIK INSTALLATION A. Glue -Down Cushion - Pressure Sensitive Adhesive: After all floor preparation is completed, the layout of the cushion should be planned. Cushion should be installed in longest lengths possible with consideration for traffic patterns and seam placement. Cushions seams should not be directly under carpet seams and generally should be at right angles to them. When this is not possible, shift cushion or carpet so that cushion seams are at least 6" to one side of carpet seams. After completing the cutting and fitting, begin gluing. Fold back the cushion and begin applying the adhesive to the floor. Refer to adhesive manufacturer's instructions for trowel size. Coat the floor with a continuous thin film of adhesive. A thick film will not be permitted. The optimum time to install cushion onto the adhesive is after the adhesive has become tacky dry. Do not lay the cushion into wet pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Gluing Cushion to Floor: a. Pressure Sensitive Adhesive: For most installations, a 1/32" x 1/32" x 1/32" trowel size will be sufficient. However, if floor is very porous (rough concrete, particle board, plywood, etc.), a larger trowel notch may be required. Some pressure sensitive adhesives can be applied more quickly to smooth subfloors by using a short nap paint roller. Comply with the adhesive manufacturer's instructions covering the specific adhesive. After adhesive application has been completed, place the cushion onto the adhesive and adjust where necessary to ensure there are no gaps at seams and whether full contact is made with adhesive. Smooth out air bubbles with a 2' piece of carpet core or the bottom of a tool box shelf. 3. Glue Down Carpet to Cushion: Section 1112_09 68 00_carpet.doc Page 8 of 11 PRO CON4,��, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Multipurpose - Carpet Adhesive - Premium Quality: For use between the cushion and tufted carpets with a secondary back or woven carpets, only a quality Brand Premium Adhesive should be used. Conform to manufactures recommendations and spread with a properly selected notched trowel. Maintain proper notch size throughout the installation. b. Laying Out Carpet and Installing: Follow industry accepted methods for a glue - down installation. All carpet should be spread in the room 24 hours prior to actual installation with room temperature between 65 degrees and 95 degrees F. Open carpet and spread it out over cushion. Roughly locate the carpet three to four inches longer than the area measurement. Align all breadths in their proper positions and trim the seams. All seam edges must be trimmed using the appropriate seam cutting tools, according to the carpet manufacturer's recommendations, before spreading the adhesives. Do not double cut carpet seams where cutting tool will penetrate the cushion; this can weaken the finished seam. Select the appropriate adhesive and trowel notching, as recommended for the coarseness of the carpet backing. On tufted carpets with a secondary back and on woven carpets, the trowel notch shall be large enough for the adhesive to make good contact with the recessed areas of the backing. Very coarse textured backings, rough porous concrete surfaces, or other unusual conditions, can require a trowel with deeper notches as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Lack of adhesion caused either by a lower quality adhesive or wrong trowel selection is the number one cause of installation failure. c. The adhesive is to be spread uniformly over the cushion with selected trowel. After sufficient open time, the carpet should be pressed down into the adhesive using a 2 - foot section of carpet tube or a stiff bristlebroom (not nylon), or a roller weighing no more than 35 pounds. d. The following types of carpet can be glued down to cushion: woven wilton, woven axminster, tufted with secondary backing of jute or synthetic, tufted carpet with no secondary backing (unitary backing), tufted carpet with then -no -plastic (hot melt) application of secondary backing of jute or polypropylene, or cushion -bonded. e. Floor preparation and testing, as well as cutting, fitting and laying of cushion and carpet are essentially the same for all types. However, the type of adhesive and the depth of the notches in the trowel (which controls the amount of adhesive being applied) depends on whether you are installing cushion or the carpet and on what type floor and carpet backing. Refer to carpet manufacturer or adhesive manufacturer's instructions for recommendations. 3.05 SEALING CUT EDGES A. To prevent fraying and raveling at all seams and transition areas, a continuous bead of seam adhesive must be applied to the first edge where the face yam enters the backing. B. On woven carpet, all cut edges at seams and transition areas must be secured with a latex seam adhesive immediately following the seam trimming. Section 1112_09 68 00 carpet.doc Page 9 of 11 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.06 SEAMING PRC) CON,+ INCORPORATED IIesign and Construction Maungenunt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Install pad and carpet seams in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Locate pad seams at right angles to carpet seams. Where not possible to locate at right angles, locate pad seam minimum 6 inches away from carpet seams. Butt pad edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Tape pad seams. C. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. D. Orcon Super 3S Wide tape will be used on all public area seams specifying hot melt tape. E. The seaming iron with heat shield must be of proper size, matching the hot melt tape being used. F. The proper head setting and exposure time must be used to assure proper transfer without creating damage to backing or pile yarn. G. Orcon Super 3S tape will be used in Guest Rooms and suites where seams are specified. H. Cutting and Seaming Plan: 1. Guest Room and Suites: Refer to the Interior Design Drawings seaming layouts. a. Carpet may arrive pre-cut and labeled. b. Public Areas: Refer to the Interior Design Drawings seaming layouts and the carpet suppliers seaming layouts. I. Where conflicts between Owner's requirements and manufacturer's requirements occur, use Owner's requirements. 3.07 ACCESSORIES A. Provide carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Edge guard shall be used in all doorways or openings where no sill is installed or as required. B. Stair Nosing: Coordinate with installation of carpet so that edge of the carpet is installed under edge of nosing or otherwise protected from unraveling. C. Base (in corridors): Carpet Base, to match floor. c I: F.110MIN=61 A. Stretch -In Installation: Restretch carpet sixty days after Substantial Completion, as directed by Owner. 3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installation". B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps daily. C. Vacuum carpet daily using commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any protruding face yam using sharp scissors. Knock down tacks at entries to baths and guest rooms (to protect feet). Section 1112_09 68 00 carpet.doc Page 10 of 11 0 U Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Constrnction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit D. Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable scraps of carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and 3'-0" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste". E. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION Section 111209 68 00_carpet.doc Page 11 of I 1 PRO CON,;t Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design uxACO)IOnictioa Manggernent Dec. 2Q, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 09 77 30 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING (FRP) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panels, complete with trim, attachments, sealants, and other components and materials required for complete installation. Install at locations as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product and each color indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRP PANEL MATERIALS A. Panels: 1. PS 53-72 and Federal Specification L -P-505; durable, semi-rigid fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels manufactured by continuous laminating process, with pebble -like embossed finish face and smooth backs; color as selected from manufacturer's standards and uniform throughout. 2. Flame Spread less than 25 (Class I/A). 3. Smoke Developed less than 450. 4. Size: 0.09 inch x 4 feet wide x maximum length panels for minimum number of end joints. B. Trim: Manufacturer's standard extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) in color to match FRP panels; either one-piece or two-piece units, as recommended by manufacturer for use intended, as approved. C. Anchors: Manufacturer's standard nylon drive rivets suitable for anchoring to substrates shown on drawings, as approved. D. Sealant: Clear color silicone, as recommended by panel manufacturer or approved by interior designer. E. Adhesive: Type recommended by FRP panel manufacturer. Section 1112097730 FR Paneling.doc Page 1 of 3 PRO CON�o Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design ondConstmdionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit F. Miscellaneous Materials: As required by drawings and recommended by panel manufacturer, for complete installation, as approved. G. Colors as selected by the Interior Designer. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crane Composites, Inc.; http://www.cranecomposites.com/; Fire -X Glasbord. 2. Kal-Lite Division, Kalwall Corporation; http://www.kat-lite.com/; Kal-Lite Low Flame. 3. Koroseal Wall Protection Systems; http://www.korogard.com/; Korogard. 4. Marlite; http://www.marlite.com/; Standard FRP. 5. Sequentia Products, a Division of Crane Composites, Inc.; http://www.cranecomposites.com/sequentia/index.asp; Structoglas FRP. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas for conditions under which work is to be performed. Report, in writing, to Owner's Representative all conditions contrary to those shown on the drawings or specified herein, and all other conditions that will affect satisfactory execution of work; such as improperly constructed substrate or adjoining work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FRP PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Prior to installation, move panels to installation areas and allow to reach temperature of installation areas. 2. Install in compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions and final shop drawings. 3. Pre -fit each panel before securing in place. Cut as required to closely and neatly fit obstructions, non-standard panel spacings and penetrations. Use reinforced carborundum or carbide tipped blade for cutting. Protect eyes with goggles and cover nose and mouth with filter mask when cutting panels. 4. Allow manufacturer recommended space between abutting panel ends, edges and trim, and not less than 1/8 inch space around pipes, electrical fitting, obstructions and other items penetrating through panels. B. Wall Panels: 1. Install with edges vertical and plumb. Use maximum length pieces for minimum number of end joints from finished floor to 4 feet above finished floor. 2. Apply adhesive to wall surface to receive panel and apply adhesive to panel backs, as Section 1112_097730 FR Paneling.doc Page 2 of 3 PRO CON4,1� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA nks'gn and C°nstn,ctim Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit recommended by FRP panel manufacturer. Press panels into position. 3. Secure along upper and lower panel ends with nylon drive rivets, or with other approved non -corroding mechanical fasteners. a. Space fasteners at 16 inches on center, maximum. b. Drive fasteners to snug fit, but do not over tighten. c. Pre -drill panel fastener holes slightly oversize (1/8 inch) to accommodate normal panel expansion and contraction. Use carbide -tipped drill bit. 4. Install panel trim concurrently with installation of panels, with trim clasping adjacent panel ends or edges and sealed with silicone sealant. Install sealant and trim as recommended by manufacturer for moisture resistant application. a. Remove excess sealant during installation, or carefully trim off excess after sealant has cured. S. Seal corner seams, base and ceiling junctures, and junctures between panels and wall with silicone sealant. 6. FRP panels shall only be used as wall panels and not in any horizontal application. Panels shall terminate and finished at the cove base only. Do not install the cove base over the FRP. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT A. Clean installed materials to be free of surface contaminants, prior to final inspection and acceptance. Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of materials being cleaned. B. Replace damaged, abraded, defective, and unacceptable materials and components with new materials, as original specified, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Section 1112_097730 FR Paneling.doc Page 3 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL PRO CON e4 INCORPORATED Design and Constracfion Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.0 GENERAL A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint materials to exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces scheduled. Surface preparation, prime and finish coats specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatments. B. Paint all exposed surfaces, whether or not colors are designated, except where a surface or material is indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not mentioned, paint the same color as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Owner will select from standard colors or finishes available. C. Except in mechanical and electrical rooms, paint all exposed plumbing, heating, and electrical material to match the walls and ceilings of that area unless noted otherwise. This shall include, but not be limited to, pipes, insulation, conduit ducts, access panels, grilles, diffusers, whether the adjacent surfaces receive paint or not, and the like. D. Painting is not required on pre -finished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, or labels. E. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code - required labels, or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. G. Paint inside of ductwork behind grilles and registers flat black when visible from public spaces. H. All colors to be selected by the Interior Designer. 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Procedures for submittals. 1. Samples: Submit two (2) representative samples of each major type of surface or material. Do not proceed with final painting until samples are approved. 2. Color Charts: For all paints, stains and special coatings. Identify with numbers used on the "Interior Finish Index" refer to Section 00370. 1.2 AIR QUALITY A. All paints and finish products used on the interior of the facility must past EPA, OSHA and any applicable state standards for solvent release and content. Section 1112_099000 Painting.doc Page 1 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and construrtion Mmrageimf ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 2.1 PAINT A. Paint: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work including the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co., Montvale, NJ (201) 573-9600. Alternates: 2. Glidden Coatings & Resins/SCM Corporation, Cleveland, OH (216) 344-8207. 3. PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paint Division, Pittsburgh, PA (800) 441-9695. 4. Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH (800) 321-8194. B. Provide manufacturer's "professional quality," paint and products. C. Provide all primers, block fillers, and undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer's as finish coats. 2.2 SPAR VARNISH A. Modified alkyd resin meeting federal regulations for lead and other heavy metals. Clear, gloss finish. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type conforming to ASTM D 1187. B. Zinc Chromate Primer: Standard zinc chromate primer, selected from Manufacturers listed in this Section. C. Aluminum Pigmented Paint: Fibrated aluminum complying with ASTM D2824, Type IV. 2.4 EPDXY A. Products (Primer for Gypsum Board): Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work including the following: 1. "No. 3416" - Glidden Coatings & Resins/SCM Corporation, Cleveland, OH (216) 344-8207. 2. "Pro -Mar Latex Wall Primer, B28W 1" - Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH (301) 459-5005., Mark Soltice. 3. "Primer -Sealer 17-13" - PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paint Division, Pittsburgh, PA (800) 245-4726. B. Products (Top Coat): Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. "Glid-Guard 5430/5434" - Glidden Coatings & Resins/SCM Corporation, Cleveland, OH (216) 344-8207. 2. "Tile -Clad II Enamel, B70/B6V15" - Sherwin Williams; Cleveland, OH (301) 459- 5005, Mark Soltice. 3. "Pitt Glaze 16-801/902 (2 components)" - PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paint Division, Pittsburgh, PA (800) 245-4726. Section 1112_099000 Painting.doc Page 2 of 6 0 0 E6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION PRO CON4,i� INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. The application process of each "coat" of paint (spray, roll or brash) is left at the option of the applicator, provided that the required coverage is met. 3.2 SURFACES TO BE PAINTED A. The intent of these Specifications is to provide a protective finish for all exposed surfaces. The scope of work herein specified shall be understood as all exterior surfaces and all interior surfaces exposed to view, not provided with "factory" pre -finished surfaces, except as otherwise noted and as indicated. B. Surfaces Not To Be Painted: 1. Items specified to be factory primed and finished. 2. Mechanical and electrical units of work except as specified herein. 3. Concealed ducts and piping. 4. Aluminum, stainless steel and other non-ferrous metals unless specifically noted to be painted. 5. Face plates of wiring devices. 6. Leave hardware free of paint and in operating condition. 7. Door and door frame rating labels C. Paint inside of ductwork where exposed to view through grilles: two (2) coats flat black. D. All exposed mechanical and plumbing work located on the roof shall be painted two (2) coats flat black. E. All exposed interior and exterior mechanical grilles, access panels, etc., shall be painted to match the color of the adjacent wall or ceiling surface. F. Provide primer coat over all interior gypsum wall board scheduled to receive vinyl wall covering. 3.3 PAINT SCHEDULE A. The number of coats listed is the total number of coats required. The first coat may be omitted on items delivered shop primed. Numbers 1, 2 and 3 indicate the first, second and third coat. B. Verify compatibility of primers and block fillers with surfaces for which intended. C. All exposed metal surfaces to be painted to match surrounding area. Contractor to repaint surfaces as directed by Architect or Owner if proper coverage has not been attained, at no additional cost. D. Verify shop coat material to determine compatibility with coats being applied on the job. Section 1112_099000 Painting.doc Page 3 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 E. SCHEDULE: 09 9100 PAINTING Manufacturer PRO CON I# INCORPORATED Design and ConstnletionManagcmept ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Benjamin Moore & Co. is approved manufacturer and product unless otherwise noted. Alternate manufacturers and products are acceptable if approved in writing by the Architect. Submit product information as required by Section 01010 for Owner and/or Interior Designer and Architect approval. Colors (refer to finish schedule). Specifications and Products Exterior Surfaces - 09 9113: Traffic Marking First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M58 Safety & Zone Marking Acrylic Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M58 Safety & Zone Marking Acrylic Wood Painted Finish: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 169 Superspec Latex Exterior Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 170 Superspec Latex House & Trim Paint Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 170 Superspec Latex House & Trim Paint Ferrous Metals: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M06 Alkyd Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M28 Acrylic Gloss DTM Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - M28 Acrylic Gloss DTM Galvanized Metals and Aluminum: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M04 Acrylic Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M28 Acrylic Gloss DTM Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - M28 Acrylic Gloss DTM Interior Surfaces - 09 9123: Wood for Painted Finish: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 245 Superspec Acrylic Enamel Underbody Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 276 Superspec Latex Semi Gloss Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 276 Superspec Latex Semi Gloss Wood for Transparent Finish: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 238 Benwood Wood Grain Filler Section 1112_099000 Painting.doc Page 4 of 6 0 r-� 01 PRO CON i& Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Iktign and Consfmcfion Management Dec. 20,2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 234 Benwood Penetrating Stain Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 428 Benwood Polyurethane Finish Fourth Coat: Benjamin Moore - 428 Benwood Polyurethane Finish Concrete: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 285 SuperCraft Block Filler Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 276 SuperSpec Latex Semi Gloss (More than one coat may be required to achieve maximum coverage depending on color.) Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 284 SuperHide Latex Primer/Undercoater Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 275 SuperSpec Latex Flat Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 275 SuperSpec Latex Flat Gypsum Wallboard: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 253 SuperSpec Latex Undercover Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 274 SuperSpec Latex Eggshell Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 274 SuperSpec Latex Eggshell Gypsum Wallboard: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - 253 SuperSpec Latex Undercover Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - 276 SuperSpec Latex Semi Gloss Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - 276 SuperSpec Latex Semi Gloss Ferrous Metals: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M06-20 Acrylic Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss DTM Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss DTM Fourth Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss DTM Galvanized Metals and Aluminum: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M06-20 Alkyd Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss Primer Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss Primer Fourth Coat: Benjamin Moore - M29 Acrylic Semi Gloss Primer Ferrous and Galvanized Metals at Wet Areas: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M43/M44 Acrylic Epoxy Coating Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M43/M44 Acrylic Epoxy Coating Third Coat: Benjamin Moore - M43/M44 Acrylic Epoxy Coating (Note: surface preparation must follow manufacturer's recommendations) High Temperature Surfaces (interior and exterior): Clean surfaces by SSPC Powertool and Solvent Cleaning. Section 1112_099000 Painting.doe Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS; INCORPORATED Design and Consbertlon Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit First Coat: Rust-Oleum Heat -Resistant 4268 Primer Second Coat: Rust-Oleum Heat -Resistant 4200 Finishes (This system to handle temperatures of 300° F to 800° F) First Coat: Rust-Oleum Heat -Resistant 4315 High Heat Aluminum Second Coat: Rust-Oleum 4315 High Heat Aluminum (This system to handle temperatures of 500° F to 1200° F) First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M64-78 High Heat Coating - Aluminum Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M64-78 High Heat Coating - Aluminum Interior exposed structural steel system and metal decking (eggshell). Ferrous Metals: First Coat: Benjamin Moore — M07 Alkyd Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore — M52 Sweep Up Spray Alkyd Third Coat: Benjamin Moore — M52 Sweep Up Spray Alkyd Galvanized and Aluminum Surfaces: First Coat: Benjamin Moore - M04 Acrylic Metal Primer Second Coat: Benjamin Moore - M59-01 Latex Flat Sweep Up Telecommunication and Electrical Backboards: Provide the following finish over plywood (white color for telecommunications and black for electrical. Total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils): Primer: Benjamin Moore — Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater/Primer Sealer. First Coat: M59 220 Latex Fire -Retardant Coating Second Coat: M59 220 Latex Fire -Retardant Coating Structural Steel Requiring Intumescent Paint: Where structural steel requires fireproofing and g.w.b. enclosures cannot be accommodated due to space constraints, provide "Flame Control 10-10" alkyd based interior intumescent paint. Install per manufacturer's recommendations to achieve the specified fire resistance. For area not weather protected during construction, use an exterior grade intumescent paint by same manufacturer. Substitutions will be reviewed by the Architect. END OF SECTION Section 1112_099000 Painting.doc Page 6 of 6 0 1-0 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Mairggement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Special coating for exterior and exposed ferrous metals. 2. Epoxy Floor Coating 3. Concrete Stain/Sealer 4. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of special coating materials to items scheduled. a. Surface preparation, prime and finish coats specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatments. 5. Paint all exposed surfaces, whether or not colors are designated, except where a surface or material is indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not mentioned, paint the same color as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect (exterior) or Interior Designer (interior) will select from standard colors or finishes available. 6. Painting is not required on pre -finished items, operating parts, or labels. a. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code - required labels, or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Section 03 54 13 - Cementitious Decks and Underlayment 3. Section 05 52 00 - Handrails and Railings 4. Section 08 11 13 - Steel Doors and Frames 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting 1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. "Special Coatings" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 0133 00 with the following supporting data: Section 1112_09 96 00—high performance coatings.doc Page I of 8 Brightview North Andover PRO CON# Design Project Specification North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including basic materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified. a. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Color Charts: In duplicate, for all paints, stains and special coatings. Identify with numbers used on the "Finish Index" on Drawings. 3. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4" square samples of metal surfaces for each type of color and finish. Define by steps. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer, unless noted otherwise. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. B. Coordination of Work: Review sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. I. Notify the Owner's Representative of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. All ferrous metal shall be inspected for conformance with these Specifications and f� manufacturer specifications shall be for: 1. Surface Preparation 2. Prime and Intermediate Coats 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with trade name and manufacturer's instructions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. in a well -ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary precautionary measures to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application of coatings. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are above 50 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions. High solids products require temperature range of 70-90 degrees F. Section 1112_09 96 00 high performance coatings.doc Page 2 of 8 PRO CON4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA &Sig,=find ConsMichpaManagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F. above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing the coating operation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide a five-year material and labor warranty from the manufacturer and the applicator. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. Ferrous Metals: a. Tnemec Company, Inc. (800-356-3041) 2. Epoxy Coating for Concrete Floors (Interior): a. The Sherwin-Williams Company (800-321-8194) b. Euclid Chemical Co, An RPM Company (800-321-7628) c. Selby, BASF Building Systems (800-433-9517) d. Dur -A -Flex, Inc. (800-253-3539) 3. Concrete Stain/Sealer a. The Sherwin-Williams Company (800-321-8194) b. "Col -R -Tone III"; Kemiko, Epmar Corporation, a Subsidiary of Quaker Chemical Corporation (562-946-8781) c. Approved Substitution; L. M. Scofield (800-800-9900) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coats, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Ferrous Metals: All structural steel and metal fabrications, miscellaneous metal including Lintels, handrails, uninsulated piping, mechanical and electrical equipment at exterior including all component parts, but not including stainless steel or prefinished aluminum: 1. Shop Priming: a. SP3 power tool clean b. Primer: Tnemec Series 901K-97 Tnemec-Zinc at 3.0 mils DFT. 2. Field Application: a. SP3 power tool clean Page 3 of 8 Section 1112_09 96 00 high performance coatings.doc Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONe4,,, INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE b. Spot Prime: Tnemec Series 901K-97, Tneme-Zinc. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit c. Finish (required at exposed items only): Tnemec Series 113 (color) Tneme-Tufcoat 5.0 — 6.0 mils DFT. Color as selected by Owner's Representative. Apply one coat if spray applied, two coats if brush or roller applied. C. Exterior Steel Doors and Frames (Galvanized): 1. Factory Primer (By Door Manufacturer) a. To be sanded or abraded as recommended by Tnemec Co., Inc... 2. Tie Coat: "Clean `n Etch" pretreatment solution by Great Lakes Laboratories (800-888- 1105) 3. Back -prime frames and all edges with Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline at 2.0 mils DFT. 4. Finish: One coat Tnemec Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat (Semi -Gloss Color) at 3.0 mils DFT. D. Decorative Epoxy Coating for Concrete Floors: 1. Prepare surface as recommended by manufacturer. Use abrasive blast cleaning method if requested. 2. Two Part Epoxy Coating: "Eucopoxy Tufcoat DBS Pigmented Resin System" by Euclid Chemical Co, An RPM Company, or "Selbatwede 41 CR" by Selby, BASF Building Systems. a. Comply with flooring system manufacturer's recommendations for installation. b. Provide a minimum of two coats with total dry film thickness of nominal 20 - 25 mils, as recommended by manufacturer. c. Epoxy flooring shall cove a minimum of 4" up concrete curb at second floor water room and also be tooled into the floor drain for a watertight installation. d. Color as shown on Interior Finish Index. E. Clear Sealer for Concrete Floors 1. Refer to Section 03 30 00 (03300) and Interior Finish Index. 2.03 COLOR SAMPLES: A. The Contractor shall furnish samples of all finishes in triplicate and obtain the approval of color match before starting work. Final colors must match exactly with the approved sample. Colors selection and quantity of different colors, as shown on Drawings, and approved by Owner's Representative. B. Where a different manufacturer is utilized that product identified in Interior Finish Index, color must match listed name or number. Section 1112_09 96 00 high performance coatings.doc Page 4 of 8 0 Em Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION PRO CON440 INCORPORATED Design and Consimcuon Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Start of coating work will be construed as the applicator's acceptance of surfaces within particular area. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and items in place that are not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and coating. Remove items, if necessary, for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of coating operation, reinstall items removed using workmen skilled in the trades involved. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition. B. Ferrous Metal: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop -coated. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. 1. Blast -clean steel surfaces as recommended by the coating system manufacturer and according to the requirements of SSPC Specification SSPC-SP 10. C. Galvanized Steel/Non Ferrous Metals: Utilize SSPC-SPl solvent cleaning and chemical power wash (tri -sodium phosphate) to remove solvent and non -solvent soluble sealers and other substrate contaminants. 1. Touch-up shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged and bare areas. Wire -brush, solvent clean, and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to the coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to the manufacturer's directions. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain the coating material before using. Section 1 l 12_09 96 00 high performance coatings. doc Page 5 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.04 APPLICATION PRO CONN110 INCORPORATED Design grid Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. General: Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. 2. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used. B. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the manufacturer's directions, sand between applications to produce a smooth, even surface. C. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 1. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. 2. Coat the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness (DFT) of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to the material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime - coated by others. 1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in the first coat to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. F. Brush Application: Brush -out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. 1. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless the manufacturer's instructions permit using mechanical applicators. G. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods to apply coating when permitted by the manufacturer's recommendations and governing regulations, only when approved by Architect. I. Wherever using spray application, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush -applied coats. Do not double -back with spray equipment building -up film thickness of two coats in one pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer. Section 111209 96 00 high performance coatings.doc Page 6 of 8 0 0 PRO CON44 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Conslrnchon Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit H. All field connections such as bolts, nuts, and other fasteners shall be totally encapsulated with special coating system to match adjacent material. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Applicator to maintain accurate records of the application and provide copies of the records to the manufacturer, if requested. I. Minimum information required in the records: a. Daily temperatures - morning and evening b. Weather conditions c. Total area applied daily d. Amount of materials used daily e. Computed square foot coverage rate B. Manufacturer's written instructions will be kept at job site. Before application begins, all personnel involved will read these instructions. 3.06 COMPLETED WORK: A. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. The Owner reserves the right to engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. B. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests as required by the Owner. C. If tests shown that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting and remove non -complying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non -compatible. 3.08 CLEAN-UP: A. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing, scraping, or other proper methods, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Section 111209 96 00 high performance coatings.doc Page 7 of 8 PRO CON�;� Brightview North Andover 1 N C O R P O R AT E D Project Specification North Andover, MA. Design and ConstrmdionManagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION a Section 1112_09 96 00 high performance coatings.doc 0 Page 8 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON4,(, INCORPORATED Design and Coustmction Manrtgement ARCHITECTURE SECTION 10 20 00 BUILDING SPECIALTIES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following building specialties: 1. Metal employee lockers. 2. Corner guards. 3. Beauty salon equipment. 4. Commercial laundry equipment. 5. Flagpole B. Related Sections: Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work of the Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for concrete pads for laundry equipment. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for solid blocking required for installing building specialties. 3. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for washer and dryers in AL/ALZ Laundry Rooms. 4. Division 22 & 23 Sections for plumbing and HVAC respectively for laundry equipment and beauty salon equipment. 5. Division 26 Sections for conduit and wiring for laundry equipment and beauty salon equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, attachment to adjacent materials, and maintenance requirements for each project. Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 1 of 8 PRO CON'; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design find Constrriction mous +nrnt North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Include detailed information regarding rough -in and other preparatory work by other trades related to the laundry and beauty salon equipment installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for all materials. Shop Drawings shall indicate materials, gauges, fabrication details, dimensions and method of attachment. 1. Laundry Equipment: Differentiate between work provided by equipment installer and work required by other trades to support laundry equipment installation. D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's color charts for products having color options. E. Maintenance Data: Provide for all items to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified to Division 1. 1. Laundry Equipment: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts list with sources indicated, recommended parts .inventory list, emergency instructions and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. 1.4 WORKMANSHIP 0 A. Materials, devices, equipment and apparatus of a patented or of a special nature of manufacture shall be prepared, applied, or installed in a strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. B. Work of this Section shall be executed in strict accordance with Drawings, approved Shop Drawings and approved samples. C. Insofar as possible, fitting, construction and fabrication of the work shall be executed at shops, ready for delivery and erection at buildings. D. Provide all holes, connections, and fastenings for and to work of other trades abutting, adjoining, or intersecting work of this Section. E. All items, which do not have a special finish or are not otherwise specified, shall receive 1 shop coat of metal primer before leaving shop. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver laundry equipment only after utility rough -in is complete and construction in spaces to receive appliance is ready for installation. B. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for metal locker installation. N Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 2 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1:6 WARRANTY PRC) CON440 INCORPORATED Design and Constmaion Managewnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under the provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period as follows: Laundry Equipment: a. Tumbler (dryer): Three years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Washer -Extractor: 1) All Parts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 2) Bearings and Bearing Seal Assembly: Five years from the date of Substantial Completion. 3) Shell, Welded Frame Assembly, and Sbaft Assembly: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LOCKERS A. Metal Employee Lockers: Provide knock -down, double -tier lockers, fabricated of cold -rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366, and meeting the following requirements: Locker Arrangements and Size: Where indicated, provide the following: a. Single Tier Lockers: 12" W x 12" D x 72" H. Quantity: six. b. Double Tier Lockers: 12" W x 12" D x 72" H. Quantity: six. 2. Body: Form tops, bottoms, sides and intermediate partitions from 0.024 inch thick steel sheet; backs shall be 0.0428 inch thick steel sheet; flanged for double thickness at back vertical comer. Bottoms shall be galvanized sheet steel. Exposed ends shall be formed from 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet. 3. Frames: Form channel frames from minimum 0.0598 inch thick cold -rolled steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners. Form continuous integral door strike on vertical frame members. Form latch hooks from minimum 0.1046 inch thick steel, welded to door frames. Provide resilient bumpers to cushion door closing. Cross frames between tiers Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 3 of 8 PRO CON. Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Desip and Coarmd1onManagennnr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit shall be formed and fabricated from same material and welded to vertical frame members. 4. Doors: One-piece 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet, formed into channel shape at vertical edges and flanged at right angles at top and bottom edges; stamped louver vents in door face. Fabricate to prevent springing when opening or closing, and to swing 180 degrees. 5. Fabricate lockers for quiet operation with manufacturer's standard rattle -free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 6. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard 5 knuckle hinge welded to inside of door frame; recessed handle and pry -resistant latch with integral door pull for Owner provided combination locks; one double -prong ceiling hook and two single -prong wall hooks per locker. 7. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard continuous base, continuous sloping tops with supports and end panels, finished locker end panels fabricated from minimum 0.047 inch thick steel sheet, filler plates and number plates. 8. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel; color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 9. Manufacturers: a. Lyons Metal Products. b. Penco Products, Inc. C. Republic Storage Systems. d. Or Equal approved in writing by the Architect. 2.2 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT A. Washer — Extractor: Provide a soft -mount, high-speed extractor with a welded frame assembly and having the following characteristics: 1. Capacity: One at 35 lbs. and one at 55 lbs. 2. Provide raised metal base by manufacturer. 3. Controls: Microprocessor with up to 39 preset programs with a total of 99 programmable cycles. 4. Adjustable water temperatures and levels. 5. Manual chemical dispenser system for either powdered or liquid products. 6. Heavy-duty latch and door handle. 7. Heavy-duty full strut suspension system. 8. Wash Speed: 10 — 50 rpm, both. 9. Distribution Speed: a. 35 lb. Unit: 74 rpm. b. 55 lb. Unit: 69 rpm. 10. Low/High Extract Speed: Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 4 of 8 PRO CON44k Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design and Conshuction Management North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE a. 35 lb. Unit: 100 - 1000 rpm. b. 55 lb. Unit: 250 - 1000 rpm. 11. Low/High G -Force: a. 35 lb. Unit: 23 - 363 rpm. b. 55 lb. Unit: 26 - 418 rpm. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 12. Power: 208 — 240/3 phase. 13. Product: Speed Queen models by Alliance Laundry Systems as follows: a. 35 lb. Unit: Speed Queen SX35 b. 55 lb. Unit: Speed Queen SX55 B. Tumbler (Dryer): Gas fired unit with sensor activated fire extinguisher system and having the following characteristics: 1. Tumbler Capacity: 75 lbs. 2. Provide raised metal base by manufacturer. 3. Controls: Microprocessor with programmable drying cycles with desired drying times, temperatures, and cool -down. 4. Fire Extinguisher System: Sensor activated system shall automatically sense dryer fire, douse them with water and shut off when the fire is out. 5. Heat Input: 165,000 BTU/hr. 6. Airflow: 920 cfm. 7. Power: 3/4 HP, 208V, 3 phase. 8. Product: Speed Queen; Alliance Laundry Systems. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Stainless Steel Guards (Commercial Kitchen and Back of House only.): Paper -covered, satin - finish, 0.0625 -inch minimum, stainless steel sheet corner guards; full -height, unless otherwise indicated. Provide 90 -degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; and formed edges. 1. Wing Sixe: 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches. 2. Mounting Method: Countersunk, flat head, stainless steel screws with mounting holes 8 inches o.c. 3. Finish: Satin, directional polish. 4. Location: Commercial Kitchen and back -of -house; locate as indicated on drawings and as directed by Architect. 5. Quantity: Provide 15. 6. Product: Acrovyn Co -8; Construction Specialties, Inc. B. Surface -Mounted, Corner Guards (Public Areas): Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 5 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4,�# INCORPORATED Design gnd Constmdinn ManggMnrnt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Wing Size: 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches. 2. Mounting Method: Double-faced, self-adhesive. foam tape. 3. Location: Outside corners in public areas in locations directed by Architect. 4. Quantity: Provide 30 units. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of options. 6. Product: Acrovyn AM -20; Construction Specialties, Inc. 2.4 BEAUTY SALON EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: Belvedere USA Corp.; subsidiary of Wella Corp.; (800) 435-5491. B. Booth Unit: Shall have enclosed sliding lid to cover sink and bottle well; left cabinet shall have double doors with interior adjustable shelf, and right cabinet shall have a slant tool panel for three curling irons and one handheld dryer, _drawer and lower storage area behind door. Unit shall be equipped with a fourplex outlet with integral ground fault interrupter for hard wiring at site. 1. Color: Selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Model: Model SL44LTDII. C. Shampoo Sink: High gloss, stain resistant plastic shampoo bowl made of injection molded plastic, solid color throughout the bowl. I. Color: Selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Model: Belvedere 2100. D. All -Purpose Chair: Fully upholstered back, seat, and armrests; bright chrome arm supports; locking back release mechanism; 16AF bright chrome square tube foot rest; and brushed chrome, round hydraulic base. 1. Fabric: Grade 2 fabric; color selected by Interior Designer from full range of colors. 2. Model: Delta BD 81. E. Dryer Chair: Fully upholstered back, seat, armrests, and dryer box; and bright chrome arm supports. 1. Fabric: Grade 2 fabric; color selected by Interior Designer from full range of colors. 2. Model: Delta BD 83. F. Dryer Hood for Dryer Chair: UL listed cabinet with smoked hood; fire position heat control, sixty -minute timer, dust filtered, and outlet. 1. Model: First Lady Dryer, Model B81OS. Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 6 of 8 0 PRO CON44 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA vesign and constmdion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit G. Wall Mounted Hair Dryer: UL listed, pedestal -mounted unit; rotary knob for manual regulation of blower and temperature; two speed stages; mechanically regulated time with automatic stop function. 1. Model: Futura Basic Hood Hairdryer, Model FBPED; color selected by Interior Designer. 2.5 FLAGPOLE A. Flagpole: Provide one-piece, ground -set aluminum flagpole meeting the following criteria: 1. Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specification for Design of Metal Flagpoles." Installation to comply with all state and local ordinances. a. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole. b. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph; 3 -second gust speed at 33 feet above ground. 2. Exposed Height: 30 foot. 3. Design: Provide cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruding tubing complying with ASTM B 241. Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6. 4. Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated -steel foundation tube, 0.064 -inch -minimum nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16 -inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4 - inch -diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 5. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard slush -seam ball, sized to match flagpole -butt diameter; finished to match flagpole. 6. Internal Halyard, Cam Cleat System: 5/16 -inch -diameter, braided polypropylene halyard; cam cleat; and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic -coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. 7. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two swivel snap hooks per halyard. 8. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA -M 12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 1, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 7 of 8 PRO CONo# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Sections and shapes shall be rolled, formed, drawn or extruded as required for respective functions. C. Molded work shall have sharply defined profile and shall be clean and straight. Plain work shall be leveled, straight and surfaces true and smooth. Edges, angles, and comers shall be square, clean and sharp, unless otherwise detailed. D. Fastenings, exposed metal fastenings, and accessories, unless Underwriters' prohibit for safety, shall be of same materials, texture, color and finish as the base metal to which applied. E. Molds, trim, frames and other metalwork shall be proper dimensions to receive masonry block and tile, plaster, ceramic tile, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All items specified under this Section shall be installed in a strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. B. Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked -down metal lockers with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Anchor locker runs at end and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing. plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. C. Flagpole Installation: Install flagpoles where shown and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below -grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2 -inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. D. Training: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of laundry equipment. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete laundry equipment maintenance program. Coordinate instruction with the availability of the Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 0 Section 1112_102000 Building Specialties.doc Page 8 of 8 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON40 INCORPORATED Design and Constriction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes toilet and bath accessories. Extent of each is indicated on the Drawings. Type of toilet and bath accessories includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Toilet tissue dispensers. 2. Soap Dispensers. 3. Paper Towel Dispensers. 4. Grab Bars. 5. Towel Hooks. 6. Mirrors. 7. Mop and Broom Holders. B. Related Sections: I. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Division 08 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Samples: If requested by the Architect, full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Section 1 l 12_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories_doc Page 1 of 7 PRO CON40 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction managewnt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated by Architect. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 COORDINATION 0 A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 2 of 7 PRO CON,eo Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and constructionmarrageynent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031 -inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036 - inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot -dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized -Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and - theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD -M-411. 2.3 TOILET AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Paper Towel Dispenser, Surface Mounted: Provide Type 304 stainless-steel paper towel dispenser, all welded construction, sized for minimum of 300 C -fold or 400 multi -fold paper towels without using special adapters; with continuously hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with refill indicators that are pierced slots at sides or front. 1. Products: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Bobrick); Model B-262. b. General Accessory Manufacturing Company (General); Model TD -2. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser, Surface Mounted: Provide concealed mounting, stainless-steel roll -in - reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset with non -control delivery with manufacturer's standard theft -resistant spindle designed for 4-1/2 or 5 -inch diameter -core tissue rolls. 1. Product: a. Bobrick; Model B-2888 b. General; Model TTD-5 Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 3 of 7 PRO CON,# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design anti coushurtiunmanagement Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Wall Mounted: Vertically -mounted soap dispenser, container body and back Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. Device shall dispense soaps, lotions and detergents, 40 fl. Oz. capacity, unbreakable refill window, concealed wall fastening, large locked hinged stainless steel filler top, vandal -resistant. 1. Products: a. Bobrick; Model B-2111. b. General; Model G-16AP. D. Grab Bars: Bars shall be thermoplastic or resin -coated steel, 1 -1/2 -inch diameter, .05 -inch minimum wall thickness, smooth, satin finish and manufacturer's standard concealed fasteners. Provide lengths and configurations indicated on the Drawings. Product: Anchor Architectural Products or Architect approved equal. a. Color: White. E. Stainless -Steel, Channel -Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from stainless-steel channels in manufacturer's standard polished finish with square corners mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked; size as indicated on Drawings. Mirrors shall be first quality plate glass conforming to U.S. Commercial Standard CS -27-36 with two coats of silver and copper clad. Mirror backs shall be zinc -coated steel. 24 -inch by 36 -inch mirror size unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Product: a. Bobrick; Model B-165 Series. b. Bradley Corporation; Model 781. F. Mop and Broom Holder with Utility Shelf: 36 -inch long unit fabricated of minimum nominal 0.05 -inch thick stainless steel with shelf, 8 inches deep; support brackets for wall mounting; three hooks for rags; four spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam -type mop/broom holders. Provide at each janitors sink. 1. Product: a. Bobrick; Model B-224. b. General; Model US -5. 2.4 BATH ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single -roll dispenser, surface mounted concealed anchorage, thermoplastic or resin -coated metal, non -control delivery with manufacturer's standard spring- loaded spindle, designed for 4-1/2 or 5 -inch diameter core tissue rolls. 1. Product: Anchor Architectural Products (Anchor); Paper Holder AH 514. a. Color: White. Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 4 of 7 PRO CON*40� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and CvnstructipnManage"Jent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Towel Bars: 5/8 -inch diameter bar with 3 -inch diameter brackets with concealed fastenings, and projecting 3-1/8 inch from wall, thermoplastic or resin -coated metal; length 36 -inch or as indicated on drawings. Do not mount towel bars where they are susceptible for use as grab bars. 1. Product: Anchor; Towel Bar with Posts Ah -515. a. Color: White C. Grab Bars: Bars shall be thermoplastic or resin -coated steel, 1 -1/2 -inch diameter, .05 inch minimum wall thickness, smooth, satin finish and manufacturer's standard concealed fasteners. Provide lengths and configurations indicated on Drawings and as required to comply with applicable codes. 1. Product: Anchor Architectural Products or Architect approved equal. D. Robe Hook: Double prong unit with 2 -inch diameter mounting with concealed fasteners and projecting 1 -3/4 -inch from the wall, thermoplastic or resin -coated metal. 1. Product: Anchor; Double Robe Hook Ah 510 a. Color: White 2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. C. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion -resistant backing plates. Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 5 of 7 PRO CONA Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Cons ction Management Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and re -supplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to .withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. � 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE A. Public Use Toilet Accessories: 1. Provide one toilet tissue dispenser. 2. Provide grab bars, configuration as indicated on Drawings, screwed to blocking in stud partitions. Color: White. 3. Install decorative minor over lavatory (Owner furnished). B. Staff Toilet Room Accessories: 1. Provide one toilet tissue dispenser. 2. Provide one paper towel dispenser. 3. Provide one wall mounted, liquid soap dispenser. 4. Provide grab bars, configuration as indicated on Drawings, screwed to blocking in stud partitions. Color: White. 5. Provide channel -framed mirror over lavatory. C. Bathing Room Accessories (white): 1. Provide one towel bar. 2. Provide one robe hook. 3. Provide grab bars, configuration as indicated on Drawings, screwed to blocking in stud partitions. Color: White. Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 6 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE 4. Provide one toilet tissue dispenser. 5. Install decorative mirror over lavatory (Owner furnished). D. Unit Bathroom Accessories (white): 1. Provide toilet tissue dispenser. 2. Provide medicine cabinet. 3. Provide robe hook. 4. Provide towel bar. Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Provide grab bars, configuration as indicated on Drawings, screwed to blocking in stud partitions. Frameless mirrors provided in Section 08800 "Glazing". E. Staff Lounge Accessories: 1. Provide one paper towel dispenser. 2. Provide one wall mounted, liquid soap dispenser. F. Janitor Closet Accessories: Provide one mop and broom holder. END OF SECTION Section 1112_102800 Toilet & Bath Accessories.doc Page 7 of 7 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: PRO CON.. INCORPORATED Desivn and Construction Afaaageu ent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 10 3100 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 1. Prefabricated Fireplace Units, With Gas Log Set 2. Ceramic fiber fireplace logs 2. All Required Accessories B. Related Sections: Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Division 15 - Fire Alarm and Detection Systems: Carbon Monoxide Detectors Wall switch and Timer Switch connected to gas log electronic ignition. Note: Refer to MEP -FP specifications by Design Build Engineers for additional information. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit "Letter of Conformance" in accordance with Section 01330 with the following supporting documents: B. Submit product data, mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project. C. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit copies of Shop Drawings of all items specified herein to Architect for approval. Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding with manufacturing. Shop Drawings shall indicate: elevations; details; location in the building of each item; conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials; typical and special details of construction; methods of assembling sections; locations and installations requirements for hardware; size, shape, and thickness of materials; and joints and connections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of fireplace units of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this Section. B. All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. C. Comply with the fire -resistance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authority and codes. Provide materials, accessories, and application procedures which have been listed by UL. D. Verify that components and proposed installation comply with local and state requirements. E. U.L. Listing: Flue and Throat shall be UL rated insulated type for zero clearance installation to combustible surfaces. Section 1112_103100 Manufactured Fireplaces.doc Pagel of 3 PRO CONe; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Single Sided Unit: Model 6000G; Heat-N-Glo, a division of Hearth Technologies, Inc. 2. Double Sided Unit: Equivalent to 6000G By Heat-N-Glo, model TBD. (Location: IL Dining) 2.02 GAS FIREPLACE UNIT A. General: Provide top vented, fireplace unit with safety pilot, igniter and specified accessories complying with the Drawings. B. Single Sided Fireplace Unit, Model 6000G: Provide single side unit with fixed glass panel, top vent unit having the following characteristics: 1. Unit Framing Dimensions: 42 inches wide, 38-1/2 inches high and 22 inches deep. 2. Rating: 18,200 — 30,000 BTU/hr input. 3. Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency Rating (A.F.U.E.): Not less than 70%. 4. Valve: Provide with variable valve allowing for the adjustment of flame height and heat output. 5. Wall Switch: Provide wall switch with temperature sensor and variable speed control of gas. C. Vent System: Direct and top venting components, including elbows, pipe supports, flashing and terminations. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Blower Unit: 160 cfin unit. B. Fireplace Logs: Ceramic fiber campfire style log set, 30 inches long. C. Trim Kit: Halston operable doors, new bronze finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of manufactured fireplace. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Section 1112_103100 Manufactured Fireplaces.doc Page 2 of 3 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.02 INSTALLATION PRO CON4,40 0 INCORPORATED Design and Construction blangQemnrt ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Install manufactured gas fireplace unit in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. C. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction. D. Secure the fireplace and hearth extension to the floor to prevent shifting. Place metal safety strips provided with unit beneath the front edge of the fireplace, extending 1-1/2" under the fireplace base. Seal the crack. E. Make certain that the three concentric pipes of the chimney penetrate the roof to provide a proper functioning chimney termination and cooling system. F. Chimney top to be minimum 2'0" higher than any portion of the roof within 10'-0" of the chimney. Minimum height to be 3'-0" measured from the high side of the slope roof. G. Installed gas piping, tubing, hoses and clamps, must be hidden from view. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust components for proper operation. B. Clean exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 1112 103100 Manufactured Fireplaces.doc Page 3 of 3 ^ Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 1.0. GENERAL PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Drsign and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.1. Section Includes: A. Portable Fire Extinguishers and Brackets B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets for Portable Fire Extinguishers C. Fire Extinguishing Systems for Kitchen Hood D. Accessories 1.2. REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 -Portable Fire Extinguishers Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data which shall include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, and details. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.0. PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Larsen's Manufacturing Company B. J. L. Industries, Inc. C. Modern Metal Products, a Division of Technico Inc. 2.2. EXTINGUISHERS: A. Multi -Purpose, Dry -Chemical Type: Steel Tank, pressurized, including hose and nozzle: Provide 2-A:10-b:C, 5 -lb units for all fire extinguisher cabinets. 2. Provide 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b bracket mounted units in all mechanical rooms, including elevator machine room. B. Multi -Purpose, Wet -Chemical Type, Class K: UL -rated 2-A:K, 1.6 -gal nominal capacity, with potassium acetate -based chemical in stainless steel container, with pressure -indicating gage. 1. Location: Commercial Kitchen. Coordinate exact location with Architect. 2.2. BRACKET: Furnish black wall mount bracket where shown on Drawings complete with mounting hardware. 2.3. CABINETS: A. Products: 1. JL Industries, Inc.; Ambassador Series. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series. 3. Potter Roemer; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.; Alta Series Section 1112_104400 Fire Protection Specialties.doc Page 1 of 2 PRO CON.# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and ConstwHon Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Construction: Non -rated and rated as required for wall construction where cabinet is located. D. Cabinet Material: Enameled steel sheet with shelf of same metal and finish as cabinet. E. Semi -recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge. 1. Rolled Edge Trim: 2 -1/2 -inch backbend depth. F. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel Sheet. G. Door Material: Steel Sheet. H. Door Style: Horizontal duo panel with frame. I. Door Glazing: Clear tempered float glass. J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style and door material and style indicated. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel with plated or baked enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. L. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing and location. 2.4. FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM FOR KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD: A. Refer to kitchen drawings and Kitchen Equipment Schedule. 3.0. EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10440 Section 1112_104400 Fire Protection Specialties.doc Page 2 of 2 1*1 0 All PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Consbncaun Manngemenr Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 10 55 00 POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. USPS -approved horizontal mail receptacles. 2. USPS -approved parcel lockers. 3. Accessories: a. Directory for mail receptacles. b. Key keeper. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, identification sequence for compartments, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Product certificates, including written approval by Postmaster General. E. Maintenance data. F. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Each Type of Postal Specialty: For USPS -approved products, use only those included on current lists of USPS manufacturers and models. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Section 1112_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 1 of 7 PRO CON, . Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design and Coustrmction Management North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated. B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, exposed matte finish where exposed. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation, extra smooth where exposed; or electrolytic zinc -coated steel sheet, ASTM A 879/A 879M, Coating Designation 08Z (24G). D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. E. Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, manufacturer's standard copper alloy. F. Stainless -Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade 138M, Type 316. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.2 USPS -APPROVED HORIZONTAL MAIL RECEPTACLES A. Front -Loading, USPS -Approved Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side -hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS -STD -4C. Ee Section 1112_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 2 of 7 PRO CON44 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA Project Specification DeSigrrgndCo�:sEntctianMrmagcnient Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit L Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Eagle Mailboxes. b. American Postal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Postal Products Unlimited, Inc. C. Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. d. Bommer Industries, Inc. e. Jensen Industries. f. Salsbury Industries. g. Security Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings, of the following sizes: a. Type I: A group of mail receptacles in single -column configuration with single master door, up to eight mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep, one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master -door lock, and one parcel compartment 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep. b. Type II: A group of mail receptacles in double -column configuration with double master door, up to 16 mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep, one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master -door lock, and two parcel compartments: 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep. C. Type III: A group of mail receptacles in double -column configuration with single master door, up to 16 mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep, one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master -door lock, and two parcel compartments: 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep. d. Type VI (No Parcel Compartment): A group of mail receptacles in single -column configuration with single master door, up to nine mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep, and one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master -door lock. e. Type VIII (No Parcel Compartment): A group of mail receptacles in double - column configuration with double master door, up to 19 mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep, and one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master -door lock. 3. Front -Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master -door lock provided by local postmaster. 4. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each with lock and tenant identification as required by cited standard. Provide mail slot in the compartment with master -door lock. Section 1112_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 3 of 7 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design, and Contraction Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit a. Compartment -Door Locks: Comply with USPS -L -1172C, PSIN 0910, for locks and keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS; with three keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. 5. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested units, with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment. 6. Snap -on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. 7. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with manufacturer's standard finish. 8. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coated Finish: Alternate finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 USPS -APPROVED PARCEL LOCKERS A. Front -Loading, USPS -Approved Indoor Parcel Lockers: Single or multiple compartments enclosed within a larger enclosure of type indicated below. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming parcels from front of unit. Provide access to each compartment for �. removing parcels by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS -STD -4C construction, . adapted for larger -sized, interior, parcel compartments. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Eagle Mailboxes. b. American Postal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Postal Products Unlimited, Inc. C. Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. d. Bommer Industries, Inc. e. Jensen Industries. f. Salsbury Industries. g. Security Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Enclosure Type: Recessed. 3. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings, of the following sizes: a. Type X, Parcel Only (No Master Door): A group of parcel receptacles in single - column configuration without a master door; two compartments 18 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep. b. Type XI, Parcel Only: A group of parcel receptacles in single -column configuration with single master door prepared for master -door lock; two compartments 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep. Section 1 l 12_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 4 of 7 PRO CON440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constmetion Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 4. Front -Loading Master Door: Fabricated to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master -door lock provided by local postmaster. 5. Compartment Doors and Frames: Fabricated from same material and finish as adjacent mail receptacles. Equip each compartment door with lock, identification, and concealed, full-length, spring-loaded, flush hinge on right side. a. Compartment Identification: Black, sequential numbers stamped onto recess in face of compartment door. b. Compartment -Door Locks: Dual lock security system in which master lock provides access to customer lock (USPS -L-1 172C, PSIN 0910) and parcel -locker key opens compartment and is retained once opened. 6. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coated Finish: Alternate finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Directory for Mail Receptacles: Surface -mounted, front -opening unit, with clear tempered glass window. 1. Fabricate directory as framed unit above alongside of mail receptacles; of same material, size, and finish as adjacent mail receptacles unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide space for 40 names. 3. Provide name strips made of 1/4 -inch high label tape. B. Key Keeper: Single compartment with door; interior compartment size not less than 4-3/4 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 1-1/2 inches deep. USPS approved. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. C. Jensen Industries. d. Knox Company. e. Salsbury Industries. f. Security Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Style: Compartment door set within face frame or extending full width and height of unit, with no exposed frame. 4. Type of Operation: Loose key in box. Section 1112_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 5 of 7 PRO CON,, '�, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and CofrsfMCHOn ManagMlEnt Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 5. Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 6. Exposed Material and Finish: Exposed surfaces fabricated from same material and finish as adjacent mail receptacles. a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coated Finish: Alternate finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. C. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 0 1. Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation. 2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. 3. Final acceptance of postal specialties depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install horizontal mail receptacles with center of tenant -door lock cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Vertical Mail Receptacles: Install vertical mail receptacles with center of master lock cylinder not more than 48 inches and not less than 30 inches above finished floor. D. Key Keeper: Install as indicated on Drawings. Section 1112_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 6 of 7 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and conshnctiun Mmragemmt Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties after they have been installed according to USPS regulations. B. Obtain written final approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation. END OF SECTION Section 1 l 12_105500 Postal specialties.doc Page 7 of 7. Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRO CONS j, INCORPORATED Design anti Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 113100 APPLIANCES Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Refer to Section 10 20 00 for commercial laundry equipment and beauty salon equipment. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Microwaves 2. Refrigerator/freezers 3. Undercounter Refrigerator/freezers 4. Ranges and Range Hoods 5. Ovens 6. Residential Laundry Equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Architectural Woodwork" for custom-made cabinets and countertops that receive residential appliances. 2. Division 10 Section 'Building Specialties" for commercial laundry equipment. 3. Division 26 Electrical 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Section 1112_113100 Appliances.doc Page 1 of 5 PRC) COM,,4, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Msign and Construction Mnrrage?nent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source and each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. D. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with rules and regulations of the Architectural Access Board, (521 CMR), Federal Fair Housing Act Design Manual, The Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after rough -in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Microwave Oven: 10 -year limited warranty for service on defects in the magnetron tube. 2. Refrigerator/freezer: 5 -year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. 3. Clothes Washer: 10 -year limited warranty for service on inner wash basket and outer tub, and 5 -year limited warranty for service on balance suspension system and drive transmission. 0 Section 1112_113100 Appliances.doc Page 2 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 2.2 PRC) COM4� INCORPORATED Design anii Construction tNmragement ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Microwave Oven: Undercabinet mounted microwave oven, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. B. Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding unit with freezer on top, ice maker, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. C. Under -counter Refrigerator: 1. Freestanding, undercounter unit with interior freezer compartment, listed by UL, and com plying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. D. Clothes Washer: Freestanding, automatic clothes washer with wash cycles including regular, delicate and permanent press; UL listed, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. E. Electric Clothes Dryer: Freestanding unit; UL listed, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. APPLIANCES A. Porcelain -Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied porcelain -enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. B. Refrigerators and Freezers: 1. AL Units: Frigidaire FFPH31M6L/M, silver mist. 2. ALZ Country Kitchen, Cafe: GE Model GSH22KGRBB with ice maker 3. Public Area, Under -counter Units: GE Model GMR04BANBB. 4. IL Units, Break Room: GE Model GTS16BBSRBB 5. AL and IL Cafe: GE Model GSL22JFT C. Microwave Units: 1. AL Units: Frigidaire FFCM0934L/M, silver mist. 2. Other Areas: GE Model JE620BF D. Dishwashers: 1. AL Public Areas: GSD 1200GBB. Section 1112_113100 Appliances.doc Page 3 of 5 PRO CON.,,o Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Decig„ and Construction Mannyentent Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. IL Units: GE Model GSD2000GBB, Accessible Units: ASKO D3121, Black. E. Residential Laundry Equipment: 1. AL/ALZ Resident.Laundry Rooms: a) Washers: GE Model WSXH2O8AWW b) Dryers: GE Model DSXH43EAWW c) Pedestal: GE Model SBSD227FWW, 12 -inch high. 2. IL Units, Stacked Washers/Dryers: GE Model WSM2700DWW. F. Electric Ranges, Ovens and Cooktops: 1. ALZ Kitchen: GE Model JBS15. 2. IL Units: Free Standing Electric Range GE Model JBS15M or JPBI5DM 30", free standing with upfront controls, coil type. 3. IL Studio Two Burner Stove Top: GE Built-in electric cooktop JP201CBSS. 4. IL Cafe: GE Model JP910SKSS Stainless steel built-in, ceramic glass cooktop. S. IL Caf6: GE Model JTP86SFSS, 30" Built-in wall double oven. �-� 6. ALZ Kitchen: GE Model JTP86BFBB Built-in. G. Range Hoods: 1. IL Units: GE Model JN327XBH, recirculating standard range hood. 2. IL Caf6: Electrolux Model RH36PC60GS, 36" stainless steel island mount range hood with optional duct free kit for a duct free installation. Mechanical engineer to confirm code compliance prior to ordering. Note: In the case that an appliance has been discontinued by its manufacturer, provide the manufacturer's current equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. 0 Section 1112_113100 Appliances.doc Page 4 of 5 PRO CON e; # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constn;ction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to plumbing and electrical Contract Documents for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing materials from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION Section 1 ] 12_113100 Appliances.doc Page 5 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design rout consthmeHi n Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 1140 00 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes equipment for foodservice facilities indicated on the Drawings. B. Owner -Furnished Equipment: Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment items. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Alternates". 2. Division 03 Section "Concrete" for the following: a. Equipment bases. b. Requirements for slab depressions. c. Insulated slabs beneath walk-in refrigeration units. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for equipment supports. 4. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for custom casework and countertops. 5. Division 07 Section "Rooftop Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment supports. 6. Division 09 Section for floor finishes in walk-in refrigeration units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's model number. 2. Options, accessories, and components that will be included for Project. 3. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance. 4. Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include roughing in dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing -in dimensions, fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work. C. Coordination Drawings: For foodservice facilities. 1. Indicate locations of foodservice equipment and connections to utilities. 2. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings. 3. Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and maintenance, details of support for equipment; and utility service characteristics. 4. Include details of seismic bracing for equipment. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For foodservice equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" and "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: I. Product Schedule: For each foodservice equipment item, include the following: a. Designation indicated on Drawings. b. Manufacturer's name and model number. Section 1112_114000 Food Service Equipment.doc Page 1 of 4 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Mmrasmient North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 0 c. List of factory -authorized service agencies including their addresses and telephone numbers. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark certifying compliance with applicable NSF/ANSI standards. B. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel -burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use. C. Steam Equipment: Provide steam -generating and direct -steam heating equipment that is fabricated and labeled to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following: 1. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." 2. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." 3. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." 4. NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations." E. Seismic Restraints: Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and Installation Guidelines," Appendix A, "Seismic Restraint Details," unless otherwise indicated. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Coordination Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate foodservice equipment layout and installation with other work, including lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire -suppression system components. B. Coordinate location and requirements of utility service connections. C. Coordinate size, location, and requirements of the following: 1. Overhead equipment supports. 2. Equipment bases. 3. Floor depressions. 4. Insulated floors. 5. Floor sinks and drains serving foodservice equipment. 6. Roof curbs, equipment supports, and penetrations. ON Section 1112_114000 Food Service Equipment.doc Page 2 of 4 PRO CON.440 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit WARRANTY A. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, inability to maintain set temperature. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for foodservice equipment item is based on the product named. Provide the named product. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Refer to the attached food service equipment list for specified products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install foodservice equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Connect equipment to utilities. 2. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through equipment to make final connections. B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required. 1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler. 2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish. C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install cabinets and similar equipment on concrete bases in a bed of sealant. E. Install closure -trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. F. Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Produce airtight, watertight, vermin -proof, sanitary joints. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes. B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready -for -use condition. C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain foodservice equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training". Section 1112_114000 Food Service Equipment.doc Page 3 of 4 PRO CONS;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Design and Coustnict%n Management North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 3.4 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION LIST REFER TO KITCHEN DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Section 1112_114000 Food Service Equipment.doc 0 01 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL PRO CON.4,1 j INCORPORATED Design and Contraction Managennent ARCHITECTURE SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Kitchen cabinets. 2. Vanity cabinets. 3. Plastic -laminate countertops and backsplashes. 4. Synthetic marble countertops with integral lavatory bowl. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Architectural Woodwork" for custom fabricated cabinets and countertops. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" 3. Division 10 Section "Lavatory Countertops" for unit bathrooms. 4. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances. 5. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26 for general MEP/FP coordination. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semi -exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semi exposed." Section 1112123530 Residential Casework.doc Page 1 of 5 PRO CONS;, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA DesipRM4ConstmetionMarragonent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinets. 2. Plastic -laminate countertops. 3. Synthetic marble countertops 4. Cabinet hardware. C. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. D. Samples: 1. Wood -veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species. 2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species. 3. Plastic laminate for casework finish, 8 by 10 inches. 4. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches. 5. Exposed hardware, for each type of item. 6. One full-size synthetic marble countertop with integral bowl matching color specified by Interior Designer. Unit may be used in the Work providing it is undamaged. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain cabinets and countertops through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi -exposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. Section 1112123530 Residential Casework.doc Page 2 of 5 PRO CON,�,� Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED North Andover, MA vesigt:nnd ConahuctioaMarragmwit Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 2. Plastic -Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet - work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. A. M. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a) Plastic Laminate for Countertops: As indicated on the Millwork Schedule or equal approved by Owner and Architect. 2. Cabinets: Provide the following: a) Wood Kitchen Cabinets, Utilitarian Cabinets and Vanities: Saco Industries, Inc., Lowell, IN: Princeton II — Recessed panels and square top doors Lexus — Full overlay, thermo-fused melamine. 3. Finish and Hardware: Refer to Millwork Schedule 2.2 POSTFORMED PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), and end -splash style: Section 1112_123530 Residential Casework.doc Page 3 of 5 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC) CON�o INCORPORATED Design and Conshwtion Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1. Front: No Drip (raised marine edge with rolled front). 2. Cove: Cove molding (one-piece post -formed laminate supported at junction of top and backsplash by wood cove molding); where indicated. 3. Backsplash: Square or radius edge with scribe. 4. End Splash: Square or radius edge with scribe to match backsplash; where indicated. 5. Substrate: Moisture resistant plywood or particleboard. 2.3 LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS A. Lavatory Countertops with Integral Bowls: Provide units having the following characteristics: 1. Custom molded, reconstituted (synthetic) marble, complete with integral bowl and backsplash, affixed apron and (2) loose end splashes. Seal unit with gel coat to resist staining. a. Material Thickness: Not less than 3/4 -inch. 2. Where indicated, offset bowl locations and ensure plumbing lines will clear cabinet frame. 3. Side Splashes: To be fabricated of same material and color as countertop. 4. Fasteners: Include screws and other fasteners used for installation. Fasteners shall not be exposed. 5. Colors: As selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 6. Manufacturers: a) Imperial Marble Corp., Somonuak, IL. b) Virginia Marble Company. c) Amex Marble, Santa Ana, CA. d) Romarco Corp., Morgantown, NC. e) Century Cast Products, a Division of Vermax, Salt Lake City, UT. f) Owner and Architect approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. Section 1112_123530 Residential Casework.doc Page 4 of 5 0- 01 PRO COST # Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Constnsdion Mangmnent Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. E. Fasten plastic -laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 1. Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. F. Fasten solid -surfacing -material countertops per manufacturer's instructions. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with solid -surfacing -material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION Section 1112_123530 Residential Casework.doc Page 5 of 5 PRO CON4# Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Conshra;Non Marmg-enf Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit SECTION 12 48 00 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Carpet -type mats in surface -mounted frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Carpet" for tufted carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including the following: a. Door control devices. 2. Divisions or joints between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. 4. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors. 5. Layout, plans, elevations and sections 6. Accessories, anchors and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each type of product indicated. 1. Floor Mat: 12 -inch- square, assembled sections of floor mat. Section 1112_124800 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames.doc Pagel of 4 PRO COMA% Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Proiect Specification DeItshuctionManagrnn Dec. 20, 2011 North Andover, MA Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 2. Tread Rail: 12 -inch- long Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: 12 -inch- long Sample of each type and color. E. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), Mass. 521 CMR, Federal Fair Housing Act Design Manual. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 2.2 METAL FRAME MATERIALS Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061-T6 or alloy 6063-T5, T6 or T52 as standard with manufacturer. Leveling Material: Ardex K-15 and manufacturer recommended primer. ENTRANCE MATS A. Carpet -Type Mats: 100% Solution -dyed, UV stabilized polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/8 to 1/4 -inch thick, high density rubber backing to form mats 3/8 -inch thick with non -raveling edges. 1. Total Weight: 78 oz. 2. Mat Size: As indicated. 3. Product: Berber, Mats, Inc. a) Color: As selected by Interior Designer 01 Section 1112_124800 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames.doc Page 2 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project 9301112 2.3. FRAME PRO CON44; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Surface -Mounted Aluminum Frame: Extruded aluminum angle edge -frame with 1/8 -inch wide exposed face. Provide with floor anchorage devices, mitered corners and sizes recommended by manufacturer. 1. Color: Clear anodized. 2. Location: Where mat/frame abuts change in flooring. 3. Product: Aluminum "L -Frame"; Mats, Inc. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that.are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Surface -Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface -mounted installation, complete with comer connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and post -installed expansion anchors. C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: non -specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I1, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. Section 1112_124800 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames.doc Page 3 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PRO CON4 INCORPORATED Designofd Construction Manngenunf ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface -type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 1. Anchor fixed surface -type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Clean, vacuum and prime concrete surfaces. Install self -leveling underlayment compound to make the substrate smooth and level. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION W Section 1112_124800 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames.doc Page 4 of 4 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PICC) CON4 INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 2. Division 05 Section "Metals" for the following: a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide -rail brackets. b. Divider beams. C. Hoist beams. d. Structural -steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame. e. Pit ladders f. Railings between adjacent elevator pits 3. Division 09 Section "Finishes" for finish flooring in elevator cars and painting. 4. Division 26 Sections for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 5. Division 26 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switch, standby power source, transfer switch, connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller and telephone. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 1 of 16 PRO CONS; Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and cunstructionmanngernent North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. C. Hydraulic Elevator: An elevator in which a car is hoisted by action of a hydraulic plunger and cylinder (or "jack"); with other components of the Work, including fluid storage tank, pump, piping, valves, car enclosures, hoistway entrances, operation systems, signal equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, buffers and devices for operations, safety, security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS (Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00) A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following: 1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3- inch- square Samples of sheet materials; and 4 -inch lengths of running trim members. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Include with maintenance instructions: parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions and similar information. Submit for Owner's information at Project Closeout as specified in Division 1. G. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: Obtain and submit as required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. O Section 1112 142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 2 of 16 PRO COM,4 Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including pump -and -tank units, plunger -cylinder assemblies, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer. The elevator package shall be provided by a nationally recognized United States company regularly engaged in the business of manufacturing elevators of the type and character required by these specifications, and shall manufacture the entire power unit, controller, hydraulic cylinder and all other parts of equipment, including door operators and signal fixtures. 2. Installation shall be a design that can be maintainable by any licensed elevator maintenance company without need to purchase or lease additional diagnostic devices, special tools, or instructions from original equipment manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7 and the Massachusetts Elevator Code 524 CMR. 1. Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is 0.12g. 2. Project's seismic design category is C. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and the Massachusetts Elevator Code 524 CMR. E. Fire -Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 3 of 16 PRO CONS Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification ilesrgn anti Construction ,Viaanyrmicnt North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. C. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. D. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24 -hour -per -day, 7 -day -per -week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 4 of 16 N Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PRO CONS; INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following with non-proprietary controller per 1.05 B: 1. KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. (Series 2 Cab) 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. 4. Stanley Elevator Co. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Hydraulic Passenger Elevator, Schindler Model 330A: (#1) B. Elevator Equipment Summary: 1. Application: Borehole 2. Service: General Purpose Passenger 3. Quantity: 1 4. Capacity: 3500 lbs 5. Speed: 150 fpm 6. Travel: 31 feet 10 inches 7. Landings: 4 8. Front Openings: 3 9. Rear Openings: 1 10. Operation: Microprocessor Single Car Automatic Operation 11. Machine Room: Adjacent to elevator hoistway 12. Platform Size: T-0" wide x 6'-9" deep 13. Door Type: Single Speed Side Opening 14. Cab Height: 8'-0" 15. Guide Rails: Equivalent to 16 lb. per foot 16. Hoistway Entrances: 3'-6" wide x T-0" high doors 17. Power Supply: 480 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz C. Hydraulic Passenger Elevator, Schindler Model 330A: (42) D. Elevator Equipment Summary: 1. Application: Borehole 2. Service: General Purpose Passenger 3. Quantity: 1 Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 5 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 4. Capacity: 5. Speed: 6. Travel: 7. Landings: 8. Front Openings: 9. Rear Openings: 10. Operation: 11. Machine Room: 12. Platform Size: 13. Door Type: 14. Cab Height: 15. Guide Rails: 16. Hoistway Entrances 17. Power Supply: PRO CON INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managentent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 3000 lbs 150 fpm 31 feet 10 inches 4 3 2 Microprocessor Single Car Automatic Operation Adjacent to elevator hoistway T-0" wide x 6'-1" deep Single Speed Side Opening 8'-0" Equivalent to 16 lb. per foot 3'-6" wide x T-0" high doors 480 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz E. Hydraulic Passenger Elevator, Schindler Model 330A: (0) F. Elevator Equipment Summary: 1. Application: Borehole 2. Service: General Purpose Passenger 3. Quantity: 1 4. Capacity: 3000 lbs 5. Speed: 150 fpm 6. Travel: 31 feet 10 inches 7. Landings: 4 8. Front Openings: 4 9. Rear Openings: 0 10. Operation: Microprocessor Single Car Automatic Operation 11. Machine Room: Adjacent to elevator hoistway 12. Platform Size: T-0" wide x 5'-7" deep 13. Door Type: Single Speed Side Opening. 14. Cab Height: 8'-0" 15. Guide Rails: Equivalent to 16 lb. per foot 16. Hoistway Entrances: 3'-6" wide x T-0" high doors 17. Power Supply: 480 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz G. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation -absorbing material in a blowout -proof housing at pump unit. H. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 1. Provide dielectric couplings at cylinder units. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 6 of 16 0 101 PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction anlig ment Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. I. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fire-resistant fluid with additives as needed to prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects. J. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Section. K. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17:1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1 -inch clearance from cylinder and extending above pit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1. L. Corrosion Protective Filler: If required by manufacturer, provide filler compatible with other elevator systems. M. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. N. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide -rail lubricators or polymer - coated, non -lubricated guides. 2.3 ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard car enclosures of selections indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), trim, accessories, and wall and ceiling finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard flush -panel horizontal sliding doors of type indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard welded steel construction with factory finish of synthetic enamel, and provide other materials and fabrication of not less than the following: 1. Enameled -Steel Frames: Formed from cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory -applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range. Section 1112 142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 7 of 16 PRO CONS, Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and Construction Management North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 2. Walls: Flush wall plastic laminate pressure bonded to a wood core with a fire -retardant treated backing sheet. Provide plastic laminate color selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of options. 3. Canopy: 14 -gauge furniture steel painted white. 4. Front and Transom: factory -applied enamel finish. 5. Doors: Hollow metal construction, factory -applied enamel finish. 6. Ceiling and Lighting: Suspended luminous panel with fluorescent lighting. Provide maximum lighting available with manufacturer standard lamps. 7. Sill: Aluminum 8. Flooring: Carpet as selected by the Interior Designer. 9. Handrails: Cylindrical metal bar, brushed stainless steel. 10. Clear Cab Height: 7'4". 11. Accessories: Two -speed exhaust fan, brushed stainless certificate frame, and ADA compliant, two-way speakerphone, protection pads and stainless steel pad buttons. 2.4 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hollow metal, sliding, door and frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills and accessories. Match car doors for size, number of panels and door movement. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment; provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Frames: Enameled steel, color as selected by Interior Designer. 2. Doors and Transoms: Enameled steel, color as selected by Interior Designer. 3. Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 -inch thickness, mill finish. 0 Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 8 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 2.5 EQUIPMENT PRO CON ,,, �k INCORPORATED Designs and Constn4ction.management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Passenger Elevator(s): Schindler Elevator Corp, Model 330A holed hydraulic elevator or equal approved by the Architect in writing, meeting the following minimum requirements. Interior car finishes shall match those specified; failure to comply will be reason for rejection. Platform and Sling: Shall have a fabricated frame of formed and structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded. Provide sub -floor prepared for finish flooring. Underside of platform shall be fireproofed. Sling shall consist of heavy steel channels stiles properly affixed to a steel crosshead and bolster, with bracing members as required, to remove all strain from car enclosure. Steel bumper plates shall be affixed to bottom of bolster channels and a platen plate with clamps and cap screws shall be provided for fastening sling to plunger. 2. Passenger Car Doors: Panel rigidity to be obtained by suitable steel reinforcements. Doors shall be hung on sheave hangars with polyurethane tires and sheaves not less than 3-1/4" diameter, running on polished steel track, and guided at bottom by non-metallic shoes sliding in a smooth threshold groove. 3. Alarm Bell: Emergency alarm bell shall be located in conformance with ANSI A-17 Code requirements and connected to a plainly marked push button in car. Connect alarm bell to emergency lighting power pack. 4. Guide and Guide Shoes: Guides for elevator car shall be planed steel elevator guide rails, properly fastened to building structure with steel brackets. Car stile shall be fitted at top and bottom with guide shoes of the self -aligning, swivel type, with metal body and removable, non-metallic liners. 5. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): Shall be compactly and neatly designed with all components listed below combined in a self-contained unit; structural steel outer base with tank supports; floating inner base for mounting pump assembly; oil reservoir with tank cover and controller compartment with cover; metal drip pan; oil - hydraulic pump; electric motor; oil control unit with the following components built into a single housing; high pressure relief valve; check valve; automatic unloading upstart valve; lowering and leveling valve; and a magnetic controller. The pump shall be specifically designed and manufactured for oil -hydraulic elevator service. It shall be a positive displacement type, inherently designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsations to provide quiet and smooth operation. Pump output shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on elevator car. Motor shall be specifically designed for oil -hydraulic elevator service, of standard manufacture, and of duty rating to comply with herein specified speeds and loads. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function will not be acceptable under this Specification. All adjustments shall be accessible and shall be made without removing assembly from oil line. Relief valve shall be externally adjustable, and shall be capable of bypassing total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to open valve. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 9 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO QN4, INCORPORATED Designs and Constmetfon management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Up start and stop valve shall be externally adjustable, and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall gradually divert oil to or from jack unit, providing smooth up starts and up stops. Check valve shall close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be externally adjustable for drop -away speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to insure smooth "Down" starts and stops. Electronic controller shall be microprocessor integrated circuitry. Provide thermal overload relays to protect motor. All component switches to be mounted in a steel panel designed for mounting on power unit, wall or floor. Jack Unit: Double post design, in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A- 17.1, sized according to specified gross load and factory tested to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. No brittle material, such as gray cast iron is permitted to be used in jack construction. Brackets shall be welded to jack cylinder for supporting elevator on pit channels. Provide auxiliary safety bulkhead in lower end of cylinder for limiting down car speed to a safe value in event of leakage around external bulkhead. Mainline Strainer: Shall be self-cleaning type, equipped with a 40 -mesh element, for installation in oil line. 8. Automatic Guide Rail Lubricators: Provide and mount according to manufacturer instructions. 9. Failure Protection: Electrical control circuit shall be designed so if malfunction should occur due to motor starter failure, oil becoming low in system or car failing to reach landing in up direction within a predetermined time, elevator car will automatically descend to lowest terminal landing. Power operated doors shall automatically open when car reaches landing. Doors shall then automatically close and all control buttons, except "Door Open" button, in car station shall be made inoperative. 10. Sound Insulation Panels: Shall be manufactured of reinforced 16 -gage steel with a 1 -inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. core of fiberglass affixed to interior. Mount on all four open sides of power unit frame. 11. Sound Isolating Couplings: Provide a minimum of two installed in oil line in Machine Room between pump and jack. 12. Oil -Hydraulic Silencer: Installed in oil line near power unit per manufacturer requirements, such that inspecting interior parts is possible without removing unit from oil line. A rubber hose without blowout -proof features is not acceptable. 13. Mount vibration pads under power unit assembly to isolate unit from building structure. 14. Automatic Self -Leveling: Provide elevator with a self -leveling feature that will automatically bring the car to floor landings. Self -leveling shall be entirely automatic and 0 Section 1112 142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 10 of 16 PRO CON4,4> Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Managenunt Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction independent of operating device, and shall correct for over -travel or under -travel. Car shall be maintained level, within 1/2 -inch, with landing irrespective of load. 15. Automatic Terminal Limits: Electric limit switches, placed in hatchway near terminal landings, shall be designed to cut off electric current and stop car should it run beyond either terminal landing. 16. Buffers: Provide buffers, complying with ANSI A-17.1 under car in elevator pit. Mount buffers per manufacturer's instructions. 17. Car Top Inspection Station: Provide station with "emergency stop" switch and with constant pressure "up -down" direction buttons that make normal operating devices inoperative and give the inspector complete control of the elevator. 18. Door Operation: Provide direct current, motor -driven, heavy-duty operator designed to operate car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both limits of travel; door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Provide full height, infrared light beam door sensing device with automatic non -contact reversal of car and hoistway doors if an obstruction enters path of travel for elevators. Doors shall then resume closing cycle. Doors shall automatically open as car arrives at landing and shall automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when car is dispatched to another landing. Direct drive geared operators, AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations from the above are not acceptable. 19. Interlocks: Each hoistway entrance shall be equipped with an approved interlock, tested as required by code. Design interlock to prevent operation of car away from landing until doors are locked in closed position as defined by the applicable code and to prevent doors from opening at any landing from corridor side unless car is at rest at that landing or is in leveling zone and stopped at that landing. Interlocks shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories "B" label of approval. 20. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Hoistway door unlocking devices, as specified by ANSI A-17.1, shall be provided to permit authorized persons to gain access to hoistway when elevator car is away from a landing. 21. Door Hangars and Tracks: Provide each hoistway sliding door with sheave type two point suspension hangars and tracks complete, per manufacturer's instructions. 22. Passenger Hoistway Entrances: Provide manufacturer standard hollow metal, horizontal sliding type entrances at each hoistway opening bearing Underwriters' Laboratories `B" label. Front of hoistway shall be left open or a rough opening provided that is 18 inches greater in width and 12 inches greater in height than finished opening, until after entrance are installed. After guide rails are set and lined, entrance frames shall be installed in alignment with guide rails. Finish walls will then be completed by others. Section 1112 142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 11 of 16 PRO CC�N�; Brightview North Andover 1 N C O R P O R AT E D Project Specification North Andover, MA Design and Construction Management Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 23. Passenger Operation (Selective Collective Automatic Pushbutton): Control of elevator car shall be automatic in operation by means of a pushbutton in car marked for each landing level served and an "up -down" button at each intermediate landing with a call button at each terminal landing, wherein all stops registered by momentary pressure of landing or car buttons shall be provided in car pushbutton station, which when in the off position, will render elevator inoperative, and which will enable attendant, or passenger to stop car at any point during its travel. Opening of this switch shall not cancel registered calls, and when switch is closed, car will continue to answer calls that have been registered. Each landing station shall contain an illuminated pushbutton that shall illuminate when pressed to indicate that a call has been registered to bring car to that particular landing. A time delay, non-interference feature, shall be incorporated in control mechanism to allow ample time for opening and closing car and hoistway doors before it is again placed in motion. 2.6 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall -call and car -call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long -life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent, non -yellowing translucent plastic diffusers. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard semi -recessed car control stations Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and Massachusetts 524 CMR." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush - mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. D. Firefighters' Service Cabinet: As required by code. Provide communication to reception desk in main lobby. E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital -type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. F. Hall Push -Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 12 of 16 PRO CONS , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design nr:t CUxsFruction:Ylnxagerttext North Andover, MA Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction 1. Provide units with flat stainless steel faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Provide units with direction -indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one button at terminal landings. G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. 1. Provide units with flat stainless steel faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing. 2. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches above the floor. 3. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. H. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated signal type or digital -display -type position indicators, located above each hoistway entrance at first floor. Provide units with flat, stainless steel faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 1. Integrate ground -floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators. I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by ASME A17.1, Appendix H and authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 13 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.2 INSTALLATION PRO CON+ INCORPORATED Design and Constniction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. If conflicts arise between manufacturer instructions and the Architectural drawings or specifications, refer item to Architect for resolution prior to proceeding. B. Coordinate elevator work with other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. C. Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinder. D. Provide waterproof well casing as necessary to retain walls of well hole. E. Install cylinder in protective casing within well hole. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole. 1. Fill void space between protective casing and cylinder with corrosion protective filler. 2. Align cylinders and fill space around protective casing with fine sand. F. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches of non -shrink, nonmetallic grout. G. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. H. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. I. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration -isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure -borne noise from elevator system. J. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent -cemented fittings. K. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before backfilling. L. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 14 of 16 .0 s PRO CON Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification North Andover, MA Doigntand ConsfrnctionManagement Revised March 29, 2012 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Construction M. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. N. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. O. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with non - shrink, nonmetallic grout. P. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated or required by code: 1. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 2. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. Q. Provide a "cart selector key" function for operation of the elevators during a power outage. Design system as required by the Massachusetts Elevator Code and coordinate with the electrical engineer for connection of the elevator(s) to the emergency generator. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. C. In addition to other requirements, inspections, tests and remedies herein provided, upon completion of elevator installation and before final approval and final payment, Elevator Subcontractor shall make, in the presence of the Architect or his designated representative, a running speed test with maximum load on elevator car to determine whether elevator meets speed, capacity and all other requirements of the Specifications, as installed. D. If elevator fails to meet the requirements of the Specifications, Elevator Subcontractor shall, at his expense, promptly remove all work condemned by the Architect as failing to conform to the Specifications, and shall promptly replace and re -execute his own work in accordance with the Specification. Elevator Subcontractor shall bear all expense of correcting all work of other trades damaged by removal or replacement of elevator equipment. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 15 of 16 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON4# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Managennent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to elevator manufacturer and Installer that ensure elevator are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section for additional requirements. B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. C. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION Section 1112_142400 Hydraulic Elevators.doc Page 16 of 16 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART GENERAL I.I. DESCRIPTION: PRO CON4# INCORPORATED &sips atilt ConStiiiCtion Alatiagen�etit ARCHITECTURE SECTION 14 9182 TRASH CHUTE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 1.1.1. Work Included: Provide trash chute complete and in place, tested and approved, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1. Standards: 1.2.1.1. All terms in this Section shall have the meaning defined in the ANSI code. 1.2.2. Qualifications of Subcontractor: The trash/linen chute subcontractor shall be regularly engaged in the business of manufacturing, installing and servicing trash/linen chutes of the type required by these Specifications and shall have a local history of successful installations acceptable to the Architect. 1.2.3. Qualifications of Installers: 1.2.3.1. Throughput progress of the work of this Section provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely experienced and trained in the necessary crafts and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work performed under this section. 1.2.3.2. Provide adequate number of skilled personnel who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the materials and methods necessary for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.2.3.3. In acceptance or rejection of work performed under this Section, the Architect will make no allowances for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. RELATED SECTIONS/DIVISIONS: 1. Section 0133 00 - Submittals 2. Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Wall Assemblies 3. Division 21 Fire Protection 4. Division 26 Electrical 1.3. SUBMITTALS 1.3.1. Product date: Within (45) calendar days after Notice to proceed, submit: 1.3.1.1. A complete list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 1.3.1.2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts and other data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. 1.3.1.3. Complete shop drawings of all work of this Section, showing dimensions and locations of all items supporting structure and clearances required. Section 111214 91 82 trash chutes.doc Page I of 3 PRO CON4;t Brightview North Andover INCORPORATED Project Specification Design and constmaion Management North Andover, MA Dec. 20, 2011 Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE Issued For Building Permit 1.3.1.4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by Architect, shall be the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer: VALIANT PRODUCTS, INC. Lakeland, FL or approved equal. 2.2 Chute shall be construction of 16 gauge aluminized steel. Chute shall be fully factory assembled with all joints welded or lock seamed. There shall be one expansion joint per floor. All chutes shall have a flush interior and are assembled without bolts, rivets or clips protruding into the chute opening. Chutes shall be equipped with chute support clips pre -positioned at the factory to insure proper chute alignment. The intake door and frame shall be adjustable and securely fastened to intake throat. Off -sets, if required shall be reinforced and supported in impact areas. (Offsets must be approved by local building officials). 2.3 Size: The standard size shall be 24 inches diameter per NFPA recommendations. 2.4 Intake Doors: 15" X 18" bottom hinged, "B" labeled self closing intake doors shall be construction of 22 gauge polished stainless steel fronts and 18 gauge aluminized steel backs and wings. Each door shall be equipped with chrome plated Tee handle; fire rated latching mechanism and bottom stainless steel piano hinge. 2.5 Discharge Doors: Shall be standard sliding discharge and spring loaded. Fabricated from 12 gauge galvanized plate that slides in a 11/2" a 1/4" steel track. It shall be held open with a 165 degree U.L. approved fusible link. 2.6 Vent: Vent shall be made the same diameter as the chute and extend 4'0" above the finished roof per NFPA recommendations. Vent shall be construction of 22 gauge galvanized steel and shall be complete with roof flashing to insure a water tight seal, and metal weather cap. 2.7 Accessories: Shall furnish one U.L. approved 1/2" IPS flushing head and 1/2" fusible link sprinkler head above top intake door complete with a fitting for connection by plumber. Additional sprinklers shall be provided at alternate floors. 2.8 Guarranty: The trash chute shall conform to all applicable building codes and be manufactured in accordance with the best practices of the industry. Material and workmanship are to be guaranteed against defects for a period of one year after delivery, other than that caused normal wear and tear 3.0. PRODUCT HANDLING 3.1.1. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of these sections before, during and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. 3.1.2. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 1112 14 91 82 trash chutes.doc Page 2 of 3 0 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 4.0. EXECUTION PRO CC3N# INCORPORATED Design and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit 4.1 INSPECTION: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4.2 INSTALLATION: Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings, the original design, and all pertinent regulations and codes anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. 4.3 TESTING: Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance provide all necessary equipment and personnel and perform all tests required. Secure all required approvals from agencies having jurisdiction END OF SECTION Section 111214 91 82 trash chutes.doc Page 3 of 3 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PART 1 GENERAL PRO CON,# INCORPORATED Design and Construction: Management ARCHITECTURE SECTION 23 50 00 GENERAL MEP/FP CRITERIA Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various shafts, lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, outlets, and equipment anticipated in the project. It is not intended to show every required space necessary for the full concealment of the Mechanical and Electrical systems which will be determined in the early design/build stages. The systems shall include, but are not limited to the items shown on the drawings or specified in the criteria. Exact locations of these items shall be determined by reference to the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical and Fire Protection plans and details and measurements at the building and in coordination with other Subcontractors, and in all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. When conflicts arise with the other work the Architect shall be the sole authority as to the exact location of all items. B. The Contractor shall lay out his work maintaining all lines, grades and dimensions according to these drawings with due consideration for other trades and verify all dimensions at the site prior to any fabrication or installation. Should the layout be impractical, the Architect shall be notified before any installation or fabrication, and the existing conditions shall be investigated and proper changes effected without any additional cost. C. Each Contractor shall create his own set of coordination drawings showing the extent of his trade and coordination with other trades including but not limited to Architectural, Structural and the MEP -FP trades. Each Contractor shall submit his coordination drawings to the Architect for review prior to, or in conjunction with, the required shop drawings. D. Refer to the MEP -FP Narrative in Appendix C for additional information. In the event of a conflict between this section and Appendix C, the Appendix will prevail. 1.2. General Scope: A. The work included under this specification consists of Engineering design of the building systems and of furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation, services, etc., which are applicable and necessary to complete the installation of the systems specified in Division 23: Mechanical and Division 26 Electrical, as described in these specifications and as illustrated on the prototype drawings, but in no case less than is required to achieve a complete operational system that satisfies the Design Criteria herein, the Owner's design standards and is acceptable to the jurisdiction having authority. B. Coordinate work of all Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical trades with the Architectural and Structural work for the project. C. In general, the various lines and ducts shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards so as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. Run work parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. D. The construction details of the building are illustrated on the Architectural and Section 1112_235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doc Page 1 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CONS,; INCORPORATED Desip and l:onsirnction Mmrnyemert ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction Structural Drawings. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details before submitting his bid as no allowance will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. The Contractor shall place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms before concrete is poured. Set sleeves in place in forms before concrete is poured, and in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. E. Locations and elevations of the various site utilities included within the scope of this work have been obtained from City or other substantially reliable sources and are offered separately from the Contract Documents, as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. Contractor shall verify the locations, elevations, and availability of all utilities and services required. F. The Contractor shall provide all necessary motors, starters, disconnect switches, wiring diagrams, and control wiring requirements to provide complete functional systems as called for in the summary of work. G. The entire hot and cold domestic potable water systems shall be thoroughly sterilized after installation per the requirements of the local health and building codes. H. No plumbing fixture, device, or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as drainage system or a soil or waste pipe which will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water, or waste into the water supply system. I. Each contractor is responsible for confirming their work complies with the North Andover Health Department regulations and requirements. 1.3. Mechanical Noise and Vibration Isolation A. Equipment installed in the building shall not cause noise levels in occupied spaces to exceed noise criteria (NC) recommended by current ASHRAE handbook as average design goals for spaces having the same function. Mechanical equipment and piping shall be installed with appropriate fittings such that structure borne vibration noise is isolated from the building structure as required/specified herein and tabulated in the vibration isolation schedule. All rooftop equipment shall be appropriately isolated from the structure such that mechanical noise and vibration is not a nuisance to building occupants. Do not locate rooftop equipment above sleeping room wherever possible. B. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS: Provide resilient earthquake restraints with suitable structural support for vibration isolated equipment and piping. Restraints shall be attached to structural members capable of withstanding the design dynamic load required. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the dynamic load capacity of the attachment bolts and supporting structure is greater than or equal to the capacity of the seismic restraint. He shall also coordinate the size of concrete housekeeping pads to ensure adequate room for the isolators and the restraints. C. Electrical connections to all mechanical equipment motors shall be made though a flexible conduit designed to reduce motor vibration transfer into the rigid conduit which is directly attached to the building structure. Flexible conduit shall be sufficiently long to Section 1112_235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doe Page 2 of 6 0 0— Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 Pito CON 4,(4,, INCORPORATED Resign and Construction Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction provide a 360 degree loop in the flex between the motor and the rigid conduit. A soft neoprene bushing shall be provided at the connection point between the flex and the rigid conduit to break the metal -to -metal contact. All ground wires from vibrating equipment shall be flexible with sufficient slack to prevent vibration transfer. Ground wires must not directly contact structural membranes (floors, walls or ceilings) of the building. 1.4. DESIGN GENERAL CRITERIA: A. Mechanical systems are to be by Design -Build Subcontractor and Subcontractor's Engineer licensed in the state that the project is located, refer to Section 01010 for Subcontractor and Engineer requirements. B. All Mechanical systems are to comply with requirements of the latest editions of the Applicable Codes having jurisdiction. All Design/Build components, systems, etc. shall comply with requirements of the latest editions of the Applicable Codes having jurisdiction. Copies of all applicable codes shall be maintained on the construction site for the duration of the project, including but not limited to the following: 1. Building code requirements (Refer to Section 014100) 2. Health and Safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. 6. NFPA 241 "Standards for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations". 7. ANSI -A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition". 8. NEC Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities", NFPA 70, and NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. 9. Life Safety/Fire (NFPA, State, etc.): NFPA 101, State of Massachusetts Fire Safety Code w/ all applicable Massachusetts supplement and amendments. C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. D. Mechanical systems subcontractors shall coordinate work with all related trades; plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, and electrical as well as with the Architectural and Structural components of the building concerning loading, vibration, penetrations, etc. E. Any special requirements not herein specified, by the Owner, the Owner's financing source or the Owner's insurance carrier. F. MEP/FP contractors shall guarantee for a minimum of one (1) year, from date of acceptance of the work, the quality of all materials, equipment and workmanship furnished and installed and to remedy, to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner, all defects in the work. This includes replacing all defective apparatus, material and equipment, and correcting all damage to adjacent work, paint, Section 1112 235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doc Page 3 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRC) CON4,4� INCORPORATED Design and Constneetion Matragentent ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction woodwork, or building caused by leaking pipes or connections or other defects in his work and its operation. Where sound and vibration conditions arise, which the Architect considers objectionable, the subcontractor shall pay all costs to remedy conditions. Subcontractor shall obtain guarantees from equipment manufacturers covering their respective equipment for the above period of time. Furnish three (3) copies of guarantees to the Owner. G. All cutting, patching and firestopping is by the MEP/FP Subcontractor for the work of that trade. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect or Structural Engineer. This includes Structural bearing wall studs, headers, plates, posts, etc. H. Any special requirements not herein specified, by the Owner, the Owner's financing source or the Owner's insurance carrier normally incorporated in construction of this type of building. I. Access panels are furnished and installed by each sub where required for their work and shall be fire rated/clearly labeled where located in fire rated assemblies. Location of all access panels is to be coordinated with the Architect. Access panels are to be flush mounted, frameless and finished to match adjacent surface unless otherwise approved by the Architect. J. HVAC equipment, ducts, and piping shall be coordinated with the building structural framing, columns, beams, structural bearing walls, etc. No HVAC equipment or ducts shall be allowed to penetrate any framing without the Structural Engineer's or the structural deign -build subcontractor's Written Approval. No equipment shall be suspended from nor supported upon the building without review by the structural engineer. Such supports and penetrations may be made only by the Contractor with written instructions obtained from that engineer. K. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; Non-metallic coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing. L. Building Attachments: Submit data for review for all attachments. Powder -actuated - type, drive -pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; Mechanical -Anchor Fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials. UL listing and FM approval for fire -protection systems. M. HVAC wiring in closets and ceilings used as return plenums shall be plenum rated wiring per local code requirements. N. Gas fired HVAC furnace units, water heaters, etc. in unheated spaces shall have all water piping, and air intake duct/pipe, exhaust, piping, condensate lines etc. insulated. O. Toilet exhaust ductwork in attics shall be insulated. P. Coordinate startup of HVAC systems in all applicable areas to provide for controlled environment for installation of finished millwork. 1.5. ENERGY CONSERVATION: A. Mechanical systems are to comply with all applicable Massachusetts codes. B. Design/Build documents shall include calculations, diagrams, etc as required by the code and the official having jurisdiction. Submit calcultions to Architect for review prior to Section 1112_235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doc Page 4 of 6 0 0 Brightview North Andover PcRoO CON�;t, North Andover, MA Design and Construction Mannyenlent Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE 2.0 submission to authorities having jurisdiction 1.6. INSTALLATION CRITERIA: Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. Mechanical, Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical distribution shall be run in designated chase and shaft locations indicated on plans, to the greatest extent possible. Where Design - Build System requires additional shafts or rated enclosures, they shall be provided as required only with written permission of the Architect. B. All cutting, patching and firestopping by subcontractor. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Design -Build Structural Engineer or the Structural Engineer of Record. C. Access panels are furnished and installed by each sub where required for their work. Access panels are to be fire rated/clearly labeled where located in fire rated assemblies. Refer to item 1.5-I above for additional requirements. D. All mechanical equipment, ducts, and piping shall be coordinated with the structural bearing walls. MEP/FP supply lines, sanitary drains, vents, ducts, conduits, etc shall not run in corridor bearing walls unless allowed by structural engineer. No HVAC equipment or ducts shall be allowed to penetrate any framing without the Design -Build subcontractor's Approval. Such penetrations may be made only with written instructions obtained from that Engineer. E. Building Attachments: Attachments to trusses shall be at the intersection of the truss members. No connections will be made to top or bottom chords unless reinforced per written instructions from the Truss Engineer or the Structural Engineer of Record. Powder -actuated -type, drive -pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; Mechanical -Anchor Fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing. Provide seismic sway bracing as required by code. F. Wiring in closets and ceilings used as return plenums shall be plenum rated wiring per local code requirements. G. MEP/FP Subcontractors are responsible for making, sealing, and firestopping all penetrations for their work. Refer to Section 07840. H. No Piping shall be run above the insulation or on the cold side of insulation. This includes water, sanitary, condensate, sprinkler, or any other wet piping. MATERIALS 2.1 All materials to be new and undamaged. Design/Build Engineer shall determine minimum material standards to satisfy code requirements. Section 1112_235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doc Page 5 of 6 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 3.0. INSTALLATION PRO CON44; INCORPORATED Pos+gn and Constnictton Management ARCHITECTURE Project Specification Revised March 29, 2012 Issued For Construction A. All materials to be protected from damage and exposure prior to installation. B. MEP/FP Subcontractors are responsible for making, sealing, and firestopping all penetrations for their work through fire rated assemblies. Refer to Section 07842. C. All rough openings through the exterior sheathing shall be protected with waterproofing membrane in accordance with manufacturer's rough opening prparation requirements and with 25 mil rubber flashing compatible with the exterior finish system from the face of waterproofed sheathing onto material of penetration. Penetration sleeve may be required to ensure proper seal at mechanical termination. Ensure lap onto material is covered by exterior finish product. Refer to Section 072700. D. Mechanical subcontractor to provide levelling curbs at roof as required. Curbs to be compatible with roof type. END OF SECTION Section 1112 235000 Genl MEP -FP Criteria.doc Page 6 of 6 *1 Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO CON# INCORPORATED flesign and Consirnrftnn Mariag. "O ARCHITECTURE APPENDIX Al Geotechnical Report by: Dr. Clarence Welti, P.E., P.C. 227 Williams Street P.Q. Box 397 Glastonbury, CT 06033 (860) 633-4623 / Fax (860) 657-2.514 January 30, 2009 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Section 11 12Appendix Ai_GeoTech Report Page 1 of 31 N DR. CLARENCE WELTl, P.E., P.C. GEOTECHNICAL. ENGINEERING 227 Wllllams Street - P.O. BOX 397 Glastonbury, CT 06033 (860) 633-46231 FAX (860) 657.2514 January 30, 2009 Mr. Eric Gruettner Henry Schadler Associates, P.C. Waterville Road Farmington, CT 06032 Re: Geotcchnical Study for The Arbors at North Andover Continuing Care Retirement Center, North Andover, MA Dear Mr. Gruettuer: 1.0 Herewith are the data from the test borings taken at the above referenced site. Eight borings were drilled at the proposed building to a maximum depth of 20.5 feet below the existing grades. Six borings were taken in areas of proposed site development, including four borings at the proposed deep cut for the emergency access road. Tire borings were drilled by Clarence Welti Associates, Irmc. and sampling was conducted by This ficin solely to obtain indications of substaface conditions as part of a geotechnical exploration program. No services were performed by Dr. Clarence Welti, P.R, P. C. to evaluate subsurface environmental conditions. Grain size gradation tests with water content tests were performed on five soil samples taken from the borings. The results ofthose tests are included in the appendices. 1.1 Numerous test pits were excavated as part of geotechnical studies for previously proposed development at the subject site. Those studies included a 1989 report by Geotechnical Consultants of Massachusetts and a 1996 report by UTS of Massachusetts. Both studies were for multi unit residential/condominiumprojects. Many ofthe test pits are witlun the limits ofthe proposed proj ect. The test pit locations are shown on the proposed site plan. The tests pit data were reviewed but are not included with this report. 2.0 The Subject Project will include the construction of a continuing care retirement center with a footprint of about 40,000 sf. The building is assumed to have two or three stories with slab at grade construction. The slab at grade is proposed to be at Elev. 182+. The exterior areas will be graded to nominal Elev. 181 around the structure. The area in front of the braiding will largely be paved for parking and access to the building. There is an existing std lodge located near Route 114, in the area of the proposed parking lot, which will be demolished. 2.1 The Existing Topography rises from about Elev.165 near Route 114 to about Elev. 260.1 at the Z 0 grading limits. The site is a former ski hill which continues to rise in the areas to the south and east of the proposed construction limits. There is 32f feet of topographic relief within the proposed building footprint (Elev. 202 to Elev.170). The proposed floor elevation will require earth cuts up to 211 feet and fills up 101 feet. The cuts will be deeper for footings. The existing grade within the area of the deep cut for the proposed emergency access drive is as high as Elev.212. The proposed site grading will require cuts up to 351 feet for construction ofthe emergency access roadway around the south side of the building. The long term stability of these cut slopes will be addressed with retaining walls and stone cladding on the slopes. Several retaining walls will be required to support less critical cut and fill conditions at the grading limits_ 3.4 The Geologic Origin of the natural soils at the site and environs is from glacial moraine (Till) deposits. These deposits consist generally of fine to coarse sand and silt with little gravel, cobbles and boulders. There are numerous surface boulders evident in the undeveloped areas of the site. The bedrock at the site, based on the USGS bedrock geological mapping for the area, consist of Andover Granite. 3.1 The Soils/Rock Cross Sections from the borings are generally as follows: Building ]Footprint (see borings R-1 thru B-7 & B -7A): Topsoil to 4" to 6" Locally Subsoils; fine SAND and SILT to 1 to 2 feet Note: The ground was frozen to about 1.5 feel at the time of the borings. 71ie subsoils will be loose when the ground thaws. The subsoils were evident on many of the testpit logs. Moraine; fine to coarse SAND, some Silt, little Gravel, few Cobbles and Boulders to auger refusal on possible bedrock or boulders at 7.5 to 23.5 feet below grade, dense to very dense Note: The shallowest refitsal depths (i.e., 7.5 feet at boring B-7 and 13.5 feet at boring B -7R) were encountered at the east end of the building. The test pit log for TP89-25 (1989), which was located about 50 east of those borings, indicated refusal on ledge at 10 feet. Parking Lot (see borings B-8 & B-9) Locally FILL (see B-9); fine to coarse SAND, some Silt, little Gravel to 5 feet; atop Organic SILT to 7 feet Fine to coarse SAND, some Gravel, little Silt, few Cobbles and Boulders to auger refusal on possible weathered rock at 14 to 15 feet, medium compact to dense Locally (see boring B-9); possible weathered rock or dense moraine to auger refusal at 19 feet Site Borings at Emergency Access Road (see borings B-11 thra B -13A): E Topsoil to 6" to 18" Note: BOULDERS and COBBLES are evident at the sur face Locally Subsoil; SILT and fine SAND to 1.5 to 4 feet, loose to medium compact Moraine; SILT and fine to medium SAND, little Gravel, few Cobbles and Boulders to auger refusal at 5 to 26.5+ feet, medium compact to very dense Note: The quantityofcobbles and boulders can not be determined from the borings alone Based on the numerous surficial boulders and the cobble and boulder content encountered in the test pits taken as part ofpr iorstudies it should be assumed that some cobbles and boulders may be encountered beloit, grade throughout the site. 3.2 The Water Table was at 5 to 15 feet below the existing grades at the completion of the borings. The water table is maintained by recharge of storm water falling directly on the site and entering from higher topographic areas. The moraine soils have a low permeability and low void ratio. These properties allow large fluctuations and mounding of the water table to occur in areas which receive concentrated recharge. The soil samples taken at the borings from below about 6 feet had water contents close to saturation levels. It should be assumed that the water table can be within 6 feet of existing grades throughout the project limits. The capillary rise can be to 2 feet above the static water table. 4.0 The Criteria for Foundation Type and Loading are as follows: 1. The maximum total settlement shall not exceed'/," and the maximum differential settlement shall not exceed %Z the maximum. settlement. 2. The seismic section of the Massachusetts Building code 7"' edition must be addressed in the foundation type and structure. 3. The Slab on Grade must not settle differentially more than %" in excess of the structure subsidence. This criteria is generally applied to buildings of similar character. If the owner, the architect, the engineers find the criteria as unacceptable, the writer shall be informed to permit additional geotechnical input. 4.1 Regarding item 2 (above), the Seismic Site Soil Profile Classification is "C". This is based on the very dense natural soils and depths to bedrock. The mapped MCE spectral response acceleration values for North Andover, MA are S, = 0.075 for one second period and Ss = 0.33 for short periods. The values for the site coefficient as a function of site class are Fv =1.47 for one second period and Fa =12 for short period. For transfer of ground shear into the soil, the ultimate friction factor for 3 concrete on crushed stone over the soils can be 0.60. 5.0 Regarding Foundation Type, the logical type will be spread footings. The footings can be on the natural inorganic soils at least 2.5 feet below natural grade to be below frost disturbed soils, on the bedrock or on a controlled fill placed after the removal of any existing fills and frost disturbed subsoils. Some ofthe footings in the fill areas along the front of the proposed building will probably be on controlled fill. The natural soils will be susceptible to remoldingbeneath equipment when wet. To address this condition there shall be a minimum 8" layer of 3/8" crushed stone beneath the footings on the natural soils and as an initial layer beneath controlled fills where atop a wet sub grade. Controlled fill shall conform to the requirements of section 6.0 below, and shall extend horizontally beyond the footings for a distance equal to at least the depth of f ll beneath the footings. 5.0.1 Based on the borings it is possible that the bedrock may locally protrude into the footing subgrades. The rock shall be excavated to sufficient depth to place a minimum 8" layer of 3/8" crushed stone beneath the foundations. Loose broken rock pieces shall be removed from the subgrades. The crushed stone layer on the rock surface shall be compacted by at least five passes of a vibratory drum compactor having a minimum static weight of 4 Tons to fill any fractures in the rock. 5.1 The Allowable Bearing Pressures can be (1) 4,000 psf for footings on controlled fill; (2) 6,000 psf for footings on the crushed stone layer atop the natural inorganic soils or rock. The allowable loadings scan be increased by 1/3 for seismic or wind loading. At retaining walls the maximum pressure on the toe can be 50% higher than the average pressures, cited above. 5.2 Lateral Earth Loading on retaining walls that are part of the building (i.e., loading docks) this should be with- at rest pressure. The at rest pressure coefficient (to be multiplied by unit weight of backfill) is TCo = 0.45. Retaining walls, which are apart from the building, can be designed based on normal active pressure using an active pressure coefficient ICA = 0.28 (level backfill). The ultimate sliding factor for concrete on controlled fill or crushed stone can be 0.60. The recommended backfill for retaining walls shall conform to the requirements of section 6.0 below and shall extend laterally behind the walls for a distance equal to at least the height of the backfill measured from the footing bottoms. Retaining walls supporting cuts shall have structure under -drains. 5.2.1 The support of the proposed cuts along the emergency access road can be at least partially addressed with retaining walls. The possible retaining wall types were identified and schematically depicted inprevious correspondence. Those schematics are included in the appendices herewith. The wall types include pre -cast gravity systems and segmental designs with reinforced backfill. It is possible that rock excavation may be required in some areas of the cut. The proposed boring B-10 location was not accessible for a drilling rig and auger refusal was encountered at 16 feet below grade at boring B-11 (Elev.1961 vs proposed grade at Elev.1811). Borings B-12 and B-13 were drilled below Elev.1 80 without encountering rock. Where rock is encountered it is suggested that areas of rock be over -cut laterally to permit placing the retaining walls at the base of the cuts. If no walls will be used for the cuts, the requirements for slopes in earth and rock are discussed in section 4 7.1 and 7.1.1 below. The lateral earth pressure can be based on active pressure, but should be modified to account for probable sloping backfill. Fora backfill inclined at 1.5H:1 V, the appropriate earth pressure coefficient would be K„ = O.S. The fital designs for the emergency access road walls should be reviewed by this office to confirm that global stability is adequately addressed 5.3 The Frost Protection Depth in accordance with the MA Building Code is 4.0 feet below finish grades in areas which will be exposed to weather. 5.4 The following is a Summary of the Foundation Design Parameters: _I � I �r. ; .. e.4�gu:Purametera;tf , : ,, € !:;4r ;:t ,1 to :a ... adn�� F+ :.:;:.s. I: _ .. c: " :1r 13 , j� ;.: .M' 'FI i Fri r �� *,t :l_I:iW'1..^.nY.i.YdtliFn :i 4,000 psf Allowable Bearing Pressure on controlled fill Allowable Bearing Pressure on crushed stone layer atop natural soils or on rock 6,000 psf Backfill Unit Weight * 125 pef Angle of Internal Friction, 340 At Rest Earth Pressure Coefficient, Ko 0.45 Active Earth Pressure Coefficient (level backfill), KA 0.28 TBC Seismic Soil Site Profile Classification "C" Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration for a one second period, S, 0.075 Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration for a short period. SS 0.330 UItimate Sliding Coefficient Concrete on controlled fill or crushed stone 0.60 Frost Protection Depth 4.0 feet * Backfill material conforming to section 6.0, below 6.0 Regarding Controlled Fill, Backm of 'Walls and Excavations at Footings, and Underlayment beneath Slabs on Grade (to 4" below the slab bottom) the material shall conform to the following gradation, or shall be 3/a" crushed stone: 5 �a'r.;St; r;:,p ��� R�itl�flf�>• ..... i1�Ju l����qi� : �. j(�. }�.e rp .^ :,_,� .�. :a j ;� _.� yy i. 'L4^':- � ii.� Vii' �.hLi "�': � :ti'• aa:n; - !•�a�'��:i.t_ .. - �s::��,y-a i• q. xi'4 5 �-lei-' . ���. L� :.. _ .S �`I� •. 1� 100 3.5" 50-100 3/4" 25-75 No.4 The fraction, passing the No.4 sieve shall have less than 15%, passing the No. 200 sieve. The on site excavated soils will not conform to the above, gradation. All backfill and controlled fill must be compacted to at least 95% of modified optimum density in accordance with ASTM D1557. 6.1 Regarding the Slab on Grade, there shall be at least 20" of controlled fill placed beneath such floors to within 4" of the slab bottom. The final 4" directly beneath the slab at grade shall be with 3/8" crushed stone. Controlled fill shall confbrm to Section 6.0 above. Where the floor sub grade falls in bedrock (if any) there shall be an initial 4" layer of 3/8" crushed stone over the rock surface. All existing fills, structures, subsoils and organic soils shall be removed from beneath the floors. A vapor retarder is required beneath slabs at grade. Based on the floor elevation and the requirements to under -drain the large cut behind the building, there would not be a requirement for floor under- drainage. 7.0 Regarding Earthwork, excavations in the natural soils will generally be defined as OSHA Type B, which will require sloping of unshored excavations exceeding 5 feet in height to slopes less than 45° from the horizontal (1:1). Temporary cuts in bedrock can be close to vertical. 7.1 In general, Long Term Slopes in earth cuts and fills shall be 2:1, or flatter. Steeper slopes up to 1.5: l will require riprap cladding as shown schematically in the appendices for the emergency access road cuts. There shall be an under drain and stone wedge at the base of earth cut slopes that exceed 4 feet in height. A Schematic section is included in the appendices. Over cutting of slopes should be avoided as this may lead to future sloughing where seepage occurs in these areas. 7.1.1 Slopes inRoekand Combined EarddRock could be largely avoided based on thetest borings acid if retaining walls are used to support the deep cuts at the back ofthe building. The earth and rock would be cut back sufficiently behind the walls to place the foundations and the granular backfill. In designing combined earth/rock slopes (if any), the clearing limits for the slope should be determined by extending aline at 2H:1 V from the toe of rock cut. The proximity ofrock will provide the bench for the earth slope. There should be a foundation drain at the base of rock cuts. A recommended cross section is shown in the appendices. 7.1.2 The site design must include adequate drainage devices above the final slopes and retaining walls at the back of the site to intercept overland flow generated from the higher areas. This will 9 mitigate surficial flows from entering into vehicular and pedestrian areas at the base of the slopes and walls, and reduce the amount of storm water infiltration into the permeable backfill at retaining walls. 7.2 The Natural Moraine Soils have silt contents in the range of 23 to 50±% and will be susceptible to remolding under construction equipment when wet, either from groundwater or storm water onto the exposed soils. The on site excavated soils will not be suitablefor use beneath the building and retaining walls, for backfill of walls, or as fill beneath pavements within 2.$ feet of finished grades. In pavement fills at 2.5+ feet below the pavement grades the moraine soils could be used provided the required compaction can be achieved To achieve the compaction would require that the soil water contents do not exceed the modified proctor optimum moisture content by more then 2 to 3%. The soils taken from below about 6 feet below the existing grades will have water contents close to saturation (i.e. more then 3% above the optimum moisture content). The use of such soils in controlled fills would require temporary stockpiling for drying. The drying of the moraine soils will be highly dependant on the weather and probably only possible during dry summer months. If the sub grades are wet the initial layer of fill in such areas would have to be crushed stone or off site sand and gravel. Compaction of the moraine soils may require kneading compaction (i.e.,with sheep's -foot rollers) and layers not exceeding 9". The placement of the crushed stone or sand and gravel layers as an initial step after stripping of topsoil will lessen potential extra expenditures required to mitigate disturbed areas. nth the above Ihnitations on the use of the on site moraine deposits it should be assumed that the site earthwork can not he balanced from cuts to fills. 8.0 Regarding New pavements, the subgrades will include frost susceptible soils and possibly bedrock in deep cut areas. There should be at least 12" of Mass Highway Gravel FILL or material conforming to section 6.0 above placed beneath the pavement sections. Areas in rock shall be over - cut to at least 2.5 feet below the finished grades. There shall be an initial 6" layer of 3/8" crushed stone atop subgrades falling on an excavated rock surface and for subgrades on wet natural soils. The recommended pavement sections, above the 12" layer of Mass Highway Gravel FILL or material conforming to 6.0, are as follows: 1. Passenger Car Parking: 3" of Bituminous Concrete on 8" of Processed Stone Subbase 2. Truck Access: 4" of Bituminous Concrete on 8" of Processed Stone Subbase 8.1 Subsurface drains are recommended for pavements in cut areas. The drains should be located at pavement edges and at maximum 35 feet spacing beneath parking areas. The drains can be 4" diameter perforated ADC piping about 12" below the subbase wrapped in a geotextile encapsulated in 3/8" stone. 9.0 This report has been prepared for specific application to the subject project in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation engineering practices. No otherwarranty, express or implied, is made. In the event that any changes in the nature, design and location of structures are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or verified in writing. 7 The analyses and recommendations submitted in this report are based in part upon data obtained fi om referenced explorations. The extent ofvariations between explorations may notbecome evident until construction. If variations then appear evident, it will be necessary to re-evaluate the recommendations of this report. Dr. Clarence Welti, P.E., P.C., shall perform a general review of the final design and specifications in order that geotechnical design recommendations may be properly interpreted and implemented as they were intended. If you have any questions please call me. Very trul yours John J. Bear, P.E. .Clarence Welti Ph.D., P. E. President, Dr. Clarence Welti P.E.; P.C. APPENDIX 1 Boring Location Plan Test Boring Logs CLARCNCE WEL71 ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHA13LER ASSOCIATES P. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER. MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSET Su ACE EI -E �. HOLE NO. 84 TYPE HSA SS LINE&STA. (ROUNDR'ATGRODSFRVATIONS AT 8.0 fir.AFTEri I) HOURS v. AtnR Nouns START Dare 1/22!09 FINISH DATE 1172!09 SILEI.U. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. lbs -140 HAMMER FALL 30� E. COORDINATE DEPTH SAMPLE NO. L3LOWS/6" DEPTH A STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS EI.I:V. 0 5 10 15 - TOPSOIL BR.FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL 0.5 ' 1 10-12-16 2 18.21-60 10.00`-11.50' 20---- 25-- 30- AUGER REFUSAL @ 15.0- 5.0'202530LEGEND. LEGEND.COL. A:RF.COVIiRY" SAMPLETYPE: D=DRY A=AUGER C=C()RE LI=IJNDISTURI.DPISTON S=SPLITSPOON PROPORTIONS USED: TRACE=G•IT4 LI1TI_I =10ZD^o SOME=30-35 : AND -35-500A DRILLL'R: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 THOL E NO. B-1 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADI ER ASSOCIATES P. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER. MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR OFFSET SURFACE ELEV. IJOLF- 10. B-2 TYPE HSA SS LINE R STA. GROUND WATER OBSERVATIONS AT 8.0 r -T. AFrEn 0 Rauns AT FT.AFtGft Iwuns START Darr: 1122109 ��i 1122109 SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER IAT. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 30' E.000RDINA'TE DEPTH SAMPLE-- STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS ELGV. NO. BLOWS/6- -- DEPTH 5 18 = TOPSOIL 0.5 BR. FINE CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES 1 10-2125 5.00'-6.50' 2 60 10.10-10.25' WEATHERED ROCK 13.0 15 20 25-- 30-- 3s AUGER REFUSAL @ 15.0' 15.0 LEGEND: COL A:itWOVERY" SAAiPLF. TYPE: D -DRY A -AUGER C -CORE U -UNDISTURBED PL4TON S=SPLI SPOON PROPORTIONS USED: TRACE=0-I0% Lrrrj,E=I(t.'-n'.'v SOME -20.35!a AND -35-5(r% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. 13-2 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.0_ BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES P. G. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORL: DAR. OFFSET SURFACE E!L•Y. HOLE NO B_3 TYPE HSA SS LINE & STA. GROUND %1 ATER 01151:1lvATIONS ,!r 10.0 Fr. AFT[sR 0 HOW tr F7.Ar7F.l! NDURs START DATE 1/22109 nNlsit DATE 1/22109 SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WI'. 140 [bs HAMMER FALL 30" F. COORDINATE UEPili SAMPLE A+REMARKS STRATUM DESCRIPTION Fan HU. BI.04V5/6" DEPTH 0 5 10 15 20 25--- 30--- 35 TOPSOIL 0.5 BR. FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT. LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES 1 17-26-20 5.00'$.50' 2 10-11-13 10.001-11.50' 3 60 15.07-15.17' a 60 20,00'-20.06' AUGER REFUSAL @ 23.5' 23'5 1 LEGEND: COL A:]tE(-''OVFRY„ SA"I'LE T1T'L•': D=DRY A=AUGER C=COkr U-UNDISTURDED mi'BN S=sPLIT SPOON PROPORTIONS I)SF.D: 1'tL1CC=04U°5 LIT11.17=10.20% SOME' -10-35% AND=35-50% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 MOLE NO. B-3 CLARENCL WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397ASSISTED GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 cur.NT HENRY SCHADLE ASSOCIATES P. C. PROJECT NAME LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA E] ANGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSFT sertr"cEorv. ROLE NO. B-4 TYPE HSA SS LINE & STA. AROUND WATER 00SERVA ONS AT 10.0 Fr. AFTER 0 tlaulu Ar t�'" � ti°Ims srART 1122109 DATr: MICj 1!22/09 SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1376" , N. COORDINATE IiAA{A1ER W'I'. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 39 G COORDtNA'IT DEPTH SAMPLE 0. STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS FLEW NO. AI-OWS/6" DEvrI•l 0 5 i0 15 - TOPSOIL 0.5 BR. FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL 1 12-12-12 5.00'-6.50' 2 6D 10.00'-10.50' 20 25 30 AUGER REFUSAL @ 15.0' 15'0 LEGE I): COI.. A:RECOVERY" SANIPLEWPE: D-DRY A-AUGER C--CORE U-UNDISIURBEDPISTON S—SPLITSP00N PROPORTIONS USED: TRACt o-10 . LITTU-10-20% '&)MU-20-]5?b AND--35-50% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. BA CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06D33 CLIENT HENRYSCHADLEP. ASSOCIATES, P. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSET suuA 'E ELEV HOLE NO. g-5 TYNE' HSA SS LINE & STA. GRQlTD1t:\TEttOns EtiVrtTIOtSS AT 9.0 f•T. AtlER 0 HOURS AT FT. AFTER HoURS SY,1R7 121/09 DAT[ FINISH 1121/09 DATC SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. 140 lbs HAMMER. FALL 30" E COORDINATE DEPTH SAMPLE A STRATUM DESCRIPTION 4- REMARKS ELE1'. N0. BLOWSI6" DEPTH 0 5 10- 15 20 -GREY = TOPSOIL :. - ...... 0.5 BR. FINE-CRS.SAND. SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL. FEW COBBLES 1 10.19-30 5.00'-6.50' 2 60 10.00'-10.33' 3 60 25 30 35 4 60 20.00'-20.50' FINE-MED.SAND AND SILT UTTLE GRAVEL 20.0 20.5 BOTTOM OF BORING @ 20.5' LEGEND: COL. A:RECOVERY " SAhIPLE TYPLI D=DRti A=AUGFR C -CORE U-UNDISIURBED PISTON S -SPLIT SPOON PROPOR'r[ONS I%SEI): TRACE -0.101% 41TTLE.—AU-2010 SOME 20-35"6 AND -35-50% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 HOLE \0. B-$ CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY. CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES P. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVINGP.O. LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLCR CORFBAR Off SET SIAtFACEELM HOLE NO. $-6 TYPE HSA SS LINE&STA. GROUND WATEROUSERVATIONS AT nonea•-r. APl•ER 0 Ilaats AT FT. AFTER HOURS START UATF 1121109 FINISH 1121109 anis SIZE I.U. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WE 140 lbs HAMMER TALI- 30" E. COORDINATE DEPTI.1 SAMPLE A STRATUM WSCRIPTION +REMARKS ELEV. NO. BLOWS/6" DEPTH 5 TOPSOIL 0.33 • BR.FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES S 60 5.00'-5.33' 10- 15 = GREY/BR.FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW 80 COBBLES 2 15-29-60 10.00'-11.33' 3 40-60 15.00'-15.75' 20 25 30 AUGER REFUSAL @ 16.0' 1 16.0 LEGEND: COL. A:RECOVERY " S.-WPLF WPE: D=DRY A AUGER C-WRE 11=UNDISTURHL•D PISTON S=SPLIT SPOON PROPORTIONS USED: TRACE-0-10% LITTLE=/0-21)6 SOME=2D-35.% AND=3i-5096 DRILLCR S GRAVES INSPECTOR SHEET 1 Of 1IIOLt NO. B-6 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY. CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES P. C PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSET SURFACEELeIL. HOLE NO, g,7 TYPE HSA SS LINE S STA, GROUND WATEROD.SERVATKN41; AT nonertAfTER 0 HOURS AT FT.Ar•Trx HOURS START i/21/D9 DATE FINISH 1/zi109 n vrr SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. 140 lbs I1AMhiGlt FALL 30• L".COpRDINA'CE DEPTH SAMPI.f; A S"fRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS ELEV. NO. BLOWS/ DEPTH 0 5 10 15 25 35 2D 30 = TOPSOIL 0.33 • BR.FINE-MED.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL 1 80 AUGER REFUSAL @ 7.5' 7.5 LEGEND: COL. A:RECOYCRY " SAMPLETITE: D --DRY A=AUGER C=CORE UrUNVISI'URBED PISTON S=SPLIT SPOON PROPORTIONS USCD: TRACE=0-10".6 UTILE=10?096 SOW -20-35% AND -35-50". DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 THOLE NO. B-7 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN OGD33 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCI P. C. PROJECT NAML- ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER.A AUGER CASING SAMPLER I CORE DAR. OfFS'ET SURr• "1c1cY' IIOLIiNO. 13-7A TYPE HSA SS LINES STA. CROWD WATCROMERl'ATIONS AT 5.0 FLAFTER 0 youRx AT FT. AFT[R kJoUltS START DATE 1/22109 FINISH DATE' 1122109 SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. 140 lbs HAMMIER FALL 30" E. COORDINATE DEPTH SAMPLE A STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS ELEV. NO. BLOWS/6" DEPTH 0 5 10 = TOPSOIL 0 5 BR.FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES 15 20- 25-- 02530 30-- 35 WEATHERED ROCK 11.0 AUGER REFUSAL Gal 13.3' 13.5 LEGEND: COL. A:RECOVERY " SANIPLETYPE: D=DRY A=AUGER C -CORE U=UNDISTURBEDPISTON S=SPLITSP00N PROPOR'T'IONS USED: TRAC'C=040% Lfl-I1.F.=10-1096 SOME -20.35% ANO.35-500.o DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. B -7A CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 -1ENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIA E5 P C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFPSET SURFACE.:CEV HOt.Is N0. B-8 TYPE HSA SS LINE- & STA. GROUND WATm 04SCOVATIDN5 AT 9.0 m 1FTE t 0 nouns AT Fr. vTrA Flouts MART 1123109 DATE FIXISFI 1123109 DATE SIZE I.U. 3.75" 1,375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. 140 lbs 1tAMA1 8R FALL 30" 1 . COORDINATE DEP'T'H SAMPLE NBLOWSI6" O. DEPTH A STRATUI64 DESCRIPTION +REMARI:S ELEV. 5 10- BR. FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME GRAVEL, LITTLE SILT 1 22-20-20 5.00' 6.50 2 14-12-11 i0.00'-11.50' 15 20--- 30-- 030L.EGENQ: AUGER REFUSAL @ 14.0' 14.0 LEGEND.,COL. A:RECOVERY " SAMPLE TYPE: D=DRY A=AUGER CORE U-UNDISfURBL•OPIS'1'ON S-SPLITSPOON PROP01MONS USED: TRACE -0-1016 LITTLE=10--V..o SOME -M-35% AND -35-50% DRILLE2- S GRAVES INSPECTOR; SHIFEt' 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. B-8 CLAREIVCE WELT! ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATESP. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER MA ALIOCR CASING SAMPLER CORF BAR. OFFSET SURFAcEELM HOLT NO. B-9 fYl'E MSA S5 LINE & STA. GR()uxt)WATrR ODSF.RWIDN'5 Al' 9.0 FT.,irrrx 0 Nouns AT Fr-r�r[n Nauss START 1/23109 naTG 1!23109 DATC I.D. 3.75" 1.375"DATE N. COORDINA'T'E HAMMER IVT. 1401bs HAMMER FALL 30" LCOORDINATE DEPTFI SAMPLE A+REMARKS STRATUM DESCRIPTION ELEV. NO. BLOWS/6" DEPTI-I BR. FINE-CRS.SAND, SOME SILT & GRAVEL - FILL 1 1-1-2 5.00'-6.50 OR. ORGANIC SILT 5.0 10 BR. FINE-CRS.SAND. SOME GRAVEL, LfITLE SILT 7'0 2 12-9-9 10.00'-11.50' POSSIBLE WEATHERED ROCK 15,0 20- 25- 02534 30-- 35 AUGER REFUSAL @ 19.0' 19'0 LEGEND: CUL. A:RECOVFRY" SAMPLE TYPE: 13 -DRY A=AVOJER C -CORE 11-UNDIS'I'URBEDPISTON S=SPLIT SPOON PROPOR71ONS USED: TRACE=11-10% LITTI.E=10-30% SOME -%)0.334o AND -35-50% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SWEET 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. B-9 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES P. C.—NORTH PROJECT NAME LIVING LOCATIONASSISTED ANDOVER MA UGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSET SURFACEFIEV. HOLE NO. B-11 TYPE HSA r3.75" SS LINL'&-SPA' GROUNOXYATtROBSERVAnona AT 12.Orr,AFTEIt 0 uoulcs xr FT. At-tER nouns START 1121109 FINISH DAIL 1121/09 S17-EI.D, 1.375 -DATE N.COORDINt1Tl: HAMMER WT. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 30" E. COORDINATE DEPTH SAMPLE A STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS ELEV. NO. BLOWS/6" DEPTH 0 5 1q 15 20--- 25- 3q 35 ; ; TOPSOIL 0.5 BR, SILT AND FINE -MED -SAND, LCfnE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES AUGER REFUSAL @ 16A• 16.0 LECLND. COL. A:RGCOVERV SAAIPLE'fl' E: D=DRY A=AUGER C -CORE U=UNOISTURBEDPISTON S-SPUT SPOON PROPORTIONS USED: TRACE=O-10% LITTLr IO -2(1% SOME -3i-35% A141)=33-50% DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1 HOLE NO. �-T CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRYSCHADL R ASSOCIATES P. C PROIEG I' NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION ANDOVER MA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE BAIL OFf5ET SURFACE Ful*NORTH I TOLE N0. 8-12 TYPE HSA SS UNE SSTA. GROUND WATER 00SERVATIONS AT 15.0 rr. AFTER 0 330URS AT } r. of FMR Ilo3ms START 1119/09 DATE rinlsl3 1119/09 DATE SIZE' I.D. 3.75° 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER 41'T. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 30° L". COORDINATE DEP'I'1t SAMPLE AREMARKS STRATUM DESCRIPTION ELEV. NO. BLOWS/6° DL'PTI-I 5 110- TOPSOIL 1.5 BR. SILT AND FINE SAND BR. SILT AND FINE-MED.SAND, LITTLE GRAVEL 4'0 1 5-5-8 5.00'-6.50' 2 8-8-6 10.00'-11.50' 15 20 25 30 GREY SILT AND FINE -MED. SAND, LITTLE GRAVEL 14.0 26.5 3 20-27-26 15.00'-16.50' 4 13-15-25 20.00'-21.50' 5 B-10-19 25.09-26.50' BOTTOM OF BORING @ 26.5' LEGEND: COL. A:RECOVERY " SAMPLETVPE: D=DRY A -AUGER C -CURE U --UNDISTURBED PISTON SGSPLITSPOf1N PROPORTIONS USED: T RAC E=040U . UTTL&IO-Y1°; 5taU =3-435 b AND --35-50% DRILLER:- S GRAVES INSPECTOR; S14EET 1 OF 1NOLE NO. B-12 CLARENCE WELT! ASSOC., INC.CLIENT P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES. P. C. PROJECT NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER NIA AUGER CASING SAMPLER CORE LIAR. OFFSET WRFACE ELC1'. IioLE No. B-13 TYPE HSA SS LINE & STA. GMLTND ISATEIt 08SGtVATIDNS AT n0nam ATTER 0 MOMS Al Fl.,V7EIL HOURS S7•ART i/19109 DATE FINISH 1119!09 OATe SIZE I.D. 3.75" 1.375" N. COORDINATE HAMMER WT. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 30" E. COORDINATE DL•'I'rH SAMPLE STRATUM DESCIZIMON +REMARF;S ELEV. NO. 13LOAIS/6" DLPTH 5 TOPSOIL 0,5 BR. FINE-MED.SAND AND SILT, LITTLE GRAVEL 10 15 20 25 30 AUGER REFUSAL @ 5.(' s 0 LCGF": COL. A:RECOVBRY ° SA,Vi!'I,ETVPIi: D-DRY A=AUGER C=CORL U-UNDI.S MI)PISTON S-SPLITSPOON PROPORTIONSISSED: TRACE=0-10?o LIT11.E-10-210% SOME-20-35% AND--M-50% DRILLM: S GRAVES INSPECTOR: SHEET 1 OF 1HOLE NO. BAA CLARENCE WELTI ASSOC., INC. P.O. BOX 397 GLASTONBURY, CONN 06033 CLIENT HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES, C. PROJECT' NAME ASSISTED LIVING LOCATION NORTH ANDOVER. MA AUGER CASING -SAMPLER CORE BAR. OFFSET SURFACEELE - 14OLL•' 10. $-13A TYPE HSA SS LINE lh STA. GROIND u'ATER OBSERVATIONS AT 15.0 FT. AI.7Elt 0 uolnea AT Ft. AF1'Elt HOURS START 1/22/09 FIMSH 1/22/09 DATE SIZE f.D. 3.75" 1.375"DATE N. COORDINATE f-IA1vLMER WT. 140 lbs HAMMER FALL 30" G. COORDINATE DEPTH SAMPLE A STRATUM DESCRIPTION +REMARKS ELEV. NO, BLOWS/6" DEP I1i 0 5 10 15 20 25 TOPSOIL 0.5 SR. SILT AND FINE-MED.SAND, LITTLE GRAVEL, FEW COBBLES 30 35 BOTTOM OF BORING ® 25.0' 25.0 LEGEND: COL. A:RL, COVERY" SAIVIPLE'L'YPE: 0 ---DRY A=AUGER C=CORE U -UNDISTURBED PISTON S=SPLITSPOON PROPORTIONS USED: TRACr-0.10% 1.117LE=10-3[w; SOMS--20-35% AND=354046 DRILLER: S GRAVES INSPECTOR• SHED 1 OF 1 I HOLE NO. B -13A 0 APPENDIX 2 Grain Size Gradation Tests Water Content Tests Particle Size Distribution Report .9 ID jg g d d iR 100 J 80 . . .... 70 60 W...... ......... LA Z ILL w uj a. 40 J Vi 30 - 20 F- 01 100 10 1 tl.1 0.01 0.001 GRAIN E - mm. % Gravel % Sand % Fines. Coarse Fine Coarse Medium Fine Silt Clay 01 10 15 Is 23 8 15 222 24 8 18 29 1 26 X LL PL D8D 13.5 0 D3n DIS Din C r. C11 0 -12 1 17.9360 2.9226 L1.0515 0.1655 E. – — 13.9330 L�75513 0.5891 0.1272 0.6059 0.3247 0.0987 Material Description USCS AASHTO 0 Project No. Client: HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES, P. C. Remarks: Project: NORTH ANDOVER ASSISTED LIVING oWATCR CONTENT= 8.1% r3 WATER CONTENT = 7.6% 0 Source of Sample: B-6 Depth: 5.0 Sample Number: I A WATER CONTENT = 11.0% o Source of Sample: B-6 Depth: 10.0 Sample Number: 2 ,A Source of Sample: B-5 Depth. 10.0 Sample Number 2 1 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOCIATES, INC. I Figure Particle Size Distribution Report C d d O X, 0 C3 100- 4 J.. 80 t U if 60 U.1 Z LL Z so CK w 40 30 it 20 10 A o 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 GRAIN SIZE - nim. %+311 % Gravel %Sand0/. Fines Coarse Fine Coarse Medium Fine silt Clay 0 4 12 27 48 0 7 15 26 46 X LL PL Res D.60 D50 DA�_ Dlfi Din C, r -U- 0 IA396 0.1632 0.0857 0.1920 0.0976 Material Description U8CS AASKTO 0 0 Project No. Client: HENRY SCHADLER ASSOCIATES, P. C. Remarks: Project: NORTH ANDOVER ASSISTED LIVING 0 WATER CONTENT= 13.69/a C) WATER CONTENT = 9.5% * Source Of Sample: B-12 Depth: 5.0 SaMPIG Number: I * Source of Sample: B-12 Depth: 15.0 Sample Number: 3 CLARENCE WELTI ASSOCIATES, INC. Figure 0 AIPPENDIX 3 General Slope Schematics Conceptual Treatments At Emergency Access Road Cuts 1 v, N C� Q m � W z z x a C7 J1 a -ai iQ;U N LL- W U O M U� . lL !Q- MA W a r� W< - a ca U L'J -J U z a 0 r WW Ci w R A cal z z pq y R � � w W CE -i¢ ' W C3 o z w w U E < iZi N Cl W 7) U Ha.W p D ¢wW A p E° - W Q W 2 cu o LL. `I I 4 z EJ z U1 z pq a I I Q w t'l-- { 'NIW O I 1 TFI- �� El A v Ld W 1 �- �1_ FF- hfy_ z W 1 X Li z Z 1i U W dX W = A 0 <W J Q U " T z Fes-+ 0 (� Y l7H ¢Up p pq Opp' = w A r LLI W t- 00 Ld pa p E D W Ul j J Cj i�/1 pq -� W x ¢ ,..., z p 13 tit�A WW Mz �aW d O XW� �> ¢¢ zmx p v oLL. C6 wa- Av 13am3 2 El iM--4� LyI. 3� 1=1 C3 3Ao LLI A �c Z LLLf Z x �i--H w t0UjI. Q w Li ¢ - y i Um o a r �J) Q a zp W A a A. a .pdm 0 W� ota woo 2 E q C N Z lyw l�J IL Z O N w z W nH Q a_ LLI g v..: f-- © Q F-- v LL- ry o W Qf r cl� O w s as z Q Q w LLI et (Y w LL O N t7 w 06 w O S W O CL H A pq A Z< of La t' A A LLJO OC LL. PRO COIN'4, , Brightview North Andover INCORPORATE., North Andover, MA &stn mid Con-4mv tewn ALM4 ocot Project #301112 ARCHITECTURE APPENDIX A2 Geotechnical Supplemental by: Miller Engineering & Testing 100 Sheffield .Road P.O. Box 4776 Manchester, New Hampshire 03108-4776 (603) 668-6016 August 11, 2011 Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Section 1112_Appendix_A2_GeoTech Supplemental Page I of 26 August 11, 2011 Mr. Mark Belter PRO CON, INC. 1359 Hooksett Road PO Box 4430 Manchester, New Hampshire 03108 RE: Test Boring Observations and Geotechnical Engineering Considerations For The Arbors at North Andover Project No. 11.154.NH Dear Mr. Belter: The purpose of this letter report is to provide the results of test pits recently excavated in the existing slope area south of the proposed building location. The test pit results were evaluated together with test boring results obtained by others (Dr. Clarence Welti, P.E., P.C. Geotechnical Study) to develop conceptual geotechnical engineering recommendations with regard to design of the southern slope and considerations for reuse of soils derived from on-site excavations anticipated in southern areas of the development. The property formerly was a ski -area; thus, some ground disturbance has occurred randomly over the site, including the slope areas. Subsurface Exploration Program and Conditions Encountered The recent subsurface exploration program, consisting in the excavation of fifteen (15) test pits by Linskey Construction, was monitored by a Miller Engineering and Testing, Inc. (MET) geotechnical engineer. The test pits, labeled METP-1 through METP-15, were all located in the slope area south of the building location. The Test Pit Logs and a Subsurface Exploration Location Plan, Fig 1, are attached to this report. The test pit locations were recommended by MET and staked in the field by Marchionda & Associates, L.P. The excavation contractor was retained by Pro Con, Inc. Ground surface elevations at the test pit locations were interpolated from the Grading and Drainage Plan, dated November 12, 2009, prepared by Marchionda & Associates, L.P. These elevations are provided on each Test Pit Log. A naturally occurring subsurface profile was encountered from the ground surface at many of the exploration locations, except for those excavated in proximity to locations disturbed by regrading slopes during former ski -area operations. Fill layers were evident at METP-3,5,7,8,12, and 13 where a 4 to 7 foot thick layer of loose, sand, silt, boulders, and roots was found. The test pits in natural areas encountered topsoil/forest mat material and subsoil consisting of organic fine sand, roots, and boulders to depths of 2 to 2.5 feet. Beneath the fill and organic layers, natural glacial soil strata were encountered. Typically, the glacial soils are coarser -grained in the uppermost portion of the layer and finer -grained with depth. The lowermost glacial deposits are dense to very dense and uppermost soils appear medium dense to dense. The test pits were terminated or encountered refusal at depths between 7.5 and 13.0 feet below ground surface. Groundwater was encountered at approximate elevation 203 near the toe of slope. It should be noted that the test pits at the lower portions of the slope were excavated as deep as possible with the CAT 325B excavator; however, some of the test pits did not reach the maximum depth of proposed cuts. Considerations for Reuse of Materials The topsoil/subsoil and fill materials encountered at test pit locations are considered unsuitable for use in structural fill areas of the proposed project. These materials should be segregated from the underlying glacial soils for use in non-structural areas, beyond the locations of any slopes. The primary source of structural fill material at the site consisted of glacial outwash and till comprised of an abundance of fine to medium sand, some to little silt, and little to trace amounts of gravel. Some cobbles and large boulders should also be expected within this layer. These large particles will need to be removed from the soils, to allow proper lift thickness, prior to using the material as structural fill. The glacial till soils have a moderate sensitivity to excess moisture and can be difficult to place and compact when the moisture content is more than two (2%) percent above optimum values, as determined by ASTM D-1557. Furthermore, when 2 excess moisture is present, the material is susceptible to destabilization resulting from disturbance due to construction traffic. At all times during earthwork, therefore, it will be important that the site be positively graded, within the limits of construction, to avoid ponding of runoff water. Particular care must be taken to minimize traffic directly upon prepared footing and slab subgrades. Earthwork in glacial soils is generally more difficult and expensive during wet periods of the year (i.e. mid September through May). The glacial soils obtained from on- site cuts, therefore, may not be cost-effective to use during certain times of the year. Use of Select Granular Fill material from a borrow source may expedite earthwork during unfavorable weather conditions. Based upon our analyses, the adequately compacted glacial soils should provide an allowable net bearing pressure of 4,000 pound per square foot. It is imperative that the glacial soils are placed in 12 -inch loose lifts and that relative compaction of each lift is verified by field density testing. Slope Stability Considerations The southern slope will be partially excavated to establish proposed grades depicted on the Grading and Drainage Plan for the project. The finish elevation of Drive 3 ranges from el. 180 to el.190, indicating the cut at toe of slope will be 20 to 25 feet below existing surface grades. Judging from the recent test pit results and test borings advanced by others, very dense glacial till or bedrock is expected at the elevation of the toe of slope. The naturally occurring glacial till and bedrock should have an allowable net bearing pressure of 4.0 tons per square foot (tsf). In our opinion, various slope angle configurations could be considered to provide stable slope conditions. The slope configuration depicted in the Grading and Drainage Plan indicates that a tiered slope is currently being considered. The conceptual details for the slope are provided in the geotechnical report, dated January 30, 2009, prepared by Dr. Clarence Welti, P.E., P.C. It is our understanding that the project team is evaluating slope alternatives that might be more cost effective than the tiered slopes with multiple retaining walls solution. Based upon the results of our global slope stability analyses, a relatively high retaining wall could be designed for support adjacent to Drive 3 at the toe of slope. The retaining structure could consist of a 3 reinforced concrete cantilever or gravity wall or Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) system with sloping backfill. Our global slope stability analyses. indicate that the minimum Factor of Safety (FOS) resisting slope rotation and translation is 1.6. The attached Figure 2 depicts the slope configuration that was analyzed. The analysis was performed for a critical section on Drive 3 where the wall height could be 31 feet and the maximum backslope angle is 2.5H:1 V. The high retaining wall must be designed by a structural engineer with soil and groundwater parameters provided by the geotechnical engineer. The design must account for drainage (surface and subsurface), coefficient of active earth pressure (considering sloping backfill) and bearing conditions. In addition, the final wall design and slope geometry must be analyzed with respect to global stability to. ensure the minimum FOS is 1.5 at all locations of the slope. The slope design must include surface and subsurface drainage systems (open channel and/or closed systems) sized for collecting and discharging the design storm event. The Civil Engineer should determine the size and location of the system based upon the area of the watershed and site topography. Once the design team has selected a slope configuration, our engineers are available to provide geotechnical parameters for final slope design. We trust the contents of this report meet with your current needs and expectations. Should you have any questions regarding the contents of this report, or if we can be of further assistance to you, please do not hesitate to contact us. Very truly yours, & TESTING, INC. Frank 4 0 to TEST PIT LOG Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER Test Pit No: METP-1 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: It. I54 -NH Surface Elev: 245.0' See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 Location: Date: 07-25-11 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor L[NSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative K. MILENDER Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Capacity 1.5 cu.yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Descri tion p Boulder Remarks 0 245 0.6 8" Forest mat and to soi! Size/Count 2 @ 24" 2.0 Light brown fine sand little silt SUBSOIL 4.5 Brown fine to coarse sand little silt little fine to coarse gravel, trace cobbles trace boulders 8 t✓Q 12" 5 240 Gray -brown fine to coarse sand, little (-) silt, trace fine to coarse gravel, trace cobbles, trace 7.5 boulders GLACIAL TILL eat ered Be roc Bucket Refusal at 9.0' TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 9 ft 10 235 15 --230 20--225 25 220 Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 12.0 Width 6.0 07-25-11 -- Depth 9.0 Volume 648 cu. ft. REMARKS: TEST PIT LOG 0 J 0 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NH Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-2 Surface Elev: 240.0 Location: See Plan 41.AA - i 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear - 90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth! Eley. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 240 0.5 6" Topsoil 2.5 Tan fine to medium sand, some silt, trace gravel, roots SUBSOIL 5 235 8.0 Brown fine to coarse sand, some gravel, some cobbles, few boulders up to approximately 3.0' in diameter, trace silt 10 230 15--225 20 220 25--215 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 8 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 Depth 8.0 Volume 320 cu. ft. 07-22-11 - - _ 'REMARKS: 0 J 0 TEST PIT LOG Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER Test Pit No: METP-3 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NH Surface Elev: 236.0 See Plan 4/ -Jia I 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 Location: Date: 07-22-11 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Remarks 0 236 0.5 6" Topsoil Size/Count (1) 5 2a1 Dark brown fine to medium sand, some silt, numerous boulders up to about 4.0' in diameter, little 6.0 cobbles trace gravel, roots ILL 8.0 Gra ish-brown fine to medium sand some silt little gravel, trace cobbles TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 8 ft 10 226 15 221 20--216 25 211 Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 07-22-11 - - Depth 8.0 Volume 320 cu, ft. REMARKS: (1) Numerous surface boulders up to approximately 5.0' in diameter near test pit location_ TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER MA Project No: i 1.154.NHSurface Date: 07-25-11 Test Pit No: METP-4 Elev: 226.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative K. Milendef Operator W. Linske Make CAT Model 325B Weather Capacity 1.5 cu, yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Chane Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 226 0.5 6" Forest mat and topsoil I @ 36" 2@24' 10@ 12" 2.5 Light brown fine sand little silt SUBSOIL s 221 5.5 Brown fine to coarse sand little silt,trace fine to coarse gravel, trace cobbles trace boulders 10.0 Gray -brown fine to coarse sand, little (-) silt, little fine to coarse gravel, trace cobbles, trace boulders (GLACIAL TILL) Bucket Refusal 10.0' 15 --211 20--206 25--201 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 10 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 13.0 Width 5.0 Depth 10.0 Volume 650 cu. ft. 07-25-11 - - - REMARKS: 0 IN 01 TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NHSurface Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: MM -5 Elev: 227.0 Location: See Plan 100S e jeld Road -Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 227 0.67 8" Topsoil 5.0 Dark brown fine to medium sand, some silt, numerous boulders up to 4.0' in diameter, little cobbles trace gravel, roots ILL 7.0 1 Dark brown -tan fine sand and silt roots BURIED TOP/SUBSOIL 10 --217 10.5 Brown fine to coarse sand, little gravel, little cobble, little silt, few boulders near bottom of test pit up to approximately 2.5' in diameter Bucket Refusal at 10.5' 15--212 20--207 2s 202 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 10.5 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.5 Depth 10.5 Volume 472.5 cu. ft. 07-22-11 - - REMARKS: TEST PIT ]LOG En 0 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: T14E ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NHSurface Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-6 Elev; 218.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative K. Milender Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ lev. Ee Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 218 0.5 6" Topsoil U) (2) 2.5 Tan fine to medium sand some silt,trace gravel, trace cobbles, abundant roots SUBSOIL s 213 10--208 12.0 Brown fine to coarse sand, little cobbles, some gravel, trace to little silt, few boulders up to approximately 2.5' in diameter 15-203 20 198 25 193 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 12 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 Depth 12.0 Volume 480 cu. ft. 07 -22 -II _ . REMARKS: (1) Surface bouldets up to approximately 4.0' in diameter around test pit. (2) Obtained soil sample from approximately 3.0-6.0' for labratory analysis. En 0 TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER — NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NHSurface Date: 07-22-I1 Test Pit No: —MTP -7 Elev: 216.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B lWeather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elcv. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0.25 3" Topsoil 4.0 Dark brown fine to medium sand and silt, abundant roots, few boulders up to approximately 2.0' in diamter, plastic, one boulder at 4.0' in diameter ILL 5 211 6.0 Black/orange-brown fine to medium sand and silt, abundant roots BURIED TOP/SUBSOIL l0 206 10.5 Tan fine to medium sand, some silt, little gravel, little cobbles, few boulders up to approximately 1.5' in diameter 15-201 20--196 25 191 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 10.5 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 12.0 Width 4.5 Depth 10.5 Volume 567 cu. ft. 07-22-1I - REMARKS: TEST PIT LOG 01 0 0 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: I L 154 -NH Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: MEPP -8 Surface Elev: 210.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear - 90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description er SBBoulder Remarks 0 210 4.0 Dark brown fine to medium sand and silt, trace gravel, trace cobbles root material FILL s zos 6.0 Brown fine sand and silt abundant root material trace gravel BURIED TOPSOIL 10 zoo l 1.0 12.0' Tan fine to medium sand, some silt, some cobbles, little gravel, few boulders up to approximately in diameter 15 195 20 190 25 185 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT I 1 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 11.0 Width 5.0 Depth 11.0 Volume 605 cu. ft. 07-22-11 REMARKS: 01 0 0 TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NH Date: 07-25-11 Test Pit No: METP-9 Surface Elev: 206.0 Location: See Plan 4�A - 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative K. Milender Operator W. Linske Make CAT Model 325B Weather Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description p Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0.3 4" Forest mat and topsoil 2 12" cQ 2.0 Light brown fine sand little silt,trace cobbles SUBSOIL s zm 9.0 Brown fine to coarse sand little silt,little fine to coarse avel trace cobbles 15 191 20 186 25--181 10.0 Gray -brown fine to coarse sand, little silt, little fine to coarse gravel, trace cobbles (GLACIAL WILL) TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 10 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 15.0 Width 6.0 Depth 11.0 Volume 990 cu. ft. 07-25-I1 - - REMARKS: TEST PIT LOG 01 L wn 01 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 1.1.t54.NH Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-10 Surface Eley: 208.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 208 0.5 6" Topsoil 1.5 Tan fine to medium sand some silt abundant roots trace gravel SUBSOIL 5 203 7:0 Brown fine to medium sand little gravel, little cobbles, little silt 8.5 Gray fine sand and silt, trace gravel Bucket Refusal at 8.5' 10 198 15 -193 20 188 25--183 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 8.5 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 Depth 8.5 Volume 340 cu. ft. 07-22-11 - REMARKS: 01 L wn 01 TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NH Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-11 SurfaceElev: 208.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Chane Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 208 0.5 6" To soil (1) 2.0 Tan fine to medium sand some silt trace gravel, roots SUBSOIL 5 203 9.0 Brown fine to coarse sand, some cobbles, little gravel, little silt, few boulders up to approximately 2.0' in diameter 10 198 13.0 Olive -brown fine to medium sand some silt little gravel, trace cobbles IS 193 20 188 25 183 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 13 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 Depth 8.0 Volume 320 cu. ft. 07-22-11 - - REMARKS: (1) Obtained a sample from approximately 6.0-9.0' for laboratory testing. TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No. 11.154.NH Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-12 Surface Elev: 210.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 210 5--205 0.5 6" Topsoil (1) 6.5 Brown fine to medium sand, some silt, few boulders up to approximately 4.0' in diameter, little gravel, trace cobbles roots FILL 8.0 Brown fine to coarse sand, some gravel, little cobbles, trace to little silt, few boulders up to approximately 2.5' in diameter WE t0 zoo 13.0 Tan fine to medium sand, some silt, little gravel, trace cobbles (WET) Test pit walls collapsing IS 195 20 190 25--185 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 13 ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 12.0 Width 6.0 Depth 13.0 Volume 936 cu. ft. 07-22-I1 - +/- 7.0' - REMARKS: ([)Obtained a sample from approximately 2.0-6.0' for laboratory testing - 0 NJ 0 TEST PIT LOG MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NHSurface Date: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-13 Elev: 204.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Chane Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks 0 7Q4 5 199 0.33 4" Topsoil 7.0 Dark brown to brown fine to medium sand and silt, little cobbles, few boulders up to approximately 2.0' in diameter, trace gravel, roots FILL 10--194 12.5 1 Grayish -brown fine to medium sand some silt, little gravel, trace cobbles MOIST AT BOTTOM) 15 --189 20--184 25--179 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 12.5 R Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.5 Depth 12.5 Volume 562.5 cu. ft. 07-22-11 - REMARKS: TEST PIT LOG 0 MILLER ENGINEERING & TESTING, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER NORTH ANDOVER MA Project No: 11.154.NH pate: 07-22-11 Test Pit No: METP-14 Surface Elev: 200.0 Location: See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NH 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Re resentative T. Strike O erator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Size/Count Remarks ° 20D 0.67 8" To soil 3.0 Brown fine to medium sand and silt roots SUBSOIL 5 195 10 190 11.0 Tan fine to medium sand, little gravel, little cobbles, few boulders up to approximately 2.0' in diameter 15 185 20 180 25--175 TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 1 l ft Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.5 Width 4.5 Depth 11.0 Volume 519.75 cu. ft. 07-22-11 REMARKS: 0 TEST PIT LOG Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER Test pit No: METP-15 MILLER ENGINEERING &TESTING. INC. NORTH ANDOVER, MA Project No: 11.154.NH SurfaceElev: 194.0 See Plan 100 Sheffield Road - Manchester, NN 03103 Ph. (603) 668-6016 - Fax: (603) 668-8641 Location: Date: 07-22-11 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Contractor LINSKEY CONSTRUCTION MET Representative T. Strike Operator Make CAT Model 325B Weather Clear -90's Capacity 1.5 cu. yds. Reach 15 Depth/ Elev. Strata Change Soil Description Boulder Remarks ° 194 0.67 8" Topsoil Size/Count 2.5 Oran a -brown fine to medium sand some silt, little cobbles trace gravel, roots SUBSOIL 5 189 7.0 Brown fine to medium sand littleravel, little silt,little cobbles Gray fine sand and sill, trace g ravel 8.0 ucket Refusal at 8.0' TEST PIT TERMINATED AT 8 ft + 10 184 IS 179 20 174 25--169 Ground Water Observations Pit Dimensions Date Time Depth Remarks Length 10.0 Width 4.0 07-22-11 - Depth 8.0 Volume 320 cu. ft. REMARKS: COMPACTION TEST REPORT 147 I 142 137 U CL -- - —1 a C - N a - 132 127 ZAV for Sp.G. _ 2-65 122 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10-5 12 Water content, % Test specification: ASTM D 1557-02 Method C Modified ASTM D 4718-87 Oversize Corr. Applied to Each Test Point Elev/ Classification Nat. % > % < Depth Moist. G Sp.. LL PI 314 in. No.200 USCS AASHTO 3-6' 13 12 ROCK CORRECTED TEST RESULTS MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Maximum dry density =137.1 pcf SAND AND GRAVEL Optimum moisture = 6.6 % Project No. 11.154.NH Client: PROCON INC. Remarks: Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER o Sample Source: METP-6 Depth: 3-6' Sample No.: Ll 10349A \11LLfR F�JI.ThTiERINC R 7L•\"17NG.INC. 09 Figure Ll 10349A GRAINSIZE DISTRIBUTION REPORT -AGGREGATE GRADING o O o C C C C C C O O O O O O O 100 90 80 70 W 60 M z50 LL F_ 40 UJ U W 30 tL 20 10 0 +3'• % Gravel Coarse Fini 0 13 22 9 1 SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC." PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 97 1.5" 95 V 91 .75" 87 .5" 80 .375" 76 #4 65 #10 56 #20 45 #40 34 #50 29 #60 27 #80 22 #100 20 #200 12 oil I +3'• % Gravel Coarse Fini 0 13 22 9 1 SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC." PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 97 1.5" 95 V 91 .75" 87 .5" 80 .375" 76 #4 65 #10 56 #20 45 #40 34 #50 29 #60 27 #80 22 #100 20 #200 12 U.i I SIZE - mm. % Sand Medium Fine 22 22 0 10 20 30 T M 40 n M z 50 x 60 D z M 70 80 90 _ 100 0.01 0.001 _ % Fines Silt — —F--- 12 Material Description SAND AND GRAVEL Atterbern Limits PL= LL= PI= Coefficients D90= 23.0552 D85= 17.0321 D60= 3.1264 D50= 1.2518 D30= 0.3289 D15= 0.0963 D10= Cu= Cc= Classification USCS= AASHTO= Remarks (no specification provided) Source of Sample: METP-6 Depth: 3-6' Sample Number: Ll 10349A Date: 7-22-11 Client: PROCON INC. MI11 FRENGINEEMIG a. •ir:SinNG, INC. Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER �4 — -- I Project No: 11.154.NH Figure L110349A I� Tested By: DM/SL 138 136.5 135 U Q r15 132 130.5 COMPACTION TEST REPORT --------------- --------------- ---------------- ---- — — — — — — — — - — t t , i t 7AV for Sp. G. _ 2.65 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 Water content, % Test specification: ASTM D 1557-02 Method C Modified ASTM D 4718-87 Oversize Corr. Applied to Each Test Point Elev/ Classification Nat. %> Depth USCS AASHTO Moist. Sp.G. LL PI 314 in. No.200 6-9' 17 16 ROCK CORRECTED TEST RESULTS MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Maximum dry density = 136.0 pcf SAND & GRAVEL Optimum moisture = 6.6 % Project No. 11.154.NH Client: PROCON INC. Remarks: Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER o Sample Source: METP-1 l Depth: 6-9' Sample No.: Ll 10349B Af�n�uxt�+cnnuan arFsr�c.inc. re L110349B GRAINSIZE DISTRIBUTION REPORT - AGGREGATE GRADING c c � o n 101 91 8( F✓ T W } 6( m Z 5( z a( W U W 3( 0. 2C 1C 0 10 20 30 m ao n m Z 50 M D 60 z M 70 80 90 100 UA 0.001 ron��l ol�� vl v�ll• VILIL-111111. % {3„ % Gravel % Sand _ % Fines Coarse Fine Coarse �Medium�Fine Silt 0 17 16 8 25 16 SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC." PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 95 1.5" 89 V 86 .75" 83 .5" 79 .375" 78 #4 67 #10 59 #20 50 #40 41 #50 36 #60 34 #80 28 INN 26 #200 111 .111 milli .111111 mill 0 10 20 30 m ao n m Z 50 M D 60 z M 70 80 90 100 UA 0.001 ron��l ol�� vl v�ll• VILIL-111111. % {3„ % Gravel % Sand _ % Fines Coarse Fine Coarse �Medium�Fine Silt 0 17 16 8 25 16 SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC." PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 95 1.5" 89 V 86 .75" 83 .5" 79 .375" 78 #4 67 #10 59 #20 50 #40 41 #50 36 #60 34 #80 28 #100 26 #200 16 Material Description SAND & GRAVEL Atterbera Limits PL= LL= P1= Coefficients Dgo= 40.3144 D85= 21.6710 D60= 2.3639 D50= 0.8758 D30= 0.2047 D1 5= D10= Cu= Cc= Classification USCS= AASHTO= Remarks kno spectncation provided) Source of Sample: METP-11 Depth: 6-9' Sample Number: Ll 10349B Date: 7-22-11 Client: PROCON INC. h4IU-ERENGINF, UNG &ESIW,, iNc_ Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER Project No: 11.154.NH Figure Ll 10349B Tested By: DM/SL 0 COMPACTION TEST REPORT 140 135 ------------- 130 U Q. i c a� � I Z` - d 125 120 - - ' i ZAV for -- — - ; ---- t- Sp.G. _ + -- ---- �..- ! 2.60 115 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 Water content, % Test specification: ASTM D 1557-02 Method B Modified ASTM D 4718-87 Oversize Corr. Applied to Each Test Point Elevl Classification Nat. %> % Depth Moist. Sp.G. LL PI 318 in. No.200 USCS AASHTO 2-6' 17 25 ROCK CORRECTED TEST RESULTS MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Maximum dry density = 130.8 pcf SAND AND GRAVEL Optimum moisture = 7.9 % Project No. 11.154.NH Client: PROCON INC. Remarks: Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER o Sample Source: METP - 12 Depth: 2-6' Sample No.: Ll 10349C lIILIIR ENl'INEFRINO h M --TING- INC. Figure Ll 10349C GRAINSIZE DISTRIBUTION REPORT - AGGREGATE GRADING C C C 6.9 E- W O 00 0 O 0 V p a M v to .3 1oC 9C 8( E- 0 70 W 6C m Z 5C IL z 40 W U W 3C n. 2C 10 0 IY PERCENT FINER SPEC! PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 98 q 1.5" 95 �wV�w 92 II 90 .5" p ii Iq .375" 83 #4 78 #10 72 #20 63 #40 54 #50 49 #60 46 #80 39 % +3„ % Gravel Coarse Fine 0 10 12 SRAIN SIZE - mm. % Sand __ arse Medium Fine 6 18 I ?9 SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC! PERCENT PASS? (X=NO) 3" 100 2" 98 1.5" 95 V 92 .75" 90 .5" 86 .375" 83 #4 78 #10 72 #20 63 #40 54 #50 49 #60 46 #80 39 #100 37 #200 25 % Fines Silt Cla 25 Material Description SAND AND GRAVEL Atterbera Limits PL= LL= P1= Coefficients 10 t0 30 M ao 0 M z >o —i M D 30 z M 70 30 30 100 D90= 19.6343 D85= 11.8456 D60= 0.6586 D50= 0.3173 D30= 0.0990 D15= D10= Cu= Cc= Classification USCS= AASHTO= Remarks (no specitication provided) Source of Sample: METP - 12 Depth: 2-6' Sample Number: Ll 10349C Date: 7-22-11 Client: PROCON INC. MIU- R ENGINEER --G s.1Es1iNG, INC Project: THE ARBORS AT NORTH ANDOVER 04 1 Project No: 11.154.NH Fioure Ll 10349C Tested By: DWSL Brightview North Andover North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRBC) CON TNCORPQ1t.A.TED 4ig� k6gn and Can thuctiou ManWmrat ARCHITECTURE APPENDIX B Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Wetland and Buffer Zone Mitigation Plan by: Seekamp Enviromental Consulting, Inc. 129 Route 125 Kingston, New Hampshire 03848 February 15, 2010 Section 1112_Appendix_B_Wetland and Buffer Zone Pagel of 8 WETLAND. AND BUFFER ZONE MITIGATION PLAN The Arbors at North Andover 1275 Turnpike Street North Andover, MA Prepared for . ELM DEVELOPMENT SERVICES, LLC 200 North Main Street East Longmeadow., MA 01028 Prepared by: SEEKAMP ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING, INC. 123 Route 125 Kingston, NH 03848 Febmary 15, 2010 OVERVIEW: On behalf of Elm Development Services, LLC, Seekamp Environmental Consulting, Inc. (SEC) has prepared the following Wetland and Buffer Zone Plan Mitigation for proposed impacts associated with the construction of a senior residential and care facility at 1275 Turnpike Street, North Andover, MA. The proposed impacts involve the filling of approximately 1,100 sq. ft of Bordering Vegetated Wetland (BVW) for the construction of a portion of a parking area. The project has been designed to limit BVW impacts to the maximum extent practicable. The applicant has proposed to mitigate BVW impacts at a replacement ratio of 5 : 1 (mitigation : impact) for a total of 5,500 s.f. of mitigation. In addition, approximately 12,000 sq. ft. of Buffer Zone will be restored / planted in order to enhance existing buffer qualities. EXISTING BUFFER ZONE CONDITIONS: Seekamp Environmental Consulting, Inc. (SEC) visited the site on several occasions in late 2009 and early 2010 to review the site. Details of the characterization of the site are included in the Alternatives Analysis prepared by SEC and dated. January 20, 2010. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF PROPOSED BVW IMPACT AREAS: Proposed BVW impact will occur at the AA and BB/CC-series wetlands, which are located in the northeast corner of the lot. As noted above, approximately 1,100 sq. ft. of the AA- Series and BB/CC- Series wetland will be permanently impacted by grading associated with the paved parking lot. In general, the AA -series wetland represents a recently formed, Palustrine, persistent emergent cattail marsh; while the BB/CC wetland represents a recently formed Palustrine, scrub -shrub wetland, both which are located adjacent to Boston Brook. The BVW areas provide temporary storage of stormwater during heavy precipitation events; however, the hydrologic source of these is primarily groundwater seeps. WETLAND MITIGATION AREA: Location: . The Wetland Mitigation Area will be situated directly adjacent to the BVW areas to be impacted, as depicted on the accompanying site plans entitled "Wetland Replication Areas" prepared by Marchionda & Associates, L.P. By locating the mitigation area adjacent to the resource area to be impacted, SEC believes that the mitigation area has the greatest potential for success. Enhanced Wetland Function and Ecological Value: As mentioned above, the Wetland Mitigation Area is estimated at approximately 5,500 sq. ft., resulting in a replacement ratio of 5 : 1 (mitigation : impact). Given that the surface area of proposed wetland mitigation will occupy a greater area than the area of proposed wetland impact, it is SEC's opinion that there is a greater opportunity that the mitigation efforts will provide an enhanced ecological value and wetland function than the existing BVW. To encourage this principle, the proponents seek to procure high-quality nursery stock to be hand - planted within the proposed Wetland Mitigation Area. These plantings will consist of native, fruit -bearing shrub species for the intended use as food by wildlife. Moreover, the native shrubs introduced to the mitigation areas will provide shade and vertical stratification to simulate habitat and function of other wetland resources found on-site. The broadcasted native wetland seed 2 mixture will consist of a diverse herbaceous community that will beautify these areas with spring wildflowers, in addition to providing cover and bedding for use by small mammals. Furthermore, the Wetland Mitigation Area will be supplemented with downed logs, rocks / boulders, and other available natural materials; and the area is designed to provide flood storage capacity, prevent storm damage; prevent water quality impairment; and enhance wildlife habitat in order to accomplish the goal of restoring lost wetland function and ecological value from the proposed BVW disturbance. It is important to mention that the development of the Wetland Mitigation Area will be monitored by a wetland scientist, or other qualified individual, for a minimum of two (2) growing seasons. The wetland scientist, or other qualified individual, will provide subsequent reports detailing the overall success and recommendations for any remedial activities which may be necessary as a result of shrub and herbaceous mortalities or invasive species introduction. Grading of Wetland Mitigation Areas & Supplement of Natural Materials: Prior to construction, the Wetland Mitigation Area will be staked in the field with survey control (horizontal and vertical) so that existing elevations and topography as well as subsequent field adjustments can be documented. Erosion and siltation control measures (siltation fence and / or haybales) shall be installed adjacent to all work areas, between existing wetlands and the proposed mitigation area. A typical cross-sectional detail .is provided to represent the grading associated with the proposed wetland mitigation area construction. A wetland scientist, or other qualified individual, will oversee this work to ensure that the grading activities achieve an appropriate hydrologic regime for the proposed mitigation area plantings. As such, excavation and grading of the mitigation area may be field adjusted at the direction of the overseeing wetland scientist, or other qualified individual. Side slopes that will form the perimeter of the Wetland Mitigation Area will be graded per the plan prepared by Marchionda & Associates, L.R. Care shall be taken during grading to limit clearing and disturbance in the perimeter upland to only that necessary for mitigation area construction. A typical cross-sectional detail is provided to represent the grading associated with the proposed Wetland Mitigation Area construction. Where present, large (naturally occurring) stones and significant downed rotting logs found within the impacted wetlands (and / or impacted uplands) will be pushed beyond the limits of excavation during construction and replaced into the Wetland Mitigation Area, following topsoil placement. Microtopographical features such as hummocks and hollows and small ponding areas will be incorporated into the Wetland Mitigation Area under the direction of.a wetland scientist so that a more diverse wetland will be established. These activities are undertaken in order to provide enhanced wetland function and wildlife habitat value. Biological benchmarks such as evidence of seasonal high groundwater elevations, water stains and ice scars, vegetation rooting patterns, observed standing water, and other evidence of hydrology will guide grading elevations so that hydrologic conditions similar to those in the adjacent wetland will be established. 0 Soils of Proposed Wetland Mitigation Area: The Wetland Mitigation Area will be excavated approximately 8 — 12" lower than the desired final grade, and stockpiled topsoil exhumed from the BVW Impact Area will be used in the Wetland Mitigation Area. If necessary, the Wetland Mitigation Area will be supplemented with high-quality loam in order to achieve an appropriate planting bed (8 —12"). Planting Schedule of Proposed Wetland Mitigation Area: Total quantities of shrubs and wetland seed for the Wetland Mitigation Area are outlined below. SEC believes that the selected tree, shrub, and seed mixture will adequately restore and enhance the qualities found within the proposed wetland impact location. Common Name (Scientific Name) Size Quanti1y Density Speckled alder (Alnus incana) 2-3' 11 10' on center Highbush blueberry (Vaccinum corymbosum) 2-3' 11 10' on center Silk dogwood (Cornus ainomum) 2-3' 11 10' on center Northern arrowwood (Viburnum dentatum) 2 — 3' 11 10' on center Chokeberry (Aronia melanocarpa) 2 — 3' 11 10' on center Herbaceous: Wetland Seed Mix (Attached) seed 2.2 lb. 1 lb /2,500 s.£ In the event that deviations from the specified planting plan are necessary due to the availability of plant material, species selection will be accomplished under the direction of a qualified wetland scientist. Substitutions will be presented to regulatory authorities for approval. Transplanting (by hand) shall occur when favorable conditions are present. Seeding of the Wetland Mitigation Area shall be completed as soon as possible once final grading, planting, and placement of structural features is completed. The areas will be broadcast -seeded with a typical native wetland seed mix at an application rate of approximately 1 lb. per 2,500 sq. ft. Please review the attached list of native wetland seed species included in a typical wetland seed mixture. The Proponent will then notify the regulatory authorities following completion of wetland mitigation area construction, planting, and seeding activities. SUFFER ZONE RESTORATION: Portions of the Riverfront to Boston Brook and the Buffer Zone to Bordering Vegetated Wetlands will be restored in the northeastern corner of the lot as mitigation for work within jurisdictional areas. The location of the restoration areas is detailed on plans prepared by Marchionda & Associates, L.P. The Restoration Area has been designed to mimic the vegetative characteristics of the existing buffer using the following species, as well as seeding with a typical native wetland seed mix consisting of a variety of herbaceous species. 4 Species Size Number Ave Density Speckled alder (Alnus incana) 3 — 4' 30 10' on center Highbush blueberry (Vaccinium cofymbosum) 3 � 4' 30 1.0' on center Shadbush (Amelanchier canadensis) 3 —4' 30 10' on center Chokeberry (Aroma melanocarpa) 3 —4' 30 10' on center Native Wetland seed mix (see attached) seed 4.8 lb l lb/2,500 sf FLOOD STORAGE PLANTING: In addition to Riverfront / Buffer restoration planting, the proponents propose to provide additional native shrubs and seed within the proposed. It is SEC's opinion that this additional planting will further enhance wildlife habitat within Riverfront. The location of the flood storage areas are detailed on plans prepared by Marchionda & Associates, L.P. The flood storage area plantings have been designed to mimic the vegetative characteristics of the existing buffer using the following species, as well as seeding with a typical native wetland seed mix consisting of a variety of herbaceous species. Species Size Number Ave Density Gary birch (Betula populifolia) 3 — 4' 8 15' on center Highbush blueberry (Vaccinium corymbosunn) 3 —4' 10 15' on center River birch (Betula nigra) 6 — 8' 8 15' on center Native Wetland seed mix (see attached) seed 2.2 lb I lb/2,500 sf TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL: Prior to commencement of any work at the site, temporary erosion control (TEC) in the form of entrenched siltation fencing and / or double -staked strawbales will be installed at the Limit of Work of replication activities, as shown on the above referenced plan. TEC will remain in place and be properly maintained until seeded areas have fully germinated. This will prevent sedimentation of the Boston .Brook or other resource areas from on-site activities. Removal of the TEC will be contingent upon the approval of the NACC and I or its acting agent. MONITORING OF MITIGATION AREAS: The overall development of the Mitigation Areas will be monitored at the beginning and end of the first and second growing seasons. A wetland scientist, or other qualified individual, will conduct the associated monitoring and evaluate the success of. the Mitigation Areas, based oil an 5 SII assessment of plant survival / mortality, rate of basal area and / or aerial cover development, wetland hydrology, hydric soil development, wildlife habitat value, observed evidence of wildlife usage, invasive species colonization, as well as its ability to provide and maintain anticipated wetland function and values during these bi-seasonal visits. The monitoring individual will subsequently prepare a status report -indicating his / her findings and recommendations for remedial activities (if necessary) for review by the regulatory authorities. IN TYPICAL WETLAND SEED MIX 2010 Species Scientific Name approx. % Shallow sedge Fringed sedge Wool grass Manna grass Soft rush Joe-Pye-weed Boneset New England aster Blue vei vain Bladder sedge Meadow rue Steeple bush Swamp millcweed Blueflag Iris Jewelweed (Carex lurida) 30 (Carex crinita) 30 (Scirpus cyperinus) 10 (Glyceria canadensis) 10 (Juncus effusus) 3 (Eupatoriadelphus maculatus) 3 (Eupatorium perfoliatum) 3 (Aster novae-angliae) 3 (Verbena hostata) tr. (Carex lupulina) tr. (Thalictrum pubescens) tr. (Spirea tomentosa) tr. (Asclepias incarnata) tr. (Iris versicolor) tr. (Impatiens capensis) tr. 7 North Andover Senior Housing North Andover, MA Project #301112 PRO %C`ON40� INCORPORATED Drs&and ConstnediouAlana�elrrent ARCHITECTURE APPENDIX C MEP/FP Narrative Prepared by: Project Specification Dec. 20, 2011 Issued For Building Permit Design Day Mechanicals Inc. David E. Goddard, P.E ❑ 1 Mapleleaf Drive, Nashua, NH 03062 ❑ (603) 888-1632 ❑ Douglas C. Waitt ❑ P.O. Box 447, New Ipswich, NH 03071 ❑ (603) 291-0111 ❑ Richard D. Gagnon ❑ 84 Gilford Street, Manchester, NH 03102 ❑ (603) 668-5027 ❑ John L. Waitt ❑ 148 Beaver Ridge Road, Center Barnstead, NH 03225 ❑ (603) 269-7253 December 15, 2011 Section 1112_Appendix_C_MEP-FP narrative Page I of 8 Date: 12/15/2011 DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS INC BRIGHT VIEW SENIOR LIVING North Andover, Massachusetts MECHANICAL PLUMBING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM NARRATIVE I. MECHANICAL SYSTEM: A. Applicable Codes & Standards: 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code 780 CMR. 2. International Mechanical Code 2009 (Specifically referenced 780 CMR Appendix). 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Plumbing Code 248 CMR. 4. NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code (Specifically referenced 248 CMR Appendix). 5. Town of North Andover Building and. Fire Department Requirements. B. Design Responsibilities: 1. Registered professional engineer (PE) will fully design and specify the HVAC system to be installed. 2. PE supervises all document productions and review all items in detail. 3. PE reviews HVAC shop drawings. 4. PE or his designated representative makes periodic site visits during construction. 5. PE shall be engineer of record. 6. Building Use Group, Fire Ratings and Smoke Barrier designations shall be defined by Architect. C. System Description: 1. Independent Living (IL) a. Studio, One and Two Bedroom Apartments: 1) Unitary type air-to-air heat pump unit with auxiliary electric heat, with condenser air circulated through side wall louver to outdoors. The unit will have ducted supply and return air register tapped from its plenums, and controlled with remote large display non -programmable thermostat. 2) Fresh air requirements met by operable windows and make-up air from the corridor ventilation system as required by toilet and kitchen exhaust. 3) Continuous toilet and kitchen exhaust shall be provided through a sub -duct system connected to the dedicated outside air system (DOAS) that will include energy recovery. 4) Kitchen will have re -circulating type exhaust hoods. Kitchen shall be open to space having operable windows to qualify for the passive ventilation. David E. Goddard, P.E 1 Mopleleof Drive, Nashua, NH 03062 • (603) 888-1632 • davidegoddard@live.com Douglas C. Waitt P.O. Box 447, New Ipswich, NH 03071 • (603) 291-0111 dougwaitt@comcast.net Richard D. Gagnon 84 Gilford Street, Manchester, NH 03102 (603) 668-5027 • rdging@comcast.net John L. Waitt 148 Beaver Ridge Road, Center Barnstead, NH 03225 . (603) 269-7253 • jlwdd@tds.net DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS INC 5) Electric clothes dryers will be connected to sealed aluminum duct to side wall caps. 2. Assisted Living (AL) a. Studio, Deluxe Studio, One and Two Bedroom Apartments, and Comp: 1) PTHP Packaged Terminal air-to-air Heat Pump unit with auxiliary electric heat and unit mounted controls with fresh air intake option. 2) Continuous toilet exhaust shall be provided through a sub -duct system connected to the dedicated outside air system (DOAS) that will include energy recovery. Alzheimer Wing (AZ) a. Studio and Comp: 1) PTHP Packaged Terminal air-to-air Heat Pump unit with auxiliary electric heat and unit mounted lockable controls with fresh air intake option. 2) Continuous toilet exhaust shall be provided through a sub -duct system connected to the dedicated outside air system (DOAS) that will include energy recovery. 4. Corridors and areas opened to the Corridors: a. Served by 100% dedicated outside air system (DOAS) packaged rooftop gas heating/ electric DX cooling units with, vibration isolation curbs, energy recovery wheels, modulating gas heat and cooling for leaving air temperature, and hot gas reheat for dehumidification, with supply ductwork ducted down to feed all floors through combination fire and smoke dampers, and ducted exhaust through a sub- duct system, or direct connect exhaust to all toilets, bather rooms, salon, fitness, massage, and residential kitchen spaces through rated chases. b. Provide separate pricing for modulating gas fired humidification within the supply air stream of the DOAS. 5. Non -Residential Areas: The following twenty-six (26) singular and multiple areas will be served by individual ducted split type air-to-air heat pump units with auxiliary electric heat, with outside air motor operated dampers controlled by return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensors. Provide complete compatible zone damper control system for systems with multiple distinct room. Units that are mounted on the roof will have vibration isolation pads. a. First Floor: Administrative Suite Offices with Files and Sales Office. DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS INC Multi-purpose Room with Activity Director Office and Storage Closet. Cafd. Library and Brain Fitness. Hobby Room/ Wood Shop with Store. Theatre. Entry Hall with Executive Director Office, Vestibule, Work Room and Public Toilets. b. Second Floor: Assisted Living Dining. AL - Living Room Independent Living Dining Private Dining Break Room with Maintenance Office and Service Corridor. Kitchen with Dry Storage and Chef. Exam Doctor, Waiting, Director Office and Charts. Card Room and Upper Lobby. Independent Living Pub and Billiards Room. Independent Living Room. Commercial Laundry. C. Third Floor: Alzheimer's Activity and Dining. Alzheimer's Living Room. Director Office and Visitors. d. Fourth Floor: Independent Living Activity. Salon. OT/PT Fitness Sewing, Massage, Juice, Office. e. Trash Room and Trash Chute Rooms 1) The main centralized Trash Room shall be heated by an electric unit heater. 2) Both the main centralized Trash room and the Trash chute Rooms on each floor shall be continuously exhausted. f. Electric, Water and Mechanical Rooms: 1) Heated by electric unit heaters. g. Bather Rooms: DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS INC 1) Heated by electric wall heaters h. Vestibules and Stairways having outside wall or door exposure. 1) Heated by electric wall heaters. Gas Fireplaces 1) Provide flues run up to roof. Kitchen: 1) Commercial cooking kitchen exhaust hoods will be exhausted to the roof using welded 16 gauge black iron ductwork. Ductwork within 18" clearance to combustible materials will be wrapped with ceramic fiber insulation with NFPA rating for zero clearance. Exhaust fan will be located on roof with its discharge upward. Hoods with Ansul system provided by the kitchen equipment supplier, installed by this contractor 2) Dishwasher hood and ductwork shall be 304SS with sealed seams, continuously pitched and run to roof exhaust fan. 3) Make up air will be provided by an indirect gas fired make-up air unit with, vibration isolation curb, 409SS heat exchanger, 409SS 20-100% modulating burner, 409SS drip pan, 100% OA intake hood. 4) Isolate all kitchen air moving equipment and ductwork from structure with vibration isolation hangers. k. Commercial Laundry: 1) Commercial dryers will have direct connected combustion air intake from side wall louver and exhausted to the roof. 1. Elevator Shafts and Elevator Machine Rooms: 1) Elevator Machine Rooms cooled with ductless split system air conditioning units with low ambient control. 2) Elevator shafts vented at top with normally opened by smoke/ fire alarm motor operated low leak insulated dampers. 3) An emergency elevator shaft pressurization system shall be provided, activated by the smoke and fire alarm system. H. PLUMBING SYSTEM: A. Applicable Codes & Standards: 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code 780 CMR. 2. International Mechanical Code 2009 (Specifically referenced 780 CMR Appendix). 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Plumbing Code 248 CMR. DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS INC 4. NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code (Specifically referenced 248 CMR Appendix). 5. Town of North Andover Building, W&S, and Fire Department Requirements. 6. Gas Company requirements. B. Design Responsibilities: 1. Registered professional engineer (PE) will fully design and specify the system to be installed. 2. PE supervises all document productions and review all items in detail. 3. PE reviews shop drawings. 4. PE or his designated representative makes periodic site visits during construction. 5. PE shall be engineer of record. 6. Building Use Group, Fire Ratings and Smoke Barrier designations shall be defined by Architect. 7. Plumbing work shall be defined to within 10 feet from the building exterior wall. C. System Description: Plumbing Fixtures & Gas Devices: a. Plumbing Fixtures shall be specified as per Shelter Groups Standards. b. Gas burning devices shall be only those specifically approved as listed by the State Fuel Gas Board. 2. Domestic Hot Water Heaters: a. Provide stand alone high efficiency gas fired domestic water heaters, one system for the Commercial Laundry, one system for Residential areas including residential toilets, Bathers, and domestic laundry, and one system for the Kitchen, with re- circulating piping and pump as required, check valve and diaphragm expansion tank to prevent back flow migration b.. The water heater that serves the Kitchen pot sinks, and dishwashers, and laundry shall be a high capacity commercial grade gas fired DHW heaters to provide 140F water. Dishwasher shall be equipped with integral final rinse electric booster. 3. Waste & Vent: a. Above ground W&V shall be no -hub cast iron for non- residential areas. For residential areas it shall be solvent welded PVC with insulation for sound. b. Below ground W&V shall be solvent welded PVC throughout, as allowed by applicable codes, except for the Kitchen, which shall be no -hub cast iron piping. C. Separate suds risers will be provided for laundry. 4. Potable Water System: a. Dwelling units may be CPVC as allowed by 248 CMR, with all other areas being type -L copper with lead-free 95-5 soldered joints. Transition from copper to plastic DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS- INC piping shall be made with full port brass ball valves. All pipes first 20 feet to and from domestic hot water tanks shall be type -L copper. b. RPBFP as required. C. All copper cold, hot and re -circulating lines shall be insulated. All plastic hot and re -circulating lines shall be insulated as per 780 CMR Chapter 13. Plastic cold water pipes 3" and larger shall be insulated. d. Floor drains at all BFP. 5. Non Potable Water System: a. Wall hydrants and frost free hose bibs shall be protected by vacuum breakers. Provide outside hose bibs as required by code, and for the Service Entrance, Mani Entrance, Patios, and Roof Garden. b. Any make-up water shall have RPBFP. C. Floor drains at all BFP. 6. Roof Drain: a. Above ground for residential section shall be of solvent welded PVC piping. b. Below ground, public area and commercial space shall use no -hub cast iron piping. C. Emergency overflow roof drainage shall be required for low roof d. Emergency scuppers (provided by the GC) shall be provided for the high roofs. C. Gutters (provided by the G.C.) shall be provided for the Porte Cochere, Entrances, and Patios. f. Insulate all above ground piping. 7. Gas Services: a. Low pressure fuel gas piping, schedule 40 steel with screwed fittings. b. Gas services to Commercial Kitchen appliances, DHW heaters, rooftop units, humidifier(s) (option with DOAS), DOAS, gas fire places, and Commercial Laundry Dryers. C. Provide main safety shut off valve at kitchen and at all fire places as required. III. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM: A. Applicable Codes & Standards: 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code 780 CMR 8th Edition, and all applicable codes referenced within. 2. Town of North Andover Building, W&S, and Fire Department Requirements. B. Design Responsibilities: Registered professional engineer (PE) will fully design and specify the sprinkler system to be installed. DESIGN DAY � MECHANICALS INC 2. PE supervises all fire protection system document productions and review all items in detail. 3. PE reviews shop drawings. 4. PE or his designated representative makes periodic site visits during construction. 5. PE shall be engineer of record. 6. Building Use Group, Fire Ratings and Smoke Barrier designations shall be defined by Architect. C. System Description: 1. Preliminary hydrant flow test and hydraulic calculations show that fire pump is not required. 2. NFPA-13 wet system will be used to serve the building with quick response heads, with extended coverage side wall type wherever possible. 3. NFPA-13 wet system for public spaces and common spaces. 4. NFPA-13 dry system for unheated attic space. 5. NFPA-13 dry system as required for balconies and similar structures associated with the building. 5. Stand pipes at stairwells, fire department connections, and fire alarm interface as required. 6. Ansul dry type fire protection system for kitchen hood, by the Kitchen Equipment Provider. 7. Portable Fire Extinguishers by others. DESIGN DAY MECHANICALS, INC. Douglas C. Waitt 0 Brightview North Andover PRO CON4,4& Project Specification North Andover, MA INCORPORATED March 29 2012 Design and Constriction Management Project #301112 Issued For Construction ARCHITECTURE APPENDIX D Responsibility Matrix Section 1112_Appendix D Responsibility Matrix Cover.doc Page 1 of 1 Exhibit IRM RESPONSIMATY NATM Bri '1 -0 1 ..... 8"'1 UV g i liew, on or ing. at 1275-TOrApiW Street, North Atidvvci; MA The Olowini-glesponsibility" items of W6.rk.1fi*di6Wd (it6n:Ofm..A..-OW Wic:f6b.6 provided'by.either the PO or"by. "Shie'liei). "'R'Wc'r:.f6' 8Aihd 6'th6*r'* areas "Offthis Contrast*f(*j'f':fiu-t-tli"e"t".*t']Afifi'c"a't*i'd'ii'd'i'fid doline-ai i 9ii -o.fmork responAhilfiics: -CRITERIA SECTION &.1 T)r-,'9 :GENERAL Dr'a_*pe'fl6*s* Plantation Slitifters,01inds &ROnt6d 11ardware. Moy.eaWforlifitirc. (VY.J3.) Televisions, Swivel basos,:.Gloelc Radios Vinyl WAII-doveritigs Plug-in Lightinig Ait.'Wpik-:.& Aftih6is .netry .... ........ ................. d d . ... ......... .. <ticypra 'Ext6rW S19,1Q.0. 00 , Ompu I c 0 B q", 't"i I P" M' '"e" 'n" f & C , " * " " t' e-, r, ::PUBLIC CIRCULATION &SERVICES -Entry Mat atVestibule 'bopt 64 Vit..P-ep 'Aqi�s .�andaccessories ...l ......, .. . Cpinpaciion RIA t .4. !q'sy; pill House Sound sy4kiff Vdblie Afddt — C6t46r.(3Ua*rds IliferiOr"81gnaga :.-FOOD-A-DEVE )RAGRIFACILffIES 'Millwork -and Casework Vending W[4.6hios Bottled Wa(O Service/Distribution Kite, ]loll E q*, 6i p"ib"e"n"t )FURNISH INSTALL NOTFIS PCT :.PC. -.f S 8 Coffer 'ffAds'-Wid &da.djs .......... pens!3rs :arc - PCI Pt I by 6wfi6r V64do' fs.- Food Service. EqUipniefitis Based upun an allowance S Cd-drdinatd and mAffag6'OWti6r's S S PW PCI Padding is not included. POT This l PO item is based upon n an allowance for all Werior ant1 Oxteriar sigt►age W-1 PCI S S P-cl :-PCI Lat* 1b$..pF.qV' WOY YOT, I'Cl T11 is itctnjs_ bmed. twoll'aft villowanee,for .......► .. . ... Ailinte 6rAyid*0(tc"' ' all ' 0 ...... mgrk�go: 8 S fax, Copier, Tiiii6 C -166k syst6jh Clock PCI `PCI 11CI Pell S S '_.Fc.1 PQT 8 S Rough -ins (Wiriji@,by PCI. Equipment and speakers : by-DWneri all interior and extbrior signage PCT :.PC. -.f S 8 Coffer 'ffAds'-Wid &da.djs .......... pens!3rs :arc - PCI Pt I by 6wfi6r V64do' fs.- Food Service. EqUipniefitis Based upun an allowance RE, SP6NS1U1L1TYMATR1X (666 n—u"CO) Owner Vurn-'McdPiddticW Wptki4b..Petforified by Qw#e.i BrighWl* at: 1.275 T6601 W Si, N. Andover, MA. ........... FU Mu-I(I-Poypose Room walhnouftfddV4bIfibt NIC wlClialkboard, Ta kboard and accessories PI-pjqptionscreens NIC None-itidicated Is Tage'! of 4 1/f/262' .INTERIOR REC. REATION Ex"C"11-CA90 no . 0 . n . 1: .��prcjse Equibment S STM94n to house re�eptaoles'0 ONO, -Tv WalliC6,11"1111gMount b yao.ket S S (am -C A001118 P6blbble/PWO TV and related appurtei aiices S Liquor -Cabinet S Appliances PCI ..S. - PCZ Connect -to house utilities as required Mill,W4 & LJ n PCI PCI00.9 Bar:Equipmen PCI PCI See food Service Alld*W& ThM6 - 'S6fiA9--.Md c.qv.ipjp)egt- yv-screen "RESIDENCE ROOMS% Shower 1044 PCI PCI Shower Curtains, S. Shower Cuilain Rods PCI PCI Clow kao'k'skaolyo ....... . . ....... PCI .. .... PCI Residents pf6VIdd N4&9 AL- Microwaves, refrigeratoxs, etc._ JL Gu.es:1'room:ApI51ianccs PCI PCI AT2. memory boxes S 8 Blocking by PU .0 N ,*R A , 'CA$ FJIVExtittgoighers PCI :PCI Comer Guards -.PCI PCI Where Indicated byplans & specs; Ititerlor Signage I PC .. .... :V�*Cl This item is based W -0i ifli all interior and exterior signage U666f6tivo hiirroisln pvvfid rostr6offis r RESPONSIBILITY NATWX '0Qn(InPq0) Pam-.3.of 4 QvVner.k. . .. .. ..... ... . ........ . by Owner . ..... .. ... Brigh'... Wat 195 Concord Road, BI'lle'rioa.- MA SUPPORTAMENITIES ,ash ifrns/Trasli'U- andflen&es/Plani6W Rci PCI Bird.-Bodw/Oird Feede'rs - oxterlor S. PCI 13016fin llom-0. S S If applicable Trashurts (transport P -Ci Uffi only; 0 Ching, PCI rid proporty.of tiash and Cu'tle'Iy",--Sil,V6hvore, -otiioe -Suppiles .. .. .. .. .... B m ergency Call. System "(&011) S pays for FF8 diimpsiters as required. -AL-/AL-Z GUEST LAUNDRY PGT PCI :Cab--&:Bntranoo:Signsgo ::Pcl PCI Dryers PCY PCI Fo4ding Tables: S EMPLOYEE FACILITIES I~jnpjoye6..'Are.ak- Area L6okeis Rci PCI Coffee- Aker and Supplies S. PCI 13016fin llom-0. S S If applicable ltefrigeratoi P -Ci 166-61. 0b]. 6-s-- Wi d6.-jYf&. i &f.�- Nficraw�ve even. PCI PCS -'VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION .. .. .. .. .... B m ergency Call. System "(&011) Carpeting W.. PGT PCI :Cab--&:Bntranoo:Signsgo C15 C/S Go4o Required - C Courtesy - SYMEMS .WeN6fd.W.oh System Rci PCI CableTV System PCI PCI PC I.:*P'rovi&s, hbu.s6.06blifig to m0t- 166-61. 0b]. 6-s-- Wi d6.-jYf&. i &f.�- .. .. .. .. .... B m ergency Call. System "(&011) BhUyI-6ok/Pef4bdi6f S6afity Systenig S S P J - provides rqVgl-i's ifils-wire equiani conipiiter systems.pment; Telepligpq equjpment S S.- PCI -provides '9 house wiring. S PCI '--pk&ld6 Wire, S -*6'Vid-6 -&-Ififtilli syWin hardware& co"b"' P"ut6s`y"`st6ffi§. 'OMW FVWshed Produ* Odd Work -to be Performed by. Owner Brigb..$1 .95 ROW6.- . BilledMA � ... Concord or ft. . d Mt9ift, U'AMTS: VM0168 —AH Size VOW. Supplies: commorciatk1when/ Janitor.efivities Looms J AbbreAatiops: Furnish -Provide T,OB:site; tsXincluded Iq8tAII Re6elve,,.xmMud,- distribute, and install -0noluding furnishing minoriaoce5sorles) Po C61i Ia. Page 4 of 4 212/1012.. MC -Not InlContract SCI abA M -1 toprovide d mps 'C, shall dispose of A.packaging for Shelter -furnished material which'PCI installs. PCu tei service Agm 00(cy.4 .... .......... ...... . � r4i 1W. materials by its own subcoritradors. :3. Fi, aN H- 9*'fdiall-t�uil)ments�all-bettig�eb IM t make eciuimneiii o nal, 41 IWOWN61' ... .... .. .... ..... y Pc4AV -�rg . ...... ........ 0